DNV Os F101

OFFSHORE STANDARD
DNV-OS-F101
SUBMARINE PIPELINE SYSTEMS

JANUARY 2000
Since issued in print (January 2000), this booklet has been amended, latest in October 2005.
See the reference to “Amendments and Corrections” on the next page.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

FOREWORD
DET NORSKE VERITAS (DNV) is an autonomous and independent foundation with the objectives of safeguarding life, prop-
erty and the environment, at sea and onshore. DNV undertakes classification, certification, and other verification and consultancy
services relating to quality of ships, offshore units and installations, and onshore industries worldwide, and carries out research
in relation to these functions.
DNV Offshore Codes consist of a three level hierarchy of documents:
— Offshore Service Specifications. Provide principles and procedures of DNV classification, certification, verification and con-
sultancy services.
— Offshore Standards. Provide technical provisions and acceptance criteria for general use by the offshore industry as well as
the technical basis for DNV offshore services.
— Recommended Practices. Provide proven technology and sound engineering practice as well as guidance for the higher level
Offshore Service Specifications and Offshore Standards.
DNV Offshore Codes are offered within the following areas:
A) Qualification, Quality and Safety Methodology
B) Materials Technology
C) Structures
D) Systems
E) Special Facilities
F) Pipelines and Risers
G) Asset Operation
H) Marine Operations
J) Wind Turbines
Amendments and Corrections

This document is valid until superseded by a new revision. Minor amendments and corrections will be published in a separate
document normally updated twice per year (April and October).
For a complete listing of the changes, see the “Amendments and Corrections” document located at:
http://www.dnv.com/technologyservices/, “Offshore Rules & Standards”, “Viewing Area”.
The electronic web-versions of the DNV Offshore Codes will be regularly updated to include these amendments and corrections.
Comments may be sent by e-mail to rules@dnv.com

For subscription orders or information about subscription terms, please use distribution@dnv.com
Comprehensive information about DNV services, research and publications can be found at http://www.dnv.com, or can be obtained from DNV,
Veritasveien 1, NO-1322 Høvik, Norway; Tel +47 67 57 99 00, Fax +47 67 57 99 11.
© Det Norske Veritas. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including
photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Det Norske Veritas.
Computer Typesetting (FM+SGML) by Det Norske Veritas.

Printed in Norway.
If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compensation to such person
for his proved direct loss or damage. However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the service in question, provided that the maximum compen-
sation shall never exceed USD 2 million.
In this provision "Det Norske Veritas" shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all its subsidiaries, directors, officers, employees, agents and any other acting on behalf of Det
Norske Veritas.
Acknowledgement
This Offshore Standard has been developed in close co-operation with the industry. In order to ensure constructive and effective
feedback at an early stage of the development, working groups for design, material, installation and operation were established.
The following companies were members of working groups:
— Statoil
— Norsk Hydro
— Saga Petroleum
— Phillips Petroleum
— J.P.Kenny A/S
— Reinertsen Engineering
The Standard has been circulated on extensive internal and external hearings. The following organisations have made major con-
tributions to the hearing process:
Allseas Engineering Exxon Prod. Research Company Reinertsen Engineering

Andrew Palmer & Associates ITOCHU Røntgen Technische Dienst bv
BHP Steel JP Kenny Ltd Saga Petroleum
BP Amoco Exploration Kawasaki Steel Salzgitter
British Steel Mentor Project Eng. Seaflex
Brown & Root Navion Shaw Pipeline Services Ltd.
Coflexip Stena Offshore Niras Shell
DSND Norsk Hydro SOFREGAZ
DST NPD Statoil
EMC Phillips Petroleum Stolt Comex Seaway
Europipe Rambøll Oil & Gas Vallourec & Mannesman Tubes
DNV is grateful for the valuable co-operations and discussions with the individual personnel in these companies.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS
Amended October 2005, Offshore Standard DNV-OS-F101, January 2000
see note on front cover Contents – Page 5
CONTENTS
Sec. 1 General................................................................. 11 D 900 Marine growth ................................................................ 24
A. General.................................................................................. 11 E. External and Internal Pipe Condition ...................................24

A 100 Introduction..................................................................... 11 E 100 External operational conditions ...................................... 24
A 200 Objectives ....................................................................... 11 E 200 Internal installation conditions ....................................... 24
A 300 Scope and Application .................................................... 11 E 300 Internal operational conditions ....................................... 24
A 400 Other codes ..................................................................... 11
F. Documentation......................................................................25
B. Normative References .......................................................... 11 F 100 General............................................................................ 25
B 100 Offshore Service Specifications...................................... 11 F 200 Conceptual and detail engineering.................................. 25
B 200 Offshore Standards ......................................................... 11 F 300 Linepipe and pipeline component manufacturing .......... 25
B 300 Recommended practices ................................................. 11 F 400 Corrosion control system and weight coating
B 400 Rules ............................................................................... 12 manufacturing ................................................................. 25
B 500 Certification notes and Classification notes.................... 12 F 500 Installation and commissioning ...................................... 26
B 600 Guidelines ....................................................................... 12 F 600 DFI Résumé .................................................................... 26
B 700 Other references.............................................................. 12 F 700 Operation ........................................................................ 26
F 800 Filing of documentation.................................................. 26
C. Definitions ............................................................................ 12
C 100 Verbal forms ................................................................... 12 Sec. 4 Loads.................................................................... 27
C 200 Definitions ...................................................................... 12
C 300 Definitions (continued) ................................................... 15 A. General..................................................................................27
A 100 Objective......................................................................... 27
D. Abbreviations and Symbols.................................................. 16 A 200 Application ..................................................................... 27
D 100 Abbreviations.................................................................. 16 A 300 Loads............................................................................... 27
D 200 Symbols .......................................................................... 16
D 300 Greek characters ............................................................. 17 B. Functional Loads ..................................................................27
D 400 Subscripts........................................................................ 17 B 100 General............................................................................ 27
B 200 Characteristic load effects............................................... 27
Sec. 2 Design Philosophy............................................... 18
C. Environmental Loads............................................................27
A. General.................................................................................. 18 C 100 General............................................................................ 27
A 100 Objective......................................................................... 18 C 200 Wind loads ...................................................................... 28
A 200 Application...................................................................... 18 C 300 Hydrodynamic loads....................................................... 28
C 400 Wave and current loads .................................................. 28
B. Safety Philosophy ................................................................. 18 C 500 Ice loads .......................................................................... 28
B 100 General............................................................................ 18 C 600 Characteristic load effects............................................... 28
B 200 Safety objective............................................................... 18
B 300 Systematic review ........................................................... 18 D. Construction Loads...............................................................29
B 400 Safety class methodology ............................................... 18 D 100 General............................................................................ 29
B 500 Quality assurance............................................................ 19
B 600 Health, safety and environment ...................................... 19 E. Accidental Loads ..................................................................29
E 100 General............................................................................ 29
C. Design Format ...................................................................... 19
C 100 General............................................................................ 19 F. Other loads............................................................................29
C 200 Categorisation of fluids................................................... 19 F 100 Trawling loads ................................................................ 29
C 300 Location classes .............................................................. 19 F 200 Earthquake ...................................................................... 30
C 400 Safety classes .................................................................. 19
C 500 Partial Safety Factor methodology ................................. 19 Sec. 5 Design Criteria.................................................... 31
C 600 Reliability analysis.......................................................... 20
A. General..................................................................................31
Sec. 3 Design Premises and Documentation................ 21 A 100 Objective......................................................................... 31
A 200 Application ..................................................................... 31
A. General.................................................................................. 21
A 100 Objective......................................................................... 21 B. Design Principles and Materials ...........................................31
A 200 Concept development ..................................................... 21 B 100 Pipeline layout ................................................................ 31
A 300 Execution plan ................................................................ 21 B 200 Mill pressure test and system pressure test..................... 31
A 400 Installation, operation and abandonment ........................ 21 B 300 In-service inspection ....................................................... 32
B 400 Minimum wall thickness................................................. 32
B. System Design Principles ..................................................... 21 B 500 Materials selection .......................................................... 32
B 100 System integrity .............................................................. 21 B 600 Characteristic material properties ................................... 33
B 200 Monitoring/inspection during operation ......................... 21 B 700 Corrosion allowance ....................................................... 34
B 300 Pressure Control System................................................. 22
C. Load and Resistance Calculations ........................................34
C. Pipeline Route....................................................................... 22 C 100 Load conditions .............................................................. 34
C 100 Location .......................................................................... 22 C 200 Load effect calculation ................................................... 34
C 200 Route survey ................................................................... 22 C 300 Characteristic wall thickness .......................................... 35
C 300 Seabed properties............................................................ 23 C 400 Stress and strain calculations .......................................... 35
D. Environmental Conditions.................................................... 23 D. Limit States...........................................................................35
D 100 General............................................................................ 23 D 100 General............................................................................ 35
D 200 Collection of environmental data.................................... 23 D 200 Limit state format ........................................................... 36
D 300 Wind................................................................................ 23 D 300 Load effect factors and load combinations..................... 37
D 400 Tide ................................................................................. 24 D 400 Pressure containment (bursting) ..................................... 37
D 500 Waves.............................................................................. 24 D 500 Local buckling ................................................................ 38
D 600 Current ............................................................................ 24 D 600 Global buckling .............................................................. 39
D 700 Ice.................................................................................... 24 D 700 Fatigue ............................................................................ 40
D 800 Air and sea temperatures................................................. 24 D 800 Ovalisation...................................................................... 40
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Offshore Standard DNV-OS-F101, January 2000 Amended October 2005,
Page 6 – Contents see note on front cover
D 900 Ratcheting .......................................................................41 Sec. 7 Components and Assemblies............................. 65

D 1000 Accumulated plastic strain ..............................................41
D 1100 Fracture ...........................................................................41 A. General..................................................................................65
D 1200 Accidental limit state ......................................................42 A 100 Scope...............................................................................65
A 200 Quality assurance ............................................................65
E. Special Considerations ......................................................... 42
E 100 General ............................................................................42 B. General requirements for Design of Pipeline Components ..65
E 200 Pipe soil interaction.........................................................42 B 100 General ............................................................................65
E 300 Spanning risers/pipelines ................................................42 B 200 Material selection............................................................65
E 400 On bottom stability..........................................................43 B 300 Flanged and mechanical connections..............................66
E 500 Trawling interference ......................................................43 B 400 Bolting............................................................................66
E 600 Third party loads, dropped objects..................................44 B 500 Valves..............................................................................66
E 700 Insulation.........................................................................44 B 600 Pressure vessels..............................................................66
E 800 Pipe-in-pipe and bundles.................................................44 B 700 Components fabricated by welding.................................66
B 800 Insulating joints...............................................................66
F. Pipeline Components and Accessories ................................. 44 B 900 Pipeline fittings ...............................................................67
F 100 General ............................................................................44 B 1000 Anchor flanges ................................................................67
G. Supporting Structure............................................................. 44 B 1100 Other components ...........................................................67
G 100 General ............................................................................44 B 1200 Structural items ...............................................................67
G 200 Riser supports..................................................................44
G 300 J-tubes .............................................................................44 C. Material and Manufacturing Specifications for
G 400 Stability of gravel............................................................44 Components ..........................................................................67
C 100 Material and manufacturing specifications .....................67
H. Installation and Repair.......................................................... 44
H 100 General ............................................................................44 D. Material for Hot Formed, Forged and Cast Components .....68
H 200 Pipe straightness..............................................................45 D 100 General ............................................................................68
H 300 Coating ............................................................................45 D 200 Components made of low alloy C-Mn steel....................68
D 300 Components made of ferritic-austenitic (duplex) steel,
Sec. 6 Linepipe............................................................... 46 other stainless steel and nickel based corrosion resistant
alloy (CRA).....................................................................69
A. General.................................................................................. 46 D 400 Delivery condition...........................................................69
A 100 Scope ...............................................................................46
A 200 Material specification......................................................46 E. Hot Forming, Forging, Casting and Heat Treatment............69
A 300 Pre-qualification of materials and manufacturers ...........46 E 100 Hot forming.....................................................................69
A 400 Process of manufacture ...................................................46 E 200 Forging ............................................................................69
E 300 Casting ............................................................................69
B. Linepipe Designations .......................................................... 46 E 400 Heat treatment .................................................................69
B 100 Linepipe NDT levels .......................................................46
B 200 Supplementary requirements...........................................46 F. Manufacturing of Components, Equipment and Structural
B 300 Designations....................................................................47 Items .....................................................................................70
F 100 General ............................................................................70
C. Material Properties ............................................................... 47 F 200 Manufacture of flanges ...................................................70
C 100 General ............................................................................47 F 300 Manufacture of valves.....................................................70
C 200 Carbon Manganese (C-Mn) steel linepipe ......................47 F 400 Manufacture of pressure-containing equipment and
C 300 Ferritic-austenitic (duplex) steel .....................................50 components fabricated by welding .................................71
C 400 Other stainless steel and nickel based corrosion resistant F 500 Manufacture of other equipment and components..........71
alloy (CRA) linepipe .......................................................51 F 600 Fabrication of structural items ........................................71
C 500 Clad/lined steel linepipe..................................................51 F 700 Mechanical testing of hot formed, cast and forged
C 600 Weldability......................................................................52 components .....................................................................71
D. Supplementary Requirements............................................... 52 G. Manufacture of Bends...........................................................71
D 100 Supplementary requirement, sour service (S) .................52 G 100 General ............................................................................71
D 200 Supplementary requirement, fracture arrest G 200 Mother pipe for seawater service ....................................73
properties (F)...................................................................53 G 300 Supplementary requirements to mother pipe ..................73
D 300 Supplementary requirement, linepipe for plastic G 400 Requirements to pipe other than dedicated mother pipe.73
deformation (P) ...............................................................54 G 500 Required post bending heat treatment.............................73
D 400 Supplementary requirement, dimensions (D) .................55 G 600 Bending procedure qualification.....................................74
D 500 Supplementary requirement, high utilisation (U) ...........55 G 700 Bending and post bend heat treatment ............................75
E. Manufacture.......................................................................... 55 G 800 Non-destructive testing and visual inspection ................75
E 100 General ............................................................................55 G 900 Production testing of bends.............................................75
E 200 Quality Assurance ...........................................................55 G 1000 Dimensions, tolerances and marking ..............................76
E 300 Manufacturing Procedure Specification and G 1100 Repair ..............................................................................76
Qualification....................................................................55
E 400 Steel making....................................................................56 H. Fabrication of Risers, Expansion Loops, Pipe Strings for
E 500 Manufacture of plate and strip ........................................56 Reeling and Towing..............................................................76
E 600 Linepipe manufacture .....................................................57 H 100 General ............................................................................76
E 700 Chemical analysis ...........................................................58 H 200 Quality Assurance ...........................................................76
E 800 Mechanical and corrosion tests .......................................58 H 300 Materials for risers, expansion loops, pipe strings for
E 900 Non-destructive testing ...................................................59 reeling and towing...........................................................76
E 1000 Visual inspection, workmanship and correction of H 400 Fabrication procedures and planning ..............................76
defects .............................................................................60 H 500 Material receipt, identification and tracking ...................77
E 1100 Mill pressure test .............................................................61 H 600 Cutting, forming, assembly, welding and heat treatment77
E 1200 Dimensions, weight and lengths .....................................61 H 700 Hydrostatic testing ..........................................................77
H 800 Non-destructive testing and visual examination .............78
F. Marking and Protection ........................................................ 64 H 900 Dimensional verification.................................................78
F 100 General ............................................................................64 H 1000 Corrosion protection .......................................................78
G. Documentation, Records and Certification .......................... 64 I. Documentation, Records, Certification and Marking...........78
G 100 General ............................................................................64 I 100 Documentation, records, certification and marking........78
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Sec. 8 Corrosion Protection and Weight coating........ 79 essential variables and validity ....................................... 89
D 400 Operating limit conditions .............................................. 90
A. General.................................................................................. 79 D 500 Installation procedures.................................................... 90
A 100 Objective......................................................................... 79 D 600 Contingency procedures ................................................. 90
A 200 Application...................................................................... 79 D 700 Layvessel arrangement, laying equipment and
A 300 Definitions ...................................................................... 79 instrumentation ............................................................... 90
D 800 Requirements for installation.......................................... 91
B. General Principles for Corrosion Control During Design .... 79
B 100 General............................................................................ 79 E. Additional Requirements for Pipeline Installation Methods
B 200 Evaluation of options for corrosion control.................... 79 Introducing Plastic Deformations .........................................92
E 100 General............................................................................ 92
C. Pipeline External Coatings ................................................... 80 E 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 92
C 100 General............................................................................ 80 E 300 Qualification of the Installation Manual......................... 92
C 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and application.. 80 E 400 Installation procedures.................................................... 92
E 500 Requirements for installation.......................................... 92
D. Special Riser Coatings.......................................................... 80
D 100 General............................................................................ 80 F. Pipeline Installation by Towing............................................93
D 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and application.. 81 F 100 General............................................................................ 93
F 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 93
E. Field Joint Coatings .............................................................. 81 F 300 Qualification of Installation Manual............................... 93
E 100 General............................................................................ 81 F 400 Operating limit conditions .............................................. 93
E 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and application.. 81 F 500 Installation procedures.................................................... 93
F 600 Contingency procedures ................................................. 93
F. Concrete Weight Coating ..................................................... 81 F 700 Arrangement, equipment and instrumentation ............... 93
F 100 General............................................................................ 81 F 800 Pipestring tow and installation........................................ 93
F 200 Concrete materials and coating manufacturing .............. 81
F 300 Inspection and testing ..................................................... 82 G. Other Installation Methods ...................................................93
G 100 General............................................................................ 93
G. Cathodic Protection Design .................................................. 82
G 100 General............................................................................ 82 H. Shore Pull..............................................................................94
G 200 Design parameters and calculations................................ 82 H 100 General............................................................................ 94
H. Manufacturing and Installation of Sacrificial Anodes.......... 83 H 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 94
H 100 Anode manufacturing ..................................................... 83 H 300 Qualification of Installation Manual............................... 94
H 200 Anode installation ........................................................... 83 H 400 Operating limit conditions .............................................. 94
H 500 Installation procedures.................................................... 94
I. Design and Manufacturing/Fabrication of Internal Corrosion H 600 Contingency procedures ................................................. 94
Protection.............................................................................. 83 H 700 Arrangement, equipment and instrumentation ............... 94
I 100 General............................................................................ 83 H 800 Requirements for Installation ......................................... 94
I 200 Internal corrosion protection by fluid processing ........... 83
I 300 Internal corrosion protection by use of linepipe in I. Tie-in Operations ..................................................................94
Corrosion Resistant Alloys (CRAs)................................ 84 I 100 General............................................................................ 94
I 400 Internal corrosion protection by organic coatings or I 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 94
linings ............................................................................. 84 I 300 Qualification of Installation Manual............................... 94
I 500 Internal corrosion protection by chemical treatment ...... 84 I 400 Operating limit conditions .............................................. 94
I 500 Tie-in procedures ............................................................ 94
Sec. 9 Installation........................................................... 85 I 600 Contingency procedures ................................................. 95
I 700 Tie-in operations above water ........................................ 95
A. General.................................................................................. 85 I 800 Tie-in operations below water ........................................ 95
A 100 Objective......................................................................... 85
A 200 Application...................................................................... 85 J. As-Laid Survey.....................................................................95
A 300 Failure Mode Effect Analysis (FMEA) and Hazard and J 100 General............................................................................ 95
Operability (HAZOP) studies ......................................... 85 J 200 Specification of as-laid survey........................................ 95
A 400 Installation and testing specifications and drawings....... 85 J 300 As-laid survey................................................................. 95
A 500 Installation Manuals........................................................ 85 J 400 As-laid survey of corrosion protection systems.............. 95
A 600 Quality Assurance........................................................... 85
A 700 Welding........................................................................... 85 K. Span Rectification and Pipeline Protection ..........................95
A 800 Non-destructive testing and visual examination............. 86 K 100 General............................................................................ 95
A 900 Production tests............................................................... 86 K 200 Span rectification and protection specification............... 95
K 300 Span rectification ............................................................ 96
B. Pipeline Route, Survey and Preparation ............................... 86 K 400 Trenching........................................................................ 96
B 100 Pre-installation route survey ........................................... 86 K 500 Post-installation gravel dumping .................................... 96
B 200 Seabed preparation.......................................................... 87 K 600 Grout bags and concrete mattresses................................ 96
B 300 Pipeline and cable crossings ........................................... 87
B 400 Preparations for shore approach ..................................... 87 L. Installation of Protective and Anchoring Structures.............96
L 100 General............................................................................ 96
C. Marine Operations ................................................................ 87
C 100 General............................................................................ 87 M. Installation of Risers .............................................................97
C 200 Vessels ............................................................................ 87 M 100 General............................................................................ 97
C 300 Anchoring systems, anchor patterns and anchor M 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 97
positioning ...................................................................... 87 M 300 Qualification of the Installation Manual......................... 97
C 400 Positioning systems ........................................................ 88 M 400 Operating limit conditions .............................................. 97
C 500 Dynamic positioning....................................................... 88 M 500 Contingency procedures ................................................. 97
C 600 Cranes and lifting equipment.......................................... 88 M 600 Requirements for Installation ......................................... 97
C 700 Anchor handling and tug management ........................... 88
C 800 Contingency procedures ................................................. 88 N. As-Built Survey ....................................................................97
N 100 General............................................................................ 97
D. Pipeline Installation .............................................................. 88 N 200 Specification of as-built survey ...................................... 97
D 100 General............................................................................ 88 N 300 As-built survey requirements.......................................... 97
D 200 Installation Manual ......................................................... 89 N 400 Inspection of impressed current cathodic corrosion
D 300 Review and qualification of the installation manual, protection system ............................................................ 98
DET NORSKE VERITAS

O. Final Testing and Preparation for Operation ........................ 98 F. Design Criteria....................................................................109

O 100 General ............................................................................98 F 100 General ..........................................................................109
O 200 Specification of final testing and preparation for F 200 Material de-rating..........................................................109
operation..........................................................................98 F 300 Condition load effect factors.........................................109
O 300 Procedures for final testing and preparation for F 400 Pressure containment - equivalent format.....................109
operation..........................................................................98 F 500 Calculation of nominal thickness..................................110
O 400 Cleaning and gauging......................................................98 F 600 Pressure containment criterion, incidental pressure less
O 500 System pressure testing ...................................................98 than 10% above the design pressure. ............................110
O 600 Cleaning, de-watering and drying ...................................99 F 700 Local buckling - Collapse .............................................110
O 700 Systems testing..............................................................100 F 800 Local buckling - Moment..............................................110
O 800 Product filling ...............................................................100 F 900 Local buckling - Girth weld factor................................110
O 900 Operational verification (start-up inspection) ...............100 F 1000 Local buckling - Propagating pressure..........................111
F 1100 Local buckling - Buckle arrestors .................................111
P. Documentation.................................................................... 100 F 1200 Local buckling - Allowable stress design format..........111
P 100 General ..........................................................................100 F 1300 Local buckling - Adding moments................................111
F 1400 Ovalisation ....................................................................112
Sec. 10 Operation, Inspection, and Repair ................. 101
G. Fracture Mechanics.............................................................112
A. General................................................................................ 101 G 100 Engineering Criticality Assessment (ECA) - Strain based
A 100 Objective .......................................................................101 design ............................................................................112
A 200 Procedures .....................................................................101 G 200 ECA - Cyclic loading into the plastic regime ...............112
A 300 In-Service file................................................................101 G 300 Fracture toughness testing.............................................112
A 400 Operation.......................................................................101
A 500 Inspection and monitoring philosophy..........................101 H. API Material Grades ........................................................... 113
H 100 API material grades.......................................................113
A 600 Special inspections ........................................................101
I. Components and assemblies ...............................................113
B. Pipeline Configuration Survey ........................................... 101 I 100 Bends.............................................................................113
B 100 General ..........................................................................101 I 200 Riser Supports ...............................................................113
B 200 Periodic survey..............................................................101 I 300 J-tubes ...........................................................................114
C. Inspection and Monitoring of External Corrosion.............. 102 J. Material and Design Links..................................................114
C 100 General ..........................................................................102 J 100 General ..........................................................................114
C 200 Risers in the Splash zone and the Atmospheric Zone ...102 J 200 Supplementary requirements.........................................114
C 300 Pipelines and Risers in the Submerged Zone................102 J 300 Links based on accumulated strain ...............................114
J 400 Material data sheet ........................................................115
D. Inspection and Monitoring of Internal Corrosion............... 103
D 100 General ..........................................................................103 K. Installation ..........................................................................116
D 200 Corrosion inspection .....................................................103 K 100 Safety class definition ...................................................116
D 300 Corrosion monitoring....................................................103 K 200 Coating ..........................................................................116
K 300 Simplified laying criteria ..............................................116
E. Defects and Repair.............................................................. 103 K 400 Reeling ..........................................................................116
E 100 General ..........................................................................103
E 200 Global buckling.............................................................104 L. References...........................................................................117
E 300 Grooves, gouges, cracks and notches............................104
E 400 Metal loss defects..........................................................104 App. A Supplementary Requirements to ISO ............ 118
E 500 Dents .............................................................................104
E 600 Leaks .............................................................................104 A. General................................................................................118
E 700 Repair by welding .........................................................104 A 100 General ..........................................................................118
Sec. 11 Requalification.................................................. 105 B. Differences observed ..........................................................118
B 100 Chemical composition and mechanical properties........118
A. General................................................................................ 105 B 200 Weldability....................................................................118
A 100 Objective .......................................................................105 B 300 Samples and test pieces.................................................118
A 200 Application....................................................................105 B 400 Frequency of testing during manufacture .....................118
B 500 NDT ..............................................................................118
B. Design Criteria.................................................................... 105 B 600 Dimensions....................................................................118
B 100 General ..........................................................................105 B 700 Documentation ..............................................................118
B 200 System Pressure Test ....................................................105 B 800 Special requirements for sour service ...........................118
B 300 Deterioration .................................................................105 B 900 Special requirements for fracture arrest ........................118
B 1000 Mill pressure test...........................................................118
Sec. 12 Commentary (Informative) ............................. 106
App. B Mechanical Testing and Corrosion testing .... 120
A. General................................................................................ 106
A 100 Objective .......................................................................106 A. Mechanical Testing.............................................................120
A 100 General ..........................................................................120
B. Cross References ................................................................ 106 A 200 Selection and preparation of samples and test pieces ...120
A 300 Chemical analysis .........................................................120
C. Design Philosophy.............................................................. 107 A 400 Tensile test ....................................................................120
C 100 Safety Class discussion .................................................107 A 500 Bend test........................................................................120
C 200 Structural reliability analyses........................................108 A 600 Charpy V-notch impact test ..........................................121
C 300 Characteristic values .....................................................108 A 700 Drop weight tear test (DWTT)......................................121
A 800 Fracture toughness testing.............................................121
D. Design Premise ................................................................... 108 A 900 Shear strength test .........................................................122
D 100 Monitoring ....................................................................108 A 1000 Metallographic examination and hardness testing ........122
D 200 Air and sea temperatures...............................................108 A 1100 Strain ageing test...........................................................122
E. Loads .................................................................................. 108 B. Corrosion Testing ...............................................................123
E 100 Local pressure ...............................................................108 B 100 General ..........................................................................123
E 200 Conversion of pressures ................................................109 B 200 Pitting corrosion test .....................................................123
E 300 Flow velocity around cylindrical members...................109 B 300 Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking test ...................123
DET NORSKE VERITAS

B 400 Sulphide Stress Cracking test ....................................... 123 B 300 Manual ultrasonic testing.............................................. 143
B 400 Manual magnetic particle testing.................................. 144
App. C Welding.............................................................. 128 B 500 Manual liquid penetrant testing .................................... 145
B 600 Manual eddy current testing ......................................... 145
A. Application ......................................................................... 128 B 700 Visual examination ....................................................... 146
A 100 General.......................................................................... 128
A 200 Welding processes ........................................................ 128 C. Manual Non-destructive testing of Base Materials and Weld
A 300 Quality Assurance......................................................... 128 Overlay ...............................................................................146
C 100 General.......................................................................... 146
B. Welding Equipment, Tools and Personnel ......................... 128 C 200 Plate and pipe................................................................ 146
B 100 Welding equipment and tools ....................................... 128 C 300 Forgings ........................................................................ 146
B 200 Personnel....................................................................... 128 C 400 Castings......................................................................... 146
C 500 Weld overlay................................................................. 146
C. Welding Consumables........................................................ 129
C 100 General.......................................................................... 129 D. Automated Non-Destructive Testing..................................146
C 200 Chemical composition .................................................. 129 D 100 General.......................................................................... 146
C 300 Mechanical properties................................................... 129 D 200 Automated ultrasonic testing ........................................ 147
C 400 Batch testing – Girth welds........................................... 129
C 500 Handling and storage of welding consumables ............ 130 E. Non-Destructive Testing Acceptance Criteria....................147
E 100 General.......................................................................... 147
D. Welding Procedures............................................................ 130 E 200 Acceptance criteria based on Engineering Critical
D 100 General.......................................................................... 130 Assessment (ECA)........................................................ 148
D 200 Preliminary welding procedure specification ............... 130
D 300 Welding procedure qualification record ....................... 130 F. Non-Destructive Testing of Plate and Strip at Mill ............148
D 400 Welding procedure specification .................................. 130 F 100 General.......................................................................... 148
D 500 Welding procedure specification for repair welding .... 131 F 200 Ultrasonic testing of C-Mn and duplex steel plate
D 600 Essential variables for welding procedures .................. 131 and strip ........................................................................ 148
F 300 Ultrasonic testing of clad plate and strip ...................... 149
E. Qualification of Welding Procedures ................................. 131 F 400 Visual examination of plate and strip ........................... 149
E 100 General.......................................................................... 131
E 200 Qualification of repair welding procedures .................. 132 G. Non-Destructive Testing of Linepipe at Pipe Mills............149
E 300 Qualification of longitudinal and spiral welds in linepipe G 100 General.......................................................................... 149
and linepipe components .............................................. 132 G 200 Untested pipe ends........................................................ 149
E 400 Qualification of girth welds in risers, expansion loops and G 300 Suspect pipe .................................................................. 149
pipe strings for towing .................................................. 132 G 400 Non-destructive testing applicable to all pipe .............. 149
E 500 Qualification of girth welds for installation and tie-in . 133 G 500 Non-destructive testing of seamless pipe ..................... 150
E 600 Qualification of girth welds exposed to accumulated G 600 Non-destructive testing of HFW, LBW and EBW pipe150
plastic strain .................................................................. 134 G 700 Non-destructive testing of SAW pipe........................... 152
E 700 Qualification of underwater welding for tie-in ............. 134 G 800 Manual NDT................................................................. 154
E 800 Qualification of overlay welding .................................. 135 G 900 Non-destructive testing of weld repairs in pipe............ 155
E 900 Qualification of welding procedures for structures ...... 135 G 1000 Visual examination of welds in linepipe ...................... 155
F. Examination and Testing .................................................... 135 H. Testing of Installation Girth Welds, Component Welds and
F 100 General.......................................................................... 135 other Pressure Containing Welds........................................155
F 200 Visual examination and non-destructive testing........... 135 H 100 General.......................................................................... 155
F 300 Destructive testing of butt joints................................... 135 H 200 Non-destructive testing and visual examination........... 155
F 400 Sulphide stress cracking test ......................................... 137 H 300 Acceptance criteria ....................................................... 155
F 500 Corrosion Testing and Microstructure Examination .... 137 H 400 Repair of welds ............................................................. 156
F 600 Testing of weld overlay ................................................ 137
I. Acceptance Criteria for Pipeline Components, Equipment,
G. Fabrication and Welding Requirements ............................. 138 Structural Items, Base Materials and Weld Overlay ..........157
G 100 General.......................................................................... 138 I 100 General.......................................................................... 157
G 200 Production welding ....................................................... 138 I 200 Manual Non-destructive Testing Acceptance criteria for
G 300 Repair welding.............................................................. 138 Plate and Pipe ............................................................... 158
G 400 Post weld heat treatment ............................................... 138 I 300 Acceptance criteria for forgings ................................... 158
G 500 Welding of linepipe and linepipe components ............. 139 I 400 Acceptance criteria for castings.................................... 158
G 600 Fabrication of risers, expansion loops, pipe strings for I 500 Acceptance criteria for weld overlay ............................ 158
towing. .......................................................................... 139
G 700 Installation and tie-in welding ...................................... 139 App. E Automated Ultrasonic Girth Weld Testing.... 159
H. Material and Process Specific Requirements ..................... 139 A. General................................................................................159
H 100 Internally clad/lined carbon steel.................................. 139 A 100 Scope............................................................................. 159
H 200 Duplex stainless steel.................................................... 140 A 200 References..................................................................... 159
H 300 Martensitic (13% Cr) stainless steel ............................. 140
B. Basic Requirements ............................................................159
App. D Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)....................... 141 B 100 General.......................................................................... 159
B 200 Documentation.............................................................. 159
A. General................................................................................ 141 B 300 Qualification ................................................................. 159
A 100 Scope............................................................................. 141 B 400 Ultrasonic system equipment and components............. 159
A 200 Codes and standards...................................................... 141 B 500 Recorder set-up............................................................. 161
A 300 Quality Assurance......................................................... 142 B 600 Circumferential scanning velocity................................ 161
A 400 Non-destructive testing methods .................................. 142 B 700 Gate settings.................................................................. 161
A 500 Non-destructive testing procedures .............................. 142 B 800 Recording Threshold .................................................... 161
A 600 Personnel qualifications................................................ 142 B 900 Power supply ................................................................ 161
A 700 Reporting ...................................................................... 142 B 1000 Software........................................................................ 161
A 800 Timing of NDT ............................................................. 142 B 1100 System Log Book ......................................................... 161
B 1200 Spares............................................................................ 161
B. Manual Non-destructive Testing and Visual Examination of B 1300 Slave monitors .............................................................. 161
Welds .................................................................................. 143
B 100 General.......................................................................... 143 C. Procedure ............................................................................161
B 200 Radiographic testing ..................................................... 143 C 100 General.......................................................................... 161
DET NORSKE VERITAS

D. Calibration .......................................................................... 162 I. Validity of Qualification.....................................................165

D 100 Initial static calibration..................................................162 I 100 Validity..........................................................................165
D 200 Dynamic calibration ......................................................162 I 200 Essential variables.........................................................165
E. Field Inspection .................................................................. 162 J. Annex A. Transducer requirements....................................165

E 100 Inspection requirements ................................................162 J 100 A.1 Identification ..........................................................165
E 200 Operational checks ........................................................163 J 200 A.2 Beam angle.............................................................165
J 300 A.3 Beam size ...............................................................165
F. Re-examination................................................................... 163 J 400 A.4 Overall gain............................................................165
F 100 General ..........................................................................163 J 500 A.5 Index point .............................................................165
J 600 A.6 Squint .....................................................................165
G. Evaluation and Reporting ................................................... 163 J 700 A.7 Longitudinal angle beam........................................165
G 100 Evaluation of indications ..............................................163 J 800 A.8 Surface waves.........................................................165
G 200 Examination reports ......................................................163 J 900 A.9 Side lobes ...............................................................165
G 300 Inspection records .........................................................163 J 1000 A.10 Subsidiary maxima...............................................165
J 1100 A.11 Pulse shape ...........................................................166
H. Qualification ....................................................................... 163 J 1200 A.12 Frequency.............................................................166
J 1300 A.13 Pulse length ..........................................................166
H 100 General ..........................................................................163 J 1400 A.14 Signal to noise ......................................................166
H 200 Scope .............................................................................163
H 300 Requirements ................................................................163 K. Annex B. Determination of shear wave velocity in pipe
H 400 Qualification programme ..............................................164 steels ...................................................................................166
H 500 Variables .......................................................................164 K 100 B.1 General ...................................................................166
H 600 Test welds .....................................................................164 K 200 B.2 Equipment ..............................................................166
H 700 Qualification testing .....................................................164 K 300 B.3 Specimens...............................................................166
H 800 Validation testing ..........................................................164 K 400 B.4 Test method ............................................................166
H 900 Analysis.........................................................................165 K 500 B.5 Accuracy.................................................................166
H 1000 Reporting.......................................................................165 K 600 B.6 Recording ...............................................................166
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover Sec.1 – Page 11
SECTION 1
GENERAL
A. General 402 Where reference is made to codes other than DNV doc-
uments, the valid revision shall be taken as the revision which
A 100 Introduction was current at the date of issue of this standard, unless other-
wise noted.
101 This standard gives criteria and guidance on design, ma-
terials, fabrication, installation, testing, commissioning, oper- 403 This standard is intended to comply with the ISO stand-
ation, maintenance, re-qualification, and abandonment of ard 13623: Petroleum and natural gas industries - Pipeline
pipeline systems. transportation systems, specifying functional requirements for
offshore pipelines and risers.
A 200 Objectives Guidance note:
201 The objectives of this standard are to: The following major deviations to the ISO standard are known:
— provide an internationally acceptable standard of safety — applying the supplementary requirements U, for increased
for submarine pipeline systems by defining minimum re- utilisation, this standard allows higher pressure containment
quirements for the design, materials, fabrication, installa- utilisation than the ISO standard;
tion, testing, commissioning, operation, repair, re- — the equivalent stress criterion in the ISO standard sometimes
qualification, and abandonment; allows higher utilisation than this standard;
— serve as a technical reference document in contractual — requirements to system pressure test (pressure test); and
matters between purchaser and Contractor; and — minor differences may appear depending on how the pipe-
line has been defined in safety classes, the ISO standard
— serve as a guideline for designers, Purchaser, and Contrac- does not use the concept of safety classes.
tors.
This standard requires that the line pipe and fabrication has been
A 300 Scope and Application produced and fabricated to this standard.
301 This standard applies to rigid metallic submarine pipe- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
line systems as defined in C 200, for the transportation of fluids
of categorisation as defined in Section 2 and made of linepipe 404 The linepipe requirements of this standard are based on
material as given in Section 6. the ISO standard 3183-3 Petroleum and natural gas industries
302 This standard applies to the design, materials, fabrica- - Steel pipe for pipelines - technical delivery conditions - part
tion, installation, testing, commissioning, operation, repair, re- 3 "Pipe of requirement class C", with, in some respects, more
qualification, and abandonment of submarine pipeline systems stringent requirements.
used in the petroleum and natural gas industries. This offshore standard gives also requirements for five supple-
303 This standard is applicable to single systems, pipeline mentary requirements and an additional level of NDT require-
bundles of the piggyback type, and pipeline bundles encased ments which are linked up to the design criteria and content.
within a carrier pipe. Guidance note:
304 This standard is not applicable to flexible pipes or dy- Additional requirements to the ISO standard on linepipe are giv-
en in Appendix A.
namic or compliant risers.
Guidance note: ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
The above limitation is due to the difference in load effects on a
riser connected by clamps, or similar, to a fixed structure com-
pared to a compliant riser which may move in the fluid. This ex-
cludes risers such as catenary risers or risers connected to a B. Normative References
Tension Leg Platform (TLP).
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- B 100 Offshore Service Specifications
The latest revision of the following documents applies:
305 Umbilicals intended for control of subsea installations
are not included in this standard. Individual pipes, within an DNV-OSS-301Certification and Verification of Pipelines
umbilical, made of materials applicable to this standard, may
be designed according to this standard. B 200 Offshore Standards
Guidance note: DNV-OS-F201 Dynamic Risers
Even though this standard may be applied to umbilicals, the non-
typical geometry, as compared to that of an ordinary pipeline, B 300 Recommended practices
may be outside the validity range for certain requirements and The latest revision of the following documents applies:
care shall be taken for such applications.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- DNV-RP-F101 Corroded Pipelines
DNV-RP-F104 Mechanical pipeline couplings
306 This standard is applicable for installation by S-lay, J- DNV-RP-F105 Free Spanning Pipelines
lay, towing and laying methods introducing plastic deforma- DNV-RP-F106 Factory applied pipeline coatings for corro-
tions. Installation requirements for risers as well as protective sion control
and anchoring structures are also included. DNV-RP-B401 Cathodic Protection Design
DNV-RP-C203 Fatigue Strength Analysis of Offshore Steel
A 400 Other codes Structures
401 In case of conflict between requirements of this standard DNV-RP-E305 On-bottom Stability Design of Submarine
and a reference document, the requirements of this standard Pipelines
shall prevail. DNV RP-O501 Erosive Wear in Piping Systems
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 12 – Sec.1 see note on front cover
B 400 Rules touchdown point monitoring or by a dedicated vessel during

The latest revision of the following documents applies: installation of the pipeline.
DNV Rules for Certification of Flexible Risers and Pipes 203 Atmospheric zone: The part of the pipeline system above
the splash zone.
DNV Rules for Planning and Execution of Marine operations
204 Buckling, global: Buckling mode which involves a sub-
DNV Rules for Classification of Fixed Offshore Installations stantial length of the pipeline, usually several pipe joints and
not gross deformations of the cross section; upheaval buckling
B 500 Certification notes and Classification notes is an example thereof.
The latest revision of the following documents applies: 205 Buckling, local: Buckling mode confined to a short
length of the pipeline causing gross changes of the cross sec-
DNV CN 1.2 Conformity Certification Services, Type Ap- tion; collapse, localised wall wrinkling and kinking are exam-
proval ples thereof.
DNV CN 1.5 Conformity Certification Services, Approval
of Manufacturers, Metallic Materials 206 Characteristic load: The reference value of a load to be
DNV CN 7 Ultrasonic Inspection of Weld Connections used in the determination of load effects. The characteristic
DNV CN 30.4 Foundations load is normally based upon a defined fractile in the upper end
DNV CN 30.5 Environmental Conditions and Environmen- of the distribution function for load.
tal Loads 207 Characteristic resistance: The reference value of struc-
DNV CN 30.6 Structural Reliability Analysis of Marine tural strength to be used in the determination of the design
Structures strength. The characteristic resistance is normally based upon
a defined fractile in the lower end of the distribution function
B 600 Guidelines for resistance. For local buckling, the characteristic value usu-
The latest revision of the following documents applies: ally corresponds to the expected value. The local buckling re-
sistance divided by the material partial factor, usually
DNV Guidelines for Flexible Pipes, Rev. 02, constitutes a lower fractile.
November 1987 208 Characteristic strength: The nominal value of material
DNV Guideline 13 Interference between Trawl Gear and strength to be used in the determination of the design strength.
Pipelines. The characteristic strength is normally based upon a defined
fractile in the lower end of the distribution function for
B 700 Other references strength.
BS 7910 Guide on methods for assessing the accepta- 209 Clad pipe (C): Pipe with internal liner where the bond
bility of flaws in fusion welded structures between (linepipe) base and cladding material is metallurgical.
ISO/DIS 13623 Petroleum and natural gas industries - Pipe- 210 Commissioning: In relation to pipelines, refers to activi-
line transportation systems. ties which take place after pressure testing and prior to opera-
ISO 3183-3 Petroleum and natural gas industries - steel tion, comprising de-watering, cleaning, drying and filling with
pipe for pipelines - technical delivery condi- product.
tions - part 3 "Pipe of requirement class C". 211 Condition load effect factor: A load effect factor includ-
Guidance note: ed in the buckling calculation to account for specific load con-
The latest revision of the DNV documents may be found in the ditions.
publication list at the DNV website www.dnv.com. 212 Construction phase: All phases during construction, in-
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- cluding fabrication, installation, testing and commissioning,
up until the installation or system is safe and operable for in-
tended use. In relation to pipelines, this includes transporta-
tion, on-shore and on-barge welding, laying, rectification, tie-
in, pressure testing, commissioning and repair.
C. Definitions
213 Contractor: A party contractually appointed by the Pur-
C 100 Verbal forms chaser to fulfil all, or any of, the activities associated with de-
101 "Shall": Indicates requirements strictly to be followed in sign, construction and operation.
order to conform to this standard and from which no deviation 214 Corrosion allowance: Extra wall thickness added during
is permitted. design to compensate for any reduction in wall thickness by
102 "Should": Indicates that among several possibilities, one corrosion(internally/externally) during operation.
is recommended as particularly suitable, without mentioning 215 Design life: The initially planned time period from ini-
or excluding others, or that a certain course of action is pre- tial installation or use until permanent decommissioning of the
ferred but not necessarily required. Other possibilities may be equipment or system. The original design life may be extended
applied subject to agreement. after a re-qualification.
103 "May": Verbal form used to indicate a course of action 216 Design premises: A set of project specific design data
permissible within the limits of the standard. and functional requirements which are not specified or which
are left open in the standard.
104 "Agreement", "by agreement": Unless otherwise indicat-
ed, this means agreed in writing between Manufacturer/ Con- 217 Design: All related engineering to design the pipeline in-
tractor and Purchaser. cluding both structural as well as material and corrosion.
218 Design temperature, maximum: The highest possible
C 200 Definitions temperature to which the equipment or system may be exposed
201 As-built survey: Survey of the installed and completed to during installation and operation. Environmental as well as
pipeline system, that is performed to verify that the completed operational temperatures shall be considered.
installation work meets the specified requirements, and to doc- 219 Design temperature, minimum: The lowest possible
ument deviations from the original design, if any. temperature to which the equipment or system may be exposed
202 As-laid survey: Survey performed either by continuous to during installation and operation, irrespective of the pres-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

sure. Environmental as well as operational temperatures shall 239 Load combination: The local bucking limit state criteri-
be considered. on for combined loading shall be checked for two load combi-
220 Engineering Criticality Assessment (ECA): Fracture me- nations, a and b. Load combination a is a system check and
chanic assessment of defects. shall only be applied when system effects are present.
221 Erosion: Material loss due to repeated impact of sand 240 Load effect: Effect of a single load or combination of
particles or liquid droplets. loads on the equipment or system, such as stress, strain, defor-
mation, displacement, motion, etc.
222 Fabrication: Activities related to the assembly of ob-
jects with a defined purpose. In relation to pipelines, fabrica- 241 Load effect factor: The partial safety factor by which the
tion refers to e.g. risers, expansion loops, bundles, reels, etc. characteristic load effect is multiplied to obtain the design load
effect.
223 Fabrication factor: Factor on the material strength in or-
der to compensate for material strength reduction from cold 242 Location class: A geographic area of pipeline system
forming during manufacturing of linepipe. classified according to human activity.
224 Fabricator: The party performing the fabrication. 243 Lot: A number of pipes from the same heat, the same
225 Failure: An event affecting a component or system and heat treatment batch and with the same diameter and wall
causing one or both of the following effects: thickness.
244 Manufacture: Making of articles or materials, often in
— loss of component or system function; or large volumes. In relation to pipelines, refers to activities for
— deterioration of functional capability to such an extent that the production of linepipe, anodes and other components and
the safety of the installation, personnel or environment is application of coating, performed under contracts from one or
significantly reduced more Contractors.
226 Fatigue: Cyclic loading causing degradation of the ma- 245 Manufacturer: The party who is contracted to be respon-
terial. sible for planning, execution and documentation of manufac-
227 Fluid categorisation: Categorisation of the transported turing.
fluid according to hazard potential as defined in Section 2. 246 Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS): A man-
228 Fractile: The p-fractile (or percentile) and the corre- ual prepared by the Manufacturer to demonstrate how the spec-
sponding fractile value xp is defined as: ified properties may be achieved and verified through the
proposed manufacturing route.
F ( xp ) = p 247 Material resistance factor: Partial safety factor trans-
forming a characteristic resistance to a lower fractile resist-
F is the distribution function for xp ance.
229 Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking (HPIC): Internal 248 Material strength factor: Factor for determination of the
cracking of wrought materials due to a build-up of hydrogen characteristic material strength reflecting the confidence in the
pressure in micro-voids (Related terms: hydrogen induced yield stress.
cracking, stepwise cracking)
249 Mill pressure test: The hydrostatic strength test per-
230 Hydro-test or Hydrostatic test: See Mill pressure test formed at the mill, see Section 5B 200.
231 Inspection: Activities such as measuring, examination,
testing, gauging one or more characteristics of a product or 250 NDT level: The extent and acceptance criteria for the
service and comparing the results with specified requirements NDT of the linepipe are given for two levels. Level one, which
to determine conformity. is more stringent, is required for displacement controlled de-
sign criteria.
232 Installation (activity): The operations related to install-
ing the equipment, pipeline or structure, e.g. pipeline laying, 251 Nominal outside diameter: The specified outside diame-
tie-in, piling of structure etc., including final testing and prep- ter. This shall mean the actual outside diameter, e.g. 12.75" for
aration for operation. a 12" pipe (clarification).
233 Installation (object): See Offshore installation. 252 Nominal pipe wall thickness: The specified non-corrod-
ed pipe wall thickness of a pipe, which is equal to the minimum
234 Installation Manual (IM): A document prepared by the steel wall thickness plus the manufacturing tolerance.
Contractor to describe and demonstrate that the installation
method and equipment used by the Contractor will meet the 253 Offshore installation (object): General term for mobile
specified requirements and that the results can be verified. and fixed structures, including facilities, which are intended
for exploration, drilling, production, processing or storage of
235 J-tube: A J-shaped tube installed on a platform, through hydrocarbons or other related activities/fluids. The term in-
which a pipe can be pulled to form a riser. The J-tube extends cludes installations intended for accommodation of personnel
from the platform deck to and inclusive of the bottom bend at engaged in these activities. Offshore installation covers subsea
the sea floor. The J-tube supports connect the J-tube to the sup- installations and pipelines. The term does not cover traditional
porting structure. shuttle tankers, supply boats and other support vessels which
236 Limit state: A state beyond which the structure no longer are not directly engaged in the activities described above.
satisfies the requirements. The following categories of limit
states are of relevance for pipeline systems: 254 Operation, Incidental: Conditions which that are not
part of normal operation of the equipment or system. In rela-
SLS = Serviceability Limit State tion to pipeline systems, incidental conditions may lead to in-
ULS = Ultimate Limit State cidental pressures, e.g. pressure surges due to sudden closing
FLS = Fatigue Limit State of valves, or failure of the pressure regulation system and acti-
ALS = Accidental Limit State. vation of the pressure safety system.
255 Operation, Normal: Conditions that arise from the in-
237 Lined pipe (L): Pipe with internal liner where the bond tended use and application of equipment or system, including
between (linepipe) base and cladding material is mechanical. associated condition and integrity monitoring, maintenance,
238 Load: Any action causing stress, strain, deformation, repairs etc. In relation to pipelines, this should include steady
displacement, motion, etc. to the equipment or system. flow conditions over the full range of flow rates, as well as pos-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

sible packing and shut-in conditions where these occur as part

of routine operation.
256 Out of roundness: The deviation of the linepipe perime-
ter from a circle. This can be stated as ovalisation (%), or as lo-
cal out of roundness, e.g. flattening, (mm).
257 Ovalisation: The deviation of the perimeter from a cir-
cle. This has the form of an elliptic cross section.
258 Owner: The party ultimately responsible for design,
construction and operation.
259 Partial safety factor: A factor by which the characteris-
tic value of a variable is modified to give the design value (i.e.
a load effect, condition load effect, material resistance or safe-
ty class resistance factor).
260 Pipe, High Frequency Welded (HFW): Pipe manufac-
tured by forming from strip and with one longitudinal seam
formed by welding without the addition of filler metal. The
longitudinal seam is generated by high frequency current (min-
imum 100 kHz) applied by induction or conduction. The weld
area or the entire pipe shall be heat treated.
261 Pipe, Seamless (SML): Pipe manufactured in a hot form-
ing process resulting in a tubular product without a welded
seam. The hot forming may be followed by sizing or cold fin-
ishing to obtain the required dimensions. Figure 1-1 Pressure definitions
262 Pipe, Submerged Arc-Welded Longitudinal or Helical 269 Pressure test: See System pressure test
(SAWL or SAWH): Pipe manufactured by forming from strip or
plate, and with one longitudinal (SAWL) or helical (SAWH) 270 Pressure, Collapse: Characteristic resistance against ex-
seam formed by the submerged arc process with at least one ternal over-pressure.
pass made on the inside and one pass from the outside of the 271 Pressure, Design: In relation to pipelines, this is the
pipe. An intermittent or continuous single pass tack weld made maximum internal pressure during normal operation, referred
by the gas metal arc welding method is permitted. to a specified reference height, to which the pipeline or pipe-
263 Pipeline: A pipeline is defined as the part of a pipeline line section shall be designed. The design pressure must take
system which is located below the water surface at maximum account of steady flow conditions over the full range of flow
tide, except for pipeline risers. The pipeline may, be resting rates, as well as possible packing and shut-in conditions, over
wholly or intermittently on, or buried below, the sea bottom. the whole length of the pipeline or pipeline section which is to
have a constant design pressure.
264 Pipeline Components: Any items which are integral
parts of the pipeline system such as flanges, tees, bends, reduc- 272 Pressure, Hydro- or Hydrostatic test: See Pressure, Mill
ers and valves. test.
265 Pipeline System: An interconnected system of subma- 273 Pressure, Incidental: In relation to pipelines, this is the
rine pipelines, their risers, supports, isolation valves, all inte- maximum internal pressure the pipeline or pipeline section is
grated piping components, associated safety systems and the designed to withstand during any incidental operating situa-
corrosion protection system. Unless specified otherwise, the tion, referred to the same reference height as the design pres-
pipeline system limits are as follows: sure.
274 Pressure, Initiation: The external over-pressure required
— up to and including the pig launcher/pig receiver on an in- to initiate a propagating buckle from an existing local buckle
stallation. If no pigging facilities are present, the pipeline or dent.
system terminates at the first valve within the facilities.
— on a subsea installation, the pipeline system normally ends 275 Pressure, Local; Local Design, Local Incidental or Lo-
at the point of connection to the christmas tree or butterfly cal Test: In relation to pipelines, this is the internal pressure at
valve. The christmas tree is not considered to be a part of any point in the pipeline system or pipeline section for the cor-
the pipeline system. On a subsea installation, where the responding design pressure, incidental pressure or test pres-
above definition is not applicable, the pipeline system sure. This is equal to the design/incidental/test pressure at the
ends at the connection point to the subsea installation. The reference height plus the static head of the transported/test me-
connection is part of the submarine pipeline. dium due to the difference between the reference height and
the height of the section being considered.
— the pipeline system ends at the first flange/valve on shore
approach. 276 Pressure, Maximum Allowable Incidental (MAIP): In re-
lation to pipelines, this is the maximum pressure at which the
266 Pressure control system: In relation to pipelines, this is pipeline system shall be operated during incidental (i.e. tran-
the system for control of the pressure in pipelines, comprising sient) operation. The maximum allowable incidental pressure
the pressure regulating system, pressure safety system and as- is defined as the maximum incidental pressure less the positive
sociated instrument and alarm systems, see Figure 1. tolerance of the pressure safety system.
267 Pressure regulating system: In relation to pipelines, this 277 Pressure, Maximum Allowable Operating (MAOP): In
is the system which ensures that, irrespective of the upstream relation to pipelines, this is the maximum pressure at which the
pressure, a set pressure is maintained (at a given reference pipeline system shall be operated during normal operation. The
point) for the pipeline. maximum allowable operating pressure is defined as the de-
268 Pressure safety system: The system which, independent sign pressure less the positive tolerance of the pressure regulat-
of the pressure regulating system, ensures that the allowable ing system.
incidental pressure is not exceeded. 278 Pressure, Mill test: The test pressure applied to pipe
DET NORSKE VERITAS

joints and pipe components upon completion of manufacture 297 Specified Minimum Tensile Strength (SMTS): The mini-
and fabrication, see Section 5 B200. mum tensile strength prescribed by the specification or stand-
ard under which the material is purchased.
279 Pressure, Propagating: The lowest pressure required for
a propagating buckle to continue to propagate. 298 Specified Minimum Yield Stress (SMYS): The minimum
yield stress prescribed by the specification or standard under
279b Pressure, shut-in: The maximum pressure that can be at- which the material is purchased.
tained at the wellhead during closure of valves closest to the
wellhead (wellhead isolation). This implies that pressure tran- 299 Splash zone: External surfaces of a structure or pipeline
sients due to valve closing shall be included. that are periodically in and out of the water by the influence of
waves and tides.
280 Pressure, System test: In relation to pipelines, this is the
internal pressure applied to the pipeline or pipeline section dur- C 300 Definitions (continued)
ing testing on completion of installation work to test the pipe-
line system for tightness (normally performed as hydrostatic 300 Splash Zone Height: The vertical distance between
testing). splash zone upper limit and splash zone lower limit.
281 Pressure, Test: See Pressure, System test. 301 Splash Zone Lower Limit (LSZ) is determined by:
282 Purchaser: The owner or another party acting on his be- LSZ = |L1| - |L2| - |L3|
half, who is responsible for procuring materials, components
or services intended for the design, construction or modifica- L1 = lowest astronomic tide level (LAT)
tion of a installation or a pipeline. L2 = 30% of the Splash zone wave-related height defined in
303.
283 Quality Assurance (QA): Planned and systematic actions L3 = upward motion of the riser, if applicable.
necessary to provide adequate confidence that a product or
service will satisfy given requirements for quality. 302 Splash Zone Upper Limit(USZ) is determined by:
284 Quality Plan (QP): The document setting out the specif- USZ = |U1| + |U2| + |U3|.
ic quality practices, resources and sequence of activities rele-
vant to a particular product, project or contract. A quality plan U1 = highest astronomic tide level (HAT)
usually makes reference to the part of the quality manual appli- U2 = 70% of the splash zone wave-related height defined in
cable to the specific case. 303.
285 Ratcheting: Accumulated deformation during cyclic U3 = settlement or downward motion of the riser, if applica-
loading, especially for diameter increase. ble.
286 Reliability: The probability that a component or system 303 Splash zone wave-related height: The wave height with
will perform its required function without failure, under stated a probability of being exceeded equal to 10-2, as determined
conditions of operation and maintenance and during a speci- from the long term distribution of individual waves. If this val-
fied time interval. ue is not available, an approximate value of the splash zone
287 Re-qualification: The re-assessment of a design due to height may be taken as:
modified design premises and/or sustained damage. 0.46 Hs100
288 Resistance: The capability of a structure, or part of a where
structure, to resist load effects.
Hs100= significant wave height with a 100 year return period
289 Riser: A riser is defined as the connecting piping or flex-
ible pipe between a submarine pipeline on the sea bottom and 304 Submarine pipeline: See definition for pipeline.
installations above water. The riser extends to the above sea
emergency isolation point between the import/export line and 305 Submerged zone: The part of the pipeline system or in-
the installation facilities, i.e. riser ESD valve. stallation below the splash zone, including buried parts.
290 Riser support/clamp: A structure which is intended to 306 Supplementary requirements: Requirements for material
keep the riser in place. properties of linepipe that are additional to the basic require-
ments, and that are intended to apply to pipe used for specific
291 Riser system: A riser system is considered to comprise applications.
riser, its supports, all integrated pipelining components, and
corrosion protection system. 307 System effects: System effects are relevant in cases
where many pipe sections are subjected to an invariant loading
292 Risk: The qualitative or quantitative likelihood of an ac- condition, and potential structural failure may occur in connec-
cidental or unplanned event occurring, considered in conjunction with the lowest structural resistance among the pipe sec-
tion with the potential consequences of such a failure. In tions.
quantitative terms, risk is the quantified probability of a de-
fined failure mode times its quantified consequence. 308 System pressure test: Final test of the complete pipeline
system, see Section 5B 200.
293 Safety Class (SC): In relation to pipelines; a concept
adopted to classify the significance of the pipeline system with 309 Target safety level: A nominal acceptable probability of
respect to the consequences of failure. structural failure. Gross errors are not included.
294 Safety class resistance factor: Partial safety factor which 310 Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS): The measured ulti-
transforms the lower fractile resistance to a design resistance mate tensile strength.
reflecting the safety class. 311 Verification: An examination to confirm that an activity,
295 Slamming: Impact load on an approximately horizontal a product or a service is in accordance with specified require-
member from a rising water surface as a wave passes. The di- ments.
rection is mainly vertical. 312 Work: All activities to be performed within relevant con-
296 Slapping: Impact load on an approximately vertical sur- tract(s) issued by Owner, Operator, Contractor or Manufactur-
face due to a breaking wave. The direction is mainly horizon- er.
tal. 313 Yield Stress (YS): The measured yield tensile stress.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

D. Abbreviations and Symbols SSC Stress Sulphide Cracking

ST Surface testing
D 100 Abbreviations TOFD Time Of Flight Diffraction
TRB Three Roll Bending
ALS Accidental Limit State ULS Ultimate Limit State
API American Petroleum Institute UO Pipe fabrication process for welded pipes
ASD Allowable Stress Design UOE Pipe fabrication process for welded pipes, ex-
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers panded
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials USZ Splash Zone Upper Limit
AUT Automatic Ultrasonic Testing UT Ultrasonic testing
BM Base material UTS Ultimate Tensile Strength
BS British Standard WM Weld Material
C Clad pipe
C-Mn Carbon Manganese WPS Welding Procedure Specification
CRA Corrosion Resistant Alloy YS Yield Stress
CTOD Crack Tip Opening Displacement D 200 Symbols
DFI Design, Fabrication and Installation
DNV Det Norske Veritas 201 Latin characters
DP Dynamic Positioning
DWTT Drop Weight Tear Test A = Cross section area
π 2
EBW Electronic Beam Welded Ai = --- ( D – 2 ⋅ t )
ECA Engineering Criticality Assessment 4
ESD Emergency Shut Down π 2
FLS Fatigue Limit State Ae = --- D
4
FMEA Failure Mode Effect Analysis
HAT Highest Astronomical Tide As = π ( D – t ) ⋅ t Pipe steel cross section area
HAZ Heat Affected Zone D = Nominal outside diameter.
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Study Dmax = Greatest measured inside or outside diameter
HFW High Frequency Welding Dmin = Smallest measured inside or outside diameter
HPIC Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking Di = D-2tnom = Nominal internal diameter
IM Installation Manual E = Young's Modulus
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation D max – D min
J-R curve Plot of resistance to stable crack growth for es- f0 = Ovality, --------------------------------
tablishing crack extension D
KV Charpy value fy = Yield stress to be used in design
KVL Charpy value in pipe longitudinal direction fu = Tensile strength to be used in design
KVT Charpy value in pipe transversal direction g = Gravity acceleration
L Lined pipe h = Height from the referenced sea water level to the
L Load effect pipeline reference point for design pressure
LAT Lowest Astronomic Tide H = Wave height
LBZ Local Brittle Zones Hs = Significant wave height
LRFD Load and Resistance Factor Design Hp = Permanent plastic dent depth
LSZ Splash Zone Lower Limit ID = Nominal inside diameter
LBW Laser Beam Welded M = Moment
MAIP Maximum Allowable Incidental Pressure Mc = Characteristic moment resistance
MAOP Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure N = Axial force in pipe wall ("true" force) (tension is
MDS Material Data Sheet positive)
MIP Maximum Incidental Pressure ni = Number of stress blocks
MPQT Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Test Ni = Number of stress cycles to failure at constant
MPS Manufacturing Procedure Specification amplitude
MSA Manufacturing Survey Arrangement O = Out of roundness, Dmax - Dmin
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers OD = Outside nominal diameter
NDT Non-Destructive Testing pc = Characteristic collapse pressure
P Production
PRE Pitting Resistance Equivalent pd = Design pressure
PWHT Post weld heat treatment pe = External pressure
Q Qualification pel = Elastic collapse pressure
QA Quality Assurance ph = Test pressure (mill test)
QC Quality Control pi = Characteristic internal pressure
QP Quality Plan pinc = Incidental pressure
QRA Quantitative Risk Analysis pinit = Initiation pressure
ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle pld = Local design pressure
RT Radiographic testing pli = Local incidental pressure
SAWH Submerged Arc-welding Helical plt = Local test pressure (system test)
SAWL Submerged Arc-welding Longitudinal pmao = Maximum allowable operating pressure
SC Safety Class pmt = Hydrostatic mill test pressure
SCF Stress Concentration Factor pp = Plastic collapse pressure
SLS Serviceability Limit State ppr = Propagating pressure
SML Seamless Pipe pt = Test pressure
SMTS Specified Minimum Tensile Strength R = Global bending radius of pipe
SMYS Specified Minimum Yield Stress Rm = Tensile strength
SNCF Strain Concentration Factor Rpx = Strength equivalent to a permanent elongation
SRA Structural Reliability Analysis of x % (actual stress)
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Rtx = Strength equivalent to a total elongation of x % γA = Load effect factor for accidental load
(actual stress) γC = Condition load effect factor
S = Effective axial force (Tension is positive) γE = Load effect factor for environmental load
T = Operating temperature γε = Resistance factor, strain resistance
Tmax = Maximum design temperature γF = Load effect factor for functional load
T min = Minimum design temperature γinc = Incidental to design pressure ratio
T0 = Testing temperature γm = Material resistance factor
t1, t2 = Pipe wall thickness, see Section 5C 300 γp = Pressure load effect factor
tcorr = Corrosion allowance γSC = Safety class resistance factor
tfab = Fabrication thickness tolerance κ = Curvature
tmin = Minimum thickness η = Usage factor
tm min = Measured minimum thickness, see Table 6-14, µ = Friction coefficient
Table 6-15 σ = Standard deviation of a variable (e.g. thickness)
t, tnom = Nominal wall thickness of pipe (un-corroded) σe = Equivalent stress, von Mises
W = Section modulus σh = Hoop stress
z = Height from the pipeline part considered to the σl = Longitudinal/axial stress
pipeline reference point for design pressure τlh = Tangential shear stress
D 300 Greek characters D 400 Subscripts
301 Greek Characters
A = Accidental load
α = Thermal expansion coefficient c = characteristic resistance
αA = Anisotropy factor d = Design value
αc = Flow stress parameter, ref. Section 5D 300 E = Environmental load
αfab = Fabrication factor, ref. Section 5D 300, Section e = External
5B 600 el = Elastic
αfat = Allowable damage ratio for fatigue F = Functional load
αgw = Girth weld factor (strain resistance) h = Circumferential direction (hoop direction)
αh = ⎛ ----------
YS -⎞
Minimum strain hardening
i = Internal
⎝ UTS⎠ max l = axial (longitudinal) direction
αU = Material strength factor M = Moment
ε = Strain p = Plastic
εM = Characteristic bending strain resistance s = Steel
εf = Accumulated plastic strain resistance S = SLS
εp = Plastic strain U = ULS
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 2
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
A. General
A 100 Objective
101 The purpose of this section is to present the safety phi-
losophy and corresponding design format applied in this stand-
ard.
A 200 Application
201 This section applies to all pipeline systems which are to
be built in accordance with this standard.
202 This section also provides guidance for extension of this
standard in terms of new criteria etc.
B. Safety Philosophy
B 100 General
101 The integrity of a pipeline system constructed to this
standard is ensured through a safety philosophy integrating Figure 2-1 Safety Philosophy structure
different parts as illustrated in Figure 2-1. B 300 Systematic review
B 200 Safety objective 301 As far as practical, all work associated with the design,
construction and operation of the pipeline system shall be such
201 An overall safety objective shall be established, planned as to ensure that no single failure will lead to life-threatening
and implemented, covering all phases from conceptual devel- situations for any person, or to unacceptable damage to the fa-
opment until abandonment. cilities or the environment.
Guidance note: 302 A systematic review or analysis shall be carried out at all
All companies have some sort of policy regarding human as- phases in order to identify and evaluate the consequences of
pects, environment and financial issues. These are typically on an single failures and series of failures in the pipeline system,
overall level, but they may be followed by more detailed objec- such that necessary remedial measures can be taken. The ex-
tives and requirements in specific areas. These policies should be tent of the review or analysis shall reflect the criticality of the
used as a basis for defining the Safety Objective for a specific pipeline system, the criticality of a planned operation, and pre-
pipeline system. Typical statements can be: vious experience with similar systems or operations.
- The impact on the environment shall be reduced to as far as Guidance note:
reasonably possible; A methodology for such a systematic review is quantitative risk
- No releases will be accepted during operation of the pipeline analysis (QRA). This may provide an estimation of the overall
risk to human health and safety, environment and assets and
system; comprises:
- There shall be no serious accidents or loss of life during the
construction period; - hazard identification,
- assessment of probabilities of failure events,
- The pipeline installation shall not, under any circumstances
- accident developments, and
impose any threat to fishing gear; - consequence and risk assessment.
- Diverless installation and maintenance; etc.
It should be noted that legislation in some countries requires risk
Statements such as those above may have implications for all or analysis to be performed, at least at an overall level to identify
individual phases only. They are typically more relevant for the critical scenarios that might jeopardise the safety and reliability
work execution (i.e. how the Contractor executes his job) and of a pipeline system. Other methodologies for identification of
specific design solutions (e.g. burial or no burial). Having de- potential hazards are Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
fined the Safety Objective, it can be a point of discussion as to and Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP).
whether this is being accomplished in the actual project. It is ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
therefore recommended that the overall Safety Objective be fol-
lowed up by more specific, measurable requirements. 303 Special attention shall be given to sections close to in-
If no policy is available, or if it is difficult to define the safety ob- stallations or shore approaches where there is frequent human
jective, one could also start with a risk assessment. The risk as- activity and thus a greater likelihood and consequence of dam-
sessment could identify all hazards and their consequences, and age to the pipeline. This also includes areas where pipelines are
then enable back-extrapolation to define acceptance criteria and installed parallel to existing pipelines and pipeline crossings.
areas that need to be followed up more closely.
B 400 Safety class methodology
In this standard, the structural failure probability is reflected in
the choice of three safety classes (see B 400). The choice of safe- 401 In this standard, structural safety of the pipeline system
ty class should also include consideration of the expressed safety is ensured by use of a safety class methodology. The pipeline
objective. system is classified into one or more safety classes based on
failure consequences, normally given by the content and loca-
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- tion. For each safety class, a set of partial safety factors is as-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

signed to each limit state. C 300 Location classes

B 500 Quality assurance 301 The pipeline system shall be classified into location
classes as defined in Table 2-2.
501 The safety format within this standard requires that
gross errors (human errors) shall be controlled by requirements Table 2-2 Classification of location
for organisation of the work, competence of persons perform- Location Definition
ing the work, verification of the design, and quality assurance 1 The area where no frequent human activity is antic-
during all relevant phases. ipated along the pipeline route.
502 For the purpose of this standard, it is assumed that the 2 The part of the pipeline/riser in the near platform
owner of a pipeline system has established a quality objective. (manned) area or in areas with frequent human activ-
The owner shall, in both internal and external quality related ity. The extent of location class 2 should be based on
aspects, seek to achieve the quality level of products and serv- appropriate risk analyses. If no such analyses are
ices intended in the quality objective. Further, the owner shall performed a minimum distance of 500 m shall be
provide assurance that intended quality is being, or will be, adopted.
achieved. C 400 Safety classes
503 A quality system shall be applied to assist compliance 401 Pipeline design shall be based on potential failure conse-
with the requirements of this standard. quence. In this standard, this is implicit by the concept of safe-
Guidance note: ty class. The safety class may vary for different phases and
ISO 9000 give guidance on the selection and use of quality sys- locations. The safety classes are defined in Table 2-3.
tems.
Table 2-3 Classification of safety classes
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Safety Definition
class
B 600 Health, safety and environment Low Where failure implies low risk of human injury and mi-
601 The objective of this standard is that the design, materi- nor environmental and economic consequences. This is
the usual classification for installation phase.
als, fabrication, installation, commissioning, operation, repair,
re-qualification, and abandonment of pipeline systems are safe Normal For temporary conditions where failure implies risk of
and conducted with due regard to public safety and the protec- human injury, significant environmental pollution or
very high economic or political consequences. This is
tion of the environment. the usual classification for operation outside the plat-
form area.
High For operating conditions where failure implies high risk
of human injury, significant environmental pollution or
C. Design Format very high economic or political consequences. This is
the usual classification during operation in location class
C 100 General 2.
101 The design format within this standard is based upon a The partial safety factors related to the safety class are given in
limit state and partial safety factor methodology, also called Section 5D 200.
Load and Resistance Factor Design format (LRFD).
402 For normal use, the safety classes in Table 2-4 apply:
C 200 Categorisation of fluids
Table 2-4 Normal classification of safety classes*
201 Fluids to be transported by the pipeline system shall be
categorised according to their hazard potential as given by Ta- Fluid Category Fluid Category
ble 2-1. Phase A, C B, D and E
Location Class Location Class
Table 2-1 Classification of fluids 1 2 1 2
Category Description Temporary1,2 Low Low Low Low
A Typical non-flammable water-based fluids. Operational Low Normal3 Normal High
B Flammable and/or toxic substances which are liq- Note:
uids at ambient temperature and atmospheric pres-
sure conditions. Typical examples would be oil 1) Installation until pre-commissioning (temporary phase) will normally
petroleum products. Methanol is an example of a be classified as safety class Low.
flammable and toxic fluid. 2) For safety classification of temporary phases after commissioning, spe-
C Non-flammable substances which are non-toxic gas- cial consideration shall be made to the consequences of failure, i.e. giv-
ing a higher safety class than Low.
es at ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure
conditions. Typical examples would be nitrogen, 3) Risers during normal operation will normally be classified as safety
carbon dioxide, argon and air. class High.
D Non-toxic, single-phase natural gas. * Other classifications may exist depending on the conditions and criti-
Flammable and/or toxic fluids which are gases at cality of failure the pipeline. For pipelines where some consequences
ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure con- are more severe than normal, i.e. when the table above does not apply,
the selection of a higher safety class shall also consider the implication,
ditions and which are conveyed as gases and/or liq- on the total gained safety. If the total safety increase is marginal, the se-
uids. Typical examples would be hydrogen, natural lection of a higher safety class may not be justified.
gas (not otherwise covered under category D),
ethane, ethylene, liquefied petroleum gas (such as C 500 Partial Safety Factor methodology
propane and butane), natural gas liquids, ammonia,
and chlorine. 501 The fundamental principle of the partial safety factor de-
sign methodology is to verify that factored design loads do not
202 Gases or liquids not specifically identified in Table 2-1 exceed factored design resistance for any of the considered
shall be classified in the category containing substances most failure modes. A factored design load effect is obtained by
similar in hazard potential to those quoted. If the fluid category multiplying a characteristic load effect by a load effect factor.
is not clear, the most hazardous category shall be assumed. A factored resistance is obtained by dividing the characteristic
DET NORSKE VERITAS

resistance by a resistance factor. — it is used for calibration of explicit limit states outside the
502 The level of safety is considered to be satisfactory if the scope of this standard;
design load effect (Ld) does not exceed the design resistance — the method complies with DNV Classification Note no.
(Rd): 30.6 "Structural reliability analysis of marine structures";
and
L d ( L F, L E, L A, γ F, γ A, γ C ) ≤ R d ( R K ( f K ), γ SC, γ m ) (2.1) — the approach is demonstrated to provide adequate safety
for familiar cases, as indicated by this standard.
503 The design load effect is based on, or is a function of, Guidance note:
factored load effects adjusted by the condition specific load ef- In particular, this implies that reliability based limit state design
fect factor, γC, where appropriate. The factored load effects are shall not be used to replace the pressure containment criteria in
combined according to the limit state function for the particu- Section 5.
lar failure mode.
504 The load effect factors, safety class resistance factors
and material resistance factors related to the limit states pre- 602 Suitably competent and qualified personnel shall per-
sented in this standard are calibrated using a reliability-based form the structural reliability analysis, and extension into new
methodology for the different safety classes. areas of application shall be supported by technical verifica-
505 The characteristic values for load effects and resistance tion.
in this standard are usually given as percentile values of the re- 603 As far as possible, target reliability levels shall be cali-
spective probability distributions. They shall be based on reli- brated against identical or similar pipeline designs that are
able data, using recognised statistical techniques. known to have adequate safety on the basis of this standard. If
Guidance note: this is not feasible, the target safety level shall be based on the
The characteristic resistances in this standard do not necessarily failure type and safety class as given in Table 2-5.
reflect either mean values or certain percentile values. The result-
ing design formulas provide design criteria as a totality of model Table 2-5 Acceptable failure probabilities vs. safety classes
uncertainty, bias loads etc. Hence, care shall be taken when re- Limit Probability Bases Safety Classes
calibrating these formulas to ensure this totality. States Low Normal High
SLS Annual per Pipeline 1) 10-2 10-3 10-3
ULS Annual per Pipeline 1)
506 Load combinations and corresponding load effect fac-
tors are given in Section 5D 300. Limit states and correspond- FLS Annual per Pipeline 2) 10-3 10-4 10-5
ing resistance factors are given in Section 5D 200. ALS Annual per Pipeline 3)
1) Or the time period of the temporary phase
C 600 Reliability analysis
2) The failure probability will effectively be governed by the last year in
601 As an alternative to the LRFD format specified and used operation or prior to inspection depending on the adopted inspection
in this standard, a recognised structural reliability analysis philosophy.
(SRA) based design method may be applied provided that: 3) Refers to the overall allowable probability of severe consequences.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 3
DESIGN PREMISES AND DOCUMENTATION
A. General — tie-in operations,

— as-laid survey,
A 100 Objective — span rectification and pipeline protection,
101 The purpose of this section is to identify and provide a — installation of protective and anchoring structures,
basis for definition of relevant field development characteris- — installation of risers,
tics. Further, key issues required for design, construction, op- — as-built survey, and
eration, and re-qualification of pipeline systems are identified. — final testing and preparation for operation.
102 This section also specifies minimum requirements to Operation
documentation for design, manufacture, installation and oper-
ation. 403 Plans for pipeline operation, inspection, maintenance
and repair shall be prepared prior to start of operation.
A 200 Concept development
404 All operational aspects shall be considered when select-
201 Data and description of field development and general ing the pipeline concept.
arrangement of the pipeline system shall be established.
405 The pipeline system operational planning shall as a min-
202 The data and description shall include the following, as imum cover:
applicable:
— organisation and management;
— safety objective; — start-up and shut-down;
— location, inlet and outlet conditions; — operational limitations;
— pipeline system description with general arrangement and — maintenance;
battery limits; — corrosion control, inspection and monitoring;
— functional requirements including field development re-
strictions, e.g., safety barriers and subsea valves; — general inspection; and
— installation, repair and replacement of pipeline elements, — special activities.
valves, actuators and fittings; Abandonment
— project plans and schedule, including planned period of
the year for installation; 406 Pipeline abandonment shall be planned and prepared.
— design life including specification for start of design life, 407 Selection of pipeline concept shall include identification
e.g. final commissioning, installation etc.; of any significant impact on pipeline abandonment.
— data of product to be transported including possible chang-
es during the pipeline system's design life; 408 Pipeline abandonment evaluation shall include the fol-
— transport capacity and pipeline sizing data; lowing aspects:
— attention to possible code breaks in the pipeline system;
— geometrical restrictions such as specifications of constant — environment, especially pollution;
internal diameter, requirement for fittings, valves, flanges — obstruction for ship traffic;
and the use of flexible pipe or risers; — obstruction for fishing activities; and
— pigging requirements such as bend radius, pipe ovality and — corrosion impact on other structures.
distances between various fittings affecting design for pig-
ging applications;
— sand production; and
— second and third party activities. B. System Design Principles
A 300 Execution plan B 100 System integrity
301 An execution plan shall be developed, including the fol- 101 Pipeline systems shall be designed, constructed and op-
lowing topics: erated in such a manner that they:
— general information, including project organisation, scope — fulfil the specified transport capacity,
of work, interfaces, project development phases and pro- — fulfil the defined safety objective and have the required re-
duction phases; sistance against loads during planned operational condi-
— contacts with Purchaser, authorities, third party, engineer- tions, and
ing, verification and construction Contractors; and — have sufficient safety margin against accidental loads or
— legal aspects, e.g. insurance, contracts, area planning. unplanned operational conditions.
A 400 Installation, operation and abandonment 102 The possibility of changes in the type or composition of
401 The design and planning for a pipeline system shall cov- product to be transported during the lifetime of the pipeline
er all development phases including construction, operation system shall be assessed at the design phase.
and abandonment. 103 Any re-qualification deemed necessary due to changes
Installation in the design conditions shall take place in accordance with
provisions set out in Section 11.
402 Detailed plans, drawings and procedures shall be pre-
pared for all installation activities. The following shall as a B 200 Monitoring/inspection during operation
minimum be covered:
201 Parameters which could violate the integrity of a pipe-
— pipeline route survey, line system shall be monitored and evaluated with a frequency
— marine operations, which enables remedial actions to be carried out before the sys-
— pipeline installation, tem is damaged.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Guidance note: ble 3-1, the given pressures shall be used as the incidental pres-
As a minimum the monitoring/inspection frequency should be sure.
such that the pipeline system will not be endangered due to any
realistic degradation/deterioration that may occur between two Table 3-1 Selection of incidental pressures for specific condi-
consecutive inspection intervals. tions
Condition pli
When design pressure is equal to full shut-in pressure pld
202 Instrumentation of the pipeline system may be required System pressure test plt
when visual inspection or simple measurements are not con-
sidered practical or reliable, and available design methods and 307 The pipeline system may be divided into sections with
previous experience are not sufficient for a reliable prediction different design pressures provided that the pressure control
of the performance of the system. system ensures that, for each section, the local design pressure
cannot be exceeded during normal operations and that the
203 The pressure in a pipeline system shall not exceed the maximum incidental pressure cannot be exceeded during inci-
design pressure during normal steady-state operation. dental operation.
308 When the pipeline system is connected to another sys-
B 300 Pressure Control System tem with different pressure definition, the conversion between
301 A pressure control system may be used to prevent the in- the two system definitions shall be made based on the maxi-
ternal pressure at any point in the pipeline system rising to an mum incidental pressure.
excessive level. The pressure control system comprises the
pressure regulating system, pressure safety system and associ-
ated instrumentation and alarm systems.
C. Pipeline Route
302 The purpose of the pressure regulating system is to
maintain the operating pressure within acceptable limits during C 100 Location
normal operation. The set pressure of the pressure regulating 101 The pipeline route shall be selected with due regard to
system shall be such that the local design pressure is not ex- safety of the public and personnel, protection of the environ-
ceeded at any point in the pipeline system. Due account shall ment, and the probability of damage to the pipe or other facil-
be given to the tolerances of the pressure regulating system and ities. Factors to take into consideration shall, at minimum,
its associated instrumentation, see Figure 1-1. include the following:
303 The purpose of the pressure safety system is to protect — ship traffic;
the downstream system during incidental operation, i.e. in the
— fishing activity;
event of failure of the pressure regulating system. The pressure
— offshore installations;
safety system shall operate automatically and with a set pres-
— existing pipelines and cables;
sure such that there is a low probability for the internal pres-
— unstable seabed;
sure at any point in the pipeline system to exceed the local
— subsidence;
incidental pressure.
— uneven seabed;
Guidance note: — turbidity flows;
An annual probability for the pressure to exceed the maximum — seismic activity;
pressure of less than 10-4 is usually appropriate. — obstructions;
— dumping areas for waste, ammunition etc.;
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- — mining activities;
— military exercise areas;
304 The set pressure of the pressure safety system, the max- — archaeological sites;
imum allowable incidental pressure, shall be such that the local — exposure to environmental damage; and
incidental pressure is not exceeded at any point in the pipeline — oyster beds.
system. Due account shall be given to the tolerances of the
pressure safety system. Hence, the maximum allowable inci- 102 Expected future marine operations and anticipated de-
dental pressure is equal to the incidental pressure minus the velopments in the vicinity of the pipeline shall be considered
pressure safety system operating tolerance. when selecting the pipeline route.
305 The ratio between the incidental pressure and the design C 200 Route survey
pressure, γinc, is normally 1.10 which also is the maximum al-
lowed ratio. The local incidental pressure can be expressed as: 201 A survey shall be carried out along the planned pipeline
route to provide sufficient data for design and installation re-
lated activities.
p li = p inc + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h = p d ⋅ γ inc + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h 202 The survey corridor shall have sufficient width to define
a pipeline corridor which will ensure safe installation and op-
where eration of the pipeline.
203 The required survey accuracy may vary along the pro-
h is the height difference between the point and the ref- posed route. Obstructions, highly varied seabed topography, or
erence point special sub-surface conditions may dictate more detailed in-
ρcont is the density of the content of the pipeline vestigations.
204 An investigation to identify possible conflicts with exist-
Provided that the requirements to the pressure safety system ing and planned installations and possible wrecks and obstruc-
are satisfied, the incidental pressure to design pressure ratio, tions shall be performed. Examples of such installations
γinc, may be taken as less than 1.10, but minimum 1.05 include other submarine pipelines, and power and communica-
306 A pressure safety system is not necessary if the pressure tion cables.
source to the pipeline cannot deliver a pressure in excess of the 205 The results of the survey shall be presented on accurate
maximum incidental pressure. For the conditions given in Ta- route maps, showing the location of the pipeline and related fa-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

cilities together with seabed properties and anomalies. — problems with respect to pipeline crossing,
206 Special route surveys may be required at landfalls to de- — problems with the settlement of pipeline system and/or the
termine: protection structure at the valve/tee locations,
— possibilities of mud slides or liquefaction as the result of
— environmental conditions caused by adjacent coastal fea- repeated loading, and
tures; — implications for external corrosion.
— location of the landfall to facilitate installation; and
— location to minimise environmental impact. 307 Pipeline components (e.g. valves, tees) in particular
should not be located on the curved route sections of the pipe-
207 All topographical features which may influence the sta- line.
bility and installation of the pipeline shall be covered by the
route survey, including but not limited to:
— obstructions in the form of rock outcrops, large boulders, D. Environmental Conditions
pock marks, etc., that could necessitate levelling or remov-
al operations to be carried out prior to pipeline installation; D 100 General
and 101 Effects of environmental phenomena relevant for the
— topographical features that contain potentially unstable particular location and operation in question shall be taken into
slopes, sand waves, deep valleys and erosion in the form account. The principles and methods described in Classifica-
of scour patterns or material deposits. tion Note No. 30.5 "Environmental Conditions and Environ-
mental Loads" may be used as a basis for establishing the
C 300 Seabed properties environmental conditions.
301 Geotechnical properties necessary for evaluating the ef- 102 Environmental phenomena that might impair proper
fects of relevant loading conditions shall be determined for the functioning of the system or cause a reduction of the reliability
sea-bed deposits, including possible unstable deposits in the and safety of the system shall be considered, including:
vicinity of the pipeline. For guidance on soil investigation for
pipelines, reference is made to Classification Note No. 30.4 — wind,
"Foundations". — tide,
302 Geotechnical properties may be obtained from generally — waves,
available geological information, results from seismic surveys, — internal waves and other effects due to differences in water
sea bottom topographical surveys, and in-situ and laboratory density,
tests. Supplementary information may be obtained from visual — current,
surveys or special tests, as e.g. pipe penetration tests. — ice,
— earthquake,
303 Soil parameters of main importance for the pipeline re- — soil conditions,
sponse are: — temperature, and
— shear strength parameters (intact and remoulded und- — marine growth (fouling).
rained shear strength for clay, and angle of friction for D 200 Collection of environmental data
sands); and
— relevant deformation moduli. 201 The environmental data shall be representative for the
geographical areas in which the pipeline system is to be in-
These parameters should preferably be determined from ade- stalled. If sufficient data are not available for the geographical
quate laboratory tests or from interpretation of in-situ tests. In location in question, conservative estimates based on data from
addition, classification and index tests should be considered, other relevant locations may be used.
such as 202 For the assessment of environmental conditions along
— unit weight, the pipeline route, the pipeline may be divided into a number
— water content, of sections, each of which is characterised by a given water
— liquid and plastic limit, depth, bottom topography and other factors affecting the envi-
— grain size distribution, ronmental conditions.
— carbonate content, and 203 Environmental parameters shall be described using
— other relevant tests. characteristic values based on statistical data or long-term ob-
servations.
304 It is primarily the characteristics of the upper few centi-
metres of soil that determine the response of the pipeline rest- 204 Statistical data shall be utilised to describe environmen-
ing on the seabed. The determination of soil parameters for tal parameters of a random nature (e.g. wind, waves). The pa-
these very shallow soils may be relatively more uncertain than rameters shall be derived in a statistically valid manner using
for deeper soils. Also the variations of the top soil between soil recognised methods.
testing locations may add to the uncertainty. Therefore, soil pa- 205 The effect of statistical uncertainty due to the amount
rameters used in the design shall be defined with upper and and accuracy of data shall be assessed and, if significant, shall
lower limits. The characteristic value of a soil parameter used be included in the evaluation of the characteristic load effect.
in the design shall be taken as the upper or lower value depend-
ing on which is more critical for the limit state in question. D 300 Wind
305 In areas where the sea-bed material is subject to erosion, 301 Wind effects shall be considered in the design of risers,
special studies of the current and wave conditions near the bot- including the possibility of wind induced vibrations of exposed
tom including boundary layer effects may be required for the free spans. Consideration shall be given to wind actions occur-
on-bottom stability calculations of pipelines and the assess- ring in the construction phase
ment of pipeline spans. 302 For a riser adjacent to other structural parts, possible ef-
306 Special investigation of the sea-bed material may be re- fects due to disturbance of the flow field shall be considered
quired to evaluate specific problems, as for example: when determining the wind actions. Such effects may cause an
increased or reduced wind speed, or a dynamic excitation by
— problems with respect to excavation and burial operations; vortices being shed from adjacent structural parts.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

D 400 Tide sign temperatures should preferably be based upon an

observation period of several years.
401 Tide effects shall be considered when the water depth is
a significant parameter, e.g. for the establishment of wave ac- 802 Monitoring of temperature may be required during con-
tions, planning of the pipe lay operation particularly near shore struction, installation and commissioning phases if the effect
approaches/landfalls, determination of maximum or minimum of temperature or temperature variations has a significant im-
water pressure, etc. pact on the safety of the pipeline system.
402 The assumed maximum tide shall include both astro- D 900 Marine growth
nomic tide and storm surge. Minimum tide estimates should be
based upon the astronomic tide and possible negative storm 901 The effect of marine growth on pipeline systems shall be
surge. considered, taking into account both biological and other envi-
ronmental phenomena relevant for the location.
D 500 Waves
902 The estimation of hydrodynamic loads on pipelines sub-
501 The wave data to be used in the design of risers are in ject to accumulated marine growth shall account for the in-
principle the same as the wave data used in the design of the crease in effective diameter and surface roughness.
offshore structure supporting the riser.
502 Direct and indirect wave effects shall be taken into con-
sideration for both riser and pipeline.
E. External and Internal Pipe Condition
Guidance note:
Examples of direct wave effects include the wave action on a ris- E 100 External operational conditions
er, and on a pipeline during installation or when resting on the sea
bottom. Examples of indirect wave effects include the imposed 101 For the selection and detailed design of external corro-
deformations on a riser via the riser supports due to wave induced sion control, the following conditions relating to the environ-
platform displacements, and the movements of a pipeline during ment shall be defined, in addition to those mentioned in D.102
the laying operation caused by the lay vessel motions. above:
— exposure conditions, e.g. burial, rock dumping, etc.; and
503 The wave theory used shall be capable of describing the — sea water and sediment resistivity.
wave kinematics at the particular water depth in question.
102 Other conditions affecting external corrosion which
504 Consideration shall be given to wave refraction and shall be defined are:
shoaling, shielding, and reflecting effects.
505 Where the riser or pipeline is positioned adjacent to oth- — maximum and average operating temperature profile
er structural parts, possible effects due to disturbance of the along the pipeline and through the pipe wall thickness;
flow field shall be considered when determining the wave ac- — pipeline fabrication and installation procedures;
tions. Such effects may cause an increased or reduced velocity, — requirements for mechanical protection, submerged
or dynamic excitation by vortices being shed from the adjacent weight and thermal insulation during operation;
structural parts. — design life.
506 Where appropriate, consideration should be given to
wave direction and short crestedness. E 200 Internal installation conditions
201 A description of the internal pipe conditions during stor-
D 600 Current age, construction, installation, pressure testing and commis-
601 The effect of current shall be taken into consideration for sioning shall be prepared. The duration of exposure to sea
both riser and pipeline. water or humid air, and the need for using inhibitors or other
measures to control corrosion shall be considered.
602 Current velocities shall include contributions from tidal
current, wind induced current, storm surge current, density in- E 300 Internal operational conditions
duced current, and other possible current phenomena. For
near-shore regions, long-shore current due to wave breaking 301 In order to assess the need for internal corrosion control,
shall be considered. including corrosion allowance and provision for inspection
and monitoring, the following conditions shall be defined:
603 For pipelines during installation and for in-place risers,
the variations in current velocity magnitude and direction as a — maximum and average operating temperature/pressure
function of water depth shall be considered. For risers, the cur- profile along the pipeline, and expected variations during
rent velocity distribution should be the same as the one used in the design life;
the design of the offshore structure supporting the riser. — flow velocity and flow regime;
D 700 Ice — fluid composition (initial and anticipated variations during
the design life) with emphasis on potentially corrosive
701 For areas where ice may develop or drift, consideration components (e.g. hydrogen sulphide, carbon dioxide, wa-
shall be given to possible effects, including: ter content and expected content of dissolved salts in pro-
duced fluids, residual oxygen and active chlorine in sea
— ice forces on the pipeline system, water);
— impacts from drifting ice, — chemical additions and provisions for periodic cleaning;
— sea-bed scouring, and — provision for inspection of corrosion damage and expected
— ice problems during construction and installation, in- capabilities of inspection tools (i.e. detection limits and
creased wave loading due to increased diameter. sizing capabilities for relevant forms of corrosion dam-
age); and
D 800 Air and sea temperatures
— the possibility of erosion by any solid particles in the fluid
801 Air and sea temperature statistics shall be provided giv- shall be considered. Reference is made to RP O501 "Ero-
ing representative design values. Minimum and maximum de- sive Wear in Piping Systems", 1996.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

F. Documentation — material take off/data sheets.
F 100 General Installation

101 This section specifies the requirements for documenta- 206 The following documentation shall be prepared:
tion of pipeline design, manufacturing / fabrication, installa-
tion / commissioning and operation. — Failure Mode Effect Analysis (FMEA) and HAZOP stud-
ies;
102 All documentation requirements shall be reflected in a — installation and testing specifications and drawings;
document register. The documentation shall cover design, — Installation Manuals (IM);
manufacturing, fabrication, installation and commissioning As — welding procedure specifications/qualification;
a minimum, the register shall reflect activities from the start of — records;
design to start-up of the pipeline system.
— operational procedures; and
103 The documentation shall be submitted to the relevant — contingency procedures.
parties for acceptance or information as agreed.
F 300 Linepipe and pipeline component manufacturing
F 200 Conceptual and detail engineering
301 The documentation to be submitted for review prior to
Structural start or during start-up of manufacturing shall include, but not
201 A design basis for a pipeline system shall be established, be limited to:
including, but not limited to:
— Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS);
— all items listed in A.202; — manufacturing procedures, including test requirements
— topographical and bathymetrical conditions along the in- and acceptance criteria, repairs, personnel qualification
tended pipeline route; records, etc.;
— geotechnical conditions; — material specifications;
— environmental conditions; — Quality Plans;
— operational conditions such as pressure, temperature, fluid — Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) /Welding Pro-
components, flow rate, etc.; cedure Qualification Records (WPQR);
— principles for strength and in-place analysis, and — NDT procedures;
— corrosion control philosophy. — Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Test (MPQT) re-
sults; and
202 The design shall be adequately documented to enable — Manufacturer's/fabricator's quality system manual.
second and/or third party verification. As a minimum, the fol-
lowing items shall be addressed: 302 The as built documentation to be submitted after manu-
facturing shall include but not be limited to:
— pipeline routing;
— physical and chemical characteristics of fluid; — manufacturing procedures, including test requirements
— materials selection (linepipe and pipeline components); and acceptance criteria, repairs, personnel qualification
— temperature/pressure profile and pipeline expansion; records, etc.;
— strength analyses for riser and riser supports; — material certificates;
— strength and in-place stability analyses for pipeline; — production test records (visual, NDT, tests on samples, di-
— risk analysis as applicable; mensional, heat treatment, etc.);
— corrosion control (internal and external); and — hydrostatic testing report;
— installation and commissioning. — complete statistics of chemical composition, mechanical
203 Drawings shall be provided for the fabrication and in- properties and dimensions for the quantity delivered;
stallation of the pipeline system, including but not limited to: — weld log records.
— pipeline route drawings including information on, e.g. sea- F 400 Corrosion control system and weight coating
bed properties and topology, existing and future platforms, manufacturing
pipelines/cables, subsea well heads, ship lanes, etc.; 401 The documentation to be submitted for review prior to
— detailed pipeline crossing drawings; start of manufacturing shall include:
— platform layout drawings with risers, riser protection sys-
tems, loading zones, boat landing areas, rescue areas, etc. — manufacturing procedures, including inspection/test re-
as applicable; quirements and acceptance criteria, repairs, documenta-
— spool fabrication drawing; tion, etc.;
— pipeline protection drawings; and — documentation of materials and concrete mix design;
— riser and riser clamp fabrication drawings. — Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Tests results;
— quality plan with referenced procedures for inspection,
Linepipe and pipeline components testing and calibrations; and
204 The following documentation shall be prepared: — outline drawing of anodes.
— material manufacturing specifications, and 402 The as built documentation to be submitted after manu-
— material take off/data sheets. facturing shall include, but not be limited to:
Corrosion control systems and weight coating — manufacturing procedures, including test requirements
205 The following documentation shall be prepared, as ap- and acceptance criteria, repairs, personnel qualification
plicable: records, etc.;
— material certificates;
— cathodic protection design report, — production test records;
— anode manufacturing and installation specifications, — complete statistics of coating dimensions, weight and neg-
— coating manufacturing specifications, ative buoyancy for the each joint delivered;
— field joint coating specification(s), — repair log; and
— corrosion monitoring system specification, and — electrical resistance test log.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

F 500 Installation and commissioning — drawings and photos of special components;

501 The documentation to be submitted for review prior to — installation resume giving a summary description of the
start of installation shall include but not be limited to: installation history, reference to specifications, drawings
etc., discussion of problem areas, deviations from specifi-
— installation procedures, including acceptance criteria, test cations and drawings, of importance for the operational
certificates for equipment, qualification records for per- phase;
sonnel (e.g. welding, coating), etc.; — as-installed route drawings;
— trenching specification; — identification of waivers and deviations from the govern-
— intervention procedure; ing technical requirements; and
— commissioning procedure; — identification of areas deemed to require special attention
— survey procedure; during normal operation and maintenance of the pipeline
— procedure for installation of protective and anchoring system.
structures; and
— procedure for installation of risers and spools. F 700 Operation
701 In order to carry out the periodical surveys, the mini-
502 The as built documentation to be submitted after instal- mum documentation shall include:
lation and commissioning shall include, but not be limited to:
— personnel responsible for the operation of pipeline system;
— records; — history of pipeline system operation with reference to
— survey reports; events which may have significance to design and safety;
— intervention reports; and — installation condition data as necessary for understanding
— commissioning reports. pipeline system design and configuration, e.g. previous
survey reports, as-laid / as-built installation drawings and
F 600 DFI Résumé test reports;
601 A DFI Résumé shall be prepared to provide information — physical and chemical characteristics of transported media
for operation of the pipeline system and for preparation of and sand detection facilities (if any);
plans for periodic inspection. The DFI Résumé shall contain — inspection and maintenance schedules and their records;
all documentation required for normal operation, ROV surveys — inspection procedure and results covering the inspection
and maintenance and provide references to the documentation aspects described in Section 10, including supporting
needed for any repair, modification or re-qualification of the records such as diver survey reports and video films.
pipeline system.
702 In case of mechanical damage or other abnormalities
602 Documentation referred to in the DFI Résumé shall be that might impair the safety, reliability, strength and stability
kept for the lifetime of the pipeline system and shall be easily of the pipeline system, the following documentation shall, as a
retrievable at any time. minimum, be prepared prior to start-up of the pipeline:
603 As a minimum, the DFI Résumé shall contain the fol-
lowing: — description of the damage to the pipeline, its systems or
components with due reference to location, type, extent of
— brief description of the pipeline system; damage and temporary measures, if any;
— design basis including design life, conditions along the — plans and full particulars of repairs, modifications and re-
pipeline route, environmental and geotechnical condi- placements, including contingency measures; and
tions, pressure, flow rate, design temperature, design pres- — further documentation with respect to particular repair,
sure, incidental pressure, corrosion allowance, fluid modification and replacement, as agreed upon in line with
composition, etc; those for the construction or installation phase.
— relevant design assumptions and conditions including ap-
plicable limitations; F 800 Filing of documentation
— any special requirements affecting safety or reliability 801 Maintenance of complete files of all relevant documen-
found during design, fabrication or installation phases; tation during the life of the pipeline system is the responsibility
— design resume including reference to and description of of the owner.
analyses from the design phase, evaluation of critical or
problem areas, highly utilised and critical areas of the sys- 802 The engineering documentation shall be filed by the
tem and highlighting points that require special attention Owner or by the engineering Contractor for a minimum of 10
during subsequent phases; years. Design basis and key data for the pipeline system shall
— reference to accepted calculations and other documents by filed for the lifetime of the system. This includes documen-
verifying compliance with governing technical require- tation from design to start-up and also documentation from
ments for all temporary and permanent phases; possible major repair or re-construction of the pipeline system.
— fabrication resume giving a summary description of the 803 Files to be kept from the operational and maintenance
manufacturing/fabrication history, reference to specifica- phases of the pipeline system shall, as a minimum, include fi-
tions, drawings etc., discussion of problem areas, devia- nal in-service inspection reports from start-up, periodical and
tions from specifications and drawings, of importance for special inspections, condition monitoring records, and final re-
the operational phase; ports of maintenance and repair, see Section 10.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 4
LOADS
A. General — loads induced by frequent pigging operations.
A 100 Objective 104 The weight shall include weight of pipe, buoyancy, con-
tents, coating, anodes, marine growth and all attachments to
101 This section defines the load conditions and characteris- the pipe.
tic load effects to be used in the design of pipeline systems, for
both the construction and operational phase. 105 The soil pressure acting on buried pipelines shall be tak-
102 The loads are classified into different load categories. en into account if significant.
The aim of the load classification is to relate the load effect to 106 End cap forces due to pressure shall be considered, as
the different uncertainties and occurrences. well as any transient pressure effects during normal operation
Guidance note: (e.g. due to closure of valves).
The load classification is closely linked with the adopted LRFD 107 Fluctuations in temperature shall be taken into account
format. An environmental load classification is more conserva- when checking fatigue strength.
tive than a functional load classification, due to the higher load
factor. This is in contradiction with normally applied ASD for- 108 Pre-stressing, such as permanent curvature or a perma-
mats. nent elongation introduced during installation, shall be taken
into account if the capacity to carry other loads is affected by
the pre-stressing. Pretension forces induced by bolts in flanges,
connectors and riser supports and other permanent attach-
A 200 Application ments, shall be classified as functional loads.
201 This section describes the loads to be applied in the
adopted LRFD criteria. B 200 Characteristic load effects
201 The characteristic functional load effect should be de-
A 300 Loads fined as the most probable maximum value in considered time
301 Loads shall be classified as follows: period.
— functional loads; 202 In cases where external pressure increases the capacity,
— environmental loads; the external pressure shall not be taken as higher than the water
— construction loads, subdivided into functional and envi- pressure at the considered location corresponding to low tide.
ronmental; and 203 In cases where the external pressure decreases the ca-
— accidental loads. pacity, the external pressure shall not be taken as less than the
water pressure at the considered location corresponding to
302 Simplified methods or analyses may be used to calculate high tide.
the load effects provided that they are conservative. Model
tests may be used in combination with, or instead of, theoreti- 204 Design pressure and maximum or minimum design tem-
cal calculations. In cases where theoretical methods are inade- perature (whichever is more conservative) shall be used in all
quate, model or full-scale tests may be required. calculations for operational condition, except for the following
situations when normal operating pressure and normal operat-
ing temperature may be used:
B. Functional Loads — fatigue analyses, and

— environmental load dominated situations.
B 100 General
Guidance note:
101 Loads arising from the physical existence of the pipeline For pressure, the local design pressure shall be used except for
system and its intended use shall be classified as functional when normal operating pressure is referred to, when the benefi-
loads. cial effect of the steady flow pressure profile should be used.
102 All functional loads which are essential for ensuring the Regarding temperature, the "local" max (min) design tempera-
integrity of the pipeline system, during both the construction ture, i.e. the temperature profile corresponding to maximum
and the operational phase, shall be considered. (minimum) design temperature based on conservative insulation
values, shall be used. The corresponding temperature profile for
103 Effects from the following phenomena are the minimum normal operating temperature should be used when this is re-
to be considered when establishing functional loads: ferred to.
— weight; ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
— external hydrostatic pressure;
— temperature of contents;
— reactions from components (flanges, clamps etc.);
— cover (e.g. soil, rock, mattresses); C. Environmental Loads
— internal pressure during normal operation;
— reaction from sea floor (friction and rotational stiffness); C 100 General
— pre-stressing;
— permanent deformation of supporting structure; 101 For calculation of characteristic environmental loads,
— permanent deformations due to subsidence of ground, both reference is made to the principles given in Classification Note
vertical and horizontal; No. 30.5, "Environmental Conditions and Environmental
— possible loads due to ice bulb growth around buried pipe- Loads".
lines near fixed points (in-line valves/tees, fixed plants 102 Environmental loads are defined as those loads on a
etc.), caused by cooling of the contained gas/liquid; and pipeline system which are caused by the surrounding environ-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ment, and that are not otherwise classified as functional or ac- Guidance note:
cidental loads. Maximum wave load effects may not always be experienced dur-
ing the passing of the design wave. The maximum wave loads
103 Trawl gear loads shall be classified in accordance with may be due to waves of a particular length, period or steepness.
the requirements in F below.
The initial response to impulsive wave slam or slap usually oc-
C 200 Wind loads curs before the exposed part of the pipeline system is significant-
ly immersed. Therefore, other fluid loading on the system need
201 Wind loads shall be determined based on available wind not normally be applied with the impulsive load. However, due
data using recognised theoretical principles. Alternatively, di- to structural continuity of the riser, global wave loading on other
rect application of data from adequate tests may be used. parts of the system must be considered in addition to the direct
wave loading.
202 The possibility of vibrations and instability due to wind Wave slam occurs when an approximately horizontal member is
induced cyclic loads shall be considered (e.g. vortex shed- engulfed by a rising water surface as a wave passes. The highest
ding). slamming forces occur for members at mean water level and the
slam force directions are close to the vertical.
C 300 Hydrodynamic loads Wave slap is associated with breaking waves and can affect
301 Hydrodynamic loads are defined as flow-induced loads members at any inclination, but in the plane perpendicular to the
caused by the relative motion between the pipe and the sur- wave direction. The highest forces occur on members above
rounding water. When determining the hydrodynamic loads, mean water level.
the relative liquid particle velocities and accelerations used in Both slam and slap loads are applied impulsively (over a short in-
the calculations shall be established, taking into account constant of time) and the dynamic response of the pipeline system
tributions from waves, current and pipe motions if significant. shall be considered.
302 The following hydrodynamic loads shall be considered, ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
but not limited to:
409 Parts of the pipeline system, located above the normal
— drag and lift forces which are in phase with the absolute or wave impact zone, may be exposed to wave loading due to
relative water particle velocity, wave run-up. Loads due to this effect shall be considered if rel-
— inertia forces which are in phase with the absolute or rela- evant.
tive water particle acceleration, C 500 Ice loads
— flow-induced cyclic loads due to vortex shedding and oth-
er instability phenomena, 501 In areas where ice may develop or drift, the possibility
— impact loads due to wave slamming and slapping, and of ice loads on the pipeline system shall be considered. Such
— buoyancy variations due to wave action. loads may partly be due to ice frozen on the pipeline system it-
self, and partly due to floating ice. For shore approaches and
C 400 Wave and current loads areas of shallow water, the possibility of ice scouring and im-
pacts from drifting ice shall be considered.
401 Wave-and current induced loads acting on a submerged
pipe section shall be calculated according to recognised meth- 502 In case of ice frozen to above-water parts of the system,
ods. (e.g. due to sea spray) the following forces shall be considered:
402 Data from model testing or acknowledged industry prac- — weight of the ice,
tice may be used in the determination of the relevant hydrody- — impact forces due to thaw of the ice,
namic coefficients. — forces due to expansion of the ice, and
403 The current-induced drag and lift forces on risers and — increased wind and wave forces due to increased exposed
pipelines shall be determined and combined with the wave-in- area.
duced forces using recognised theories for wave- current inter- 503 Forces from floating ice shall be calculated according to
action. A vector combination of the current and wave-induced recognised theory. Due attention shall be paid to the mechani-
water particle velocities may be used. If available, however, cal properties of the ice, contact area, shape of structure, direc-
calculation of the total particle velocities and accelerations tion of ice movements, etc. The oscillating nature of the ice
based upon more exact theories on wave-current interaction is forces (built-up of lateral force and fracture of moving ice)
preferable. shall be taken into account in the structural analysis. When
404 If the riser is built up of a number of closely spaced forces due to lateral ice motion will govern structural dimen-
pipes, then interaction and solidification effects shall be taken sions, model testing of the ice-structure interaction may be re-
into account when determining the mass and drag coefficients quired.
for each individual pipe or for the whole bundle of pipes. If
sufficient data is not available, large-scale model tests may be C 600 Characteristic load effects
required. 601 For each load and design condition the most unfavoura-
405 For pipelines on or close to a fixed boundary (e.g. pipe- ble relevant combination, position and direction of simultane-
line spans) or in the free stream (e.g. risers), lift forces perpen- ously acting loads shall be used in documenting the integrity of
dicular to the axis of the pipe and perpendicular to the velocity the complete pipeline system.
vector shall be taken into account. 602 The characteristic environmental load during installa-
406 Possible influence of adjacent structural parts shall be tion of the pipeline system shall be taken as the most probable
taken into account when determining the wave and current largest value in a given sea-state for the considered period de-
loads. The increased accelerations and flow velocities in the fined by (Hs,Tp) and appropriate current and wind conditions.
flow around a cylinder, e.g. jacket leg/member or columns, can The characteristic load effect is defined as the most probable
lead to additional forces on the risers and riser supports. largest load effect, (i.e. from wave, current and wind) LE, giv-
en by:
407 In connection with vortex shedding-induced transverse
1
vibrations, the increase in drag coefficient shall be taken into F ( L E ) = 1 – ---- (4.1)
account. N
408 The effect of possible wave and current loading on a ris- where:
er system in the air gap zone shall be included. F(LE) is the probability distribution function of LE
DET NORSKE VERITAS

N is the number of load effect cycles in a sea-state of a duration — stacking of pipes;

not less than 3 hours. — handling of pipe and pipe sections, e.g. lifting of pipe, pipe
Guidance note: joints, pipe strings and pipe spools, and reeling of pipe
strings;
The given sea state for the considered period may be interpreted — pull-in at landfalls, tie-ins, trenching etc.;
as the sea state for the relevant location and installation period.
Normal requirement is that the length of the period shall be suf- — pressure testing; and
ficiently long in order to include possible delays. The installation — commissioning activities, e.g. increase in pressure differ-
period shall not exceed this time period. ential due to vacuum drying.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- 107 Operating limit conditions shall be established relevant
for the construction activity under consideration, see Section
603 The characteristic combined environmental load effect 9D 400.
for operational conditions, shall be taken as a value having a
10-2 probability of exceedance in a period of one year. When 108 Typical construction loads for pre-installed risers, riser
the correlation among the different load components (i.e. wind, supports/guides and J-tubes on jackets and similar installations
wave, current or ice) are unknown, the load combinations (si- are:
multaneously acting loads) in Table 4-1 apply. — wind-induced forces, in particular wind-induced vortex
shedding, on parts which are designed to be submerged af-
Table 4-1 Combinations of characteristic environmental loads ter installation of the load-bearing structure;
in terms of annual exceedance probability
— deflections/forces generated during load-out of the load-
Wind Waves Current Ice Earth quake bearing structure;
10-2 10-2 10-1 — transportation forces due to barge movements;
10-1 10-1 10-2 — launch forces due to deflection and hydrodynamic loads
10 -1 10 -1 10-1 10-2 (drag, slam and slap) on the structure;
10-2 — deflections/forces generated during installation of load-
bearing structure;
604 For the on-bottom pipeline in temporary conditions the — inertia loads on the riser supports/guides due to pile driv-
characteristic combined environmental load effect should be ing;
taken as follows: — re-distribution of support forces when possible temporary
riser supports are removed and the riser turned into the fi-
— for a time period less than 3 days, the characteristic load nal position;
effects may be based on reliable weather forecasts, and — cold springing of the risers (elastic pre-deformations);
— for the on-bottom pipe in temporary conditions, a 10 year — tie-in forces generated when the riser is connected to the
return period value for the considered time period shall be tie-in spool/pipeline; and
applied. The relevant time period is not to be taken less — dynamic loads from pre-commissioning activities, e.g.
than a season (3 months). If the joint distribution for envi- flooding and de-watering with pigs.
ronmental loads is unknown, the combined characteristic
load may be taken from a table similar to that for opera- 109 The load combinations to be considered shall be selected
tion. to reflect the most severe load combinations likely to be en-
countered during the construction phase under consideration.
Guidance note:
"Similar to that for operation" implies, e.g. '10 year wave + 1 year
current' or '1 year wave + 10 year current'.
E. Accidental Loads
E 100 General
101 Loads which are imposed on a pipeline system under ab-
normal and unplanned conditions shall be classified as acci-
D. Construction Loads dental loads.
D 100 General 102 The main criteria for classifying a load as accidental is
the probability of occurrence in line with Section 5D 1200.
101 Loads which arise as a result of the construction of the 103 Typical accidental loads can be caused by:
pipeline system, comprising installation, pressure testing,
commissioning, maintenance and repair, shall be classified — vessel impact or other drifting items (collision, grounding,
into functional and environmental loads. sinking);
102 All significant loads acting on pipe joints or pipe sec- — dropped objects;
tions during transport, fabrication, installation, maintenance — mud slides;
and repair activities shall be considered. — explosion;
— fire and heat flux;
103 Functional Loads shall consider forces generated due to — operational malfunction; and
imposed tension during pipeline installation, maintenance and — dragging anchors.
repair.
104 Environmental loads shall consider forces induced on 104 Size and frequency of accidental loads, for a specific
the pipeline due to wind, waves and current, including deflec- pipeline system, may be defined through risk analyses.
tions and dynamic loads due to vessel movement.
105 Accidental loads shall consider inertia forces due to sud-
den waterfilling, excessive deformation in overbend and sag- F. Other loads
bend, and forces due to operation errors or failures in
equipment that could cause or aggravate critical conditions, F 100 Trawling loads
see Section 9A 300. 101 For calculation of characteristic trawling loads, refer-
106 Other loads to be considered are: ence is made to the principles given in the Guideline 13: "In-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

terference between Trawl Gear and Pipelines". a) Trawl impact, i.e. the initial impact from the trawl board
102 The requirement for designing pipelines for trawling or beam which may cause local dents on the pipe or dam-
loads shall be determined based upon trawling frequency stud- age to the coating. This should be classified as an environ-
ies and assessment of the potential damage due to trawling, in mental load.
order to ensure that the integrity of the pipeline is not compro- b) Over-trawling, often referred to as pull-over, i.e. the sec-
mised. ond phase caused by the wire and trawl board or beam slid-
103 Trawling loads may be imposed either by trawl boards ing over the pipe. This will usually give a more global
or trawl beams depending on what is the preferred fishing tool response of the pipeline. This should be classified as an
in the area. environmental load.
104 Fishing gear and hence trawl loads may vary significant- c) Hooking, i.e. the trawl board is stuck under the pipe and in
ly, not only between pipeline systems, but also along a pipeline extreme cases, forces as large as the breaking strength of
system. Trawl loads will depend on the type, mass, velocity, the trawl wire are applied to the pipeline. This should be
warp line (line stiffness, catenary effects, and line length) and classified as an accidental load.
size of the trawl board or beam. Variations in pipeline support-
ing conditions along the pipeline route will also have varying 107 The impact energy shall be determined considering, as a
response to trawling gear. minimum:
105 The following trawling data shall be determined:
— the trawl board or trawl beam mass and velocity, and
— the maximum trawling equipment size normally used in — the effective added mass and velocity.
the area;
— future trends (new types, (gear) mass, trawling velocity, F 200 Earthquake
shape); and
— the frequency of the trawling activity in the area. 201 Load effects imposed by earth quake, either directly or
indirectly, shall be classified into accidental or environmental
106 The trawling load effects can be divided in accordance loads, depending on the probability of earthquake occurrence
with the three crossing phases: in line with accidental loads in Section 5D 1200.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 5
DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General 102 Crossing pipelines should be kept separated by a mini-

mum vertical distance of 0.3 m.
A 100 Objective 103 Pipelines shall be protected against unacceptable dam-
101 The purpose of this section is to provide design and ac- age caused by e.g. dropped objects, fishing gear, ships, anchor-
ceptance criteria for the possible modes of structural failure in ing etc., and the location of pipelines inside the loading zones
pipeline systems. of platforms should be avoided. Protection may be achieved by
one or a combination of the following means:
A 200 Application
201 This standard includes no limitations on water depth. — concrete coating,
However, when this standard is applied in deep water where — burial,
experience is limited, special consideration shall be given to: — cover (e.g. sand, gravel, mattress), and
— other mechanical protection.
— other failure mechanisms,
— validity of parameter range, 104 Relative settlement between the protective structure and
— other characteristic loads and load combinations, and the pipeline system shall be properly assessed in the design of
— dynamic effects. protective structures, and shall cover the full design life of the
pipeline system. Adequate clearance between the pipeline
202 This standard does not specify any explicit limitations components and the members of the protective structure shall
with respect to elastic displacements or vibrations, provided be provided to avoid fouling.
that the effects of large displacements and dynamic behaviour,
including fatigue effect of vibrations, operational constraints 105 Pipelines in C-Mn steel for potentially corrosive fluids
and ratcheting, are taken into account in the strength analyses. of categories B, D and E should be designed for inspection pig-
ging. In cases where the pipeline design does not allow inspec-
203 Special considerations shall be made for parts of the tion pigging, an analysis shall be carried out in accordance
pipeline system which extend onshore. These shall typically with recognised procedures to document that the risk of failure
include aspects such as: (i.e. the probability of failure multiplied by the consequences
— population density, of failure) leading to a leak is acceptable. For corrosive fluids
— personnel, of other categories the benefit of inspection pigging on opera-
— traffic, tional reliability shall be evaluated.
— corrosion, and 106 A pipeline may be divided into sections having different
— fracture arrest. design pressure. The pipeline system shall in such cases be
equipped with an adequate pressure control system, to ensure
This may require a higher safety level than reflected by the that the section or sections with a lower design pressure are not
safety classes. subjected to pressure above the allowable.
204 For spiral welded pipes, the following requirements ap- 107 Risers and J-tubes should be routed inside the structure
ply: to avoid vessel impact, and shall be protected against impact
— when supplementary requirement F (fracture arrest prop- loads from vessels and other mechanical interaction. Risers
erties) is required, the possibility for a running fracture to should not be located inside the loading zones of platforms.
continue from a weld in one pipe joint to the weld of the 108 Riser and J-tube supports shall be designed to ensure a
next pipe joint shall be assessed; smooth transition of forces between riser and support.
— external pressure resistance should be documented; and
— the design shall be based on the load controlled condition 109 The routing of J-tubes shall be based on the following
unless the feasibility for use of displacement controlled considerations:
condition can be documented. — platform configuration and topsides layout,
Guidance note: — space requirements,
The limitations to fracture arrest and load controlled condition — movements of the J-tube,
are due to limited experience with spiral welded pipes subjected — cable/pipeline approach,
to running fracture or large strains. — J-tube protection,
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- — in-service inspection and maintenance, and
— installation considerations.
B 200 Mill pressure test and system pressure test
B. Design Principles and Materials 201 The purposes of the mill test requirement are:
B 100 Pipeline layout — to constitute a pressure containment proof test, and
101 A pipeline should not be located close to other struc- — to ensure that all pipe sections have at least a minimum
tures, other pipeline systems, wrecks, boulders, etc. The mini- Yield stress.
mum distance should be determined based upon anticipated
deflections, hydrodynamic effects, and upon risk-based evalu- Therefore, the mill test pressure is defined in terms of stress
ations. Wherever a pipeline system is located close to other utilisation, rather than related to the design pressure.
structures, pipeline systems, wrecks, large boulders, etc., the 202 With exception of 203, the pipeline system shall be sys-
detailed routing shall take into account possible deflections, tem pressure tested after installation. The local test pressure
movements and other risks to ensure a sufficient separation (plt) during the system pressure test shall fulfil the following
and margin against interference. requirement:
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Normal and High Safety Class during normal operation: — safety class High, and
— location class 2.
p lt ≥ 1.05p li (5.1)
Guidance note:
Low Safety Class during normal operation: The minimum wall thickness requirement is based on failure sta-
tistics, which clearly indicate that impact loads are the most like-
p lt ≥ 1.03p li (5.2) ly cause of failure and have the decisive effect on thickness
design (not D/t).
Guidance note:
Normally, i.e. with an incidental pressure of 10% above design
pressure, the above gives a system test pressure of approximately
1.15 times the design pressure, given that the design pressure is B 500 Materials selection
referenced to the highest point of the pipeline system.
501 Materials for pipeline systems shall be selected with due
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- consideration of the fluid to be transported, loads, temperature
and possible failure modes during installation and operation.
203 The system pressure test requirement provides a leakage The selection of materials shall ensure compatibility of all
test after completed construction and is a function of the local components of the pipeline system. The following material
incidental pressure. By agreement, the system pressure test characteristics shall be considered:
may be waived provided that:
— mechanical properties,
— welded linepipes are welded by the SAW method; — hardness,
— the wall thickness design is governed by the external pres- — fracture toughness,
sure and less than 75% of the pressure containment design
— fatigue resistance,
resistance is utilised;
— records show that the specified requirements have consist- — weldability, and
ently been obtained during manufacture, fabrication and — corrosion resistance.
installation;
— the mill pressure test requirement of Section 6E 1100 has 502 Materials selection shall include identification of the fol-
been met; lowing supplementary requirements as required:
— all components and risers are hydrostatically pressure test- — supplementary requirement S, sour service;
ed during manufacture;
— supplementary requirement F, fracture arrest properties;
— local leak testing is performed after installation and tie-in
of components and risers has been completed; — supplementary requirement P, linepipe exposed to plastic
deformation exceeding 2%;
— an inspection and test regime for the entire pipeline project
is established and demonstrated to provide the same level — supplementary requirement U, increased utilisation; and
of safety as the system pressure test with respect to detect- — supplementary requirement D, more stringent dimensional
able defect sizes etc.; requirements.
— automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) has been performed
after installation welding (see Section 9A.904); The supplementary requirements are given in Section 6D.
— installation and intervention work is unlikely to have 503 Materials selection shall include the selection of linepipe
caused damage to the pipeline. Special attention shall here NDT Level, see B 600. Linepipe NDT Level I is required for
be given to ploughing, other trenching methods or third use of displacement controlled condition local buckling crite-
party damages e.g. anchor cables; and ria (strain based design).
— the pipe has not been exposed to accumulated plastic 504 Under conditions when water, oxygen and chloride can
strains exceeding 2% after AUT. be present in the fluid, e.g. water injection, stainless steels can
be susceptible to both localised corrosion and environmentally
204 During system pressure test, all limit states for safety assisted cracking, and hence the corrosion resistance shall be
class low shall be satisfied (see D). considered for each specific application. For special applica-
B 300 In-service inspection tions, corrosion testing shall be performed to qualify the mate-
rial for the intended application.
301 Requirements to inspections affecting safety and relia-
bility during operation of the pipeline system shall be identi- 505 Routing of well stimulation fluids through duplex or
fied during the design phase, and shall be documented in the martensitic stainless steel pipeline systems requires special
DFI Résumé. precautions.
506 Special precautions are required to avoid corrosion dam-
B 400 Minimum wall thickness age to CRA pipelines, during system pressure testing using
401 Unless equivalent protection against accidental loads, seawater.
dropped objects and other external loads is provided by other 507 Duplex and martensitic stainless steel linepipe, and C-
means, a minimum nominal pipe wall thickness of 12mm shall Mn steel linepipe with SMYS > 450 MPa require special con-
be used for all pipelines with: siderations of the susceptibility of environmentally assisted
cracking (including SSC and hydrogen induced cracking relat-
— nominal diameter equal to 8" and above, ed to cathodic protection). In particular this applies to material
— safety class High, and subjected to significant plastic straining during fabrication, in-
— location class 2. stallation and operation.
Guidance note:
402 Special evaluation of accidental loads, dropped objects
and other external loads shall be included in the determination Linepipe NDT level I gives more stringent requirement to NDT
of minimum required wall thickness for pipelines with: than NDT level II.
The strength factor is 4% higher for supplementary requirement
— nominal diameter less than 8", U, usually giving approximately 4% less material.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

The relationship between the different material requirements and Table 5-2 Characteristic material strength, fy,fu
design is illustrated in the table below.
Property Value
Design resistance utilisation as function of NDT level and Characteristic yield stress fy = (SMYS - fy,temp)·αU
supplementary requirement U Characteristic tensile strength fu = (SMTS - fu,temp)·αU·αA
Linepipe NDT level I II
Supplementary req. U Yes No Yes No Where:
Pressure containment High Low High Low fy,temp and fu,temp is the derating value due to the tempera-
Load controlled buckling High Low High Low ture of the yield stress and the tensile
Displacement controlled buck- High Low N/A strength respectively
ling αU Material strength factor, ref. Table 5-1
Notes to table: αA Anisotropy factor,
1) High and Low in the above table refers to the allowable utilisa- = 0.95 for axial direction (i.e. αc of Eq.
tion. (5.23))due to relaxed testing require-
2) Load controlled condition and displacement controlled condition ments in linepipe specification (ref. Ta-
are defined in C 100. ble 6-3, Note 4
= 1.0 for other cases.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note:
If no other information on de-rating effects of the yield stress ex-
ists the recommendations for C-Mn steel, 22Cr Duplex or 25Cr
Duplex stainless steel in Figure 5-1 below may be used.
B 600 Characteristic material properties
601 Characteristic material properties shall be used in the re-
sistance calculations. The yield stress and tensile strength shall
be based on the engineering stress-strain curve.
602 Supplementary requirement U ensures increased confi-
dence in yield stress, which is reflected in a higher material
strength factor, given in Table 5-1. The design strength is a
function of this value and is given in 604.
Table 5-1 Material Strength factor, αU

Factor Normal Supplementary requirement U
αU 0.96 1.00
Note: For system pressure test, aU shall be equal to 1.00, which gives an al-
lowable hoop stress of 96% of SMYS both for materials fulfilling supple-
mentary requirement U and those not.
603 The different material grades refer to mechanical prop-

erties at room temperature. Possible temperature effects on the
material properties shall be considered at temperatures above
50°C, for C-Mn steel, and above 20°C for 22Cr and 25Cr.
These properties shall be selected with due regard to material
type and potential temperature-ageing effects and shall in-
clude:
— yield stress, Figure 5-1 Proposed de-rating values for yield stress
— tensile strength, ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
— Young's modulus, and
— temperature expansion coefficient. 605 Any difference in the de-rating effect of temperature for
tension and compression shall be accounted for.
Guidance note:
Field joint coating application during installation may also im- Guidance note:
pose temperatures in excess of the above and hence shall be con- Difference in de-rating effect for tension and compression has
sidered. been experienced on 13% Cr steel material.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
604 The characteristic material strength values to be used in 606 For fabrication processes which introduce cold deforma-
the limit state criteria are given in Table 5-2. tions giving different strength in tension and compression, a
fabrication factor, αfab, shall be determined. If no other infor-
mation exists, maximum fabrication factors for pipes manufac-
tured by the UOE or UO processes are given in Table 5-3.
These factors also apply to other fabrication processes which
introduce similar cold deformations such as three roll bending
(TRB).
The fabrication factor may be improved through heat treat-
ment, if documented.
Table 5-3 Maximum fabrication factor, αfab

Pipe Seamless UO & TRB UOE
αfab 1.00 0.93 0.85
DET NORSKE VERITAS

B 700 Corrosion allowance 102 A load-controlled condition is one in which the structur-
701 For C-Mn steel pipelines carrying potentially corrosive al response is primarily governed by the imposed loads.
fluids and/or exposed to an external corrosive environment 103 A displacement-controlled condition is one in which the
without cathodic protection, the use of an extra wall thickness structural response is primarily governed by imposed geomet-
to compensate for any corrosive degradation during operation ric displacements.
("corrosion allowance") shall be duly considered, (see also 104 A load controlled design criterion can always be applied
Section 8). in place of a displacement controlled design criterion.
Guidance note:
Guidance note:
A corrosion allowance is primarily used to compensate for forms
of corrosion attack affecting the pipeline's pressure containment An example of a purely displacement-controlled condition is a
resistance, i.e. uniform attack and, to a lesser extent, corrosion pipeline bent into conformity with a continuous curved structure,
damage as grooves or patches. However, a corrosion allowance such as a J-tube or a reel. In that case, the curvature of the pipe
may also enhance the operational reliability and increase the use- axis is imposed but the circumferential bending that leads to
ful life if corrosion damage occurs as isolated pits; although such ovalisation is determined by the interaction between the curva-
damage is unlikely to affect the pipeline's resistance, it will cause ture of the axis and the internal forces induced by the curvature.
a pinhole leak when the full wall thickness is penetrated. Howev- A less clear-cut example is a pipeline in contact with the rollers
er, the extra wall thickness will only delay leakage in proportion of a lay barge stinger. On a large scale, the configuration of the
to the increase in wall thickness. pipeline has to conform to the rollers, and in that sense is dis-
placement controlled. On a local scale however, bending of the
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- pipe between the rollers is determined by the interaction between
weight and tension and is load-controlled. The stinger tip will,
702 The needs for, and benefits of, a corrosion allowance however, always be load controlled.
shall be evaluated, taking into account the following factors as
a minimum: Another intermediate case is an expansion spool in contact with
the seabed. Pipeline expansion induced by temperature and pres-
— design life and potential corrosivity of fluid and/or exter- sure imposes a displacement at the end of the spool. The structur-
al response of the spool itself has little effect on the imposed
nal environment; expansion displacement, and the response is primarily displace-
— expected form of corrosion damage (see Guidance note ment-controlled. However, the lateral resistance to movement of
above); the spool across the seabed also plays a significant part and in-
— expected reliability of planned techniques and procedures duces a degree of load control.
for corrosion mitigation (e.g. chemical treatment of fluid, These examples show that in many cases a simple distinction be-
external coating, etc.); tween load control and displacement control is not seen. The
— expected sensitivity and damage sizing capability of rele- choice should be based on an informed judgement about which
vant tools for integrity monitoring, time to first inspection components of the combined load are more important.
and planned frequency of inspection;
— consequences of sudden leakage, requirements to safety
and reliability; and 105 Linepipe NDT level I is required for use of displacement
— potential for down-rating (or up-rating) of operating pres- controlled local buckling criteria.
sure.
C 200 Load effect calculation
703 Unless a sudden leakage of fluid is acceptable (may ap-
ply for pipelines of safety class Low), the magnitude of a cor- 201 The design analyses shall be based on accepted princi-
rosion allowance shall be sufficient to accommodate any ples of statics, dynamics, strength of materials and soil me-
realistic corrosive degradation that may occur in the period be- chanics.
tween two consecutive inspections for integrity monitoring 202 Simplified methods or analyses may be used to calculate
(see Section 10) the load effects provided that they are conservative. Model
704 Pipelines of safety class Normal and High in C-Mn steel tests may be used in combination with, or instead of, theoreti-
carrying hydrocarbon fluids likely to contain liquid water dur- cal calculations. In cases where theoretical methods are inade-
ing operation shall have an internal corrosion allowance of quate, model or full-scale tests may be required.
minimum 3 mm. 203 All loads and forced displacements which may influence
705 Subject to agreement, the general requirements for a the pipeline integrity shall be taken into account. For each
minimum corrosion allowance of 3 mm may be waived if it is cross section or part of the system to be considered and for
demonstrated that the design and/or procedures for corrosion each possible mode of failure to be analysed, all relevant com-
control exclude any critical damage by corrosion. binations of loads which may act simultaneously shall be con-
706 An external corrosion allowance of 3 mm shall be ap- sidered.
plied to C-Mn steel risers of safety class Normal and High in 204 When determining responses to dynamic loads, the dy-
the splash zone. For risers carrying hot fluids (more than 10°C namic effect shall be taken into account if deemed significant.
above normal ambient seawater temperature) of the same safe- 205 Load effect calculation shall be performed applying
ty classes the use of a corrosion allowance in excess of 3 mm nominal cross section values.
shall be considered. Any allowance for internal corrosion shall
be additional. 206 Load effect calculations shall be based on characteristic
values, ref. Section 4B 200 and C 600.
207 Possible beneficial strengthening effect of weight coat-
ing on a steel pipe shall not be taken into account in the design,
C. Load and Resistance Calculations unless the strengthening effect is documented. Coating which
C 100 Load conditions adds significant bending stiffness to the pipe may increase the
stresses/strains in the pipe at any discontinuity in the coating
101 Differentiation is made between: (e.g. at field joints). When appropriate, this effect shall be tak-
en into account.
— Load Controlled condition (LC condition), and
— Displacement Controlled condition (DC condition). 208 Possible beneficial strengthening effect of cladding or
liner on a steel pipe shall not be taken into account in the de-
Different design checks apply to these two conditions. sign, unless the strengthening effect is documented.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

209 The effective axial force that determines the global re- 403 Strain concentrations shall be accounted for when con-
sponse of a pipeline is denoted S. Counting tensile force as sidering:
positive:
— uneven deformation caused by variations in actual materi-
π 2 2
S = N – p i A i + p e A e = N – --- ( p i ( D – 2t ) – p e D ) (5.3) al yield stress and strain hardenability between pipe joints
4 and in the weld metal due to scatter in material properties;
210 In the as-laid condition, when the pipe temperature and — variations in cross sectional area (actual diameter or wall
internal pressure are the same as when the pipe was laid, thickness) between pipe joints;
S=H — stiffening effects of coating and variations in coating
thickness;
Where H is the effective (residual) lay tension
— reduction of yield stress in field joints due to high temper-
211 Effective axial force of a totally restrained pipe in the ature imposed by field joint coating application during in-
linear elastic stress range is (if it can be idealised as thin- stallation; and
walled): — undermatch/overmatch of actual weld metal yield stress,
relative to actual pipe material yield stress.
S = H – ∆ p i ⋅ A i ( 1 – 2ν ) – A s ⋅ E ⋅ α ⋅ ∆ T (5.4)
404 Accumulated plastic strain is defined as the sum of plas-
where: tic strain increments, irrespective of sign and direction. Strain
H = Effective (residual) lay tension increments shall be calculated from after the linepipe manufac-
turing.
∆pi = Internal pressure difference relative to as laid
∆Τ = Temperature difference relative to as laid 405 Plastic strain increment shall be calculated from the
point where the material stress-strain curve deviates from a lin-
C 300 Characteristic wall thickness ear relationship, ref. Figure 5-2.
301 Pressure containment resistance shall be calculated
based on wall thickness as follows:
Mill pressure test and system pressure test condition
t 1 = t – t fab (5.5)
Operational condition
t 1 = t – t fab – t corr (5.6)

302 Resistances, except for pressure containment resistance,
shall be calculated based on wall thickness as follows:
Construction (installation) and system pressure test
t2 = t (5.7)
Otherwise
Figure 5-2 Reference for plastic strain calculation
t 2 = t – t corr (5.8)
Guidance note:
303 Corrosion prior to start of operation shall be considered The yield stress is defined as the stress at which the total strain is
in the above calculation of thickness. 0.5%. As an example for a 415 grade C-Mn steel, a unidirectional
strain of 0.5% corresponds to an elastic strain of approximately
304 Minimum wall thickness requirement is given in B 400. 0.2% and a plastic strain of 0.3%.
305 Wall thickness for stability calculations is given in ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
E.404.
C 400 Stress and strain calculations 406 The equivalent plastic strain is defined as:
2 2 2
401 Stress Concentration Factors (SCF) shall be included if εp = ( 2 ⁄ 3 ) ( ε pL + ε pH + ε pR ) (5.9)
relevant.
Guidance note: where
Distinction should be made between global and local stress con-
centrations. εp is the equivalent plastic strain
Local stress concentrations (that may be caused by welded at- εpL is the plastic part of the principal longitudinal strain
tachments, the weld itself, or very local discontinuities) will af- εpH is the plastic part of the principal circumferential (hoop)
fect the pipe only locally and are typically accounted for in strain
fatigue and fracture evaluations. Global stress concentrations εpR is the plastic part of the principal radial strain
(such as stress amplifications in field joints due to concrete coat-
ing, which typically extend one diameter) will affect the pipe glo-
bally, and shall be accounted for in the bending buckling
evaluations as well as fatigue and fracture evaluations.
D. Limit States
D 100 General
402 Strain Concentration Factors (SNCF) shall be deter-
mined and accounted for if plastic strain is experienced. The 101 All relevant failure modes formulated in terms of limit
SNCF shall be adjusted for the non-linear stress-strain rela- states shall be considered in design. The limit states shall be
tionship for the relevant load level. classified into one of the following four limit state categories:
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— Serviceability Limit State (SLS): A condition which, if ex-

ceeded, renders the pipeline unsuitable for normal opera-
tions.
— Ultimate Limit State (ULS): A condition which, if exceed-
ed, compromises the integrity of the pipeline.
— Fatigue Limit State (FLS): A ULS condition accounting
for accumulated cyclic load effects.
— Accidental Limit State (ALS): A ULS due to accidental
loads.
102 As a minimum requirement, risers and pipelines shall be
designed against the following potential modes of failure:
Serviceability Limit State
— ovalisation/ ratcheting limit state;
— accumulated plastic strain limit state; and
— damage due to, or loss of, weight coating.
Ultimate Limit State
— bursting limit state;
— ovalisation/ratcheting limit state (if causing total failure);
— local buckling limit state (pipe wall buckling limit state);
— global buckling limit state (normally for load-controlled
condition);
— unstable fracture and plastic collapse limit state; and
— impact.
Fatigue Limit State
— fatigue due to cyclic loading.
Accidental limit state
— ultimate limit state due to infrequent loading.
103 All limit states shall be satisfied for all specified load
combinations. The limit state may be different for the load con-
trolled condition and the displacement controlled condition.
104 Figure 5-3 gives an overview of the required design
checks.
105 All limit states shall be satisfied for all relevant phases
and conditions. Typical conditions to be covered in the design
are:
— installation,
— as laid,
— system pressure test,
— operation, and
— shut-down
Figure 5-3 Flow diagram for structural design. The design

loop shall be repeated for each relevant phase.
D 200 Limit state format
201 The design format in this standard is based on an LRFD
format.
202 Based on potential failure consequences the pipeline
shall be classified into a safety class see Section 2C 400. The
DET NORSKE VERITAS

safety class may vary for different phases and different loca- safety class and given in Table 5-5.
tions.
Table 5-5 Safety class resistance factors, γSC
203 The level of safety is considered to be satisfactory if the
γSE
design load effect (Ld) does not exceed the design resistance
Safety class Low Normal High
(Rd):
Pressure containment2 1.0463, 4 1.138 1.3081
Ld ≤ Rd (5.10) Other 1.04 1.14 1.26
1) For parts of pipelines in location class 1, resistance safety class normal
204 The design load can generally be expressed in the fol- may be applied (1.138).
lowing format: 2) The number of significant digits are given in order to comply with the
ISO usage factors.
( Ld = LF ⋅ γF ⋅ γC + LE ⋅ γE + LA ⋅ γA ⋅ γC ) (5.11) 3) Safety class low will be governed by the system pressure test which is
required to be 3% above the incidental pressure. Hence, for operation
in safety class low, the resistance factor will effectively be 3% higher.
In specific forms, this corresponds to:
4) For system pressure test, aU shall be equal to 1.00, which gives an al-
lowable hoop stress of 96% of SMYS both for materials fulfilling sup-
plementary requirement U and those not.
Md = MF ⋅ γF ⋅ γC + ME ⋅ γE + MA ⋅ γA ⋅ γC (5.12)
D 300 Load effect factors and load combinations
301 Each part of the pipeline system shall be designed for the
εd = εF ⋅ γF ⋅ γC + εE ⋅ γE + εA ⋅ γA ⋅ γc most unfavourable load combination given in Table 5-6. Load
combination a and b are referred to in D 500 through definition
in Eq. (5.12).
Sd = SF ⋅ γF ⋅ γC + SE ⋅ γE + SA ⋅ γA ⋅ γC
Table 5-6 Load effect factors and load combinations
Limit State / Functional Environ- Accidental Pressure
loads1) mental load loads loads
∆p d = γ P ⋅ ( p ld – p e ) Load combi-
nation γF γE γA γP
The load effect factors, γF , γE , γA , γP and γC are given in Table SLS& a 1.2 0.7 - 1.05
5-5 and Table 5-6. These factors apply to all safety classes. ULS b 1.1 1.3 - 1.05
Definition of characteristic functional and environmental load FLS 1.0 1.0 - 1.0
effect values are given in Section 4B 200 and C 600. ALS 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Guidance note: 1) If the functional load effect reduces the combined load effects, γF shall
be taken as 1/1.1.
The above load combinations are referred to explicitly in the de-
sign criteria, e.g. Eq. (5.23), and shall not be applied elsewhere, 302 Load combination a in Table 5-6 is required when sys-
e.g. not in Eq. (5.14) or in Eq. (5.22). tem effects are present. It is therefore not required for local de-
sign checks, which normally means for σh>0 in combination
with other loads.
Guidance note: 303 The loads listed in Section 4 shall be considered for all
For the system pressure test condition, the local test pressure is design phases relevant to the pipeline system.
considered as incidental pressure. In order to calculate the corre- 304 The condition load effect factor applies to the conditions
sponding pld, included in ∆pd above, the local test pressure in Table 5-7. Condition load effect factors are in addition to the
should be calculated as: load effect factors and are referred to explicitly in Eq. (5.12).
Table 5-7 Condition load effect factors, γ C

pt γc
∆p d = γ p ⎛ --------- + ρ t gh ref – p e⎞
Condition
⎝ γ inc ⎠ Pipeline resting on uneven seabed or in a snaked con- 1.07
dition
where href is the vertical distance between the point in question Continuously stiff supported 0.82
and the reference height and γinc should be 1.1. The same ap- System pressure test 0.93
proach applies to when the shut-in pressure is used. Otherwise 1.00
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note:
An uneven seabed condition is relevant in connection with free-
205 The design resistance, Rd, can normally be expressed in spanning pipelines. The same factor shall be used even when the
the following format: pipeline is in a snaked condition on an uneven seabed.
Rk ( fk ) Continuously stiff supported denotes conditions where the main
R d = ------------------- (5.13) part of the load is also displacement controlled. Examples may be
γ SC ⋅ γ m reeling on the drum or J-tube pull-in.
The characteristic material strength, fk, is given in B 600. Several condition factors may be required simultaneously, e.g.
for pressure testing of pipelines on uneven seabed, the resulting
206 The material resistance factor, γm, is dependent on the condition factor will be 1.07 · 0.93 = 1.00.
limit state category and is defined in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Material resistance factor, γm
Limit state category SLS/ULS/ALS FLS D 400 Pressure containment (bursting)
γm 1.15 1.00 401 The following criteria are valid provided that the mill
pressure test requirement in Section 6E 1100 has been met. If
207 The safety class resistance factor, γSC, is dependent on not, a corresponding decreased utilisation shall be applied.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

402 The pressure containment shall fulfil the following cri- Guidance note:
teria: Ovalisation caused during the construction phase shall be includ-
pb ( t1 ) ed in the total ovality to be used in design. Ovalisation due to ex-
p li – p e ≤ ------------------- (5.14) ternal water pressure or bending moment shall not be included.
γ SC ⋅ γ m
Guidance note: 504 The external pressure at any point along the pipeline
Criterion for the incidental pressure is given in Section 3B 300 shall meet the following criterion (system collapse check):
The concept of local pressure is given in Section 12E 100 pc
p e ≤ -------------------------------- (5.22)
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- 1 ,1 ⋅ γ ⋅ γ
m SC
Guidance note:
403 The pressure containment resistance, pb (x) is given by: If the pipeline is laid fully or partially liquid-filled or is otherwise
under internal pressure, then the internal pressure may be taken
p b ( x ) = Min ( p b, s ( x ) ; p b, u ( x ) ) (5.15) into account provided that it can be continuously sustained.
Combined Loading Criteria - Load controlled condition

Yielding limit state
505 Pipe members subjected to bending moment, effective
2⋅x 2
p b, s ( x ) = ------------- ⋅ f y ⋅ ------- (5.16) axial force and internal overpressure shall be designed to satis-
D–x 3 fy the following condition at all cross sections:
Bursting limit state
2⋅x fu 2
p b, u ( x ) = ------------- ⋅ ------------ ⋅ ------- (5.17)
D – x 1, 15 3
Guidance note: ⎛ Sd ⎞ 2 ⎛ Md ⎛ ∆ p d ⎞ 2⎞
γ ⎜ -------------⎟ + γ γ ⎜ --------------- 1 – ⎜ -----------------------⎟ ⎟ +
In the above formulas, x shall be replaced by t1 or t2 as appropri- SC m ⎝ α c S p⎠ SC m ⎝ α M
c p ⎝ α c p b ( t 2 )⎠ ⎠
(5.23)
ate.
∆ pd ⎞ 2
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- ---------------------⎟ ≤ 1
α c p b ( t 2 )⎠
404 Reduction in pressure containment resistance due to true
compressive forces (load controlled), N, shall be considered.
D/t ≤ 45, pi ≥ pe
D 500 Local buckling where:
501 Local buckling (pipe wall buckling) implies gross defor-
mation of the cross section. The following criteria shall be ful- Md = Design bending moment, (see Eq. (5.12))
filled: Sd = Design effective axial force
∆pd = Design differential overpressure
— system collapse (external pressure only); Mp = Plastic moment resistance given by:
— combined loading criteria, i.e. interaction between exter- Mp = fy ⋅ ( D – t2 ) ⋅ t2
2
nal or internal pressure, axial force and bending moment;
and Sp = Characteristic plastic axial force resistance given
— propagation buckling. by:
Sp = fy ⋅ π ⋅ ( D – t2 ) ⋅ t2
502 Large accumulated plastic strain may aggravate local
buckling and shall be considered. pb(t2) = Burst pressure Eq. (5.15)
αc = Flow stress parameter accounting for strain harden-
System collapse criteria ing given by:
503 The characteristic resistance for external pressure (pc)
(collapse) shall be calculated as: fu
α c = ( 1 – β ) + β ----
2 2 D fy
( p c – p el ) ⋅ ( p c – p p ) = p c p el p p f o ---- (5.18)
t2
where: but maximum 1.20
t2 3
2E ⎛ ----⎞ for D/t 2 < 15
⎝ D⎠ (5.19) ⎧ 0.4 + q h
p el = -------------------- ⎪
2
1–v β = ⎨ ( 0 .4 + q h ) ( 60 – D/t 2 )/45 for 15 ≤ D/t 2 ≤ 60
⎪
t2 (5.20) ⎩ 0 for D/t 2 > 60
p p = 2 ⋅ f y ⋅ α fab ⋅ ----
D
⎧ ( p ld – p e ) 2
⎪ ----------------------- ------- for p ld > p e
D max – D min
f o = -------------------------------- (5.21) qh = ⎨ pb ( t2 ) 3
D ⎪
⎩0 for p ld ≤ p e
not to be taken < 0.005 (0.5%) ac is not to be taken larger than 1.20.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Guidance note: cient safety margin in compliance with this standard. Any in-
creased utilisation shall be supported by analytical design
methods.
Table 5-8 Resistance strain factors, γe

NDT Supplementary Safety class
Level Requirements Low Normal High
I U 2.0 2.5 3.3
I - 2.1 2.6 3.5
II N/A
509 A higher probability of failure corresponding to a serv-

iceability limit state may be allowed during the installation
phase provided that:
αc versus D/t ratio and pressure ratio qh for fu/fy= 1.15
— aids to detect buckle are provided;
— repair of potential damage is feasible and may be per-
506 Pipe members subjected to bending moment, effective formed during laying; and
axial force and external overpressure shall be designed to sat- — buckle arrestors are installed if the external pressure ex-
isfy the following equation: ceeds the initiation propagating pressure.
⎛ ⎛ Md ⎞ ⎛ S d ⎞ 2⎞ 2 ⎛ ⎛ p e⎞ ⎞ 2 Relevant resistance factors may then be calibrated according to
⎜ γ SC γ m ⎜ ---------------⎟ + γ SC γ m ⎜ -------------⎟ ⎟ + ⎜ γ SC γ m ⎜ -----⎟ ⎟ ≤ 1 (5.24)
⎝ ⎝ α c M p⎠ ⎝ α c S p⎠ ⎠ ⎝ ⎝ p c⎠ ⎠ the SLS requirements in Section 2.
Propagation buckling
D ⁄ t ≤ 45, pi < pe 510 Propagation buckling cannot be initiated unless local
buckling has occurred. In case the external pressure exceeds
Combined loading criteria - Displacement controlled condi- the criteria given below, buckle arrestors should be installed
tion and spacing determined based on consequences of failure. The
507 Pipe members subjected to longitudinal compressive propagating buckle criterion reads:
strain (bending moment and axial force) and internal over pres-
sure shall be designed to satisfy the following condition at all
t 2 2.5
cross sections: p pr = 35f y α fab ⎛ ----⎞
ε ⎝ D⎠
ε d ≤ ----c D ⁄ t ≤ 45, p i ≥ p e (5.25)
γε
where:
p pr
εd = Design compressive strain, Eq. (5.12) p e ≤ -------------
γ m γ sc
t2 σh
εc = 0.78 ⎛ ---- – 0.01⎞ ⎛ 1 + 5 ------⎞ α h
– 1.5
⎝D ⎠⎝
α gw
fy ⎠ Guidance note:
αh = Maximum allowed yield to tensile ratio Collapse pressure, pc, is the pressure required to buckle a pipe-
αgw= Girth weld factor line.
γε = Resistance strain factor, see Table 5-8 Initiation pressure, pinit, is the pressure required to start a propa-
D–t
σh = ∆ p d ⋅ ⎛⎝ -------------2-⎞⎠ gating buckle from a given buckle. This pressure will depend on
2t 2 the size of the initial buckle.
Guidance note: Propagating pressure, ppr, is the pressure required to continue a
The maximum yield to ultimate stress ration, αh, is found in Ta- propagating buckle. A propagating buckle will stop when the
ble 6-3 and Table 6-6. The increase of this factor with 0.02 in ac- pressure is less than the propagating pressure.
cordance with footnote 5 and 3 in these tables respectively does The relationship between the different pressures are:
not apply since it is already included in the factor 0.78. pc > pinit > ppr
508 Pipe members subjected to longitudinal compressive
strain (bending moment and axial force) and external over D 600 Global buckling
pressure shall be designed to satisfy the following condition at 601 Global buckling implies buckling of the pipe as a bar in
all cross sections: compression. The pipeline may buckle globally, either down-
wards (in a free span), horizontally ("snaking" on the seabed),
⎛ ⎞ 0, 8
⎜ ε d⎟ pe or vertically (as upheaval buckling or on a free-span shoulder).
⎜ -----⎟ + -------------------- ≤ 1 D ⁄ t ≤ 45, p i < p e (5.26) 602 The effect of internal and external pressures may be tak-
ε
⎜ c⎟ pc
en into account using the concept of an effective axial force,
⎝ ----
γ ⎠ -------------------
γ SC ⋅ γ m see C.209 above. The procedure is as for "ordinary" compres-
where: e sion members in air.
εd = Design compressive strain, Eq. (5.12) 603 A negative effective force may cause a pipeline or a riser
t2 – ( 1.5 )
0.78 ⎛ ---- – 0.01⎞ α h
to buckle as a bar in compression. Distinction shall be made
εc = ⎝D ⎠
α gw between load-controlled and displacement-controlled buck-
Guidance note:
ling.
For D/t < 20, the utilisation may be increased provided that full Load-controlled buckling involves total failure, and is not al-
scale testing, observation, or former experience indicate suffi- lowed.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

604 The following global buckling initiators shall be consid- tests, the following shall be considered:
ered:
— determination of long-term distribution of stress range, see
— trawl board impact, pullover and hooking, and 707;
— out of straightness. — selection of appropriate S-N curve (characteristic resist-
ance), see 708;
605 For global buckling resistance for load-controlled condi- — determination of Stress Concentration Factor (SCF) not
tion, reference is made to DNV Offshore Standard OS-C101, included in the SN-curve; and
"Design of Steel Structures" (not yet issued; until issue, refer — determination of accumulated damage, see 709.
to DNV Rules for Classification of Fixed Offshore Installa-
tions, Pt. 3, Ch. 1, Structural Design, General). 707 As most of the loads which contribute to fatigue are of a
606 Displacement-controlled buckling may be allowed, pro- random nature, statistical consideration is normally required in
vided it does not result in other failure modes as listed under determining the long-term distribution of fatigue loading ef-
102 above. This implies that global buckling may be allowed fects. Where appropriate, deterministic or spectral analysis
provided that: may be used.
708 The characteristic resistance is normally given as S-N
— local buckling criteria are fulfilled in the post global buck- curves or e-N curves, i.e. stress amplitudes (or strain ampli-
ling configuration, tudes for the case of low-cycle fatigue), versus number of cy-
— displacement of the pipeline is acceptable and cles to failure, N. The S-N curve shall be applicable for the
— cyclic effects are acceptable. material, construction detail, and state of stress considered, as
well as to the surrounding environment. The S-N curve should
Guidance note: be based on the mean curve of log(N) with the subtraction of
A condition that can give rise to excessive strain is when a short two standard deviations in log(N).
length of an otherwise fully restrained pipeline is less restrained
or unconstrained. A typical example is upheaval buckling of a 709 In the general case where stress fluctuations occur with
buried pipeline. varying amplitude of random order, the linear damage hypoth-
esis (Miner's Rule) may be used. The application of Miner's
Rule implies that the long-term distribution of stress range is
replaced by a stress histogram, consisting of a number of con-
D 700 Fatigue stant amplitude stress or strain range blocks, (sr)i or (er)i, and
701 Reference is made to the following Rules, Classification the corresponding number of repetitions, ni. Thus, the fatigue
Notes (CN) and guidelines: criterion is given by:
k
— CN 30.5 Environmental Conditions and Environmental ni
Loads
— DNV-RP-C203 Fatigue Strength Analysis of Offshore
D fat = ∑ -----
Ni
≤ α fat (5.28)
i=l
Steel Structures
— DNV-RP-F105 Free Spanning Pipelines. Where:
702 The pipeline systems shall have adequate safety against Dfat = Miner's sum
fatigue failures within the design life of the system. k = number of stress blocks
ni = number of stress cycles in stress block i
703 All stress fluctuations imposed on the pipeline system Ni = number of cycles to failure at constant stress range
during the entire design life, including the construction phase, of magnitude (sr)i or strain range (er)i.
which have magnitude and corresponding number of cycles afat = allowable damage ratio, see Table 5-9
large enough to cause fatigue effects shall be taken into ac-
count when determining the long-term distribution of stress 710 For detailed explanation regarding fatigue calculations/
ranges. The fatigue check shall include both low-cycle fatigue analysis reference is made to DNV-RP-F105 "Free Spanning
and high-cycle fatigue. The requirements regarding accumu- Pipelines". In cases where this guideline is not applicable, al-
lated plastic strain (D 1000 below) shall also be satisfied. lowable damage ratios are given in Table 5-9.
Guidance note: Table 5-9 Allowable damage ratio for fatigue
Typical causes of stress fluctuations in a pipeline system are: Safety Class Low Normal High
- direct wave action; αfat 1/3 1/5 1/10
- vibrations of the pipeline system, e.g. due to vortex shedding
(current, waves, wind, towing) or fluid flow; D 800 Ovalisation
- supporting structure movements; and
- fluctuations in operating pressure and temperature. 801 Risers and pipelines shall not be subject to excessive
ovalisation and this shall be documented. The flattening due to
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- bending, together with the out-of-roundness tolerance from
704 Special consideration shall be given to the fatigue as- fabrication of the pipe, is not to exceed 3%, defined as:
sessment of construction details likely to cause stress concen- D max – D min
trations, and to the possibility of having low-cycle high strain f 0 = -------------------------------- ≤ 0.03 (5.29)
D
fatigue. The specific design criterion to be used depends upon The requirement may be relaxed if:
the analysis method, which may be categorised into:
— a corresponding reduction in moment resistance has been
— methods based upon fracture mechanics (see 705) included;
— methods based upon fatigue tests (see 706). — geometrical restrictions are met, such as pigging require-
705 Where appropriate, a calculation procedure based upon ments;
fracture mechanics may be used. The specific criterion to be — additional cyclic stresses caused by the ovalisation have
used shall be determined on a case-by-case basis, and shall re- been considered; and
flect the target safety levels in Section 2C 600. — tolerances in the relevant repair system are met.
706 When using calculation methods based upon fatigue 802 Ovalisation shall be checked for point loads at any point
DET NORSKE VERITAS

along the pipeline system. Such point loads may arise at free- D 1100 Fracture
span shoulders, artificial supports and support settlements. 1101 Pipeline systems shall have adequate resistance against
D 900 Ratcheting initiation of unstable fracture. This shall be achieved by select-
ing materials with the transition temperature from brittle to
901 Accumulated plastic deformation (ratcheting) caused by ductile behaviour sufficiently below the minimum design tem-
cyclic loads shall be considered. If the ratcheting causes accu- perature, see Table 6-4, and with high resistance to stable crack
mulated ovality, special consideration shall be made of the ef- growth.
fect on buckling resistance.
1102 The safety against unstable fracture is considered satis-
902 Under maximum operating temperature and pressure, factory if the materials, welding, workmanship and testing are
the equivalent plastic strain in the pipelines shall not exceed in accordance with the requirements of this standard and the
0.001 (0.1%). (Calculated based on elastic - perfectly plastic accumulated plastic strain is not exceeding 0.3%.
material. The calculations of the equivalent plastic strain as-
sume that the reference state for zero strain is the as-built state 1103 Pipeline systems transporting gas or mixed gas and liq-
(after pressure testing)). uids under high pressure shall have adequate resistance to
propagating fracture. This may be achieved by using:
903 Plastic deformation of the pipeline shall only occur
when the pipeline is first exposed to its maximum temperature — material with low transition temperature and adequate
and pressure. Charpy V-notch toughness,
904 Ratcheting due to local and global bending stresses shall — adequate DWTT shear fracture area
also be considered where this could eventually lead to loss of — lowering the stress level,
stability — use of mechanical crack arrestors, or
— by a combination of these methods.
D 1000 Accumulated plastic strain
Design solutions shall be validated by calculations based upon
1001 The equivalent plastic strain condition in C.405 and relevant experience and/or suitable tests.
C.406 is not in itself a limit state. Equivalent plastic strain is a
measure of plastic deformation, which is useful in the assess- 1104 For linepipe required to resist propagating fractures,
ment of fracture mechanics and degradation of material prop- the additional requirements in Section 6D 200 and modifica-
erties. Requirements with respect to fracture mechanics are tions for linepipe base material shall apply for the subsea sec-
given in D 1100. tion of the pipeline system. For depths down to 10 metres and
onshore, the required Charpy V-notch impact energy shall be
1002 Accumulation of plastic strain during installation and specially considered. Deep water pipelines will experience re-
operation shall be considered for all pipelines. ductions in tensile stresses due to the external pressure. Sup-
The effects of strain ageing due to the accumulation of plastic plementary requirements to fracture arrest properties need not
strain shall be considered. be applied when the pipeline design tensile hoop stress is be-
low 40% of fy.
The effects of degradation of the material properties of the
weld zones and parent pipe, and the influence on acceptance 1105 Material meeting the supplementary requirement for
criteria for NDT, shall be accounted for. fracture arrest properties (F) (Section 6D 200) is considered to
have adequate resistance to running propagating ductile frac-
1003 The amount of displacement controlled strain, both ac- ture for applications up to 80% usage factor, 15 MPa internal
cumulated and maximum for each single strain cycle, shall be pressure and 30 mm wall thickness.
established considering all phases from construction to aban-
donment. 1106 For pipelines subjected to an accumulated plastic strain
exceeding 0.3%, an engineering criticality assessment (ECA)
1004 When the accumulated plastic strain resulting from in- shall be carried out in order to confirm that unstable fracture
stallation and operation load effects (including load factors and will not occur during pipelaying, or during operation of the
all strain concentration factors), εp , is pipeline.
εp ≤ 0.3% 1107 Possible stable crack growth (ductile tearing) and high-
then the requirements of this standard for materials, welding and low-cycle fatigue crack growth shall be considered in the
procedures, workmanship and the acceptance criteria for NDT assessment. The assessment shall confirm that the largest weld
given in Appendix D Table D-4, Table D-5, are considered ad- defects expected to remain after NDT will not increase during
equate. pipelaying to an extent such that unstable fracture or fatigue
failure will occur during operation of the pipeline.
1005 When the accumulated plastic strain resulting from in-
stallation and operation, including all strain concentration fac- 1108 The effect of strain ageing on fracture toughness, shall
tors, is: be taken into account as relevant by testing artificially strain
aged material.
εp > 0.3%
1109 The ECA shall be carried out in accordance with BS
an engineering criticality assessment (ECA), see D 1100 be- 7910 at Level 3, with modifications necessary for plastic de-
low, shall be performed on installation girth welds. This ECA sign and multiple strain cycles. Some guidance for use of BS
shall determine the material fracture toughness required to tol- 7910 for plastic design and multiple strain cycles is given in
erate the flaws allowed according to the acceptance criteria for Section 12.
NDT given in Appendix D Table D-4, Table D-5, or alterna-
tively to establish the defect size that can be tolerated for a giv- 1110 The maximum defect size resulting from, or used in,
en fracture toughness. the ECA shall be adjusted for the probability of detection pos-
sible with NDT and the accuracy of the equipment to be used
1006 When the accumulated plastic strain resulting from in- in determining length, height, location and orientation of im-
stallation and operation, including all strain concentration fac- perfections.
tors, is:
1111 The uncertainty data used shall be appropriate for the
εp > 2.0% applied testing equipment and procedures for the detection and
then, in addition to the requirements of 1005, the characteristic assessment of flaws in the material and weld geometries in
strain resistance ec, shall be verified as required in Section 9E question. The data used for quantitative estimates of ultrasonic
and the material shall meet the supplementary requirement P. testing uncertainty, performance and reliability, are preferably
DET NORSKE VERITAS

to be of the "measured response versus actual flaw size" type. and procedures applied.
The probability of detection level with the applied testing 1206 A simplified design check with respect to accidental
equipment and procedures used shall be based on a confidence load may be performed as shown in Table 5-10 using appropri-
level of 95% or better. ate partial safety factors.. The adequacy of simplified design
1112 If adequate data is not available, the following ap- check must be assessed on the basis of the summation above in
proach shall be used: order to verify that the overall failure probability complies
with the target values in Section 2.
— If the purpose of the ECA is to establish the tolerable de-
fect size for given material properties and stresses, 2 mm
shall be subtracted from the calculated defect height and
length, when acceptance criteria for non-destructive test- E. Special Considerations
ing are established.
— If the purpose of the ECA is to establish the material prop- E 100 General
erties and stresses required to tolerate a given defect size, 101 This subsection gives guidance on conditions that shall
the defect size used as input into the ECA shall be in- be evaluated separately. Both the load effects and acceptance
creased in size by adding 2 mm to the stated height and criteria are affected.
width.
E 200 Pipe soil interaction
D 1200 Accidental limit state
201 For limit states influenced by the interaction between the
1201 The design against accidental loads may be performed pipeline and the soil, this interaction shall be determined tak-
by direct calculation of the effects imposed by the loads on the ing due account for all relevant parameters and the uncertain-
structure, or indirectly, by design of the structure as tolerable ties related to these.
to accidents.
In general pipeline soil interaction depends on the characteris-
1202 The acceptance criteria for ALS relate to the overall al- tics of the soil, the pipeline, and the loads, which shall all be
lowable probability of severe consequences properly accounted for in the simulation of the pipeline soil in-
1203 Design with respect to accidental load must ensure that teraction.
the overall failure probability complies with the target values 202 The main soil characteristics governing the interaction
in Section 2. This probability can be expressed as the sum of are the shear strength and deformation properties. The non-lin-
the probability of occurrence of the i'th damaging event, PDi, ear stress - strain characteristics of the soil shall be accounted
times the structural failure probability conditioned on this for. If linear springs are used to represent the interaction, the
event, Pf | Di. The requirement is accordingly expressed as: response in the springs shall be checked in order to verify that
the load level is compatible with the spring stiffness used.
∑ pf Di ⋅ PDi ≤ pf, T (5.30)
203 Pipeline characteristics of importance are submerged
where Pf,T is the relevant target probability according to Sec- weight, diameter stiffness, and roughness of the pipeline sur-
tion 2. The number of discretisation levels must be large face, which shall all be accounted for as relevant for the limit
enough to ensure that the resulting probability is evaluated state in question.
with sufficient accuracy. 204 All relevant effects of load characteristics shall be con-
1204 The inherent uncertainty of the frequency and magni- sidered, including any long term load history effects such as
tude of the accidental loads, as well as the approximate nature varying vertical reactions from installation laying pressures,
of the methods for determination of accidental load effects, and variations in the unit weight of the pipe. Cyclic loading ef-
shall be recognised. Sound engineering judgement and prag- fects are also to be considered.
matic evaluations are hence required. Some soils have different resistance values for long term load-
ing and for short term loading, related to the difference in
Table 5-10 Simplified Design Check versus Accidental loads drained and non-drained behaviour and to creep effects in
Prob. of occur- Safety Class Safety Class Safety Class drained and non-drained condition. This shall be taken into ac-
rence Low Normal High count.
Accidental loads may be regarded similar to envi- 205 For limit states involving or allowing for large displace-
>10-2 ronmental loads and may be evaluated similar to
ULS design check ments (e.g. lateral pull-in, pipeline expansion of expansion
loops or when displacements are allowed for on-bottom condi-
10-2 - 10-3 To be evaluated on a case by case basis tion) the soil will be loaded far beyond failure, involving large
10-3 γC = 1.0 γC = 1.0 γC = 1.0 non-linearities, remoulding of soil, ploughing of soil etc. Such
10-4 γC = 0.9 γC = 0.9 non-linear effects and the uncertainties related to these shall be
Accidental loads or events may considered.
10-5
be disregarded γC = 0.8
206 Due to the uncertainties in governing soil parameters,
<10-6 load effects etc., it is difficult to define universally valid meth-
Note to table: ods for simulation of pipeline soil interaction effects. The lim-
Standard industry practice assumes safety factors equal to 1.0 for an acciden- itations of the methods used, whether theoretically or
tal event with a probability of occurrence equal to 10-4, and survival of the empirically based, shall be thoroughly considered in relation to
pipeline is merely related to a conservative definition of characteristic resist- the problem at hand. Extrapolation beyond documented valid-
ance. In this standard, accidental loads and events are introduced in a more
general context with a link between probability of occurrence and actual fail- ity of a method shall be performed with care, as shall simplifi-
ure consequence. For combined loading the simplified design check proposes cations from the problem at hand to the calculation model
a total factor in the range 1.1-1.2, which is consistent with standard industry used. When large uncertainties exist, the use of more than one
practice interpreted as corresponding to safety class Normal for accidental calculation approach shall be considered.
loads with a probability of occurrence equal to 10-4.
1205 If non-linear, dynamic finite element analysis is ap- E 300 Spanning risers/pipelines
plied, it shall be ensured that system performance and local 301 Spanning risers and pipelines shall have adequate safety
failure modes (e.g. strain rate, local buckling, joint overloading against excessive yielding, fatigue and ovality and these shall
and joint fracture) are adequately accounted for by the models be documented.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

302 For design of free spanning pipelines, reference is made reference is made to RP E305 "On Bottom Stability".
to DNV-RP-F105; "Free Spanning Pipelines".
410 The most unfavourable combination of simultaneously
E 400 On bottom stability acting vertical and horizontal forces on the pipeline shall be
considered. When determining this unfavourable combination,
401 The pipeline shall be supported, anchored in open the variation in forces along the line, including directionality
trench, or buried in such a way that under extreme functional effects of waves and current, shall be addressed.
and environmental loading conditions, the pipeline will not
move from its as-installed position. This does not include per- Guidance note:
missible lateral or vertical movements, thermal expansion, and The transverse pipeline stability may be assessed using three-di-
a limited amount of settlement after installation. mensional dynamic or two-dimensional static analysis methods.
The dynamic analysis methods allow limited pipe movements,
Guidance note: but require accurate three-dimensional modelling. The static
The acceptance criterion on permissible movements may vary analysis method may be expressed by:
along the pipeline route. Examples of possible limitations to
pipeline movements include: γ st ( F D – F 1 ) ≤ µ ( W sub – F L ) (5.31)
- yielding, buckling and fatigue of pipe;
- deterioration/wear of coating; where
- geometrical limitations of supports; and
- distance from other pipelines, structures or obstacles. γst = factor of safety, normally not to be taken as
less than 1.1
FD = hydrodynamic drag force per unit length
402 Liquid or gas pipelines in the air- or gas-filled condition FI = hydrodynamic inertia force per unit length
shall have a specific gravity which is higher than that of the µ = Lateral soil friction coefficient
surrounding sea water (negative buoyancy).
Wsub = submerged pipe weight per unit length
403 When the pipeline is routed in areas that may be influ- FL = hydrodynamic lift force per unit length
enced by unstable slopes, that could lead to slope failure and
flow of soil that will impact the pipeline, the probability of
such slope failures shall be evaluated. Any relevant slope fail-
ure triggering effect, such as wave loading, earthquake loading ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
or man made activities (e.g. the pipe-laying itself), shall be
considered. Possible flow rates and densities at the pipeline 411 The coefficient of equivalent friction, µ may vary within
shall be evaluated for stability. If stability can not be guaran- a wide range depending on the seabed soil, surface roughness,
teed by sufficient weight of the pipeline, by burial of the pipe- weight and diameter of the pipeline. When the pipeline has
line or by other means, re-routing of the pipeline shall be some penetration into the soil, the lateral resistance includes
required. both friction type resistance and resistance due to mobilising
the soil outside the contact surface. In such cases the equiva-
404 For weight calculations of the pipe, the nominal wall lent friction coefficient may vary with the vertical load level.
thickness shall be reduced to compensate for the expected av-
erage weight reduction due to metal loss. For pipelines with 412 Axial (longitudinal) stability shall be checked. The an-
minor corrosion allowance this reduction may be omitted and ode structural connection (when exposed to friction, e.g., pipe-
the nominal thickness used. lines without weight coating) shall be sufficient to sustain the
anticipated friction force.
405 Buried pipelines shall have adequate safety against sink-
ing or flotation. For both liquid and gas pipelines, sinking shall 413 Pipeline movements due to thermal axial expansion,
be considered assuming that the pipeline is water filled, and shall be allowed for near platforms/structures (e.g. at riser tie-
flotation shall be considered assuming that the pipeline is gas in point) and where the pipeline changes direction (e.g. at off-
or air filled (if relevant). set spools). The expansion calculations shall be based upon
406 If the specific submerged weight of the water-filled pipe conservative values for the axial frictional resistance.
is less than that of the soil, then no further analyses are required 414 In shallow water, the repeated loading effects due to
to document safety against sinking. If pipelines are installed in wave action may lead to a reduction of the shear strength of the
soils having a low shear strength, then the soil bearing resist- soil. This shall be considered in the analysis, particularly if the
ance shall be documented. If the soil is, or is likely to be, liq- back fill consists of loose sand which may be susceptible to liq-
uefied, it shall be documented that the depth of sinking will be uefaction.
satisfactorily limited (either by the depth of liquefaction or by
the build-up of vertical resistance during sinking) meeting the 415 If the stability of the pipeline depends on the stability of
requirements of D above. the seabed, the latter should be checked.
407 If the specific submerged weight of the gas- or air-filled E 500 Trawling interference
pipe is less than that of the soil, it shall be documented that the
shear strength of the soil is adequate to prevent flotation. Thus, 501 The pipeline system shall be checked for all three load-
in soils which are or may be liquefied, the specific weight of ing phases due to trawl gear interaction, as outlined in Section
the buried gas- or air-filled pipeline is not to be less than that 4F. For more detailed description, reference is made to the
of the soil. Guideline 13;"Interference between Trawl Gear and Pipe-
lines".
408 Pipelines resting directly on the sea bottom without any
special supporting structures or anchoring devices other than 502 The acceptance criteria are dependent on the trawling
weight coating, shall be designed against sinking as described frequency (impact) and the safety classification (pull-over and
under 405 above. Special considerations shall here be made to hooking) given in Section 2C 400.
mechanical components such as valves and Tee's. 503 The acceptance criteria for trawl impact refer to an ac-
409 It shall be documented that pipelines situated on the sea ceptable dent size. The maximum accepted ratio of permanent
bottom have adequate safety against being lifted off the bottom dent depth to the pipe diameter is:
or moved horizontally. For assessment of horizontal (trans- Hp
verse) stability of pipelines exposed to wave and current loads, ------ ≤ 0.05 η (5.32)
D
DET NORSKE VERITAS

where: F. Pipeline Components and Accessories

Hp = permanent plastic dent depth F 100 General
η = usage factor given in Table 5-11. Load effect factors 101 Criteria for pipeline components and accessories are
equal to unity given in Section 7.
Table 5-11 Usage factor (η) for trawl door impact
Impact frequency Usage factor
(per year per km) η G. Supporting Structure
>100 0
G 100 General
1-100 0.3
10-4-1 0.7 101 All supporting structures shall be designed according to
Offshore Standard OS-C101, "Design of Steel Structures".
504 When allowing for permanent dents, additional failure
G 200 Riser supports
modes such as fatigue and collapse shall be taken into account.
Any beneficial effect of internal over-pressure, i.e. "pop-out" 201 The riser supports should be designed against the possi-
shall not normally be included. The beneficial effects of pro- ble forms of failure with at least the same degree of safety as
tective coating may be taken into account. The impact effec- that of the riser they support. However, if safety considerations
tiveness of coating shall be documented. indicate that the overall safety is increased by a reduction of
the failure load of certain supports, such considerations may
505 Pullover loads shall be checked in combination with oth- govern the support design (weak link principle).
er relevant load effects. All relevant failure modes for lateral 202 For bolted connections, consideration shall be given to
buckling shall be checked. Accumulation of damage due to friction factors, plate or shell element stresses, relaxation, pipe
subsequent trawling is not normally allowed. crushing, stress corrosion cracking, fatigue, brittle failure, and
506 Hooking loads shall be checked in combination with other factors that may be relevant.
other relevant load effects. All relevant failures modes shall be 203 For supports with doubler and/or gusset plates consider-
checked. ation shall be given to lamellar tearing, pull out, element
stresses, effective weld length, stress concentrations and ex-
E 600 Third party loads, dropped objects cessive rotation.
601 The pipeline shall be designed for impact forces caused 204 In clamps utilising elastomeric linings, the long-term
by, e.g. dropped objects, fishing gear or collisions. The design performance of the material with regard to creep, sea water and
may be achieved either by design of pipe, protection or means air or sun light resistance shall be determined.
to avoid impacts. G 300 J-tubes
602 The design criteria shall be based upon the frequency/ 301 An overall conceptual evaluation shall be made in order
likelihood of the impact force and classified as accidental, en- to define the required:
vironmental or functional correspondingly, see D 1200.
— safety class,
E 700 Insulation — impact design, and
— pressure containment resistance.
701 When a submerged pipeline is thermally insulated, it
shall be documented that the insulation is resistant to the com- 302 The J-tube shall be designed against the failure modes
bination of water, temperature and hydrostatic pressure. given in D 100.
702 Furthermore, the insulation should be resistant to oil and Guidance note:
oil-based products, if relevant. The insulation shall also have 301 above includes evaluation of whether the j-tube shall be de-
the required mechanical strength to external loads, as applica- signed for the full design pressure and to which safety class (i.e.
ble. hoop stress usage factors). The J-tube concept may e.g. be based
on "burst disc" which will imply that a lower pressure contain-
703 With respect to corrosion, see Section 8. ment resistance shall be governing.
E 800 Pipe-in-pipe and bundles
801 For pipe-in-pipe and bundle configurations, advantage 303 The J-tube spools should be joined by welding.
may be taken of other loading conditions, e.g. pressure con- G 400 Stability of gravel
tainment for carrier pipe. When determining the safety class,
advantage may also be taken on the reduced failure conse- 401 Gravel applied for mechanical protection of pipelines
quences compared to those of ordinary pipelines. and as sleepers for supporting pipelines in free spans shall have
sufficient stability against hydrodynamic loads. The possibili-
802 The combined effective force for a pipe-in-pipe or a ty of scour for the expected range of water particle velocity
bundle may be calculated using the expression in C 200 for shall be taken into account.
each component and summing over all components. The exter- 402 Gravel sleepers are to have sufficient safety against
nal pressure for each component shall be taken as the pressure slope failure. The shear strength of the underlying soil shall be
acting on its external surface, i.e. the pressure in the void for taken into account.
internal pipes. Release of effective axial force by end expan-
sions, lateral and/or vertical deformations or buckling depends
on how the pipes may slide relatively to each other. Therefore,
analysis of cases where the effective axial force is important, H. Installation and Repair
such as analysis of expansion, buckling and dynamics, requires
accurate modelling of axial restraints such as spacers, bulk- H 100 General
heads etc. 101 The pipeline strength and stability shall be determined
DET NORSKE VERITAS

according to subsection D and E above. straightness of the pipeline. This shall be determined and eval-
Guidance note: uated with due considerations of effects on:
According to this standard, equivalent limit states are used for all — instability:
phases. Hence the design criteria in this section also apply to the
installation phase. Installation is usually classified as a lower — positioning of pipeline components e.g. valves and Tee-
safety class (safety class low) than operation, corresponding to joints; and
lower partial safety factors (higher failure probability). — operation.
202 The possibility of instability due to out of straightness
102 The design analysis for risers and pipelines shall include during installation (twisting) and the corresponding conse-
both installation and repair activities, in order to ensure that quence shall be determined.
they can be installed and repaired without suffering damage or 203 If Tee-joints and other equipment are to be installed as
requiring hazardous installation or repair work. an integrated part of the pipeline assembled at the lay barge, no
103 The design shall verify adequate strength during all rel- rotation of the pipe due to plastification effects shall be permit-
evant installation phases and techniques to be used, including: ted. In this case the residual strain from bending at the over-
bend shall satisfy the following during installation:
— initiation of pipe laying operation,
— normal continuous pipe laying, γ rot ε r ≤ ε r, rot (5.33)
— pipe lay abandonment and pipeline retrieval,
— termination of laying operation, where
— tow out operations (bottom tow, off-bottom tow, control-
led depth tow and surface tow), εr = residual strain from over bend
— pipeline reeling and unreeling, γrot = 1.3 safety factor for residual strain
— trenching and back filling,
— riser and spool installation, εr,rot = limit residual strain from over bend.
— tie-in operations and 204 The above equations only consider rotation due to resid-
— landfalls. ual strain from installation along a straight path. Other effects
104 The configuration of pipeline sections under installation can also give rotation (curved lay route, eccentric weight, hy-
shall be determined from the laying vessel to the final position drodynamic loads, reduced rotational resistance during pulls
on the seabed. The configuration shall be such that the stress/ due to lateral play/elasticity in tensioners/pads/tracks etc) and
strain levels are acceptable when all relevant effects are taken need to be considered.
into account. Discontinuities due to weight coating, buckle ar- 205 Instability during operation, due to out of straightness
restors, in-line assemblies etc. shall be considered. caused by the installation method and the corresponding con-
105 The variation in laying parameters that affect the config- sequences, shall be determined. Residual stresses affecting
uration shall be considered. An allowed range of parameter present and future operations and modifications shall also be
variation shall be established for the installation operation. considered.
106 Critical values shall be determined for the installation 206 The requirement for straightness applies to the assumed
limit condition, see Section 9D 400. most unfavourable functional and environmental load condi-
tions during installation and repair. This requirement also ap-
107 Configuration considerations for risers and pipelines plies to sections of a pipeline where the strains are completely
shall also be made for other installation and repair activities, controlled by the curvature of a rigid ramp (e.g. stinger on in-
and the allowed parameter variations and operating limit con- stallation vessel), whether or not environmental loads are act-
ditions shall be established. ing on the pipe.
108 If the installation and repair analyses for a proposed Guidance note:
pipeline system show that the required parameters cannot be
Rotation of the pipe within the tensioner clamps of the pipe due
obtained with the equipment to be used, the pipeline system to elasticity of the rubber and slack shall be included in the eval-
shall be modified accordingly. uation of the rotation.
109 The flattening due to a permanent bending curvature, to- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
gether with the out-of-roundness tolerances from fabrication of
the pipe shall meet the requirements defined in D 800.
H 300 Coating
H 200 Pipe straightness 301 Concrete crushing due to excessive compressive forces
201 The primary requirement regarding permanent deforma- for static conditions in the concrete during bending at the over-
tion during construction, installation and repair is the resulting bend is not acceptable.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 6
LINEPIPE
A. General pass made on the inside and one pass from the outside of the
pipe. An intermittent or continuous single pass tack weld may
A 100 Scope be made by the gas metal arc welding method. The forming
101 This section specifies the requirements for materials, may be followed by cold expansion to obtain the required di-
manufacture, testing and documentation of linepipe, with re- mensions.
gard to the characteristic properties of materials which shall be Seamless (SML) linepipe
obtained after heat treatment, expansion and final shaping. 403 Linepipe manufactured by a hot forming process with-
102 The requirements are applicable for linepipe in: out welding. In order to obtain the required dimensions, the hot
forming may be followed by sizing or cold finishing.
— Carbon Manganese (C-Mn) steel,
— clad/lined steel, and High Frequency Welded (HFW) linepipe
— corrosion resistant alloys (CRA) including ferritic auste- 404 Linepipe formed from strip (skelp) and welded with one
nitic (duplex) steel, austenitic stainless steels, martensitic longitudinal seam, without the use of filler metal. The longitu-
stainless steels (“13% Cr”), other stainless steels and nick- dinal seam is generated by high frequency current (minimum
el based alloys. 100 kHz) applied by induction or conduction. The weld area
(heat affected area) or the entire pipe shall be heat treated. The
103 Materials, manufacturing methods and procedures that forming may be followed by cold expansion to obtain the re-
comply with recognised practices or proprietary specifications quired dimensions.
are normally acceptable provided such standards comply with
the requirements of this section. Electron Beam (EBW) and Laser Beam Welded (LBW) line-
pipe
A 200 Material specification 405 Linepipe formed from strip (skelp) and welded with one
201 A material specification referring to this section (Section longitudinal seam, with or without the use of filler metal. The
6) of the offshore standard shall be prepared stating additional forming may be followed by cold expansion to obtain the re-
requirements and/or deviations to materials, manufacture, fab- quired dimensions.
rication and testing of linepipe. Clad steel (C) linepipe
202 The specification shall reflect the results of the materials 406 Clad steel linepipe can be manufactured by any manu-
selection (see Section 5B 500) and shall include specific, de- facturing process which guarantees a metallurgical bond be-
tailed requirements to the properties of the linepipe. The spec- tween the base metal and the cladding.
ified properties of materials and weldments shall be consistent
with the specific application and operational requirements of Lined steel (L) linepipe
the pipeline system. Suitable allowances shall be included for 407 Lined steel linepipe can be manufactured by any process
possible degradation of the mechanical properties resulting which guarantees a mechanical bonding between the base and
from subsequent fabrication and installation activities. lining material.
203 The specification may be a Material Data Sheet (MDS) 408 Welding procedures, welding consumables, welding
referring to this standard. The MDS should include specific re- personnel, handling of welding consumables, and the execu-
quirements in places where this standard gives options, e.g. tion of welding shall meet the requirements of Appendix C.
chemical composition, supplementary requirements, require-
ments subject to agreement etc.
204 Specific requirements to the manufacturing processes
shall be stated in the Manufacturing Procedure Specification B. Linepipe Designations
(MPS) (see E 300). The type and extent of testing, the applica-
ble acceptance criteria for verifying the properties of the mate- B 100 Linepipe NDT levels
rial, and the extent and type of documentation, records and 101 C-Mn steel linepipe and the C-Mn steel section of clad /
certification shall be stated in the MPS. lined steel pipes with longitudinal or helical weld seams have,
in this offshore standard, been divided into two (2) NDT lev-
A 300 Pre-qualification of materials and manufacturers els; NDT Level I and NDT Level II. NDT Level I has more
301 Pre-qualification of materials based on the media to be stringent requirements to NDT of the pipe longitudinal or hel-
transported, loads, temperatures and service conditions, shall ical weld seam.
be considered in order to verify that the materials will fulfil 102 Linepipe with NDT Level I allows use of displacement
functional requirements. controlled criteria (strain based design), whereas NDT Level II
302 Requirements for the pre-qualification of manufacturers is restricted to load controlled conditions (see Section 5B 500
shall be considered in each case. The consideration shall take and C 100).
into account the complexity and criticality of the product to be
supplied, and the requirements of this standard. B 200 Supplementary requirements
201 Linepipe to this standard may be provided meeting sup-
A 400 Process of manufacture plementary requirements for:
401 The linepipe shall be manufactured according to one of
the following processes: — sour service , suffix S (see D 100),
— fracture arrest properties , suffix F (see D 200),
Submerged Arc-Welded (SAWL or SAWH) linepipe — linepipe for plastic deformation, suffix P (see D 300),
402 Linepipe manufactured by forming from strip or plate — enhanced dimensional requirements for linepipe, suffix D
and with one longitudinal (SAWL) or spiral (helical) (SAWH) (see D 400), and
seam formed by the submerged arc process, with at least one — high utilisation, suffix U (see D 500).
DET NORSKE VERITAS

202 The supplementary requirements shall be addressed in 106 If the cold forming during pipe manufacture of C-Mn
the MPS and the required tests shall be included in the qualifi- and clad/lined steels exceeds 5% strain, strain ageing tests
cation of the MPS. shall be performed on the actual pipe without any straightening
and additional deformation. Strain ageing tests shall conform
B 300 Designations to Table 6-11. The absorbed energy shall not be less than 50%
301 Carbon Manganese linepipe and clad/lined steel pipes, of the energy absorption obtained in the un-aged linepipe ma-
to be used to this standard, shall be designated with: terial, and the required Charpy V-notch impact properties of
Table 6-3 shall be met in the aged condition. The testing shall
— process of manufacture (see A 400), be performed in accordance with Appendix B.
— SMYS,
— NDT level (see B 100 and, 107 Testing of Charpy V-notch impact properties shall, in
— supplementary requirement suffix (see B 200). general, be performed on test specimens 10x10mm. Where test
pieces with a width < 10mm are used, the measured impact en-
e.g. "SML 450 I S" designates a seamless pipe with SMYS 450 ergy (KVm) and the test piece cross-section measured under
MPa, NDT Level I and meeting sour environment require- the notch (A) (mm2) shall be reported. For comparison with the
ments. values in Table 6-3 the measured energy shall be converted to
the impact energy (KV) in Joules using the formula :
e.g. “SAWL 415 II L - UNS XXXXX” designates a submerged
arc welded pipe, with SMYS 415 MPa, NDT level II, lined
with a UNS designated material. 8 × 10 × KV m
KV = --------------------------------- (6.1)
302 Duplex stainless steel linepipe to be used to this standard A
shall be designated with:
— process of manufacture (see A 400), C 200 Carbon Manganese (C-Mn) steel linepipe
— grade (see C 300), and 201 These requirements are applicable to welded or seamless
— supplementary requirement suffix (see B 200). linepipe in C-Mn steel with SMYS up to 555 MPa. Use of
e.g. “SML 22Cr D” designates a seamless 22Cr grade meeting higher strength shall be subject to agreement.
the enhanced dimensional requirements. Chemical composition
202 The chemical composition of C-Mn steel parent materi-
als shall be within the limits given in Table 6-1 and Table 6-2
C. Material Properties for the appropriate yield stress levels. The chemical composi-
tion of mother pipes for bends shall be within the limits given
C 100 General in Section 7.
101 Requirements for steel making, chemical analysis, pipe Mechanical properties
manufacture, type and extent of mechanical testing and NDT
are given in E below. 203 Mechanical testing shall be performed after heat treat-
ment, expansion and final shaping. The testing shall be per-
102 For pipe OD > 300 mm, tensile properties shall be tested formed in accordance with Appendix B.
in both transverse and longitudinal direction to the pipe axis,
while the Charpy V-notch samples shall be tested only in the 204 Requirements for tensile and Charpy V-notch properties
transverse direction. All mechanical and corrosion testing shall are given in Table 6-3 and Table 6-4. Welds shall meet the re-
be conducted in accordance with Appendix B. quirement for KVT impact properties given in Table 6-3.
103 For pipe OD ≤ 300 mm, all mechanical testing shall be 205 Unless sour service is specified (see D 100), the hard-
conducted in the longitudinal direction. All mechanical and ness in the Base Material (BM) and weld (weld metal + HAZ)
corrosion testing shall be conducted in accordance with Ap- shall comply with Table 6-3.
pendix B.
206 Fracture toughness testing of the Base Material (BM)
104 If materials shall be used at a design temperature above and the Weld Metal (WM) (welded linepipe) shall be conduct-
50°C, the yield stress at the Tmax may be determined during the ed as part of the qualification (Table 6-11 and Table 6-12). The
qualification of the manufacturing procedure specification. measured fracture toughness of the BM and the WM, shall as
This information shall be obtained either by use of the curves a minimum have a CTOD value of 0.20 mm when tested at the
in Sec.5 B600 or by testing. minimum design temperature. The testing shall be performed
105 When applicable, linepipe to this standard shall also in accordance with Appendix B A 800. Testing is not required
meet the appropriate supplementary requirements. for pipes with tnom < 13 mm.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-1 Welded C-Mn steel linepipe, chemical composition1) 2) 3) 4)

Product analysis, maximum weight %
SMYS 245 290 360 415 450 485 555
C 5) 0.14 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.14
Mn 5) 1.35 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.75 1.85
Si 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
P 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
S 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Cu 0.35 0.35 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Ni 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Mo 0.10 0.10 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Cr 6) 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Al (total) 7) 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
Nb 8) 9) - 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
V 8) - 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10
Ti 8) - 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
N 7) 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
B 10) 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005
CE 11) 0.36 0.34 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.41 0.44
P cm 12) 0.19 0.19 0.20 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.25
Notes
1) Chemical composition applies for wall thicknesses up to 35 mm and shall be subject to agreement for larger wall thicknesses.
2) When scrap material is being used in steel production, the amount of the following residual elements shall be determined and reported, and the levels shall
not exceed: 0.03% As, 0.01% Sb, 0.02% Sn, 0.01% Pb, 0.01% Bi and 0.006% Ca.
3) When calcium is intentionally added, the Ca/S ratio shall be = 1.5 when S > 0.0015.
4) Except for deoxidation elements, other elements than those mentioned in this table shall not be intentionally added if not specifically agreed.
5) For each reduction of 0.01% carbon below the maximum specified value, an increase of 0.05% manganese above the specified maximum values is per-
mitted with a maximum increase of 0.1%.
6) 0.5-1.0% Cr may be used subject to agreement.
7) Al:N ≥ 2:1 (not applicable for titanium killed steels).
8) (Nb+V+Ti)%maximum: 0.12%. This value may be increased to maximum 0.15% subject to agreement.
9) For SMYS = 485 MPa and for cladded material, the Nb content may be increased to 0.10% subject to agreement.
10) Boron (max 30 ppm) may be added subject to agreement.
11) CE = C + Mn Cr + Mo + V Cu + Ni
-------- + ------------------------------- + -------------------
6 5 15
12) Si Mn + Cu + Cr Ni Mo V
P cm = C + ------ + ------------------------------------ + ------ + -------- + ------ + 5B
30 20 60 15 10
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-2 Seamless C-Mn steel linepipe, chemical composition 1) 2) 3)

Product analysis, maximum weight %
SMYS 245 290 360 415 450 485 555
C 4) 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.16
Mn 4) 1.35 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.75 1.85
Si 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
P 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
S 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Cu 0.35 0.35 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Ni 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Mo 0.10 0.10 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Cr 5) 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Al (total) 6) 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
Nb 7) - 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06
V 7) - 0.04 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.10
Ti 7) - 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.06
N 6) 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
B 8) 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005
CE 9) t ≤ 15 0.34 0.34 0.37 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.43
15< t<26 0.35 0.35 0.38 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.44
- - - - -
Pcm10) t ≤ 15 0.20 0.20 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.26
15≤ t<26 0.21 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25 0.27
Notes
3) Except for deoxidisation elements, other elements than those mentioned in this table shall not be intentionally added if not specifically agreed.
5) 0.5-1.0% Cr may be used subject to agreement.
6) Al:N ≥ 2:1 (not applicable for titanium killed steels)
7) (Nb+V+Ti)% maximum : 0.12% This value may be increased to maximum 0.15% subject to agreement.
9) Mn Cr + Mo + V Cu + Ni
CE = C + -------- + ------------------------------- + -------------------
6 5 15
10) P Si Mn + Cu + Cr Ni Mo V
= C + ------ + ------------------------------------ + ------ + -------- + ------ + 5B
cm 30 20 60 15 10
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-3 C-Mn steel linepipe, mechanical properties 1) 2)

SMYS SMTS YS (Rt0.5) Maximum Elongation Charpy V-notch Notes
(MPa) 3) (MPa)4) UTS (Rm) Hardness A5 energy (KVT)
(T+L) (T) max 5) (HV 10) min.% minimum J 6) 1) The requirements are applicable for testing in the trans-
(αh) (T) BM, WM, (T+L) Mean Single
verse (T) and longitudinal (L) direction, as stated in
HAZ brackets for each column.
245 370 0.90 270 22 27 22 2) Reference is given to C201.
290 415 0.90 270 21 30 24 3) The actual yield stress in the longitudinal direction shall
360 460 0.90 270 20 36 30 not exceed SMYS by more than 120 MPa.
415 520 0.92 270 18 42 35 4) SMTS in the longitudinal direction, can be 5% less than
450 535 0.92 270 18 45 38 the required values in transverse direction.
485 570 0.92 300 18 50 40 5) The YS/UTS ratio in the longitudinal direction shall not
555 625 0.92 300 18 56 45 exceed the maximum specified value in the transverse di-
rection, by more than 0.020 for standard material, and
more than 0.030 for sour service material.
6) The KVL values (when tested) shall be 50% higher than
the required KVT values.
Table 6-4 C-Mn steel linepipe, Charpy V-notch testing temperatures T0 (ºC) as a function of Tmin (ºC) (Minimum Design Temper-
ature)
Nominal wall RISERS PIPELINES Notes
Thickness (mm) Gas 1) Liquid 1) 1) Mixed gas and liquid (s) are to be regarded as
t ≤ 20 T0 = Tmin - 10 T0 = Tmin - 10 T0 = Tmin gas.
20< t ≤ 40 T0 = Tmin - 20 T0 = Tmin - 20 T0 = Tmin - 10 2) Increasing thicknesses will require lower test
t > 40 T0 = to be agreed in each case 2) temperatures. Alternatively higher absorbed en-
ergy at the same temperature shall be required.
C 300 Ferritic-austenitic (duplex) steel Mechanical properties

301 The requirements are applicable to welded and seamless 305 Mechanical testing shall be performed after heat treat-
linepipe in 22Cr and 25Cr Duplex stainless steel grades ac- ment, expansion and final shaping. Requirements for tensile
cording to ASTM A790 (Standard Specification for Seamless and Charpy V-notch properties are given in Table 6-6. Weld-
ment shall meet the requirement for KVT impact properties.
and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe), or an ac-
cepted equivalent standard. 306 Unless sour service requirements apply (see D 100), the
hardness in the Base Material (BM) and the weld (weld metal
Chemical composition + HAZ) shall comply with Table 6-6.
302 The chemical composition of duplex stainless steel par- 307 Fracture toughness testing of the Base Material (BM)
ent materials shall be within the limits given in Table 6-5. and the Weld Metal (WM) (welded linepipe) shall be conduct-
Modifications are subject to agreement. ed as part of the qualification (Table 6-11 and Table 6-12). The
measured fracture toughness of the BM and the WM shall, as
Metallographic examination a minimum, have a CTOD value of 0.20mm when tested at the
303 Metallographic examination of the base material and of minimum design temperature. The testing shall be performed
the weld metal root, the weld metal cap, and the heat affected in accordance with Appendix B A 800. Testing is not required
for pipes with tnom < 13mm.
zone in the root area of welded pipe shall be performed and
comply with requirements in 304 below. Corrosion testing
304 Metallographic examination shall be performed after fi- 308 Corrosion testing according to ASTM G 48 shall be per-
formed in order to confirm adequate manufacturing procedures
nal solution heat treatment. The examination shall be conduct- affecting the microstructure of 25 Cr Duplex stainless steel.
ed at 400X magnification. The material shall be essentially For 25 Cr duplex with a specified PRE value of minimum 40,
free from grain boundary carbides, nitrides and intermetallic testing to ASTM G 48 shall be performed in accordance with
phases after solution heat treatment. The ferrite content shall Appendix B. The maximum allowable weight loss is 4.0 g/m2
be measured according to ASTM E562 (Standard Practice for for solution annealed material tested 24 hours at 50°C.
Determining Volume Fraction by Systematic Manual Point 309 If testing to ASTM G 48 shall be performed for duplex
Count). Base material ferrite content shall be within the range stainless steel with a PRE value less than 40, the testing tem-
35-55%. For weld metal root, weld metal cap, and heat affect- perature and/or acceptance criteria shall be subject to agree-
ed zone, the ferrite content shall be within the range 35-65%. ment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-5 Ferritic-austenitic duplex steel linepipe, chemical composition

Element 1) Product analysis, weight %
Grade Grade
22 Cr 25 Cr
C 0.030 max 0.030 max
Mn 2.00 max 1.20 max
Si 1.00 max 1.00 max
P 0.03 max 0.035 max
S 0.020 max 0.020 max
Ni 4.50 - 6.50 6.0 - 8.0
Cr 21.00 - 23.00 24.0 - 26.0
Mo 2.50 - 3.50 3.0 - 4.0
N 0.14 - 0.20 0.20 - 0.34
PRE 2) 40 min 2)
Notes
1) If other alloying elements than specified in this table are being used, the elements and the maximum content shall be agreed in each case.
2) PRE = %Cr+3.3%Mo+16%N. A minimum PRE valueof 40 is recommended for pipelines to convey raw (i.e. not deoxygenated) seawater and any similar
application
Table 6-6 Ferritic-austenitic duplex steel linepipe, mechanical properties 1)

SMYS 2)4) SMTS Maximum Elongation Charpy V-notch
YS ( R t0.5 ) Hardness A5 energy (KVT)
------------------------ (HV10) min. % min. J at
Grade UTS ( R ) m T0 = Tmin - 20ºC 5)
max
MPa MPa
3)
( αh )
BM WM Mean Single
HAZ
22 Cr 450 620 0.90 290 350 25 45 35

25 Cr 550 750 0.90 330 350 15 45 35
Notes
1) Reference is given to C301.
2) The actual yield stress in the longitudinal direction shall not exceed SMYS by more than 120 MPa.
3) The YS/UTS ratio in the longitudinal direction shall not exceed the value achieved in the transverse direction by more than 0.02.
4) For design temperatures above 50 ºC, the yield stress at the maximum design temperature (Tmax) shall comply with the requirements
stated in Section 5B 600.
5) The required KVL values shall be 50% higher than the required KVT values.
C 400 Other stainless steel and nickel based corrosion sisting of a C-Mn steel base material and a thinner internal me-
resistant alloy (CRA) linepipe tallic layer.
401 The requirements below are applicable to austenitic 502 Linepipe is denoted "clad" if the bond between base and
stainless steels, martensitic (“13% Cr”) stainless steels and cladding material is metallurgical, and "lined" if the bond is
nickel based CRAs. mechanical.
402 The linepipe shall be supplied in accordance with a rec- 503 The cladding and the lined material shall be compatible
ognised standard that defines the chemical composition, me- with the service requirements and shall be determined and
chanical properties and all the issues listed in Section 5 B500 agreed in each case. The cladding/lined material thickness
and as specified in the following. If a recognised standard is shall not be less than 2.5 mm.
not available, a specification shall be prepared that defines Supply condition
these requirements.
504 Clad/lined linepipe shall be supplied in the heat-treat-
403 For martensitic stainless steels (“13% Cr”) the same re- ment condition that is appropriate for both types of material.
quirements for fracture toughness as for C-Mn steels shall ap-
ply (see 206). Chemical composition and mechanical properties of base ma-
terial
Corrosion testing
505 The chemical composition of the base material shall
404 The same requirements as stated in 308 for duplex stain- comply with the requirements to C-Mn steel for linepipe given
less steel shall apply for other stainless steel and nickel based in Table 6-1 and Table 6-2.
corrosion resistant alloys with a specified PRE value of mini-
mum 40. 506 The mechanical properties of the base material shall
meet the requirements in Table 6-3 and Table 6-4. Mechanical
Metallographic examination of welds testing shall be performed after heat treatment, expansion and
405 Metallographic examination at a magnification of 400X final shaping.
of the weld metal and the HAZ shall be performed. The mate- 507 Fracture toughness testing of the Base Material (BM)
rial shall be essentially free from grain boundary carbides, ni- and the Weld Metal (WM) (welded linepipe), shall be conduct-
trides and intermetallic phases after solution heat treatment. ed as part of the qualification (Table 6-12 and Table 6-13). The
measured fracture toughness of the BM and the WM shall, as
C 500 Clad/lined steel linepipe a minimum, have a CTOD value of 0.20mm, when tested at the
501 The requirements below are applicable to linepipe con- minimum design temperature. The testing shall be performed
DET NORSKE VERITAS

in accordance with Appendix B A 800. Testing is not required In order to improve HAZ toughness, it is essential to refine the
for pipes with tnom < 13mm. grain size and suppress the formation of bainite with M/A con-
stituents.
508 The cladding/lining material shall be removed from the
test pieces prior to testing.
Chemical composition of cladding/lined material 603 The linepipe supplier shall provide information with re-
gard to appropriate Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) tem-
509 Cladding/lined materials shall primarily be selected on perature for the respective materials.
the basis of requirements to corrosion resistance, including
SSC. The chemical composition of cladding materials shall be Pre-production weldability testing
specified according to recognised standards. If a recognised 604 For qualification of pipeline materials and welding con-
standard is not available, a specification shall be prepared that sumables, a weldability testing programme as specified below
defines these requirements. Applicable requirements in C 300 should be performed. The type and extent of testing, and the
and C 400 shall be met. acceptance criteria for weldability testing shall be agreed in
each case.
Chemical composition of weld metal
605 Relevant documentation may be agreed in lieu of the
510 The welding consumables shall be selected taking into weldability testing.
consideration the reduction of alloying elements by dilution of
iron from the base material. C-Mn steels and martensitic (“13% Cr”) stainless steels
Metallographic examination of welds 606 For steels with SMYS ≥ 415 MPa, the weldability test-
ing/documentation shall, as a minimum, include bead on plate,
511 Metallographic examination of the weld metal and the Y-groove, and also fracture toughness tests of base material
HAZ in the root area of the cladding material, shall be per- and HAZ. In addition, for steels with SMYS ≥ 450 MPa, met-
formed at a magnification of 400X. The microstructure shall allographic examination should be conducted to establish the
be essentially free from grain boundary carbides, nitrides and presence of LBZs. The testing program shall be in accordance
intermetallic phases. with Table 6-11, Table 6-12 and Appendix C. The maximum
and minimum heat inputs giving acceptable properties in the
Properties of clad material and linepipe weld zones of the linepipe, with corresponding preheat temper-
512 Two bend tests from each plate/strip shall be bent 180× atures and working temperatures, shall be determined for both
around a former with a diameter three times the plate thick- fabrication and installation welding.
ness. One test piece shall be bent with the cladding material in 607 For materials where only limited practical experience
tension, the other with the cladding material in compression. exists, the programme may further include HAZ thermal cy-
After bending there shall be no sign of cracking or separation cling tests, continuous cooling transformation tests, delayed
on the edges of the specimens. The bend test shall be carried cracking tests and controlled thermal severity tests.
out in as specified Appendix B.
Duplex stainless steel
513 Shear testing in accordance with Appendix B shall be 608 For duplex stainless steel, the weldability testing / docu-
performed as required in Table 6-11 and Table 6-12. The min- mentation shall determine the effect of thermal cycles on the
imum shear strength shall be 140 MPa. mechanical properties, hardness, and microstructure. The max-
514 Hardness testing of welded linepipe shall be performed imum and minimum heat inputs giving an acceptable ferrite/
on a test piece comprising the full cross section of the weld. In- austenite ratio and a material essentially free from intermetal-
dentations shall be made in the base material, the cladding ma- lic phases shall be determined for both fabrication and instal-
terial and the metallurgical bonding area as detailed in lation welding. Allowances for repair welding shall be
Appendix B. included.
515 The hardness of base material, cladding material, HAZ, Other stainless steels and nickel based alloys
weld metal and the metallurgical bonding area shall meet the 609 For austenitic stainless steels and nickel based CRA's,
relevant requirements of this standard (see Table 6-3 and the weldability testing/documentation shall determine the ef-
Table 6-6). fect of thermal cycles on the mechanical properties, hardness
and microstructure. The range of heat inputs giving properties
C 600 Weldability shall be determined for both fabrication and installation weld-
ing, including allowances for repair welding.
601 Steels shall have adequate weldability for all stages of
manufacture, fabrication and installation of the pipeline, in- Clad/lined steel linepipe
cluding field and contingency conditions, hyperbaric welding 610 For clad/lined linepipe, the weldability of the base mate-
and anode installation. rial shall be tested/documented as required in 604 and 605. For
602 Welding and repair welding procedures, welding per- the cladding/lining material, the weldability testing/documen-
sonal, handling of welding consumables, and the execution of tation shall determine the dilution effects and the effect of ther-
welding shall meet the requirements in Appendix C. mal cycles on the mechanical properties, hardness and
microstructure. The range of heat inputs giving acceptable
Guidance note: properties shall be determined for both fabrication and instal-
Local brittle zones (LBZs) can be formed in the HAZ of C-Mn lation welding. Allowances for repair welding shall be includ-
microalloyed steels. These areas tend to exhibit very low cleav- ed.
age resistance, resulting in low CTOD values. The LBZs are as-
sociated with the sections of the HAZ's that are experiencing
grain coarsening during the welding operation. The microstruc-
ture in these zones consists predominantly of a bainitic structure, D. Supplementary Requirements
with a large amount of martensite/austenite (M/A) constituents
(BI-microstructure). The M/A constituents, as opposed to ferrite/ D 100 Supplementary requirement, sour service (S)
carbide aggregate such as pearlite, may have a detrimental affect
on the material's toughness. This should particularly be kept in 101 For pipelines to be used for fluids containing hydrogen
mind when selecting the chemical composition for steels with sulphide and defined as "sour service" according to NACE
SMYS ≥ 450 MPa. Standard MR0175 (Sulphide Stress Cracking Resistant Metal-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

lic Materials for Oil Field Equipment), all requirements to ma- Table 6-8 Chemical composition of seamless C-Mn steel line-
terials selection, maximum hardness, and manufacturing and pipe for supplementary requirement, sour service
fabrication procedures given in the latest edition of the said Product analysis, maximum weight %
standard shall apply. This includes pipelines which are nomi-
nally dry (i.e. free from liquid water during normal operation) SMYS (MPa) Up to 360 415 450
if other conditions for sour service according to the above C max. 0.12 0.13 0.14
standard are valid. Further, the additional requirements, modi- Mn max. 1.35 1.45 1.55
fications and clarifications defined below shall apply. P max. 0.015 0.015 0.015
102 Use of linepipe materials not listed for sour service in S max. 0.003 0.003 0.003
NACE MR0175 (latest edition) and not covered by this section Cu max. 0.35 0.35 0.35
shall be qualified according to the guidelines of the said docu- Ni max. 0.30 0.30 0.30
ment. As an alternative, the guidelines for qualification in EFC Mo max. 0.10 0.10 0.10
Publications No. 16 and No.17 may be used for C-Mn and Cr max. 0.30 0.30 0.30
CRA linepipe respectively. The qualification shall include P cm max. 0.20 0.21 0.22
testing of Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) resistance of base
materials and welds (seam welds and girth welds, as applica- 107 Additional requirements to steel making as given in
ble). E.403 shall apply.
108 Welded linepipe resistance to Hydrogen Pressure In-
Guidance note: duced Cracking (HPIC) shall be verified by testing (ref. Ap-
SSC-testing as specified in the referenced NACE and EFC doc- pendix B) during qualification of the MPS and linepipe
ument has a duration of 720 hours and is, as such, unsuitable for manufacturing, as stated in E 800.
purchase release purposes.
Guidance note:
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking (HPIC) as used in this doc-
ument is frequently referred to as either Hydrogen Induced
103 Qualification is also applicable to linepipe materials list- Cracking (HIC) or Stepwise Cracking (SWC).
ed for sour service in NACE MR0175, in case hardness or oth- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
er requirements relating to manufacturing or fabrication
deviate from those in this document. 109 During welding procedure qualification and production,
hardness measurements shall be performed as given in Appen-
Guidance note: dix B. The hardness in the base material, weld and HAZ shall
It may also be considered to specify SSC testing of grades meet- not exceed 250 HV10 in the root area, and 275 HV10 in the cap
ing all requirements for sour service in this standard, as a part of area.
a program for pre-qualification of linepipe manufacturing or in- Guidance note:
stallation procedures. It is recommended to specify a maximum hardness of 220 HV10
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- for the base material in order to allow for hardness increase dur-
ing girth welding.
104 All welding procedures (including repair welding) shall ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
be qualified and include hardness testing as specified in Ap-
pendix C, Paragraph E. Duplex steel linepipe
110 Linepipe grades, associated hardness criteria, and re-
C-Mn steel linepipe quirements to manufacturing/fabrication shall comply with
105 C-Mn steels with SMYS exceeding 450 MPa are not NACE MR0175 (latest edition). During welding procedure
covered by NACE MR0175 (as per 1998), and shall be pre- qualification and production, hardness measurements shall be
qualified for sour service as stated in 102 unless later included performed as given in Appendix B. For 22 Cr Duplex and 25Cr
Duplex, the hardness in the weld shall not exceed 310 HV10
in the said document. and 330 HV10 respectively.
106 The chemical composition shall be modified as given in Clad/lined steel linepipe
Table 6-7 and Table 6-8. Other elements not listed in these ta-
bles shall be in accordance with Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 re- 111 Materials selection for cladding/lining, the associated
hardness criteria, and requirements to manufacturing and fab-
spectively. The notes given Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 shall rication shall comply with NACE MR0175 (latest edition).
apply. The same applies to welding consumables for weldments ex-
posed to the internal fluid. The selection of the C-Mn steel base
Table 6-7 Chemical composition of welded C-Mn steel linepipe material is not subject to any special sour service requirements.
for supplementary requirement, sour service
Product analysis, maximum weight % 112 During qualification of welding procedures and produc-
tion, hardness measurements shall be performed as indicated in
Appendix B. The hardness in the internal heat-affected zone
SMYS (MPa) Up to 360 415 450
and in the fused zone of the cladding/lining shall comply with
C max. 0.10 0.10 0.10 relevant requirements of NACE MR0175 (latest edition).
Mn max. 1.35 1.45 1.55
P max. 0.015 0.015 0.015 D 200 Supplementary requirement, fracture arrest
S max. 0.003 0.003 0.003
properties (F)
Cu max. 0.35 0.35 0.35 201 The requirements to fracture arrest properties are valid
Ni max. 0.30 0.30 0.30 for gas pipelines carrying essentially pure methane up to 80%
usage factor, up to a pressure of 15 MPa and to 30mm wall
Mo max. 0.10 0.10 0.10 thickness. Fracture arrest properties outside these limitations,
Cr max. 0.30 0.30 0.30 or for less severe conditions, shall be subject to agreement (see
P cm max. 0.19 0.20 0.21 Section 5D 1100). Charpy toughness values for fracture arrest
DET NORSKE VERITAS

given in Table 6-9 are valid for full size (10 mm x 10 mm) curve shall be established for the linepipe base material in the
specimens. strain-aged condition. The plastic deformation shall be equal to
C-Mn steel linepipe the actual deformation introduced during manufacturing (no
additional straining is required). The samples shall be aged for
202 A Charpy V-notch transition curve shall be established
for the linepipe base material. Five sets of specimens shall be 1 hour at 250°C. Five sets of specimens shall be tested at dif-
tested at different temperatures, including Tmin. The Charpy V- ferent temperatures, including Tmin. The Charpy V-notch ener-
notch energy value in the transverse direction and at Tmin shall, gy value in the transverse direction, and at Tmin, shall not be
as a minimum, meet the values given in Table 6-9. The values less than 50% of the energy absorption obtained in the unde-
obtained in the longitudinal direction, when tested, shall be at formed/un-aged condition (see 202), and shall as a minimum,
least 50% higher than the values required in the transverse di- meet the values given in Table 6-9 in the deformed and aged
rection. condition. Values obtained at other test temperatures are for in-
203 This paragraph shall apply for all linepipes to be deliv- formation. The values obtained in the longitudinal direction,
ered without a final heat treatment (normalising or quench and when tested, shall at least be 50% higher than the values re-
tempering) of the entire pipe. A Charpy V-notch transition quired in the transverse direction.
Table 6-9 Charpy V-notch Impact Test Requirements for Fracture Arrest Properties tested at Tmin (Joules; Transverse Values;
Average value of three specimens) 1)
Wall ≤ 30 mm 2)
thickness
OD (mm) Notes
≤ 610 ≤ 820 ≤ 1120
SMYS 1) Minimum individual results to exceed 75% of
245 40 40 40 these values
290 40 43 52 2) Fracture arrest properties for larger wall thick-
nesses and diameters shall be subject to agree-
360 50 61 75 ment (see Section 5 D800)
415 64 77 95
450 73 89 109
485 82 100 124
555 103 126 155
204 Drop Weight Tear (DWT) testing shall only be per- materials are subject to agreement. The following additional
formed on linepipe with outer diameter > 500 mm, wall thick- requirements and modifications for linepipe material and di-
ness > 8 mm, and SMYS > 360 MPa. The DWT testing shall mensional tolerances shall apply.
include testing of one set for each of the following five temper- Guidance note:
atures: -70, -50, -30, 0 and +20°C. If one of these temperatures
equals the minimum design temperature, the set shall be tested Strain hardening capacity is an essential parameter for pipes
which are to be exposed to large plastic strain, ref. e.g. Section
10°C below this temperature. Two additional sets shall be test- 12K 400.
ed at the minimum design temperature. Each set shall consist
of two specimens taken from the same test coupon. The test The requirements of supplementary requirement P are hence of-
shall be performed in accordance with Appendix B. The spec- ten hard to meet for material grades with SMYS exceeding 415
MPa.
imens tested at the minimum design temperature shall as a
minimum, meet an average of 85% shear area with one mini- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
mum value of 75%.
303 The dimensional tolerances should meet supplementary
205 For linepipe material with SMYS ≥ 450 MPa and a wall requirements for enhanced dimensional requirements for line-
thickness ≥ 25 mm, the acceptance criteria stated in 204 (aver- pipe (D) in D 400.
age and minimum shear area) may be subject to agreement
when supplementary requirements for sour service (D 100) are 304 The finished pipe is recommended to meet the following
specified concurrently with supplementary requirements for requirements prior to being tested according to 305:
fracture arrest (D 200).
— the measured yield stress of base material should not ex-
Duplex stainless steel linepipe ceed SMYS by more than 100 MPa,
206 A Charpy V-notch transition curve shall be established — the YS/TS ratio should not exceed 0.85, and
for duplex stainless steel base material. Five sets of specimens — the elongation should be minimum 25%.
shall be tested in the temperature range from - 80 ºC to +20 ºC.
The Charpy V-notch energy value in the transverse direction, 305 Mechanical testing shall be performed on samples re-
at the Tmin, shall be according to Table 6-6. moved from finished pipe. The samples shall be successively
Clad/lined steel linepipe deformed by uni-axial tension and compression, in steps corre-
sponding to those of the installation process. εp shall be at least
207 For clad/lined steel linepipe, the requirements as for C- equal to the εp introduced during installation and service. The
Mn steels apply to the base material. samples shall be artificially aged at 250°C for one hour before
testing. The testing shall be conducted in accordance with Ap-
D 300 Supplementary requirement, linepipe for plastic pendix B.
deformation (P)
306 The testing shall include:
301 Supplementary requirement (P) is only applicable for
seamless linepipe material made of C-Mn and duplex stainless — tensile testing,
steels, exposed to an accumulated plastic strain from installa- — hardness testing, and
tion and operation, εp ≥ 2% (see Section 5D 800 and Section — Charpy V-notch impact toughness testing. Test tempera-
9E). ture shall be according to Table 6-4 or Table 6-6 as rele-
302 Requirements for welded linepipe and linepipe in other vant.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

307 The following requirements shall be met after straining Re-testing

(see 305): 508 If the result from the mandatory testing falls below
— longitudinal yield stress and tensile strength shall meet the SMYS, four (4) re-tests taken from four (4) different pipes (a
requirements of Table 6-3 or Table 6-6 as relevant, total of 4 tests), within the same test unit, shall be tested.
— the YS/TS ratio shall not exceed 0.97, If the four re-tests meet SMYS, the test unit is acceptable.
— the elongation shall be minimum 15%, If one of the re-tests fall below SMYS the test unit shall be re-
— Charpy V-notch impact toughness shall be according to jected.
Table 6-3 or Table 6-6 as relevant, and
— the hardness shall meet the requirements in C.205 or 509 If one or both of the confirmatory tests fail to meet
C.306 as relevant. SMYS, two (2) re-tests taken from each of two (2) different
pipes within the same test unit shall be tested for each of the
Subject to agreement, a higher yield stress may be accepted for failed confirmatory tests (a total of 4 tests).
duplex stainless steel pipes for use in umbilicals. If all re-tests meet SMYS, the test unit is acceptable.
308 If the supplementary requirement for sour service (S) If any of the re-tests fall below SMYS, the test unit shall be re-
and/or fracture arrest properties (F) is required, the testing for jected.
these supplementary requirements shall be performed on sam-
ples that are removed, strained and artificially aged in accord- 510 Re-testing of failed pipes is not permitted.
ance with 305. The relevant acceptance criteria shall be met. 511 If the test results are influenced by improper sampling,
machining, preparation, treatment or testing, the test sample
D 400 Supplementary requirement, dimensions (D) shall be replaced by a correctly prepared sample from the same
401 Supplementary requirements for enhanced dimensional pipe, and a retest performed.
requirements for linepipe (D) are given in E 1200 and Table 6- 512 If a test unit has been rejected after re-testing (508, 509
15. above), the Manufacturer may conduct individual testing of all
402 Requirements for tolerances should be selected consid- the remaining pipes in the test unit. If the total rejection of all
ering the influence of dimensions and tolerances on the subse- the pipes within one test unit exceeds 15%, including the pipes
quent fabrication/installation activities and the welding failing the mandatory and/or confirmatory tests, the test unit
facilities to be used. shall be rejected.
513 In this situation, the Manufacturer shall investigate and
D 500 Supplementary requirement, high utilisation (U) report the reason for failure and shall change the manufactur-
501 Supplementary requirements for high utilisation (U) ing process if required. Re-qualification of the MPS is required
shall be applied for linepipe material utilised in accordance if the agreed allowed variation of any parameter is exceeded
with Section 5B 600, and should also, in general, be applied for (see E.304).
linepipe material with SMYS = 450 MPa. The provided test
scheme is valid for production in excess of 50 lots. Supplemen-
tary requirement U shall be conducted in addition to the re-
quirements specified in E 800. Supplementary requirement U E. Manufacture
does only consider the SMYS in the transverse direction.
E 100 General
502 The test regime given in this sub-section intend to ensure
that the average yield stress is at least two standard deviations 101 The following requirements are applicable to the manu-
above SMYS and the ultimate strength is at least three standard facture of linepipe in C-Mn, duplex, and clad/lined steel.
deviations above SMTS. The testing scheme applies to produc- 102 Manufacture of linepipe in other metallic materials shall
tion in excess of 50 lots. Alternative ways of documenting the be performed according to a specification that meets the re-
same based upon earlier test results in the same production is quirements of A 200 and applicable requirements of this sub-
allowed. section.
503 The objective of the extended test program specified be- E 200 Quality Assurance
low is to ensure a high confidence in achieving consistent yield
stress for linepipe materials subjected to high utilisation during 201 Manufacturers of linepipe shall have an implemented
service. The supplementary requirement U only considers the quality assurance system meeting the requirements of ISO
yield stress of the material. All other properties shall be tested 9002. Further requirements to quality assurance are given in
in accordance with E 800. Section 2B 500.
Mandatory mechanical testing E 300 Manufacturing Procedure Specification and
504 The testing frequency shall comply with E.805. Qualification
505 If the results from the mandatory testing meet the re- Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS)
quirement SMYS x 1.03, no further testing is required in order 301 Before production commences, the Manufacturer shall
to accept the test unit (see E.804). prepare an MPS. The MPS shall demonstrate how the specified
506 If the result from the mandatory testing falls below properties may be achieved and verified through the proposed
SMYS, the re-test program given in 508 shall apply. manufacturing route. The MPS shall address all factors which
influence the quality and reliability of production. All main
Confirmatory mechanical testing manufacturing steps from control of received raw material to
507 If the mandatory test result falls between SMYS x 1.03 shipment of finished pipe, including all examination and check
and SMYS, then two (2) confirmatory tests taken from two (2) points, shall be covered in detail. References to the procedures
different pipes (a total of two tests) within the same test unit established for the execution of all steps shall be included.
shall be performed. 302 The MPS shall as a minimum contain the following in-
If the confirmatory tests meet SMYS, the test unit is accepta- formation:
ble. — plan(s) and process flow description/diagram;
If one or both of the confirmatory tests fall below SMYS, the — project specific quality plan;
re-test program given in 509 shall apply. — manufacturing process (see A 400) ;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— manufacturer and manufacturing location of raw material oxygen decarburisation before casting.
and/or plate for welded pipes; 403 For steel to be used for linepipe meeting the supplemen-
— raw material scrap content including allowable variation; tary requirement for sour service (see D 100), special attention
— steelmaking process, casting process, alloying practice, to impurities and inclusion shape control shall be required. De-
rolling or working condition and heat treatment, including tails of the inclusion shape control treatment shall be given in
target values and proposed allowable variation in process the MPS.
parameters;
— target values for chemical composition, including a critical 404 Before undergoing plate/strip/pipe forming, the slabs/in-
combination of intended elements and proposed allowable gots shall be inspected and fulfil the surface finish require-
variation from target values; ments specified in the MPS.
— pipe forming process;
— alignment and joint design for welding and production E 500 Manufacture of plate and strip
WPS (see Appendix C); Manufacturing
— final heat treatment condition;
— method for cold expansion/sizing/finishing, target and 501 All manufacturing of plate and strip shall be performed
maximum sizing ratio; following the sequence of activities and within the agreed al-
— NDT procedures; lowable variations of the qualified MPS. The manufacturing
— pressure test procedures; practice and the instrumentation used to ensure proper control
— list of specified mechanical and corrosion testing; of the manufacturing process variables and their tolerances
— dimensional control procedures; shall be described in the MPS.
— pipe number allocation; 502 The following requirements shall apply for the manufac-
— pipe tracking procedure; turing:
— marking, coating and protection procedures;
— handling, loading and shipping procedures, and — the mill shall have proper control of start and finish rolling
— reference to applicable supplementary requirements (see temperature, rolling reduction and post-rolling cooling
B 200). rate (i.e. accelerated cooling);
— plate and strip thickness shall be controlled by continuous-
303 The MPS shall be subject to agreement. ly operating devices;
Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Test (MPQT) — heat treatment shall be controlled by temperature measur-
304 The MPS shall be qualified for each pipe size. Each ing devices;
MPQT shall include full qualification of two pipes from two — plate and strip edges shall be cut back sufficiently after
different lots (see 809). The minimum type and extent of rolling, to ensure freedom from defects; and
chemical, mechanical, and non-destructive testing are given in — strip end welds shall not be permitted unless specifically
Table 6-11, Table 6-12 and Table 6-13, and the acceptance cri- agreed.
teria for qualification of the MPS are given in this section.
Testing shall be performed as described in Appendix B and Non-destructive testing
Appendix D. 503 The following NDT shall be performed either at the
305 Qualification of welding procedures shall be performed plate/strip mill, or at the pipe mill:
in accordance with Appendix C.
— full ultrasonic testing of plate and strip, or pipe body, for
306 For C-Mn steels with SMYS ≥ 450 MPa, duplex stain- laminar imperfections;
less steels and clad/lined steels the qualification of the MPS — full ultrasonic testing of clad plate, or clad pipe body, for
should be completed prior to start of production. Qualification laminar imperfections and lack of bonding;
during first day of production is performed at Manufacturer's — full ultrasonic testing of the edges of plate/strip covering
own risk. at least a 50 mm wide band on the inside of future weld
307 Additional testing may be required (e.g. weldability test- preparations.
ing, analysis for trace elements for steel made from scrap, etc.)
as part of the qualification of the MPS. The ultrasonic testing shall meet the requirements of Appendix
D. All NDT shall be performed after final heat treatment of the
308 The validity of the qualification of the MPS shall be lim- plate or strip.
ited to the steelmaking, rolling, and manufacturing /fabrication
facilities where the qualification was performed. Workmanship, visual examination and repair of defects
309 If one or more tests in the qualification of the MPS fail 504 Plates and strip shall be subject to 100% visual examina-
to meet the requirements, the MPS shall be reviewed and mod- tion on both sides. The inspection shall be performed in a suf-
ified as necessary, and a complete re-qualification performed. ficiently illuminated area (approximately 500 lx) by trained
310 For C-Mn steels with SMYS < 450 MPa that are not in- personnel with sufficient visual acuity (e.g. Jaegar J-w eye-
tended for sour service, relevant documentation may be agreed sight test at 300 mm within the last 12 months). The surface
in lieu of qualification testing. finish produced by the manufacturing process, shall ensure that
surface imperfections can be detected by visual inspection.
E 400 Steel making 505 The surface finish produced by the manufacturing proc-
401 All steel making shall be performed using the raw mate- ess, shall ensure that surface imperfections can be detected by
rials stated in the qualified MPS, follow the same activity se- visual inspection. Cracks, notches and gouges are not accepta-
quence, and stay within the agreed allowable variations. The ble. Other imperfections such as scabs, seams, laps, tears, sliv-
manufacturing practice and instrumentation used to ensure ers, impressed mill scale etc. shall only be acceptable if not
proper control of the manufacturing process variables and their exceeding 2% of the nominal wall thickness, with a maximum
tolerances shall be described in the MPS. of 0.5 mm. The actual remaining wall thickness shall be above
402 All steels shall be made by an electric or one of the basic the minimum allowable wall thickness (Table 6-14, Table 6-15
oxygen processes. C-Mn steel shall be fully killed and made to as applicable). Surface defects shall not appear over large are-
a fine grain practice. Details and follow-up of limiting macro, as.
as well as micro, segregation shall be given in the MPS. Du- 506 Surface defects in the plate or strip may be removed by
plex stainless steel shall be refined by argon oxygen or vacuum local manual grinding provided that:
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— the wall thickness is not in any position reduced to a value 605 Clad/lined steel linepipe shall be supplied in the heat
below the minimum allowed, and never more than 3 mm; treatment condition which is appropriate for both types of ma-
and terial. The heat treatment shall be in line with the steel Manu-
— the sum of all ground areas does not exceed 10% of the to- facturer's recommendations.
tal surface area of each plate or strip. Cold expansion and cold sizing
507 Grinding by the use of automatic equipment may be per- 606 The extent of cold sizing and cold forming expressed as
formed subject to agreement. the sizing ratio sr , shall be calculated according to the follow-
ing formula:
508 Grinding may introduce cold working and hardnesses
incompatible with the service requirements for plate and strip sr =(Da - Db) / Da
intended to meet the supplementary requirements for sour where
service (see D 100). In such cases hardness testing may be re-
quired in order to permit grinding. Da is the outside diameter after sizing
509 Repair of plate and strip by welding is not permitted. Db is the outside diameter before sizing
Mechanical testing of clad steel plate and strip Traceability
510 Clad steel plate and strip shall be tested according to, 607 A system for traceability of the heat number, heat treat-
and meet the requirements given in, C 500. ment batch, lot number and test unit number of the starting ma-
terial and the records from all required tests to each individual
E 600 Linepipe manufacture pipe shall be established and described in the MPS. Care shall
be exercised during storage and handling to preserve the iden-
601 Manufacturing of linepipe shall be performed using the tification of materials.
starting materials specified, following the sequence of activi-
ties, and within the agreed allowable variations and the essen- Manufacture of seamless pipe
tial variables of the qualified WPS (see Appendix C). Jointers 608 The manufacturing practice and the instrumentation
should not be permitted. used to ensure proper control of the manufacturing process
Processes of manufacture variables and their tolerances shall be described in the MPS:
602 Manufacture of linepipe shall be in accordance with one — wall thickness shall be controlled by continuously operat-
of the processes given in A 400. ing devices;
Starting material and supply conditions — pipe ends shall be cut back sufficiently after rolling to en-
sure freedom from defects; and
603 Linepipe in C-Mn steel for Tmin ≤ +5°C shall be manu- — pipes may be sized to their final dimensions by expansion
factured using the starting materials and corresponding form- or reduction. This shall not produce excessive permanent
ing methods and final heat treatment as given in Table 6-10. strain. In cases of cold sizing, where no further heat treat-
604 Duplex stainless steel pipe shall be delivered in solution- ment is performed, the sizing ratio, sr shall not exceed
annealed and water-quenched condition. 0.015.
Table 6-10 C-Mn steels, forming and heat treatment conditions

Type of pipe Starting Material Pipe forming Final heat treatment
Hot rolling Normalised or normalising formed
Quenched and tempered
Seamless pipe (SML) Ingot and continuously cast
Hot rolling and Normalised
cold finishing Quenched and tempered
Normalising rolled strip Normalised weld area
Thermo-mechanically rolled strip Heat treated weld area
Cold forming
Entire pipe normalised
High frequency Entire pipe quenched and tempered
welded pipe (HFW)
Hot rolled or normalising rolled strip Cold forming and hot
stretch under controlled
temperature, resulting in a None
normalised condition
Submerged arc Normalised or normalising rolled plate or strip
welded pipe None, unless required due to degree
Thermo-mechanically rolled plate or strip
Cold forming of cold forming
— longitudinal seam Quenched and tempered plate or strip
(SAWL) Soft annealed plate or strip Quenching and tempering
— helical seam As-rolled plate or strip Normalising
(SAWH) forming None
Normalised or normalising rolled plate or strip
Manufacture of welded pipe — plate and strip shall be cut to the required width and the
weld bevel prepared by milling or other agreed methods
609 Welding procedures, welding personnel, handling of before forming;
welding consumables and the execution and quality assurance — cold forming (i.e. below 250°C) of C-Mn steel shall not in-
of welding, shall meet the requirements of Appendix C. troduce a plastic deformation exceeding 5% for clad and
C-Mn steels, unless heat treatment is performed or strain
610 The manufacturing practice including forming, welding ageing tests show acceptable results (see C.106);
and heat treatment, and the methods used to control manufac- — normalised forming of materials and weldments shall be
turing process variables and their tolerances, shall be described performed as recommended by the Manufacturers of the
in the MPS. The following requirements apply: plate/strip and welding consumables;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— run-on and run-off tabs shall be of sufficient length such and the tests required for production testing are denoted "P".
that the welding arcs are stabilised before the welding pool Testing of other materials than those listed in Table 6-11 and
enters the pipe material, and the entire welding pool has Table 6-12 shall be subject to agreement, however, the testing
left the pipe material before stop of welding; should, as a minimum incorporate the testing stated in these ta-
— high-frequency welded pipes should not contain strip end bles.
welds;
Mechanical and corrosion testing
— spiral welded pipes should not contain strip weld connec-
tions; 805 Mechanical testing during manufacturing shall be per-
— the strip width for spiral welded pipes, should not be less formed on one randomly selected pipe from each lot, (see 809)
than 0.8 and not more than 3.0 times the pipe diameter; or once per 50 pipes, whatever gives the highest testing fre-
— arc stops during welding shall be repaired according to a quency. This number of pipes is denoted; "test unit".
qualified welding repair procedure; 806 HPIC testing during manufacturing shall be performed
— cold expansion for SAWL pipe should be within the range on one randomly selected pipe from each of the three (3) first
0.003 < sr ≤ 0.015. Expansion shall not introduce high lo- heats, or until three consecutive heats have shown acceptable
cal deformations; test results.
— HFW and SAWH pipes may be sized to their final dimen-
sions by expansion or reduction. This shall not produce ex- After three consecutive heats have shown acceptable test re-
cessive permanent strain. In cases of cold sizing, where no sults, the testing frequency for the subsequent production may
further heat treatment or only heat treatment of the weld be reduced to one per casting sequence. The Ca/S ratio shall be
area is performed, the sizing ratio, sr , shall not exceed greater than 1.5 (see Table 6-1).
0.015;
807 If any of the tests during the subsequent testing fail (one
— welded clad steel linepipe shall be formed, welded and test per casting sequence), three pipes from three different
heat treated as recommended by the starting material Man- heats of the last ten heats, selecting the heats with the lowest
ufacturer; Ca/S ratio, shall be tested. Providing these three tests show ac-
— heat treatment shall be performed as recommended by the ceptable results, the ten heats are acceptable. However, if any
material Manufacturer with regard to heating and cooling of these three tests fail, then all the ten heats shall be tested.
rates, soaking time, and soaking temperature; Further, one pipe from every heat following the initially failed
— the outside and/or internal weld bead shall be ground flush heat shall be tested until the test results from three consecutive
to an agreed length at both pipe ends. heats have been found acceptable. After three consecutive
heats have shown acceptable test results, the testing frequency
E 700 Chemical analysis may again be reduced to one test per casting sequence.
701 Product analysis during manufacture shall, as a mini-
mum, be performed on one randomly selected plate/pipe from 808 In order to accept or reject a particular heat, re-testing
each lot (see 809) or once per 100 plates/pipes, whatever gives shall be conducted in accordance with 811 to 815.
the highest test frequency. 809 A 'lot' is defined as pipes from:
702 Methods and procedures for chemical analysis shall be
according to recognised industry standards, and be referred to — the same heat,
in the MPS. — the same heat treatment batch (if applicable), and
703 All elements listed in Table 6-1, Table 6-2 or Table 6-5 — the same diameter and wall thickness.
as relevant shall be determined and reported. Other elements
added for controlling the material properties may be added, 810 For linepipe material subjected to a high utilisation (see
subject to agreement. When scrap material is being used for Section 5), supplementary requirements for high utilisation
production of C-Mn steel, the content of the elements As, Sb, (U) shall apply (D 500), in addition to the requirements given
Sn, Pb, Bi and Ca shall be checked once during MPS/MPQ and in E 800.
reported, and meet the requirements given in Table 6-1 and Ta- Re-testing
ble 6-2. Limitations on amount of scrap metal shall then be
stated in the MPS. 811 If one of the tests fails to meet the requirements, two ad-
ditional re-tests shall be performed on samples taken from two
704 If the value of any elements, or combination of elements different pipes within the same test unit. Both re-tests shall
fails to meet the requirements, a re-test consisting of two spec- meet the specified requirements. The test unit shall be rejected
imens shall be made. The re-test specimens shall be sampled if one or both of the re-tests do not meet the requirements.
from two additional pipes from the same heat. If one or both
re-tests still fail to meet the requirements, the heat should be re- 812 If a test unit has been rejected, the Manufacturer may
jected. conduct individual testing of all the remaining pipes in the test
unit. If the total rejection of all the pipes within one test unit
E 800 Mechanical and corrosion tests exceeds 25%, the test unit shall be rejected. In this situation the
801 Requirements for methods and procedures for mechani- Manufacturer shall investigate and report the reason for failure
cal and corrosion testing are given in Appendix B. and shall change the manufacturing process if required. Re-
qualification of the MPS is required if the agreed allowed var-
802 Sampling for mechanical and corrosion testing shall be iation of any parameter is exceeded (see 304).
performed after heat treatment, expansion and final shaping.
Location of the samples shall be as shown in Appendix B. The 813 Re-testing of failed pipes shall not be permitted. If a pipe
samples shall not be flame cut or prepared in a manner that fails due to low CVN values in the fusion line (HAZ), testing
may influence their mechanical properties. of samples from the same pipe may be performed subject to
agreement.
803 Samples intended for strain age testing shall be taken
from pipes that have been subjected to the maximum expan- 814 The reason for the failure of any test shall be established
sion allowed. and appropriate corrective action performed to avoid re-occur-
rence of test failures.
804 The mechanical and corrosion testing shall include the
testing shown in Table 6-11 and Table 6-12 as applicable. The 815 If the test results are influenced by improper sampling,
tests required for qualification of the MPS are denoted "Q", machining, preparation, treatment or testing, the test sample
DET NORSKE VERITAS

shall be replaced by a correctly prepared sample from the same Table 6-12 Seamless linepipe - mechanical and corrosion test-
pipe and a retest performed. ing 1)
Type of test Pipe material
Table 6-11 Welded linepipe - mechanical and corrosion
testing 1) C-Mn Duplex Clad/lined
steel Steel Steel
Pipe material
Tensile tests Q&P Q&P Q & P 2)
Type of test Location C-Mn Duplex Clad/
Steel Steel lined Charpy V-notch test Q&P Q&P Q & P 2)
Steel Weldability tests 3) Q Q Q
Tensile test Pipe body Q&P Q&P Q & P2) Hardness test 4) Q&P Q&P Q&P
Weldment Q&P Q&P Q & P2) Metallographic Q Q&P Q&P
Charpy V-notch test Pipe body Q&P Q&P Q & P2) examination
Weldment Q&P Q&P Q & P2) Fracture toughness test Q Q Q 2)
Pitting corrosion test 5) - Q&P Q&P
Bend test Weldment Q&P Q&P -
Shear strength and bend - - Q&P
Hardness test 3) Pipe body Q&P Q&P Q&P tests 6)
Weldment Q&P Q&P Q&P
Additional testing for supplementary requirement, sour service
Macro examination Weldment Q Q Q (S) (see D 100)
Metallographic Pipe body Q(&P9) Q&P Q&P Type of test Pipe material
examination Weldment Q Q&P Q&P
C-Mn Duplex Clad/lined
Fracture toughness Pipe body Q Q Q2) steel Steel Steel
test Weldment Q Q Q2)
SSC test 7) Q Q Q
Strain ageing test 4) Pipe body Q - Q
Additional testing for supplementary requirement, fracture ar-
Weldability testing 5) Q Q Q rest properties (F) (see D 200)
Pitting corrosion Pipe body - Q&P Q&P Type of test Pipe material
test 6) Weldment - Q&P Q&P
C-Mn Duplex Clad/lined
Shear strength and Pipe body - - Q&P steel Steel Steel
bend tests 7)
Charpy V-notch Q Q Q 2)
Additional testing for supplementary requirement, sour service transition curve test
(S) (see D 100)
Strain ageing transition Q - Q 2)
Type of test Location Pipe material curve test
C-Mn Duplex Clad/ Drop weight tear test Q - Q 2)
Steel Steel lined
Steel Additional testing for supplementary requirement, pipe for
plastic deformation (P) (see D 300)
HPIC test Pipe body Q & P
Type of test (tests to be Pipe material
SSC test 8) Pipe body Q Q Q done on strained and
Weldmen Q Q Q aged material)
Additional testing for supplementary requirement, fracture ar- C-Mn Duplex Clad/lined
rest properties (F) (see D 200) steel Steel Steel
Type of test Location Pipe material Tensile test Q Q Q 2)
C-Mn Duplex Clad/ Charpy V-notch test Q Q Q 2)
Steel Steel lined
Steel Notes
Charpy V-notch Pipe body Q Q Q2) 1) All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
transition curve test Appendix B
Strain aging transition Pipe body Q - Q2) 2) Test of base material only.
curve test 3) Test shall be performed unless otherwise agreed (see C 600).
Drop weight tear test Pipe body Q - Q2) 4) Acceptance criteria are different for sour and ordinary service.
Notes 5) See C.308/C.309, and C.404.
1) All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 6) See C.512 and C.513.
Appendix B 7) Not applicable for materials meeting all Supplementary Requirements
2) Test of base material and weld metal. for sour service in D 100.
3) Acceptance criteria are different for sour and ordinary service. E 900 Non-destructive testing
4) Only when cold forming during pipe manufacture of C-Mn and clad/
lined steels exceeds 5% strain (see C.106). General
5) Test shall be performed unless otherwise agreed (ref. C600). 901 Linepipe shall be subjected to non-destructive testing
6) See C.308/C.309, and C.404. (NDT). Requirements for personnel, methods, equipment, pro-
7) See C.512 and C.513. cedures and acceptance criteria for NDT are given in Appendix
8) Not applicable for materials meeting all supplementary requirements D.
for sour service in D 100.
902 When automated NDT equipment is used, a short area at
9) HFW, EBW and LBW pipes, only.
both pipe ends may not be tested. The untested ends may either
be cut off or the ends subjected to NDT, as detailed in Appen-
dix E. The extent of untested ends and description of the tech-
nique, sensitivity and parameters used for testing of the pipe
ends shall be included in the MPS.
903 NDT of linepipe shall be performed after completion of
all cold straightening, forming, heat treatment and expansion.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Type and extent of non-destructive testing 905 If deviations from the requirements are found, the extent
904 NDT for qualification of the MPS and during production of testing shall be increased as agreed until a consistent com-
shall be carried out according to Table 6-13. pliance to the given requirements is re-established.
Table 6-13 Type and extent of non-destructive testing 1)

C-Mn steels and clad steel
Method 2) Duplex steel
NDT Level I NDT Level II
ALL PIPE
Scope of testing
Laminar imperfections at pipe ends covering a UT 100% 100% 100%
circumferential band 50 mm wide
Laminar surface imperfections at end face/bevel ST 100% 100% 100%
Imperfections in untested ends UT+ST 100% 100% 100%
Residual magnetism - 5% 5% -
WELDED PIPE
Scope of testing
Longitudinal imperfections in weld UT 100% 100% 100%
Transverse imperfections in weld 3) UT 100% 5% 100%
Imperfections in extreme 300 mm of weld at each pipe end RT 100% 100% 100%
Laminar imperfections in pipe body and in area adjacent UT 100% 100% 100%
to weld seam (unless tested on plate/strip, see 503)
External surface imperfections in weld ST 4) 4) 4)
SEAMLESS PIPE
Scope of testing
Laminar imperfections in pipe body UT 100% 100% 100%
Thickness testing UT 100% 100/10% 5) 100%
Longitudinal imperfections, pipe body UT 100% 100% 100%
Transverse imperfections, pipe body UT 100/10% 5) - 100/10% 5)
Longitudinal surface imperfections ST 100/10% 5) 100/10% 5) 100/10% 5)
Transverse surface imperfections ST 100/10% 5) 100/5% 6) 100/10% 5)
NOTES
1) All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Appendix D.
2) UT = Ultrasonic testing
ST = Surface imperfection testing. Acceptable methods are detailed in Appendix D
RT = Radiographic testing.
3) Testing for transverse imperfections is not applicable for High Frequency Welded (HFW), electron beam (EBW) and laser welded (LBW) pipe.
4) Testing to include the first 20 pipes and, if acceptable results are obtained, thereafter 3% of the pipes from each welding line, on each shift, with a min-
imum of one pipe and a maximum of 5 per 8 hour shift
5) 100/10% = 100% testing of the first 20 pipes manufactured and if acceptable results are obtained, thereafter random testing during the production of 10%
of the remaining pipes.
6) 100/5% = 100% testing of the first 20 pipes manufactured and if acceptable results are obtained, thereafter random testing during the production of 5%
of the remaining pipes. Applicable only to quench and tempered pipe
E 1000 Visual inspection, workmanship and correction of ceptable. Other imperfections such as scabs, seams, laps, tears,
defects slivers, impressed mill scale etc. shall only be acceptable if not
Visual inspection exceeding 2% of the nominal wall thickness, and with a maxi-
mum of 0.5 mm. The acceptance limit for surface imperfec-
1001 Each linepipe shall be subject to 100% visual inspections on seamless pipes is 5% of the nominal wall thickness.
tion of the outside of the pipe body. The actual remaining wall thickness shall be above the mini-
1002 For pipe with an internal diameter (ID) ≥ 610 mm, the mum allowable wall thickness (Table 6-14, Table 6-15 as ap-
interior of the pipe shall be 100% visually inspected. For pipe plicable). Surface defects shall not appear over large areas.
with an ID < 610 mm, the interior shall be inspected from both 1005 The pipe surface of cold-formed welded linepipe shall
ends as far as access permits. Boroscopes or similar devices have an even curvature without "flats" along the longitudinal/
should be used to extend the access. The interior of duplex spiral weld seam, local thinning, steps and wavy edges. Dents,
stainless steel and clad/lined material should be 100% visual offset at plate edges, and out-of-line weld bead shall not ex-
inspected. ceed the limits given in Appendix D.
1003 The inspection shall be performed after heat treatment, 1006 Irregularities in the pipe curvature of cold-formed
expansion and final shaping, and in a sufficiently illuminated welded linepipe that may be caused by uneven hardness distri-
area (approximately 500 lx) by trained personnel with suffi- bution shall be investigated to determine the hardness and di-
cient visual acuity (e.g. Jaegar J-w eyesight test at 300 mm mensions of the area. Any hard spot exceeding 50 mm in any
within the last 12 months). direction shall not have a hardness exceeding values given in
Workmanship Table 6-3, Table 6-6 as relevant.
1004 The surface finish produced by the manufacturing For linepipe intended to meet the supplementary requirements
process shall ensure that surface imperfections can be detected for sour service, there shall be no hard spots with hardness ex-
by visual inspection. Cracks, notches and gouges are not ac- ceeding:
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— 250 HV10 internally and 275 HV10 externally, for C-Mn based on the minimum pipe wall thickness tmin.
steel; and Guidance note:
— for other steels, maximum allowable hardness according
The von Mises Equivalent stress shall be calculated as:
to NACE MR0175 latest edition.
2 2
Regardless of their size, no hard spots outside the hardness re- σe = σh + σl –σh ⋅ σl
quirements for the applicable material are allowed within 100
mm of the pipe ends. where
1007 The weld seam of welded linepipe shall meet the ac-
h p ⋅ (D – t min )
ceptance criteria for visual examination given in Appendix D. σ h = ----------------------------------
-
2 ⋅ t min
Correction of defects
N
1008 Surface defects in the pipe body and weld seam (weld- σ l = -----
ed pipes) may be removed by local manual grinding provided As
that:
— the wall thickness is not in any position reduced to a value N = True pipe wall force which depend on the
below the minimum allowed, and never more than 3 mm; test set up end restraints.
and (tmin is equivalent to t1 in Section 5)
— the sum of all ground areas does not exceed 10% of the to-
tal internal and external surface area of each pipe. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
1009 More extensive grinding may by performed by the use 1105 In cases where the specified corrosion allowance re-
of automatic equipment. stricts the test pressure due to mill testing capacity, the test
pressure shall be ph= 1.5·pld, where pld is the local design pres-
1010 Weld repair of pipe body is not permitted. sure.
1011 Repair welding of the weld seam is allowed for SAWL 1106 The test configuration shall permit bleeding of trapped
and SAWH pipes only and shall be performed in accordance air prior to pressurisation of the pipe. The pressure test equip-
with qualified welding repair procedures. Requirements for ment shall be equipped with a calibrated recording gauge. The
welding repair procedures are given in Appendix C. Repair applied pressure and the duration of each hydrostatic test shall
welding may only be performed subject the following limita- be recorded together with the identification of the pipe tested.
tions: The equipment shall be capable of registering a pressure drop
of minimum 2% of the applied pressure. The holding time at
— repair welding within a distance of 150 mm of the pipe test pressure shall be minimum 10 seconds. Calibration records
ends shall not be allowed, for the equipment shall be available.
— repair welding of cracks shall not be allowed,
— total repair length in any weld shall not exceed 10% of the 1107 Each pipe shall withstand the test pressure without any
weld length, sign of leakage, sweats or permanent deformation. Linepipe
— repair welding of previously repaired areas shall not be al- that fails the hydrostatic test shall be rejected.
lowed, 1108 Subject to agreement, the hydrostatic testing may be
— repair by welding after cold expansion shall not be al- omitted for expanded pipes manufactured by the UOE process.
lowed, It shall in such situations be documented that the expansion
— the distance between two weld repair areas shall not be process and subsequent pipe inspection will:
less than 150 mm,
— repair by welding after final heat treatment shall not be al- — ensure that the pipe material stress-strain curve is linear up
lowed, to a stress corresponding to 1103,
— through thickness repair shall not be allowed, and — identify defects with the potential for through-thickness
— hydrostatic testing and subsequent NDT shall be per- propagation under pressure loading, and
formed or repeated after weld repair. — identify pipes subject to excessive permanent deformation
under pressure loading to a degree equivalent to that pro-
E 1100 Mill pressure test vided by hydrostatic testing.
1101 Each length of linepipe shall be hydrostatically tested, Workmanship and inspection shall be at the same level as for
unless the alternative approach described in 1108 is used. hydrostatically tested pipe.
1102 For pipes with reduced utilisation of the wall thickness, The expansion process parameters and inspection results shall
the test pressure (ph) may be reduced as permitted in Section be recorded for each pipe.
5D 400.
1103 The test pressure (ph) for all other pipes shall, in situa- E 1200 Dimensions, weight and lengths
tions where the seal is made on the inside or the outside of the 1201 The extent of dimensional testing and dimensional tol-
linepipe surface, be conducted at the lowest value obtained by erances are given in Table 6-14 and Table 6-15. If deviations
utilising the following formulae: from the requirements are found, the extent of testing shall be
increased as agreed until a consistent compliance to the given
2 ⋅ t min requirements is re-established.
p h = -------------------- ⋅ min [ SMYS ⋅ 0.96 ;SMTS ⋅ 0.84 ] (6.2)
D – t min 1202 All test equipment shall be calibrated. The methods to
be used for monitoring dimensions, shall be in accordance with
1104 In situations where the seal is made against the end face the requirements given in 1204 to 1213.
of the linepipe by means of a ram or by welded on end caps,
and the linepipe is exposed to axial stresses, the test pressure 1203 All specified tests shall be recorded as acceptable or
shall be calculated such that the maximum combined stress not acceptable. Wall thickness measurements shall be recorded
equals; for 10% of the specified tests. All other results shall be record-
ed for 100% of the specified tests.
σ e = min [ SMYS ⋅ 0.96 ;SMTS ⋅ 0.84 ] (6.3) Diameter of pipe ends and pipe body
DET NORSKE VERITAS

1204 The actual diameter of pipe ends and body shall be cal- fied nominal diameter. The distance between pipe body and
culated based on circumferential measurements taken within the correct curvature shall be measured. Dial type gauges may
100 mm from each pipe end and for the pipe body, at the loca- be used subject to agreement.
tions given in Table 6-14 or Table 6-15 as relevant. Unless oth- Wall thickness at pipe end and pipe body
erwise agreed, the diameter tolerance shall relate to the inside
diameter for pipe ends and outside diameter for pipe body. A 1208 The wall thickness shall be measured with a mechani-
circumferential tape or calliper gauge can be used. External cal calliper or calibrated non-destructive testing device. Meas-
measurements shall be corrected by using the actual wall thick- urements for seamless pipe shall be taken in the same positions
ness. as specified in 1206. For welded pipe three measurements shall
be taken; on both sides of the weld immediately adjacent to the
Out-of-roundness for pipe ends and pipe body weld, and directly opposite to the weld.
1205 The out-of-roundness for pipe ends shall be calculated
by the following formula: Straightness
1209 Straightness measurements shall be taken using a taut
O = D max – D min (6.4) string or wire from end to end along the pipe measuring the
greatest deviation or by other equivalent methods.
where
Preparation of pipe ends and end squareness.
O = out-of-roundness in mm 1210 Pipe ends shall be cut square and shall be free from
Dmax = the largest measured inside or outside diameter burrs. The out of squareness shall be measured. End prepara-
tions shall meet the specified dimensions and tolerances.
Dmin = the smallest measured inside or outside diameter
Radial offset (High-Low)
Unless otherwise agreed, out-of-roundness values shall relate 1211 The radial offset shall be measured at regular intervals
to the inside diameter for pipe ends, and to outside diameter for along the length of the pipe. If radial offset is equal to or ex-
pipe body. ceeds the acceptance criterion, the entire length of the pipe
1206 The largest and smallest inside diameters shall be shall be accurately measured.
measured at a minimum of four equally spaced positions Weight
around the circumference. Pipe end measurements shall be tak-
en in the same cross-sectional plane, within 100 mm from the 1212 Each pipe/pipe bundle shall be weighed separately and
pipe end. Body measurements shall be taken in the same cross- the weight recorded.
sectional plan, approximately in the middle of the pipe length. Length
Local out-of-roundness. 1213 The length of each pipe shall be measured and record-
1207 Local out-of-roundness, dents and peaking, shall be ed. The individual length and the average length of the deliv-
measured internally (when access permits) and externally, us- ered pipes shall meet the specified dimensions and tolerances,
ing a gauge with the correct curvature according to the speci- as given in the purchase order.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-14 Standard dimensional requirements for linepipe

Characteristic to be tested Extent of Welded pipe Seamless pipe
testing
Diameter pipe ends D1) ≤ 610 mm R 2) ±0.5 mm or ± 0.5% D 1) (whichever is greater), but max. ± 1.6 mm
1)
Diameter pipe ends D > 610 mm R 2) ± 1.6 mm ± 2.0 mm
Greatest difference in pipe diameter 2)
R 12.5% t
between pipe ends (each pipe measured)
Diameter pipe body, D ≤ 610 mm
1) R 2) 4) ± 0.5 mm or ± 0.75% D 1) ± 0.5 mm or ± 0.75% D1) whichever
(whichever is greater), but max. is greater)
± 3.0 mm
Diameter pipe body D1) > 610 mm R 2) 4) ± 0.5% D1), but max. ± 4.0 mm ± 1% D 1)
Out-of-roundness, pipe ends D/t ≤ 75
3) R 2) 1)
1.0% D , but max. 7.5 mm
Out-of-roundness, pipe ends, D/t3) > 75 R 2) 1.5% D 1) , but max. 7.5 mm
Out-of-roundness, pipe body, D/t ≤ 75
3) R 2) 4) 1.5% D 1) , but max. 15.0 mm
3)
Out-of-roundness, pipe body, D/t > 75 R 2) 4) 2.0% D1) , but max. 15.0 mm
Local out-of-roundness 5) R 2) 1)
< 0.5% D , but max. 2.5 mm -
Wall thickness, t3) ≤ 15 mm 100% 6) ± 0.75 mm ± 12.5% t 3)
Wall thickness, 15 < t3) < 20 mm 100% 6) ± 1.0 mm ± 12.5% t 3)
Wall thickness, t ≤ 20 mm
3) 100% 6) + 1.5 mm / - 1.0 mm ± 10% t , but max. ± 3 mm
3)
Straightness R 2) ≤ 0.15% L
End squareness R 2) ≤ 1.6 mm from true 90º
Radial offset (HFW, EBW, LBW pipes) R 2) tmmin 7) at weld ≥ tmin 8) -
Radial offset (SAW pipes) R 2) ≤ 0.1 t 3), but max. 2.0 mm -
Length of pipe 100% see E1213
Weight of each single pipe/pipe bundle 100% -3.5% / +10% of nominal weight
NOTES
1) D = specified outside or inside diameter (see 1204 and 1205)
2) R means random testing of 5% of the pipes per shift with a minimum of 3 pipes per shift.
3) t = specified nominal wall thickness.
4) Dimensions of pipe body to be measured approximately in the middle of the pipe length.
5) To be measured as a distance from a template with the same OD as the pipe and with a length of OD/4, max. 200mm
6) 100% means testing of every pipe.
7) t mmin = actual measured minimum wall thickness of each measured pipe.
8) <min = specified minimum wall thickness.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 6-15 Supplementary requirements, enhanced dimensional requirements for linepipe, suffix D
Characteristic to be tested Extent of Welded pipe Seamless pipe
testing
Diameter pipe ends D1) ≤ 310 mm 100% ± 0.5 mm or ± 0.3% D 1) (whichever is greater)
1)
Diameter pipe ends 310 < D < 610 mm 100% ± 1.6 mm
Diameter pipe ends D1) ≥ 610 mm 100% ± 1.6 mm ± 2.0 mm
Greatest difference in pipe diameter between pipe 10% 10% t, but max. 3 mm
ends (each pipe measured)
Diameter pipe body D ≤ 310 mm
1) 10% ± 0.5% D1), but max. ± 1.25 mm
1)
Diameter pipe body 310 < D < 610 mm 10% ± 0.75% D1), but max. ± 3.0 mm
Diameter pipe body D ≥610 mm
1) 10% ± 0.5% D1), but max. ± 4.0 mm
Out-of-roundness, pipe ends D/t ≤ 75 100% 1.0%D1), but max. 5.0 mm
3)
Out-of-roundness, pipe ends, D/t >75 100% 1.5%D1), but max. 5.0 mm
Out-of-roundness, pipe body, D/t ≤ 75
3) 10% 4) 1.5%D1), but max. 10.0 mm
3)
Out-of-roundness, pipe body, D/t > 75 10% 4) 2.0%D1), but max. 10.0 mm
Local out-of-roundness 5) 10% 1)
< 0.5% D , but max. 2.0 mm -
Wall thickness, t3) ≤ 15 mm 100% 6) ± 0.5 mm ± 10%
Wall thickness, 15 < t3) < 20 mm 100% 6) ± 0.75 ± 10%
Wall thickness, t ≥ 20 mm
3) 100% 6) ± 1.0 mm ± 10%, but max. ±2.5 mm
Straightness 10% ≤ 0.15% L
End squareness 10% 1.6 mm from true 90°
Radial offset (HFW, EBW, LBW pipes) 10% tmmin7) at weld ≥ tmin8) -
Radial offset (SAW pipes) 10% ≤ 0.1 t3), but max. 1.5 mm -
Length of pipe 100% see E1213
Weight of each single pipe/pipe bundle 100% -3.5% / +10% of nominal weight
1) D = specified outside or inside diameter (see 1204 and 1205)
2) (not used)
3) t = specified nominal wall thickness.
4) Dimensions of pipe body to be measured approximately in the middle of the pipe length.
5) To be measured as a distance from a template with the same OD as the pipe and with a length of OD/4, max. 200mm
6) 100% means testing of every pipe.
7) t mmin = actual measured minimum wall thickness of each measured pipe.
8) tmin = specified minimum wall thickness.
F. Marking and Protection G. Documentation, Records and Certification

F 100 General G 100 General
101 All marking shall be easily identifiable and in such a 101 Linepipe shall be delivered with Inspection Certificate
condition that it is readable during the subsequent activities. 3.1.B according to European Standard EN 10204 (Metallic
102 The type of marking shall be subject to agreement. Products - Types of Inspection Documents) or an accepted
equivalent.
103 Each linepipe shall be marked with a unique number.
The marking shall reflect the correlation between the product 102 The Inspection Certificate shall identify the products
and the respective inspection document. represented by the certificate, with reference to product
number, heat number and heat treatment batch. The certificate
104 On customer's request, each linepipe shall be protected shall include or refer to the results of all specified inspection,
until taken into use, including bevel protectors on bevelled testing and measurements. The supply condition and the final
pipes. heat treatment shall be stated in the certificate.
103 Records from the qualification of the MPS and other
documentation shall be in accordance with the requirements in
Section 3.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 7
COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLIES
A. General onstrated in at least one of the following ways:
A 100 Scope — engineering calculations,

— documented prototype testing,
101 This section specifies requirements to the design, manu- — documented history of successful use of the component,
facture, fabrication, testing and documentation of pipeline produced according to the same design, compatible mate-
components and structural items, and to the fabrication and rials, manufacturing and testing procedures and used un-
testing of risers, expansion loops, pipe strings for reeling and der equivalent operating conditions,
towing.
— strength test to failure, or
A 200 Quality assurance — experimental stress analyses.
201 Requirements for quality assurance are given in Section 109 For piggable components the internal diameter of the
2B 500. Corresponding requirements for the material process- component shall be equal to that of the connecting pipeline
ing and the manufacture of components shall be specified. sections, and shall meet the same tolerance requirements.
110 The transition between a component and other items
(e.g. connecting linepipe) where the material thickness or yield
B. General requirements for Design of Pipeline stress is unequal shall be according to ASME B31.8 Appendix
I or equally recognised codes.
Components
111 If the chemical composition and the delivery condition
B 100 General of components require qualification of a specific welding pro-
101 All pressure-containing pipeline components shall gen- cedure for welding of the joint between the component and the
erally represent the same safety level as the connecting riser/ connecting linepipe, then the component should be fitted with
pipeline section. pup pieces of the linepipe material in order to avoid field weld-
ing of these components.
102 Design of pipeline components shall be according to
recognised standards. The strength shall, as a minimum be: Alternatively, rings of the component material should be pro-
vided for welding procedure qualification of the field weld.
— equivalent to the connecting pipeline, or
— sufficient to accommodate any environmental load and the B 200 Material selection
maximum forces that will be transferred to the component 201 The mechanical properties, chemical composition,
from the connecting pipeline under installation and opera- weldability and corrosion resistance of materials used in com-
tion. ponents shall be compatible with the part of the pipeline sys-
tem where they are located. Low internal temperatures due to
Guidance note: system depressurisation shall be considered during the materi-
It should be noted that the definitions of yield stress used in other al selection.
design and material standards may be different to those used for
pipelines. 202 The material in pipeline components and structural
items shall be selected taking into account the considerations
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- given in Section 5B 500. In addition, the suitability of a mate-
103 If the code or standard used for design of a component rial for a particular application shall include consideration of
does not take into account forces other than the internal pres- the following aspects:
sure, then additional calculations are required in order to ad- — external and internal corrosion;
dress the maximum forces that can be transferred to the — galvanic corrosion between dissimilar metals;
component from the connecting pipeline sections under instal- — accumulation of seawater and other corrosive substances,
lation and operation. and areas where chemical inhibition or cathodic protection
104 If the code or standard used for design of a component may be ineffective;
does not take into account the possibility for internal leakage — suitability for use with the fluid to be transported, includ-
due to forces transferred to the component from the connecting ing any additives; and
pipeline sections, then additional calculations or qualification — resistance to abrasion or mechanical damage likely to oc-
tests shall be performed. cur during installation and operation.
105 Design by finite element analysis should comply with
203 A component should be forged rather than cast whenev-
ASME VIII, Division 2, Appendix 4 or an equivalent recog-
nised standard. er a favourable grain flow pattern, a maximum degree of ho-
mogeneity, and the absence of internal flaws are of
106 External hydrostatic pressure shall be considered in the importance.
design with respect to both strength and leakage.
204 Particular consideration shall be given to the suitability
107 The following factors shall apply for the design of com- of elastomers and polymers for use in the specific application
ponents unless the requirements of the selected code or stand- and service conditions.
ard are more stringent:
205 The need for pre-qualification of materials for the serv-
Table 7-1 Design Factors
ice condition shall be considered, based on the media to be
transported, loads, temperatures and the material selected.
Internal pressure load factor (not hydrostatic test pressure) 1.10
External loads load factor 1.30
206 Where pre-qualification of materials is required, the ex-
tent of testing and investigations to be performed for a com-
Usage factor 0.67 plete qualification shall be specified.
108 Sufficient strength and fitness for purpose shall be dem- 207 Requirements for the pre-qualification of processes,
DET NORSKE VERITAS

tests, and manufacturers shall be considered in each case. The may be used provided electrical continuity is verified by meas-
consideration shall take into account the complexity and criti- urements.
cality of the product to be supplied, and the requirements of Cadmium plating shall not be used.
this standard.
406 If other bolting materials are required for corrosion re-
B 300 Flanged and mechanical connections sistance or other reasons, the material shall be selected in ac-
301 Flanges shall meet the requirements of ISO 7005-1 or cordance with the material selection requirements of the
another recognised code. standard. For subsea applications, Inconel 625 (UNS N06625)
shall be used when corrosion resistant bolts and nuts are re-
302 The flange bore should match the internal diameter of quired at ambient temperature, i.e. when bolts are exposed to
adjoining pipe. aerated seawater and cathodic protection cannot be ensured. It
303 Flanges of proprietary design, including swivel joint shall be verified that the materials have acceptable mechanical
flanges and hub type pipeline joints, shall be designed accord- properties at the minimum and maximum design temperature.
ing to relevant sections of pressure vessel codes such as ASME 407 Proprietary bolting materials may be used for CRA pipe-
VIII or BS5500. Additional calculations may be required to lines. It shall be verified that the materials have acceptable me-
demonstrate that the requirements of 102, 103 and 104 are met. chanical properties at the minimum and maximum design
304 The sealing faces of flanges shall have a surface finish, temperature, and are tested for compatibility with cathodic
hardness and roughness suitable for the gaskets to be applied. protection systems.
305 Gaskets shall be capable of withstanding the maximum B 500 Valves
pressure to which they could be subjected, as well as installa-
tion forces if flanges are laid in-line with the pipeline. Gaskets 501 Valves shall meet the requirements of ISO 14313, API
for flanges shall be made from metallic materials that are re- 6D or equivalent codes or standards. Additional calculations
sistant to the fluid to be transported in the pipeline system. Gal- may be required to demonstrate that the requirements of 102,
vanic corrosion shall be avoided. Mechanical properties shall 103 and 104 are met.
be maintained at the anticipated in service pressures and tem- 502 The design shall ensure that internal gaskets are able to
peratures. seal, and shall include a documented safety margin which is
306 Seals shall be designed to allow testing without pressu- valid during all relevant pipeline operating conditions. Sealing
rising the pipeline. will be sensitive to internal deflections, enlargement of gaps
and changes in their support conditions. Valve operation will
307 For guidance for design of couplings (sleeve type cou- be sensitive to friction and clearances.
plings) reference is made to DNV RP-F104, "Mechanical
Pipeline Couplings". The principles of this RP may also be ap- 503 Consideration should be given to requirements for dura-
plied to clamps. bility when exposed to abrasive material (e.g. weld scale, sand
etc.) or to fire loads.
308 Specifications for the tools required to install and make-
up the components shall be established. 504 Valves with requirements for fire durability shall be
qualified by applicable fire tests. Reference may be made to
B 400 Bolting API 6FA and BS 6755 Part 2 for test procedures.
401 Bolts and nuts for subsea use shall be in accordance with 505 Valve control systems and actuators shall be designed
Table 7-2. Equivalent standards may be used subject to agree- and manufactured in accordance with recognised standards.
ment. The valve actuator specification should define torque require-
ments for valve operation, with a suitable safety margin to ac-
Table 7-2 Bolts and nuts for subsea use commodate deterioration and friction increase during service.
Bolt Nut Size range B 600 Pressure vessels
ASTM A320, ASTM A194, Grade 4/S3 (Low- < 50 mm
Grade L7 temperature requirement for 601 Pressure vessels such as pig traps and slug catchers shall
Grade 4 and Grade 7 nuts) be designed in accordance with ASME VIII, BS 5500 or equiv-
ASTM A320, ASTM A194, Grade 7 < 100 mm alent standard.
Grade L43 602 The design of closures and items such as nozzle rein-
forcements, saddle supports, vent- kick and drain branches
402 Bolts and nuts for use in above water and onshore com- shall comply with the applied design standard.
ponents shall be in accordance with Table 7-3. Equivalent
standards may be used, subject to agreement. 603 Closures shall be designed such that the closure cannot
be opened while the pig trap is pressurised. An interlock ar-
Table 7-3Bolts and nuts for use above water/onshore. rangement with the main pipeline valve should be provided.
Bolt Nut Size B 700 Components fabricated by welding
range
ASTM A193, Grade B7 ASTM A194, Grade 2H All 701 The design of components fabricated by welding of
plate shall be in accordance with industry recognised engineer-
ASTM A193, Grade B16 ASTM A194, Grade 7 All ing practices. Where such components cannot be designed in
403 Bolts and nuts for bolts with diameter 25mm and above accordance with this standard, the design shall be in accord-
shall be impact tested to the same requirements as for the steel ance with ASME VIII, BS 5500 or equivalent standards. Addi-
to be bolted. tional calculations may be required to demonstrate that the
requirements of 102, 103 and 104 are met.
404 The hardness of bolts in carbon steel and/or low alloy
material shall be less than 350HV10. B 800 Insulating joints
405 Carbon steel and/or low alloy bolting material shall be 801 Prefabricated insulating joints shall be designed in ac-
hot dip galvanised or have similar corrosion protection. For cordance with ASME VIII, BS 5500 or equivalent standards.
submerged applications or when bolting torque is specified, Additional calculations may be required to demonstrate that
electrolytic galvanising or phosphating shall be used. Hot dip the requirements of B102, B103 and B104 are met.
and electrolytic galvanising shall be followed by post-baking. 802 The insulating and spacing materials shall be resistant to
For subsea use, polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) based coatings the fluid transported in the pipeline system. Mechanical prop-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

erties shall be maintained at the anticipated in service pressures 907 Steel socket welding fittings shall not be used.
and temperatures.
B 1000 Anchor flanges
803 Insulating joints shall be pressure tested at a constant
temperature as follows: 1001 Anchor flanges shall be designed for pressure contain-
ment according to ASME VIII, BS 5500 or equivalent stand-
— hydrostatic test to 1.50 x design pressure with a holding ards.
time of minimum 2 hours; and 1002 Additional calculations may be required to demon-
— hydraulic fatigue test consisting of 40 consecutive cycles strate that the requirements of 102 and 103 are met.
with the pressure changed from about 10bar to 85% of the
hydrostatic test pressure. At the completion of the test cy- B 1100 Other components
cles the pressure shall be increased to the hydrostatic test
pressure and maintained for 30 minutes. 1101 System components which are not specifically covered
in this subsection shall be demonstrated as fit for purpose as
804 No pressure drops are allowed during hydrostatic test- stated in B 100.
ing, and no leaks are allowed during the tests.
B 1200 Structural items
805 After having passed the pressure tests, the joint shall be
dried with hot air and tested to confirm electrical discontinuity 1201 Structural items such as support and protective struc-
with the joint in the vertical position as follows: tures that are not welded onto pressurised parts are considered
as structural elements. See Section 5G.
— electrical resistance test, and 1202 Structural items acting as a pressure containing part of
— dielectric strength test the pipeline system shall meet the requirements for the section
of the pipeline system where they shall be located.
806 The electrical resistance test shall give a resistance of at
least 5 Mohms at 1000 V of applied continuous current. If the 1203 Structural items shall not be welded directly to pressure
joint shows electrical resistance below the required value it containing parts or linepipe. Supports, attachments etc. shall be
shall be dried again and re-tested. One re-test only shall be al- welded to a doubler plate or ring.
lowed. 1204 Girth welds shall not be inaccessible under doubler
807 The dielectric strength test shall be performed by apply- rings, clamps or other parts of supports.
ing an AC sinusoidal current with a frequency of 50 - 60 Hz to 1205 Permanent doubler plates and rings shall be made from
the joint. The current shall be applied gradually, starting from a material satisfying the requirements of the pressure contain-
an initial value not exceeding 1.2kV increasing to 2.5kV in a ing parts. Doubler rings shall be made as fully encircling
time not longer than 10 seconds and shall be maintained at sleeves with the longitudinal welds made with backing strips,
peak value for 60 seconds. The test is acceptable if no break- and avoiding penetration into the pressure containing material.
down of the insulation or surface arcing occurs during the test. Other welds shall be continuous, as small as possible, and
made in a manner to minimise the risk of root cracking and la-
B 900 Pipeline fittings mellar tearing.
901 Tees shall be of the extruded outlet, integral reinforce-
ment type. The design shall be according to ASME B31.4,
B31.8 or equivalent. Additional calculations may be required
to demonstrate that the requirements of 102 and 103 are met. C. Material and Manufacturing Specifications
902 Bars of barred tees should not be welded directly to the for Components
high stress areas around the extrusion neck. It is recommended
that the bars transverse to the flow direction are welded to a C 100 Material and manufacturing specifications
pup piece, and that the bars parallel to the flow direction are 101 All material, manufacture and testing requirements ap-
welded to the transverse bars only. If this is impracticable, al- plicable for a particular component shall be stated in a specifi-
ternative designs should be considered in order to avoid peak cation.
stresses at the ends.
102 The specification shall be based on this standard and
903 Y-pieces and tees where the axis of the outlet is not per- other recognised codes/standards as applicable for the compo-
pendicular to the axis of the run (lateral tees) shall not be de- nent. Where a suitable code/standard is not available, the spec-
signed to ASME B31.4 or B31.8, as these items require special ification shall define the requirements.
consideration, i.e. design by finite element analysis. Additional
calculations may be required to demonstrate that the require- 103 The specification shall reflect the results of the material
ments of 102 and 103 are met. selection and shall include specific, detailed requirements for
the:
904 The design of hot taps shall ensure that the use of and the
design of the component will result in compliance with API — mechanical properties of the materials; and
Recommended Practice 2201, "Procedure for Welding and — how such properties will be achieved through require-
Hot Tapping on Equipment in Service". ments for manufacturing processes, verification through
905 Standard butt welding fittings complying with ANSI tests and supporting documentation.
B16.9, MSS SP-75 or equivalent standards may be used pro- Mechanical Properties
vided that:
104 The materials shall be specified and tested such that ac-
— the actual bursting strength of the fitting is demonstrated ceptable weldability under field and contingency conditions is
to exceed that of the adjoining pipe; and ensured and verified.
— the fitting is demonstrated to be able to accommodate the 105 The specified mechanical properties of materials and
maximum forces that can occur in the pipeline, both under weldments shall be suitable for the specific application and op-
installation and operation and the requirements of 102 and erational requirements of the pipeline system.
103.
106 Suitable allowances for possible degradation of the me-
906 End caps for permanent use shall be designed according chanical properties of a material, e.g. as a result of subsequent
to ASME VIII, BS 5500 or equivalent standards. fabrication activities, should be included in the specification.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Manufacture and Testing mising macro and micro segregation, and shall be Ca or rare
107 The specification shall state the: earth inclusion shape treated.
109 Requirements for SSC and HIPC testing are given in
— type and extent of destructive and non-destructive testing; Appendix B.
— test acceptance criteria; and
— extent and type of documentation, records and certifica- 110 Plate material shall be 100% ultrasonic tested in accord-
tion which shall be applied for verification of the material ance with Appendix D, subsection F.
properties. 111 Requirements for material properties shall be fulfilled in
the final condition, i.e. in the finished components. Materials
108 Where additional requirements beyond those of the ref- for auxiliary items such as guide bars etc. shall be made from
erenced code/standard are needed to achieve the mechanical a material satisfying the requirements to chemical composi-
properties, these shall also be detailed in the specification. tion, mechanical properties and documentation of pressure
containing parts.
D 200 Components made of low alloy C-Mn steel
D. Material for Hot Formed, Forged and Cast
201 These requirements are applicable to forged, hot formed
Components and cast components made of low alloyed C-Mn steel with
D 100 General SMYS up to 555 MPa. Use of higher strength materials shall
be subject to agreement.
101 The materials should comply with internationally recog-
nised standards, provided that such standards have acceptable 202 The steel shall be fully killed and made to a fine grain
equivalence to the requirements given in Section 6 and this melting practice. The material shall be produced by using the:
section. Modification of the chemical composition given in
such standards may be necessary to obtain sufficient weldabil- — basic oxygen furnace,
ity, hardenability, strength, ductility, toughness and corrosion — electric arc furnace,
resistance. — vacuum arc re-melting furnace (VAR), or
— an electroslag re-melting furnace (ESR) followed by vac-
Sour Service uum degassing.
102 For components in pipeline systems to be used for fluids
containing hydrogen sulphide and defined as "sour service" ac- Chemical composition
cording to NACE Standard MR0175 (Sulphide Stress Crack- 203 The chemical composition, taken from the product anal-
ing Resistant Metallic Materials for Oil Field Equipment), all ysis, of material for hot-formed components, castings and
requirements to materials selection, maximum hardness, and forgings, shall not exceed the values given in Table 7-4. The
manufacturing and fabrication procedures given in the latest notes given in Table 7-5 shall apply, except Note 9 and Note
edition of the above standard shall apply. This includes pipe- 10.
lines that are nominally dry (i.e. free from liquid water during
normal operation) if other conditions for sour service accord- 204 The maximum Carbon Equivalent (CE) shall not exceed
ing to the above standard are valid. Further, the additional re- 0.52, when calculated in accordance with:
quirements, modifications and clarifications defined below
shall apply. CE = C + Mn ⁄ 6 + 1 ⁄ 5 ( Cr + Mo + V ) + 1 ⁄ 15 ( Cu + Ni ) (7.1)
103 Use of materials not listed for sour service in NACE
MR0175 (latest edition) shall be qualified according to the Table 7-4 Chemical composition of materials for hot-formed,
guidelines of this document. As an alternative, the guidelines cast and forged components
for qualification in EFC publications No. 16 and 17 may be Element Product analysis, maximum weight
used. The qualification shall include the testing of Sulphide %
Stress Cracking (SSC) of base materials and welds as applica- C 0.16
ble. The qualification is only valid for a specific production
line and/or manufacturer/fabricator. Mn 1.60
P 0.015
104 The chemical composition of low alloy steel materials in
components intended for sour service shall comply with 203 S 0.010
and Table 7-4 with the following limitations: Si 0.40
Ni 2.00
— the content of Mn shall be < 1.40%, Cr 2.50
— the content of S shall be < 0.003%, and
— the content of Ni shall be < 1.00%. Mo 1.10
Cu 0.50
105 The final chemical composition for sour service is sub- Nb 0.060
ject to agreement. V 0.10
106 The hardness in base materials, welds and HAZ shall be Ti 0.040
in accordance with NACE MR0175 (latest edition). Al 0.060
Guidance note: N 0.012
It is recommended that the hardness in the base material, weld
metal and HAZ be kept considerably lower than the NACE re- 205 For material to be quenched and tempered, the content
quirement in order to allow for hardness increase during girth of hardening elements Cr, Mo, Cu and Ni shall be sufficient to
welding. obtain the desired microstructure in the centre of the compo-
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- nent. The selected chemical composition shall have adequate
hardenability to ensure through thickness hardening of the re-
107 Components made from rolled plate material shall be spective component.
tested for resistance to Hydrogen Induced Pressure Cracking 206 The chemical composition shall ensure the intended heat
(HIPC). treatment response, and that the required mechanical proper-
108 Plate material shall be manufactured in a manner mini- ties are obtained.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

207 The chemical composition shall be agreed prior to start 1000°C. Adequate temperature control shall be performed and
of production. the component shall be allowed to cool in still air.
Mechanical properties 103 For duplex stainless steel material, the hot forming shall
208 Tensile, hardness and Charpy V-notch properties shall be conducted within the temperature range 1000 -1150°C.
meet the requirements given in Table 6-3 and Table 6-4. E 200 Forging
209 Mechanical testing shall be performed after heat treat- 201 Forging shall be performed in general compliance with
ment. The testing shall be performed in accordance with Ap- ASTM A694. Each forged product shall be hot worked as far
pendix B and F 700. as practicable, to the final size and shape with a minimum re-
210 For materials with a thickness > 40 mm the impact test duction ratio of 4:1.
temperature and the energy absorption requirements shall be 202 Weld repair of forgings shall not be permitted.
specially considered. Increasing thickness will require lower
test temperatures. Alternatively, higher energy absorption at E 300 Casting
the same test temperature should be required. The energy ab-
sorption shall not in any case be lower than required in Table 301 Casting shall be performed in general compliance with
6-3, nor shall impact testing be performed at temperatures ASTM A352.
higher than the minimum design temperature. 302 A casting shall be made from a single heat and as a sin-
211 Requirements for fracture toughness testing of the base gle unit.
material and weld metal shall be considered for material thick- 303 Castings may be repaired by grinding to a depth of max-
ness > 50 mm. The measured fracture toughness should, as a imum 10% of the actual wall thickness, provided that the wall
minimum, be a CTOD value of 0.15 mm at the minimum de- thickness in no place is below the minimum designed wall
sign temperature. thickness. The ground areas shall merge smoothly with the sur-
212 Ductility, also in the thickness direction, shall be ade- rounding material.
quate for the part in question, taking manufacturing and serv- 304 Defects deeper than those allowed by 303 may be re-
ice conditions into consideration. Through thickness tensile paired by welding. The maximum extent of repair welding
testing may be required. should not exceed 20% of the total surface area. Excavations
213 For design temperatures above 50°C, the actual yield for welding shall be ground smooth and uniform and shall be
stress at the maximum design temperature shall comply with suitably shaped to allow good access for welding.
the requirements stated in Section 5B 600. 305 All repair welding shall be performed by qualified weld-
ers and according to qualified welding procedures.
D 300 Components made of ferritic-austenitic (duplex)
steel, other stainless steel and nickel based corrosion E 400 Heat treatment
resistant alloy (CRA) 401 Heat treatment procedures shall be prepared and agreed
301 All requirements with regard to chemical composition, prior to start of heat treatment.
mechanical properties and supplementary requirements (when 402 Heat treatment procedures shall as a minimum contain
applicable) for 22Cr and 25Cr duplex stainless steel, austenitic the following information:
and martensitic stainless steel and other CRAs shall be in ac-
cordance with Section 6. — heating facilities;
302 For components made of duplex stainless steel, other — furnace (if applicable);
stainless steels or nickel based corrosion resistant alloys — insulation(if applicable);
(CRA) intended for seawater service, corrosion testing shall be — measuring and recording equipment, both for furnace con-
conducted in accordance with Section 6C.308 and Section trol and recording of component temperature;
6C.404 as relevant. — calibration intervals;
— fixtures and loading conditions;
D 400 Delivery condition — heating and cooling rates;
401 Forgings and hot formed components in low alloy steel — temperature gradients;
shall be delivered in the normalised or in the quenched and — soaking temperature range and time;
tempered condition. — maximum time required for moving the component from
the furnace to the quench tank (if applicable),
402 Castings in low alloy steel shall be delivered in the ho- — cooling rates (conditions);
mogenised, normalised and stress relieved or in the homoge- — type of quenchant (if applicable); and
nised, quenched and tempered condition. — start and end maximum temperature of the quenchant (if
403 Duplex steel components shall be delivered in the solu- applicable).
tion annealed and water quenched condition.
403 Components should be rough machined to near final di-
404 For component material delivered in the quenched and mensions prior to heat treatment
tempered condition the tempering temperature shall be suffi-
ciently high to allow effective post weld heat treatment during 404 The furnace temperature shall be controlled to within ±
later manufacture / installation. 10°C and thermocouples shall be attached to each component
during the entire heat treatment cycle.
405 For components which are to be water quenched, the
time from removal of components from the oven until they are
E. Hot Forming, Forging, Casting and Heat immersed in the quenchant shall not exceed 90 seconds for C-
Treatment Mn and low alloy steel, and 60 seconds for duplex stainless
steels.
E 100 Hot forming 406 The water shall be heavily agitated, preferably by cross
101 Hot forming shall be performed to the agreed procedure flow to ensure rapid, adequate quenching. The start and end
according to the guidance given in G 500 temperature of the quenching water shall be recorded and shall
102 Hot forming, including extrusion of branches in low al- not exceed 40°C.
loy steel, shall be done within a temperature range of 800 - 407 The heat treatment equipment shall be calibrated at least
DET NORSKE VERITAS

once a year in order to ensure acceptable temperature stability — production process control procedures;
and uniformity. — welding procedures;
— heat treatment procedures;
— NDT procedures;
— pressure test procedures;
F. Manufacturing of Components, Equipment — list of specified mechanical and corrosion testing;
and Structural Items — dimensional control procedures;
F 100 General — marking, coating and protection procedures; and
— handling, loading and shipping procedures.
101 These requirements are applicable for the manufacture
of components, equipment and structural items for use in sub- 114 The MPS shall be subject to agreement.
marine pipelines.
F 200 Manufacture of flanges
102 If there are conflicting requirements between this stand-
ard and the referenced code or standard used for manufacture 201 Flanges shall be manufactured, inspected, tested, and
of components and equipment, the requirements of this stand- documented in accordance with:
ard shall have precedence.
— recognised practices,
103 Requirements for mechanical and corrosion testing are — the referenced design standard, and
given in Appendix B and this section.
— the material and manufacturing specification.
104 Requirements for NDT personnel, NDT equipment,
methods, procedures and acceptance criteria are given in Ap- The specified starting material and the methods and proce-
pendix D. dures agreed and qualified for the manufacture shall be used.
105 Welding procedures, welding personnel, handling of 202 Flanges shall be forged close to the final shape. Machin-
welding consumables shall meet the requirements in Appendix ing of up to 10% of the local wall thickness at the outside of
C. the flange is allowed. Contact faces of flanges shall have a ma-
106 Welding shall be performed in accordance with applica- chined finish with a surface roughness compatible with the
ble requirements of H 600. gaskets to be used.
107 The Contractor shall be capable of producing welded 203 Mechanical testing shall be as given in F 700.
joints meeting the required quality. This may include welding 204 Corrosion testing shall be performed as specified in D
of girth welds, overlay welding and post weld heat treatment of 100 and D 300 as relevant.
the components. Relevant documentation of the Contractor's
capabilities shall be available if requested. 205 Non-destructive testing and acceptance criteria shall be
in accordance with Appendix D.
108 Production tests required during the production shall be
performed in a manner which, as far as possible, reproduces 206 The extent of non-destructive testing shall be:
the actual welding and covers the welding of a sufficient large — 100% magnetic particle or dye penetrant testing; and
test piece in the relevant position. Production welds cut out due
to NDT failure may be used. — 100% ultrasonic testing of the first 10 flanges of each size
and type ordered. If no defects are found, the extent of ul-
109 When production testing is required, the number of tests trasonic testing may be reduced to 10% of each size and
as specified in Appendix C should be made. type. If defects are found in the first 5 flanges or during
110 Components and equipment intended for welded con- testing 10% of the flanges, all flanges of this size and sim-
nections to linepipe shall have dimensional tolerances on di- ilar type are to 100% tested.
ameter and thickness equal to the linepipe, in order to ensure
acceptable alignment for welding. Where welded joints in F 300 Manufacture of valves
quenched and tempered steel are to be post weld heat treated 301 Valves shall be manufactured, inspected, tested, and
(PWHT), the PWHT temperature shall be a minimum of 25°C documented in accordance with:
below the tempering temperature for the base material.
— recognised practices,
111 The Manufacturer shall develop a Manufacturing Proce-
dure Specification. — the requirements of the referenced design standard, and
Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS)
112 Before production commences the Manufacturer shall The specified starting materials and the methods and proce-
prepare a MPS. The MPS shall demonstrate how the specified dures agreed and qualified for the manufacture shall be used.
properties may be achieved and verified through the proposed 302 The extent of mechanical (see F 700), non-destructive
manufacturing route. The MPS shall address all factors which and corrosion testing, where required, shall be performed as
influence the quality and reliability of production. All main specified in this section (see D). The types of test and the ac-
manufacturing steps from control of received material to ship- ceptance criteria shall be consistent with the requirements for
ment of the finished product(s), including all examination and the pipeline or pipeline sections where the valve(s) will be
check points, shall be covered in detail. References to the pro- used.
cedures and acceptance criteria established for the execution of
all steps shall be included. 303 Hydrostatic testing shall be performed as required in the
applied design code, except that the holding time shall be min-
113 The MPS shall as a minimum contain the following in- imum 2 hours if a shorter time is allowed by the code.
formation:
304 Valves with requirements for leak tightness shall be leak
— plan(s) and process flow description/diagram; tested as required in the applied design code (e.g. riser valves,
— project specific quality plan; maintenance valves and pig trap isolation valves). Considera-
— manufacturing processes used; tion shall be given to valve performance at both high and low
— supply of material; manufacturer and manufacturing loca- differential pressures across the valve.
tion of material; 305 All testing shall be performed to agreed procedures.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

F 400 Manufacture of pressure-containing equipment — by random selection of components of the same type and
and components fabricated by welding form, from the same heat and heat treatment batch.
401 Pressure-containing equipment such as pig traps, slug All mechanical testing shall be conducted after final heat treat-
catchers, and components fabricated by welding of plates shall ment.
be manufactured, inspected, tested and documented in accord-
ance with: 702 The material thickness and forging reduction for inte-
grated test coupons shall be representative of the actual com-
— recognised practices, ponent.
— the requirements of this standard, 703 Separate test coupons should not be used but may be al-
— the requirements the referenced design standard, and lowed subject to agreement, provided that they are heat treated
— the material and manufacturing specification. simultaneously with the material they represent, and the mate-
rial thickness, forging reduction, and mass are representative
The specified starting materials and the methods and proce- of the actual component.
dures agreed and qualified for the manufacture shall be used.
704 A simulated heat treatment of the test piece shall be per-
402 Hydrostatic testing shall be performed as required in the formed if welds between the component and other items such
referenced design standard, except that the holding time shall as linepipe are to be post weld heat treated at a later stage or if
be minimum 2 hours if a shorter time is specified by the refer- any other heat treatment is intended.
enced design standard.
705 One component from each lot (i.e. components of the
F 500 Manufacture of other equipment and components same size, type and form from each heat or heat treatment
batch, whichever occurs more frequently) shall be tested as
501 Other components and equipment, such as insulating follows:
joints, mechanical connectors, tees and Y-pieces and other fit-
tings and components fabricated by hot forming of plate, shall — two tensile specimens taken from the base material in the
be manufactured inspected, tested and documented in accord- transverse direction at 1/3 thickness;
ance with: — two sets of Charpy V-notch specimens taken in the trans-
verse direction at each location 2 mm below the inner and
— recognised practices, outer surface, and two sets of specimens from the same lo-
— the requirements of this standard, cation as the tensile specimens. The notch shall be perpen-
— the requirements of the referenced design standard, and dicular to the component's surface;
— the material and manufacturing specification. — metallographic samples taken from the same location as
The specified starting materials and the methods and proce- the Charpy V-notch specimens and at 1/3T, 1/2T and 2/3T.
dures agreed and qualified for the manufacture, shall be used. A minimum of 3 hardness measurements shall be taken on
each sample. The 1/3T and 2/3T specimens shall include
502 Pressure containing components shall be subject to hy- the nearest surface "as is" after the heat treatment (not ma-
drostatic testing unless such testing is impracticable. The test chined).
pressure shall be 1.50 times the design pressure, and the hold-
ing time shall be 2 hours. If the applied design code requires 706 The distance from the edge of the test piece to the near-
higher pressures or a longer holding time, then the more strin- est edge of any specimen shall not be less that 1/3 of the thick-
gent requirements shall apply. ness. For welded components, the testing shall also include
testing of the welds in accordance with Appendix C.
503 The hydrostatic test pressure shall be recorded during
the test using equipment with calibration certificates not older 707 Samples for corrosion testing shall be taken such that the
than one year. No pressure drops or leaks are allowed during surface exposed to the corrosive medium will be tested.
hydrostatic testing. 708 The mechanical properties shall meet the specified re-
504 Insulating joints shall be tested as detailed in B 800. quirements. The reduction of area shall be at least 35%. For
heavy wall components with SMYS > 420 MPa, a higher duc-
505 Qualification testing of sleeve type couplings and tility level should be required.
clamps for the particular pipeline dimensions, dimensional tol-
erances and surface finish shall be performed according to 709 The hardness of the accessible surfaces of the compo-
agreed procedures. nent shall be tested. The testing shall be sufficient to establish
the efficiency of the heat treatment. The hardness for compo-
F 600 Fabrication of structural items nents intended for non-sour service shall not exceed the re-
601 Structural items shall be fabricated, inspected, tested and quirements given in Table 6-3 for C-Mn and low alloy steel
documented in accordance with: and Table 6-6 for duplex steels.
For components intended for sour service the hardness shall be
— recognised practices, in accordance with Section 6D 100.
— the requirements of this standard,
— the requirements of the referenced design standard, and
G. Manufacture of Bends
The specified materials and the methods and procedures
agreed and qualified for the fabrication shall be used. G 100 General
F 700 Mechanical testing of hot formed, cast and forged 101 The Manufacturer shall develop a Manufacturing Proce-
components dure Specification.
Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS)
701 Testing of the mechanical properties of components af-
ter hot forming, casting or forging shall be performed on a test 102 Before production commences the Manufacturer shall
material taken from: prepare an MPS. The MPS shall demonstrate how the specified
properties may be achieved and verified through the proposed
— a prolongation of the component; manufacturing route. The MPS shall address all factors which
— an integrated test coupons, that is removed from the com- influence the quality and reliability of production. All main
ponent after final heat treatment; or manufacturing steps from control of received material to ship-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ment of the finished product(s), including all examination and 108 Bends may be made from spare sections of normal line-
check points, shall be covered in detail. References to the pro- pipe. It should be noted that "normal" linepipe, particularly
cedures and acceptance criteria established for the execution of pipe manufactured from TMCP plate, may not have adequate
all steps shall be included. hardenability to achieve the required mechanical properties af-
103 The MPS shall as a minimum contain the following inter hot or induction bending and subsequent post bending heat
formation: treatment.
109 Hot expanded mother pipe may experience dimensional
— plan(s) and process flow description/diagram; instability after post bending heat treatment.
— project specific quality plan;
— bending process used 110 Mother pipe and other pipe for use in bend shall meet all
— supply of material; manufacturer and manufacturing loca- applicable requirements given in Section 6. Waiving of the
tion of material; mill pressure test according to Section 6E.1108 is not applica-
— bending process control procedures; ble.
— heat treatment procedures; Mechanical properties of mother pipe
— NDT procedures;
— list of specified mechanical and corrosion testing; 111 Mother pipe made of C-Mn steels and duplex stainless
— dimensional control procedures; steels shall, as a minimum, comply with the requirements for
— marking, coating and protection procedures; and linepipe and the Supplementary Requirements (as applicable)
— handling, loading and shipping procedures. given in Section 6.
112 Hardness requirements for C-Mn steels and duplex
104 Materials for use in factory-made bends shall be selected stainless steels shall be in accordance with Section 6C.205 and
taking into account the chemical composition and the influ- 306 respectively.
ence of the manufacturing method upon mechanical proper-
ties, dimensions and wall thickness. 113 Chemical composition of mother pipe
105 Induction bending is the preferred method for manufac- 114 The chemical composition of C-Mn steel mother pipe
ture of bends. shall be in accordance with Table 7-5. The chemical composi-
tion for duplex steel mother pipe shall be in accordance with
106 Bends may be made from dedicated straight lengths of Table 6-5 in Section 6.
pipe without girth welds (mother pipe), that are hot, cold or in-
duction bent, or from forgings. Mitre or wrinkle bends are not Metallographic examination of mother pipe in duplex steel
permitted. 115 Metallographic examination of dedicated mother pipe in
107 Mother pipe in C-Mn steels shall be delivered in the nor- duplex stainless steels shall be performed in accordance with
malised, quenched and tempered or TMCP condition. Section 6C.304 and 305, and Appendix B.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 7-5 C-Mn steel for bends, chemical composition1) 2) 3)

Element Product analysis, maximum weight %
SMYS 245 290 360 415 450 485 555
C 4) 0.14 0.14 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.17 0.17
Mn 4) 1.35 1.65 1.65 1.75 1.75 1.85 1.85
Si 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
P 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
S 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Cu 0.35 0,35 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Ni 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Mo 0.10 0.10 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Cr 5) 0.30 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Al (total)6) 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
Nb 7) - 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06
V 7) - 0.04 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.10
Ti 7) - 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.06
N 6) 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.012 0.012 0.012
B 8) 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005
CE 9) 0.36 0.38 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47
Pcm 10) 0.23 0.24 - - - - -
3) Except for deoxidation elements, other elements than those mentioned in this table shall not be intentionally added if not specifically agreed
5) 0.5 -1.0% Cr may be used subject to agreement.
6) Al:N ≥ 2:1 (not applicable for titanium killed steels)
7) (Nb+V+Ti)% maximum : 0.12% This value may be increased to maximum 0.15% subject to agreement.
Mn Cr + Mo + V Cu + Ni
9) CE = C + -------- + --------------------------------- + --------------------
6 5 15
Si Mn + Cu + Cr Ni Mo V
10) P cm = C + ------ + ------------------------------------ + ------ + -------- + ------ + 5B
30 20 60 15 10
G 200 Mother pipe for seawater service G 500 Required post bending heat treatment
201 For dedicated mother pipe in duplex stainless steels, oth- 501 Post bending heat treatment of induction bends made of
er stainless steels or nickel based corrosion resistant alloys C-Mn steels, duplex stainless steels, other stainless steels (ex-
(CRA) intended for seawater service, corrosion testing shall be cept martensitic) and nickel based corrosion resistant alloys is
conducted in accordance with Section 6 C308 and 404 as rele- required if the test material after bending does not comply with
vant. the requirements to the mother pipe. The heat treatment shall
G 300 Supplementary requirements to mother pipe be according to an agreed procedure proposed by the bend
Manufacturer. A bending procedure, including post bending
Supplementary requirement, sour service (S) heat treatment, shall be qualified according to G 500.
301 In general all the requirements given in Sec.6 D100 shall 502 Bends made of forged low alloy steels shall be quenched
apply. The chemical composition of pipe for bends shall com- and tempered, or normalised, subsequent to forging.
ply with Table 6-7 and Table 6-8 as relevant.
503 Bends made of martensitic stainless steels shall be heat
302 Subject to agreement the corrosion testing may be per- treated after hot forming and induction bending, according to
formed on the mother pipe. In this case samples representing the steel Manufacturer's recommendation.
the maximum wall thickness of the bend shall be taken from
the mother pipe and heat-treated prior to corrosion testing. The 504 Bends made of clad/lined material shall be heat treated
heat treatment of the test samples shall include the heat cy- after hot forming and induction bending, according to the steel
cle(s) the material is exposed to during bending, in addition to Manufacturer's recommendation.
any post bend heat treatment.
505 Bends manufactured by cold bending shall be stress re-
Supplementary requirement, fracture arrest properties (F) lieved when the total deformation exceeds 3%. For wall thick-
303 Requirements to fracture arrest properties are not appli- nesses less than 25 mm, the total cold deformation may be
cable to bends. increased without requiring subsequent stress relieving subject
to agreement. The total deformation percentage shall be calcu-
G 400 Requirements to pipe other than dedicated lated in percentage by using the following equation:
mother pipe t max
%Deformation = ⎛ ----------------------⎞ × 100 (7.2)
401 In situations where dedicated mother pipes are not avail- ⎝ 2r + t max⎠
able for manufacturing of bends, the factors given in G100 and
G200, especially G108, should be considered in order to select tmax = Maximum pipe wall thickness
the most appropriate pipe for bend manufacturing. r = Deformation radius
DET NORSKE VERITAS

G 600 Bending procedure qualification — base material tangent length.

601 A bending procedure shall be established and qualified. Charpy V-notch impact testing:
Essential variables for the allowable variation of bending pa-
rameters shall be established. — base material in the arc inner radius longitudinal and trans-
Guidance note: verse (total 2 sets),
Cold forming procedures may contain information concerning: — base material in the arc outer radius longitudinal and trans-
verse (total 2 sets),
- description and sequence of operations;
- equipment to be used; — base material in the start transition area inner radius longi-
- material designation; tudinal and transverse (total 2 sets),
- pipe diameter, wall thickness and bend radius; — base material in the start transition area outer radius longi-
- initial/successive degrees of deformation; tudinal and transverse (total 2 sets), and
- position of the longitudinal seam; — base material tangent length.
- methods for avoiding local thinning, wrinkling and ovality;
- post bending heat treatment; For bends made from pipe with outside diameter less than 300
- hydrostatic testing procedure; mm testing is required in the longitudinal direction only.
- non-destructive testing procedures; and
- dimensional control procedures. Macro, micro and hardness testing:
Hot forming procedures may include information concerning: — One full wall macro section, taken parallel to the longitu-
- sequence of operations; dinal axis of the bend, shall be removed from the inner and
- sequence of operations; outer radii and from the stop and start transition areas and
- heating equipment; from the base material tangent length (total 5 samples);
- material designation; — For duplex steel, other stainless steels and nickel based
- pipe diameter, wall thickness and bend radius; corrosion resistant alloys the specified macro sections
- heating/cooling rates; shall be substituted by micro section in order to conduct
- max/min. temperature during forming operation; full metallographic examination;
- temperature maintenance/control;
- recording equipment; — Hardness testing shall be performed on the macro and mi-
- position of the longitudinal seam; cro sections according to Appendix B;
- methods for avoiding local thinning, wrinkling and ovality; — Hardness testing shall be performed on the external sur-
- post bending heat treatment (duplex: full solution annealing); face of the completed bend. The testing shall be performed
- hydrostatic testing procedure; with a minimum of 8 measurements around the bend cir-
- non-destructive testing procedures; cumference in the tangent lengths, start and stop transition
- dimensional control procedures. areas and in the middle of the arc section.
Induction bending procedures may contain information concern-
ing: Bends from welded pipe
- the sequence of operations; 605 For bends manufactured from welded pipes the follow-
- equipment to be used; ing testing shall be performed in addition to the testing speci-
- material designation; fied in 604:
- pipe diameter, wall thickness and bend radius;
- position of weld seam; Tensile testing:
- induction bending temperature; Cross weld tensile testing shall be performed in the arc area,
- bending speed; stop and start transition areas and in the tangent length.
- cooling technique (medium, pressure, location and number of
nozzles etc.); Charpy V-notch impact testing:
- post bending heat treatment;
- hydrostatic testing procedure; — Weld metal, FL, FL + 2 mm and FL + 5 mm in the arc (4
- non-destructive testing procedures; and sets),
- dimensional control procedures. — Weld metal in the start transition area (1 set),
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- — Weld metal in the stop transition area (1 set).
602 The bending procedure shall be qualified by mechanical Macro, micro and hardness testing:
and non-destructive testing, visual inspection and dimensional — Two full wall macro sections of the weld, taken parallel to
control. If agreed the qualification of the bending procedure the longitudinal axis of the bend, shall be removed from
may be attempted without post bending heat treatment for C- the stop and start transition areas (total 2 samples);
Mn steels, duplex stainless steels, other stainless steels (except — For duplex steel, other stainless steels and nickel based
martensitic) and nickel based corrosion resistant alloys. corrosion resistant alloys the specified macro sections
603 Testing for qualification of the bending procedure shall shall be substituted by micro section of the weld in order
include the testing as required in 604 to 610. to conduct full metallographic examination.
Bends from seamless pipe Applicable to all bends
604 For bends manufactured from seamless pipes the extent 606 Tensile test specimens shall be taken from the middle of
of tensile and Charpy V-notch impact testing shall be as fol- the material thickness. Charpy V-notch impact test specimens
lows: shall be taken 2 mm below the inner surface and macro/micro
Tensile testing: specimens shall represent the full material thickness.
— base material in the arc inner radius longitudinal and trans- 607 For bends where the stop and start transition zones and
verse (total 2 specimens), the tangent length are not retained in the delivered bend, me-
— base material in the arc outer radius longitudinal and trans- chanical testing in these areas is not required.
verse (total 2 specimens), 608 The requirements for tensile Charpy V-notch and hard-
— base material in the start transition area inner radius longi- ness testing shall be in accordance with Section 6 Table 6-3
tudinal and transverse (total 2 specimens), and Table 6-4 for C-Mn steels, and Table 6-6 for duplex steels.
— base material in the start transition area outer radius longi- For duplex steel, other stainless steels and nickel based corro-
tudinal and transverse (total 2 specimens), and sion resistant alloys the metallography shall meet the require-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ments given in Section 6C.305. bend and at both neutral axis as far as access permits. The hard-
609 For supplementary requirement S, the required testing ness for bends intended for non-sour service shall not exceed
shall be performed in accordance with Section 6. the requirements given in Section 6 Table 6-3 for C-Mn and
low alloy steel and Table 6-6 for duplex steels.
610 If the test results do not meet the specified requirements
to mother pipe, the bending procedure shall be re-qualified in- 810 After end preparation the complete end preparation and
cluding a full post bending heat treatment. 100mm of the weld seam with magnetic particles for ferromag-
netic pipe or with liquid penetrant for non-magnetic pipe.
G 700 Bending and post bend heat treatment 811 Final NDT, including dimensional check, shall be per-
701 Before bending the wall thickness shall be measured on formed after post bending heat treatment.
each length of pipe.
G 900 Production testing of bends
702 If the bending operation is interrupted during hot or in-
duction bending, the bend subject to interruption shall be re- 901 During production, one bend of the heaviest wall thick-
jected. ness for each diameter produced within each lot shall be sub-
ject to mechanical testing.
703 The longitudinal weld of welded pipe shall be in the neu-
tral axis during bending. 902 Testing of induction bent bends may be performed pro-
longations of the pipe that have been subject to the same tem-
704 Bending shall be performed in accordance with qualified perature cycle(s) as the bent areas of pipe.
procedures and established essential variables. The tempera-
ture during induction and hot bending shall be controlled with- 903 Testing of the start transition areas are not required for
in ± 15°C using an optical pyrometer. The temperature data bends that have been given a full heat treatment restoring the
shall be recorded for each bend. The bending equipment shall microstructure.
be calibrated at least once a year in order to ensure acceptable 904 For bends made from pipe with outside diameter less
temperature stability and uniformity. than 300 mm testing is required in the longitudinal direction
705 Post bend heat treatment shall be performed according only.
to E 400. Bends from seamless pipe
706 A minimum of one thermocouple shall be attached to a 905 For bends manufactured from seamless pipes the extent
minimum of one bend per heat treatment batch. For compo- of mechanical testing shall be as follows:
nents to be quenched and tempered (Q/T), the temperature of
the quenching medium shall be recorded during the quenching Tensile testing:
operation.
— Base material in the arc outer radius longitudinal and
G 800 Non-destructive testing and visual inspection transverse (total 2 specimens)
— Base material in the start transition area outer radius lon-
801 Requirements for NDT personnel, NDT equipment, gitudinal and transverse (total 2 specimens) unless 903 is
methods, procedures and acceptance criteria are given in Ap- applicable.
pendix D.
802 Bends shall be blast cleaned to ISO 8501, SA21/2 to re- Charpy V-notch impact testing:
move scale from the bend area prior to visual inspection and
non-destructive testing — Base material in the arc outer radius longitudinal and
transverse (total 2 sets)
803 Provided that the material has been 100% ultrasonic — Base material in the start transition area outer radius lon-
tested for laminar imperfections as plate or pipe, the following gitudinal and transverse (total 2 sets) unless 903 is appli-
testing shall be performed on each bend: cable.
804 100% visual examination of external and accessible
parts of internal surfaces. The bends shall be free from gouges, Macro, micro and hardness testing:
dents, grooves, wrinkles, bulges, kinks and surface spalling.
Cracks are not permitted. — One full wall macro section, taken parallel to the longitu-
dinal axis of the bend, shall be removed from the inner and
805 Minor buckles in the bend inside radius profile will be outer radii and from start transition area (unless 603 is ap-
acceptable if the height and depth of the buckle does not ex- plicable)
ceed 1% of the nominal internal diameter and the length to — For duplex steel, other stainless steels and nickel based
depth ratio is greater than 12:1. The distance between accepta- corrosion resistant alloys the specified macro sections
ble minor buckles in the bend inside radius profile shall be shall be substituted by micro section in order to conduct
greater than one nominal internal diameter. full metallographic examination.
806 100% radiographic or ultrasonic testing of the weld in — Hardness testing shall be performed on the macro and mi-
the arc and transition zones + the end 250 mm of the tangent if cro sections according to Appendix B.
not tested on the mother pipe prior to bending.
Bends from welded pipe
807 100% magnetic particle testing over an arc of 90° both
sides of the extrados for ferromagnetic pipe, or 100% testing 906 For bends manufactured from welded pipes the follow-
with liquid penetrant + 100% ultrasonic testing over the same ing testing shall be performed in addition to the testing speci-
area for non-ferromagnetic pipe, in order to verify freedom fied in 905:
from transverse defects. Tensile testing:
808 Ultrasonic wall thickness measurements taken around
the circumference at the inside and outside radius of the bend — Cross weld tensile testing in the arc area (one specimen)
and at both neutral axes at a spacing of 150 mm along the entire — Cross weld tensile testing in the start transition area (one
length of the bend. The wall thickness shall not be below the specimen) unless 903 is applicable
specified minimum at any of these locations.
Charpy V-notch impact testing:
809 The hardness of the exterior surface of the bend shall be
tested at the locations given in 808. The hardness of the interior — Weld metal, FL, FL + 2 mm and FL + 5 mm in the arc (4
surface shall be tested at the inside and outside radius of the sets)
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— Weld metal in the start transition area (1 set) unless 903 is H. Fabrication of Risers, Expansion Loops, Pipe
applicable. Strings for Reeling and Towing
Macro, micro and hardness testing: H 100 General
— One full wall transverse macro section of the weld, shall 101 The following requirements are applicable for the fabri-
be removed from the bend area and one from the start tran- cation of risers, expansion loops, pipe strings etc. in C-Mn, du-
sition area (unless 903 is applicable). plex stainless, and clad/lined steel.
— For duplex steel, other stainless steels and nickel based 102 The fabrication shall be performed according to a speci-
corrosion resistant alloys the specified macro sections fication giving the requirements for fabrication methods, pro-
shall be substituted by micro section of the weld in order cedures, the extent of testing, acceptance criteria and required
to conduct full metallographic examination. documentation. The specification shall be subject to agreement
prior to start of production.
Applicable to all bends
H 200 Quality Assurance
907 Tensile test specimens shall be taken from the middle of
the material thickness. Charpy V-notch impact test specimens 201 Requirements to Quality Assurance given in Section 2B
shall be taken 2 mm below the inner surface and macro speci- 500 shall be applied.
mens shall represent the full material thickness.
H 300 Materials for risers, expansion loops, pipe strings
908 For bends where the transition zones and the tangent for reeling and towing
length are not retained in the delivered bend, mechanical test-
ing in these areas is not required. Pipe material
301 Pipe made of C-Mn steels and duplex stainless steels
909 The requirements for tensile, Charpy V-notch and hard- shall, as a minimum, comply with the requirements for line-
ness testing shall be in accordance with Section 6 Table 6-3 for pipe, including supplementary requirements (as applicable)
C-Mn steels, and Table 6-4 for duplex steels. For duplex steel, given in Section 6.
other stainless steels and nickel based corrosion resistant al-
loys the metallography shall meet the requirements given in 302 In addition, pipe used in pipe strings for reeling shall, as
Section 6C.304. a minimum, comply with supplementary requirement P given
in Section 6.
G 1000 Dimensions, tolerances and marking 303 Use of higher strength material shall be subject to agree-
1001 Dimensions and tolerances at bend ends shall be comment.
patible with the adjoining pipe. Use of straight tangent lengths Guidance note:
equal to one diameter is recommended. Ovality of cross sec- For steel with SMYS > 485 MPa, it may be necessary to conduct
tions shall be kept within the specified tolerances, and the bend Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of the weld zone in order to
radius shall be large enough (e.g. 5 x outer diameter) to allow achieve the required hardness level and mechanical properties.
passage of inspection vehicles when relevant. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
1002 Dimensional control shall include:
Forged and cast material
— ID at bend ends; 304 Forged and cast material shall as a minimum meet the re-
— OD for bend body at inner and outer radii and both neutral quirements given in D of this section.
axis;
— passing of gauge consisting of two aluminium plates of di- H 400 Fabrication procedures and planning
ameter 96% of nominal ID and fixed rigidly at a distance 401 Before production commences, the fabricator shall pre-
of 1.5 x ID; pare a Manufacturing Procedure Specification.
— out-of-roundness of bend ends: maximum 1.5% and of Manufacturing Procedure Specification (MPS)
body maximum 3%;
— outer bend radius, measured as the deviation from the 402 The MPS shall demonstrate how the fabrication will be
specified radius to (the bend centre line + 1/2 OD) ± 1%, performed and verified through the proposed Fabrication
max 25 mm; steps. The MPS shall address all factors which influence the
— the radius of bend curvature within ± 1% max ± 12.7 mm; quality and reliability of production. All main fabrication steps
— the included angle between the centrelines if the straight from control of received material to shipment of the finished
portions of the bend within ± 0.75°; product(s), including all examination and check points, shall
be covered in detail. References to the procedures and accept-
— linear/plane straightness: the specified bend angle divided ance criteria established for the execution of all steps shall be
by 90° x 10 mm, max 10 mm; included.
— location of weld seam; and
— end squareness angle within ± 0.5°, maximum 3 mm. 403 The MPS shall contain the following information:
— plan(s) and process flow description/diagram;
1003 Bends shall be marked as required in Section 6F 100. — project specific quality plan;
G 1100 Repair — fabrication processes used;
— supply of material, i.e. manufacturer and manufacturing
1101 Welding repair of the bend base material is not permit- location of material;
ted. — fabrication process control procedures;
— welding procedures;
1102 Any welding repair of longitudinal weld seams shall be — heat treatment procedures;
performed before final heat treatment and according to a qual- — NDT procedures;
ified welding procedure and shall be subject to the NDT re-
quired in Section 6. — pressure test procedures;
— list of specified mechanical and corrosion testing;
1103 Repair of surface notches, gouges and similar by grind- — dimensional control procedures;
ing shall be subject to agreement. The grinding shall not reduce — marking, coating and protection procedures; and
the wall thickness below the specified minimum. — handling, loading and shipping procedures.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

404 The MPS shall be subject to agreement. cedures, welding consumables, welding personnel, handling of
405 Due consideration shall be given to the access and time welding consumables and fabrication shall meet the require-
required for adequate inspection and testing as fabrication pro- ments of Appendix C.
ceeds. H 700 Hydrostatic testing
406 During fabrication of pipe strings for reeling and towing, 701 Hydrostatic testing shall be performed if specified.
the sequence of pipes included in the pipe string should be con-
trolled such that variations in stiffness on both sides of welds 702 The extent of the section to be tested shall be shown on
are minimised. This may be achieved by matching as closely drawings or sketches. The limits of the test, temporary blind
as possible the wall thickness / diameter of the pipes on both flanges, end closures and the location and elevation of test in-
sides of the weld. struments and equipment shall be shown. The elevation of the
test instruments shall serve as a reference for the test pressure.
407 Due consideration during fabrication shall be given to
the control of weight and buoyancy distribution of pipe strings 703 End closures and other temporary testing equipment
for towing. shall be designed, fabricated, and tested to withstand the max-
imum test pressure, and in accordance with a recognised code.
408 The procedures prepared by the fabricator shall be sub-
ject to agreement. 704 Testing should not be performed against in-line valves,
unless possible leakage and damage to the valve is considered,
H 500 Material receipt, identification and tracking and the valve is designed and tested for the pressure test con-
501 All material shall be inspected for damage upon arrival. dition. Blocking off or removal of small-bore branches and in-
Quantities and identification of the material shall be verified. strument tappings should be considered in order to avoid
Damaged items shall be clearly marked, segregated and dis- possible contamination. Considerations shall be given to pre-
posed of properly. filling valve body cavities with an inert liquid unless the valves
have provisions for pressure equalisation across the valve
502 Pipes shall be inspected for loose material, debris, and seats. All valves shall be fully open during filling.
other contamination, and shall be cleaned internally before be-
ing added to the assembly. The cleaning method shall not 705 Welds shall not be coated, painted or covered. Thin
cause damage to any internal coating. primer coatings may be used where agreed.
503 A system for ensuring correct installation of materials 706 Instruments and test equipment used for measurement of
and their traceability to the material certificates shall be estab- pressure, volume, and temperature shall be calibrated for accu-
lished. The identification of material shall be preserved during racy, repeatability, and sensitivity. All instruments and test
handling, storage and all fabrication activities. equipment shall possess valid calibration certificates with
traceability to reference standards within the 6 months preced-
504 A pipe tracking system shall be used to maintain records ing the test. If the instruments and test equipment have been in
of weld numbers, NDT, pipe numbers, pipe lengths, bends, cu- frequent use, they should be calibrated specifically for the test.
mulative length, anode installation, in-line assemblies and re-
pair numbers. The system shall be capable of detecting 707 Gauges and recorders shall be checked for correct func-
duplicate records. tion immediately before each test. All test equipment shall be
located in a safe position outside the test boundary area.
505 The individual pipes of pipe strings shall be marked in
accordance with the established pipe tracking system using a 708 The following requirements apply for instruments and
suitable marine paint. The location, size and colour of the test equipment:
marking shall be suitable for reading by ROV during installa-
tion. It may be required to mark a band on top of the pipe string — Testers shall have a range of minimum 1.25 times the
to verify if any rotation has occurred during installation. specified test pressure, with an accuracy better than ± 0.1
bar and a sensitivity better than 0.05 bar.
506 If damaged pipes or other items are replaced, the se- — Temperature-measuring instruments and recorders shall
quential marking shall be maintained. have an accuracy better than ± 1.0°C.
— Pressure and temperature recorders are to be used to pro-
H 600 Cutting, forming, assembly, welding and heat vide a graphical record of the pressure test for the total du-
treatment ration of the test.
601 The Contractor shall be capable of producing welded
joints of the required quality. This may include welding of 709 Calculations showing the effect of temperature changes
girth welds, other welds, overlay welding and post weld heat on the test pressure shall be developed and accepted prior to
treatment. Relevant documentation of the Contractor's capabil- starting the test. Temperature measuring devices, if used, shall
ities shall be available if requested by the Purchaser. be positioned close to the pipeline and the distance between the
devices shall be based on temperature gradients along the pipe-
602 Attention shall be paid to local effects on material prop- line route.
erties and carbon contamination by thermal cutting. Preheating
of the area to be cut may be required. Carbon contamination 710 The test medium should be fresh water or inhibited sea
shall be removed by grinding off the affected material. water.
603 Forming of material shall be according to agreed proce- 711 During pressurisation the pressure shall be increased at
dures specifying the successive steps. a steady rate up to 95% of the test pressure. The last 5% up to
the test pressure shall be raised by a linear diminishing rate
604 The fabrication and welding sequence shall be such that down to 0.5 bar per minute. Time shall be allowed for confir-
the amount of shrinkage, distortion and residual stress is mini- mation of temperature and pressure stabilisation before the test
mised. hold period begins.
605 Members to be welded shall be brought into correct
alignment and held in position by clamps, other suitable devic- 712 The test pressure requirement for system pressure tests
es, or tack welds, until welding has progressed to a stage where is given in Section 5D.204.
the holding devices or tack welds can be removed without dan- 713 The holding time at test pressure shall be 6 hours.
ger of distortion, shrinkage or cracking. Suitable allowances 714 The pressure shall be recorded during pressurisation,
shall be made for distortion and shrinkage where appropriate. stabilisation and hold periods. Temperatures and pressure shall
606 Welding procedures shall be qualified and welding probe recorded at least every 10 minutes during the hold period.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

715 During testing, all welds, flanges, mechanical connec- to establish conformance with the required dimensions and tol-
tors etc. under pressure shall be visually inspected for leaks. erances.
716 The pressure test shall be acceptable if there are no ob- 902 Dimensional verification of pipe strings for towing shall
served leaks or pressure drop. A pressure variation up to include weight, and the distribution of weight and buoyancy.
± 1.0% of the test pressure is normally acceptable provided
that the total variation can be demonstrated as caused by tem- H 1000 Corrosion protection
perature fluctuations, or otherwise accounted for. If greater
pressure variations are observed, the holding period shall be Application of coatings and installation of anodes shall meet
extended until a hold period with acceptable pressure varia- the requirements of Section 8.
tions has occurred.
717 Documentation produced in connection with the pres-
sure testing of the pipeline system shall include: I. Documentation, Records, Certification and
— Test drawings or sketches, Marking
— pressure and temperature recorder charts,
— log of pressure and temperatures, I 100 Documentation, records, certification and mark-
— calibration certificates for instruments and test equipment, ing
and 101 All base material, fittings and, flanges, etc. shall be de-
— calculation of pressure and temperature relationship and livered with Inspection Certificate 3.1.B according to Europe-
justification for acceptance. an Standard EN 10204 or accepted equivalent.
H 800 Non-destructive testing and visual examination 102 The inspection certificate shall include:
801 All welds shall be subject to: — identification the products covered by the certificate with
— 100% visual inspection; and reference to heat number, heat treatment batch etc.;
— 100% radiographic or ultrasonic testing, (automated ultra- — dimensions and weights of products;
sonic testing should be preferred for girth welds). — the results (or reference to the results) of all specified in-
spections and tests; and
802 Guidance on applicable and preferred NDT methods is — the supply condition and the temperature of the final heat
given in Appendix D, A 400. treatment.
803 Requirements to automated ultrasonic testing of girth
welds are given in Appendix E. 103 Each equipment or component item shall be adequately
and uniquely marked for identification. The marking shall, as
804 If allowable defect sizes are based on an ECA, ultrasonic a minimum, provide correlation of the product with the related
testing, preferably automated ultrasonic testing is required. inspection documentation.
805 All NDT shall be performed after completion of all cold
forming, heat treatment and hydrostatic testing. 104 The marking shall be such that it easily will be identi-
fied, and retained during the subsequent activities.
806 Requirements for personnel, methods, equipment, pro-
cedures, and acceptance criteria, for NDT are given in Appen- 105 Other markings required for identification may be re-
dix D. quired.
106 Equipment and components shall be adequately protect-
H 900 Dimensional verification ed from harmful deterioration from the time of manufacture
901 Dimensional verification should be performed in order until taken into use.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 8
CORROSION PROTECTION AND WEIGHT COATING
A. General pipe axis is more typical. Stress corrosion cracking is another

form of damage. Uniform corrosion and corrosion grooving may
A 100 Objective interact with internal pressure or external operational loads, caus-
ing rupture by plastic collapse or brittle fracture. Discrete pitting
101 This section aims to give general guidance on: attacks are more likely to cause a pinhole leakage once the full
pipe wall has been penetrated.
— conceptual and detailed design of corrosion protective sys-
tems,
— design and manufacturing of concrete weight coatings, 102 For riser sections in the atmospheric zone, external cor-
and on rosion shall normally be controlled by a proper paint coating
— quality control during manufacturing/fabrication of sys- with surface preparation and coating application according to
tems for corrosion protection. a recognised standard (see D). Certain corrosion resistant al-
loys may not need any such coating.
102 For quantitative design parameters and functional re-
quirements, reference is made to relevant standards and guide- 103 For riser sections in the splash zone, a thick film coating
lines, including DNV RP B401 for cathodic protection, and (A.302) shall normally be applied (see D). In addition, a corro-
DNV RP-F106 for factory applied linepipe coatings. sion allowance may be required for external corrosion control
of C-Mn steel above LAT where cathodic protection is not ef-
A 200 Application ficient (see D.107 and Section 5B 700). External cladding/lin-
201 This section covers external and internal corrosion pro- ing with corrosion resistant alloy may also be used.
tection of pipelines and risers. Concrete coatings for anti- 104 For pipelines and for riser sections in the submerged
buoyancy are also addressed. Onshore sections at any landfall zone, external corrosion protection shall normally be achieved
of pipelines are, however, not included. by a thick film coating (see C and D respectively) in combina-
202 Linepipe materials selection associated with corrosion tion with cathodic protection. Requirements and guidelines for
control is covered in Section 5. Requirements and guidance on concrete weight coating and for cathodic protection are given
inspection and monitoring associated with corrosion control in F and G respectively.
are found in Section 10. 105 For risers contained in J-tubes, conductors, tunnels and
equivalent, the annulus should be filled with non-corrosive flu-
A 300 Definitions id and sealed at both ends. Provisions for monitoring of annu-
301 The term corrosion control as used in this section in- lus fluid corrosivity should be considered.
cludes all relevant measures for corrosion protection, as well 106 For internal corrosion protection, various techniques
as the inspection and monitoring of corrosion (see Section 10). may be applied alone or in combination as detailed in I.
Corrosion protection includes use of corrosion resistant mate-
rials, corrosion allowance (see Section 5B 700) and various B 200 Evaluation of options for corrosion control
techniques for corrosion mitigation.
201 Pipeline systems may be exposed to a corrosive environ-
302 Linepipe (external) coating refers to factory applied ment both internally and externally. Options for corrosion pro-
coating systems (mostly multiple-layer, with a total thickness tection include use of corrosion resistant linepipe, corrosion
of some millimetres) with a corrosion protection function, ei- protective coatings and cladding/linings, cathodic protection
ther alone or in combination with a thermal insulation func- (externally), and chemical treatment or processing (internally).
tion. Some coating systems may further include an outer layer
for mechanical protection, primarily during laying and any 202 For C-Mn steel pipeline systems, a corrosion allowance
rock dumping or trenching operations. Concrete coating for (see Section 5B 700) may be applied either alone or in addition
anti-buoyancy (weight coating) is, however, not covered by to some system for corrosion mitigation. A corrosion allow-
the term linepipe coating. ance may serve to compensate for internal and/or external cor-
rosion.
303 Field joint coatings refers to single or multiple layers of
coating applied to protect girth welds, irrespective of whether 203 Options for corrosion control should be evaluated aim-
such coating is actually applied in the field or in a factory (e.g. ing for the most cost-effective solution meeting the overall re-
pipelines for reel laying and prefabricated risers). quirements of safety and environmental regulations.
Guidance note:
304 For definition of corrosion zones, including splash zone,
atmospheric zone and submerged zone, see D 100. In particular for internal corrosion, selection of the most cost-ef-
fective strategy for corrosion control requires that all major costs
associated with operation of the pipeline system, as well as in-
vestment costs for corrosion control, are evaluated ("Life Cycle
Cost Analysis"). When fluid corrosivity and efficiency of corro-
B. General Principles for Corrosion Control sion mitigation cannot be assessed with any high degree of accu-
During Design racy, a "risk cost" may be added for a specific option being
evaluated. The risk cost is the product of estimated probability
B 100 General and consequences (expressed in monetary units) of a particular
failure mode (e.g. rupture or pinhole leakage). The probability of
101 All components of a pipeline system shall have adequate such failures should reflect the designer's confidence in estimat-
corrosion protection to avoid failures caused or initiated by ing the fluid corrosivity and the efficiency of options for corro-
corrosion, both externally and internally. sion control being evaluated. Depending on the failure mode,
consequences of failure may include costs associated with in-
Guidance note: creased maintenance, repairs, lost capacity and secondary dam-
Any corrosion damage may take the form of a more or less uni- age to life, environment and other investments.
form reduction of pipe wall thickness, but scattered pitting and
grooving corrosion oriented longitudinally or transversally to the ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
DET NORSKE VERITAS

C. Pipeline External Coatings — coating application,

— inspection and testing,
C 100 General — coating repairs, and
101 The linepipe (external) coating system shall be selected — handling and storage of coated pipes.
based on consideration of the following major items: 203 A quality plan shall be prepared and submitted to Pur-
a) corrosion-protective (i.e. insulating) properties dictated chaser for acceptance. The quality plan shall define methods,
by permeability for water, dissolved gases and salts, adhe- frequency of inspection, testing and calibrations, and accept-
sion, freedom from pores, etc; ance criteria. Reference shall be made to applicable specifica-
b) resistance to physical, chemical and biological degrada- tions and procedures for inspection, testing and calibrations.
tion, primarily in service but also during storage prior to Handling of non-conforming coating materials and products
installation (operating temperature range and design life shall be described.
are decisive parameters);
c) requirements for mechanical properties during installation
and operation;
d) compatibility with fabrication and installation procedures, D. Special Riser Coatings
including field joint coating (see E 100) and field repairs; D 100 General
e) compatibility with concrete weight coating (see F 100), if
applicable; 101 Adverse corrosive conditions occur in the zone above
f) compatibility with cathodic protection, and capability of lowest astronomical tide (LAT) where the riser is intermittent-
reducing current demand for cathodic protection (see G ly wetted by waves, tide and sea spray (splash zone). Particu-
100), if applicable; larly severe corrosive conditions apply to risers heated by an
g) requirement for thermal insulation properties, if applica- internal fluid. In the splash zone, the riser coating may be ex-
ble; and posed to mechanical damage by surface vessels and marine op-
h) environmental compatibility and health hazards during erations, whilst there is limited accessibility for inspection and
coating application, fabrication/installation and operation. maintenance.
102 Pipeline components shall have external coatings prefer- 102 The riser section in the atmospheric zone (i.e. above the
ably matching the properties of those to be used for linepipe. If splash zone) is more shielded from both severe weathering and
this is not practical, cathodic protection design may compen- mechanical damage. Furthermore, there is better accessibility
sate for inferior properties. However, risks associated with hy- for inspection and maintenance.
drogen induced cracking by cathodic protection shall be duly 103 In the submerged zone and in the splash zone below the
considered (see Section 5B.507). lowest astronomical tide (LAT), an adequately designed ca-
103 Coating properties (functional requirements) which ap- thodic protection system is capable of preventing corrosion at
ply for the coated pipes shall be defined in a purchase specifi- any damaged areas of the riser coating. In the tidal zone, ca-
cation. The following properties may be specified as thodic protection will be marginally effective.
applicable: 104 For a specific riser, the division into corrosion protection
— maximum and minimum thickness, zones is dependent on the particular riser or platform design
and the prevailing environmental conditions. The upper and
— density,
lower limits of the splash zone may be determined according
— adhesion, to the definitions in Section 1.
— tensile properties,
— impact resistance, 105 Different coating systems may be applied in the three
— cathodic disbondment resistance, corrosion protection zones defined above, provided they are
— flexibility, compatible. The considerations according to a), b), c), f), g)
— thermal resistance or conductivity, and h) in C.101 above apply for all of the three zones.
— abrasion resistance Guidance note:
— electrical resistance, and Fastening devices for risers are normally selected to be compati-
— resistance to hydrostatic pressure ble with a specific riser coating rather than vice versa.
— cutbacks.
Project specific requirements to quality control shall be de-
scribed. 106 The following additional considerations apply in the
splash and atmospheric zones:
104 DNV RP-F106 gives detailed requirements and recom-
mendations to manufacturing of linepipe coatings, including — resistance to under-rusting at coating defects,
inspection and testing associated with quality control. — maintainability,
— compatibility with inspection procedures for internal and/
C 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and appli- or external corrosion,
cation — compatibility with equipment/procedures for removal of
201 The coating Manufacturer shall be capable of document- biofouling (if applicable), and
ing their ability to produce coatings meeting specified proper- — fire protection (if required).
ties. A coating manufacturing qualification should be executed
and accepted by Purchaser before starting the coating work, es- 107 Use of a corrosion allowance to compensate for external
pecially for novel products where there is limited experience corrosion due to coating damage shall be duly considered in
from manufacturing. the splash zone (see B103 and Sec.1 C299). The needs for, and
benefits of, a corrosion allowance depend on the type of coat-
202 All coating work shall be carried out according to a qual- ing, corrosive conditions, design life, consequences of damage
ified manufacturing procedure specification. The following and accessibility for inspection and maintenance.
items shall be described in the coating manufacturing proce-
dure specification: 108 In the submerged zone, the considerations for selection
of coating in C.101 apply. In addition, resistance to biofouling
— coating materials, is relevant in surface waters of the submerged zone and the
— surface preparation, lowermost section of the splash zone.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

109 Mechanical and physical coating properties listed in — coating/in-fill materials,

C.103 are also relevant for riser coatings, dependent on the par- — surface preparation,
ticular corrosion protection zone. The applicable requirements — coating application,
to properties for each coating system and for quality control — in-fill application (if relevant),
shall be defined in a purchase specification. — inspection, and
110 External cladding with certain Cu-base alloys may be — coating/in-fill repairs (if relevant).
used for combined corrosion protection and anti-fouling, pri-
marily in the transition of the splash zone and the submerged 203 Areas to be coated are normally prepared by grinding or
zone (see B.103). However, metallic materials with anti-foul- brushing to minimum St 2 according to ISO 8501-1. For cer-
ing properties must be electrically insulated from the cathodic tain coating systems, blast cleaning to Sa 2.5 is required.
protection system to be effective. Multiple-layer paint coatings 204 The coating manufacturing procedure shall describe vis-
and thermally sprayed aluminium coatings are applicable to ual examination and non-destructive examination of field joint
the atmospheric and submerged zones, and in the splash zone coatings. When such examination is not practical, relevant pa-
if functional requirements and local conditions permit (see rameters affecting coating quality shall be monitored.
106).
D 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and appli-
cation F. Concrete Weight Coating
201 Riser coatings may be applied after fabrication welding,
and in the atmospheric zone, after installation. F 100 General
202 All coating work shall be carried out according to a qual- 101 The objectives of a concrete weight coating are to pro-
ified procedure. The coating manufacturing procedure specifi- vide negative buoyancy to the pipeline, and to provide me-
cation shall give requirements for handling, storage, marking chanical protection of the corrosion coating during installation
and inspection of coating materials. and throughout the pipeline's operational life.
203 Regarding requirements for qualification of coating 102 Requirements to raw materials (cement, aggregates, wa-
manufacturing, coating manufacturing procedure specification ter, additives, reinforcement), and coating properties (func-
and quality plan, see C 200. tional requirements) shall be defined in a purchase
specification. The following coating properties may be speci-
204 For certain types of riser coatings, the requirements and fied as applicable:
recommendations in DNV RP-F106 are applicable.
— submerged weight/negative buoyancy,
— thickness,
— concrete density,
E. Field Joint Coatings — compressive strength,
— water absorption,
E 100 General — impact resistance (e.g. over-trawling capability),
101 For pipes with a weight coating or thermally insulated — flexibility (bending resistance), and
coating, the field joint coating is typically made up of an inner — cutbacks.
corrosion protective coating and an in-fill. The objective of the
in-fill is to provide a smooth transition to the pipeline coating Recommended minimum requirements to some of the above
and mechanical protection to the inner coating. For thermally properties are given in 203 below. Some general requirements
insulated pipelines and risers, the in-fill shall also have ade- to steel reinforcement are recommended in 204 and 205.
quate insulating properties. Project specific requirements to quality control (including pipe
tracking and documentation) shall also be described in the pur-
102 For the selection of field joint coating, the same consid- chase documentation.
erations as for pipeline and riser coatings in C.101, D.105 and
D.106 apply. In addition, sufficient time for application and F 200 Concrete materials and coating manufacturing
hardening or curing is crucial during barge laying of pipelines. 201 Before starting coating production, the coating Manu-
103 Riser field joint coatings shall preferably have properties facturer shall document that the materials, procedures and
matching the selected pipe coating. In the splash zone, field equipment to be used are capable of producing a coating of
joint coatings should be avoided unless it can be demonstrated specified properties. A pre-production test should be per-
that their corrosion protection properties are closely equivalent formed for documentation of certain properties such as impact
to those of the adjacent coating. resistance and flexibility (bending strength).
104 Relevant coating properties are to be defined in a project 202 All coating work shall be carried out according to a qual-
specification. The same properties as for pipelines and risers in ified manufacturing procedure specification. The following
C.103 and D.109, respectively should be considered when pre- items shall be described:
paring the specification.
— coating materials,
E 200 Coating materials, surface preparation and appli- — reinforcement design and installation,
cation — coating application and curing,
201 The Contractor shall be capable of documenting their — inspection and testing,
ability to produce coatings meeting specified properties. A — coating repairs (see 210), and
qualification program, including destructive testing of coat- — handling and storage of coated pipes
ings, shall be performed prior to start of work unless relevant
results from previous testing are available. For novel systems 203 The concrete constituents and manufacturing method
to be applied at sea, the qualification program should include should be selected to provide the following recommended
installation at sea with subsequent destructive testing. minimum requirements to as-applied coating properties:
202 All coating work shall be carried out according to a qual- — minimum thickness: 40 mm;
ified procedure. The following items shall be described in the — minimum compressive strength (i.e. average of 3 core
field joint coating manufacturing procedure specification: specimens per pipe): 40 MPa (ASTM C 39);
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— maximum water absorption: 8% (by volume), (testing of chemical potential into the range -0.80 to -1.1 V rel. Ag/AgCl/
coated pipe according to agreed method); and seawater. Potentials more negative than -1.1 V rel. Ag/AgCl/
— minimum density: 1900 kg/m3 (ASTM C 642). seawater can be achieved using impressed current. Such poten-
tials may cause detrimental secondary effects, including coat-
204 The concrete coating shall be reinforced by steel bars ing disbondment and hydrogen-induced (stress) cracking (or
welded to cages or by wire mesh steel. The following recom- "hydrogen embrittlement") of linepipe materials and welds.
mendations apply: For welded cages, the spacing between cir- Guidance note:
cumferential bars should be maximum 120 mm. Steel bars
should have a diameter of 6 mm minimum. The average cross Pipeline system components in C-Mn steel and ferritic, marten-
sitic or ferritic austenitic stainless steel subject to severe plastic
sectional area of steel reinforcement in the circumferential di- straining during operation can suffer hydrogen induced cracking
rection should be minimum 0.5% of the longitudinal concrete (hydrogen embrittlement) by cathodic protection, also within the
cross section. The corresponding cross sectional area of steel potential range given above. Such damage is primarily to be
reinforcement in the longitudinal direction should be minimum avoided by restricting severe straining by design measures. In ad-
0.08% of the transverse concrete cross section. dition, special emphasis shall be laid on ensuring adequate coat-
ing of components that may be subject to localised straining.
205 When a single layer of reinforcement is used, it shall be
located within the middle third of the concrete coating. The ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
recommended minimum distance from the corrosion protec-
tive coating is 15 mm, whilst the recommended minimum cov- 103 Sacrificial anode cathodic protection systems are nor-
erage is 15 mm and 20 mm for coatings with specified mally designed to provide corrosion protection throughout the
minimum thickness ≤ 50 mm and > 50 mm respectively. Over- design life of the protected object.
lap for wire mesh reinforcement should be 25 mm minimum. Guidance note:
Electrical contact with anodes for cathodic protection shall be As retrofitting of sacrificial anodes is generally costly (if practi-
avoided. cal at all), the likelihood of the initial pipeline design life being
206 The concrete may be applied according to one of the fol- extended should be duly considered.
lowing methods: ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
— impingement application, 104 Pipeline systems connected to other offshore installa-

— compression coating, tions shall have compatible cathodic protection systems unless
— slipforming. an electrically insulating joint is to be installed. At any landfall
of an offshore pipeline with sacrificial anodes and impressed
207 Rebound or recycled concrete may be used provided it is current cathodic protection of the onshore section, the needs
documented that specified properties are met. for an insulating joint shall be evaluated.
208 The curing method shall take into account any adverse Guidance note:
climatic conditions. The curing process should ensure no sig- Without insulating joints, some interaction with the cathodic pro-
nificant moisture loss for 7 days or a minimum compressive tection system of electrically connected offshore structures can-
strength of 15 MPa. not be avoided. As the design parameters for subsea pipelines are
typically more conservative than that of other structures, some
209 Detailed criteria for repairs and recoating shall be de- current drain from riser and from pipeline anodes adjacent to the
fined. As a minimum, all areas with exposed reinforcement pipeline cannot be avoided, sometimes leading to premature con-
shall be repaired. Areas with deficient coating exceeding 10% sumption. When the structure has a correctly designed cathodic
of the total coating surface shall be recoated. protection system such current drain is not critical as the net cur-
rent drain will decrease with time and ultimately cease; i.e. unless
210 Procedures for repair of uncured and cored coatings the second structure has insufficient cathodic protection.
shall be subject to agreement.
F 300 Inspection and testing
301 A quality plan shall be prepared and submitted to Pur- G 200 Design parameters and calculations
chaser for acceptance. The quality plan shall define the meth- 201 A detailed procedure for design calculations and recom-
ods and frequency of inspection, testing and calibrations, mendations for design parameters associated with sacrificial
acceptance criteria and requirements to documentation. Refer- anode cathodic protection systems is given in DNV Recom-
ence shall be made to applicable specifications and procedures mended Practice RP B401 "Cathodic Protection Design".
for inspection, testing and calibration. Handling of non-con-
forming materials and products shall be described. 202 The detailed anode design is dependent on the type of
linepipe coating. For pipelines with weight coating, the anodes
are normally designed with thickness equal to the coating. For
pipelines and risers with thermally insulating coatings, the
G. Cathodic Protection Design overall design should restrict heating of the anode in order to
improve its electrochemical efficiency (e.g. by mounting an-
G 100 General odes on outside of coating).
101 Pipelines and risers in the submerged zone shall be fur- Anode cores, supports and fastening devices shall be designed
nished with a cathodic protection system to provide adequate to provide the required utilisation factor, to ensure electrical
corrosion protection for any defects occurring during coating continuity, and to support the anode during all phases of fabri-
application (including field joints), and also for subsequent cation, installation and operation.
damage to the coating during installation and operation. 203 The anode surface facing the pipe shall have a paint
Guidance note: coating of minimum 100 m (epoxy-based or equivalent).
Cathodic protection may be achieved using either sacrificial 204 To avoid slippage during pipe installation and operation,
("galvanic") anodes, or impressed current from a rectifier. Sacri- anodes to be mounted on top of the coating may have to be de-
ficial anodes are normally preferred. signed for direct welding of anode core to doubler plates on the
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- pipeline. The detailed design shall address the likelihood of
loss of anodes during installation and its consequences for the
102 The cathodic protection systems shall be capable of sup- overall system capacity. Contingency measures shall be iden-
pressing the pipe-to-seawater (or pipe-to-sediment) electro- tified as required. It is recommended that the distance between
DET NORSKE VERITAS

successive anodes does not exceed 150 m. (Larger distances 109 Marking of anodes shall ensure traceability to heat
should be validated taking into account electric resistance in number. Anodes should be delivered according to EN 10204,
pipeline, likelihood of damage to anodes and any contingency Inspection Certificate 3.1.B or an equivalent standard.
measures).
H 200 Anode installation
205 For anodes clamped to the pipeline or riser, each anode
segment shall have an electrical cable for electrical continuity 201 Anode installation may be carried out onshore e.g. for
to the pipe. pipeline barge welding and for tow-out installation. For reel
laying, pipeline anodes are typically attached offshore
206 Outline anode drawings, including fastening devices,
shall be prepared for each anode type/size. Connection cables 202 Anodes shall be installed according to a procedure de-
shall be detailed where applicable. Net anode weights and di- scribing handling of anodes, installation and subsequent in-
mensional tolerances shall be specified on drawings. spection.
207 The detailed engineering documentation shall contain 203 All welding or brazing of anode fastening devices and
the following: connector cables shall be carried out according to a qualified
procedure (see Appendix C).
— design premises, including design life and reference to rel- 204 For linepipe that is to be concrete weight coated, electri-
evant project specifications, codes, standards, etc; and cal contact between concrete reinforcement and the anodes
— surface area and current demand calculations. shall be avoided. The gaps between the anode half shells may
be filled with asphalt mastic or similar. Any spillage of filling
In addition, design documentation for sacrificial anode sys- compound on the external anode surfaces shall be removed.
tems shall contain the following:
— anode mass calculations,
— anode resistance calculations, I. Design and Manufacturing/Fabrication of
— anode number calculations, and
— anode detailed drawings (including fastening devices and Internal Corrosion Protection
connector cables if applicable). I 100 General
208 Reference is made to DNV RP B401 for design docu- 101 Most fluids for transportation in pipeline systems are po-
mentation of impressed current systems. tentially corrosive to ordinary C-Mn steel linepipe material.
102 The selection of a system for internal corrosion protec-
tion of pipelines and risers has a major effect on detailed de-
sign and must therefore be evaluated during conceptual design
H. Manufacturing and Installation of Sacrificial (see B 200 and Section 5B 500). The following options for cor-
Anodes rosion control may be considered:
H 100 Anode manufacturing a) processing of fluid for removal of liquid water and/or cor-
101 Requirements to anode manufacturing, including di- rosive agents;
mensions and weight, requirements to quality control (defect b) use of linepipe or internal (metallic) lining/cladding with
tolerances, electrochemical performance during testing, etc.), intrinsic corrosion resistance;
marking and documentation shall be detailed in a purchase
specification. c) use of organic corrosion protective coatings or linings
(normally in combination with a) or d)); and
102 For each anode type/size, the Manufacturer shall prepare
a detailed drawing showing location and dimensions of anode d) chemical treatment, i.e. addition of chemicals with corro-
inserts, anode gross weight and other details as specified in sion mitigating function.
purchase documentation (see G.206). In addition, the benefits of a corrosion allowance (see B 200
103 Manufacturing of anodes shall be carried out according and 0) shall be duly considered.
to a manufacturing procedure specification. General require- 103 The need for temporary corrosion protection of internal
ments for anode manufacturing are given in DNV-RP B401. surfaces during storage, transportation and flooding should be
104 A procedure for electrochemical testing of anode mate- considered. Optional techniques include end caps, rust protec-
rial performance during anode manufacturing is given in Ap- tive oil/wax, and for flooding, chemical treatment (biocide
pendix A of RP B401. and/or oxygen scavenger).
105 Inserts to be welded to the pipe shall be made of steel Guidance note:
with adequate weldability. For stainless steel linepipe, such in- The use of a biocide for treatment of water for flooding is most
serts shall always be welded on to doubler plates of the same essential (even with short duration) as incipient bacterial growth
material as, or otherwise compatible with, the linepipe. For C- established during flooding may proceed during operation and
Mn steel inserts, the carbon equivalent or Pcm value for any cause corrosion damage. For uncoated C-Mn steel pipelines, an
doubler plates shall not exceed that specified for the pipe ma- oxygen scavenger may be omitted since oxygen dissolved in sea-
water will become rapidly consumed by uniform corrosion with-
terial. out causing significant loss of wall thickness. Film forming or
106 Detailed requirements for weight and dimensional toler- "passivating" corrosion inhibitors are not actually required and
ances are given in e.g. NACE RP 0492-92. may even be harmful.
107 All anodes shall be visually examined for cracks and ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
other significant defects. Requirements are given in e.g. NACE
RP 0492-92. I 200 Internal corrosion protection by fluid processing
108 A quality plan shall be prepared and submitted to Pur- 201 Corrosion control by fluid processing may involve re-
chaser for acceptance. The quality plan shall define methods, moval of water from gas/oil (dehydration), or of oxygen from
frequency of inspection and testing, and acceptance criteria. seawater for injection (deoxygenation), for example. Conse-
Reference shall be made to applicable procedures for inspec- quences of operational upsets on material degradation shall be
tion, testing and calibrations. evaluated. The necessity for corrosion allowance and redun-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

dant systems for fluid processing should be considered. On- duction in dry gas pipelines ("flow coatings"). Although internal
line monitoring of fluid corrosion properties downstream of coatings can not be expected to be fully efficient in preventing
processing unit is normally required. For oil export pipelines corrosion attack if corrosive fluids are conveyed, any coating
carrying residual amounts of water, a biocide treatment should with adequate properties may still be efficient in reducing forms
of attack affecting membrane stresses and hence, the pressure re-
be considered as a back up (see I 500). taining capacity of the pipeline.
I 300 Internal corrosion protection by use of linepipe in ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Corrosion Resistant Alloys (CRAs)
301 The selection of corrosion resistant materials has nor- I 500 Internal corrosion protection by chemical treat-
mally been preceded by an evaluation of a C-Mn steel option, ment
where the material was concluded to provide inadequate safety
and/or cost effectiveness in terms of operational reliability (see 501 Chemical treatment of fluids for corrosion control may
B 200). include:
302 For the subsequent selection of corrosion resistant mate- — corrosion inhibitors (e.g. "film forming");
rials, the following major parameters shall be considered: — pH-buffering chemicals;
— mechanical properties; — biocides (for mitigation of bacterial corrosion);
— ease of fabrication, particularly weldability; and — glycol or methanol (added at high concentrations for hy-
— internal and external corrosion resistance, in particular drate inhibition, diluting the water phase);
with respect to environmentally induced cracking. — dispersants (for emulsification of water in oil); and
— scavengers (for removal of corrosive constituents at low
Guidance note: concentrations).
Procurement conditions such as availability, lead times and costs
should also be considered. 502 The reliability of chemical treatment shall be evaluated
in detail during the conceptual design. Important parameters to
be considered are:
303 The need for pre-qualification of candidate suppliers of
linepipe and pipeline components in CRAs shall be duly con- — anticipated corrosion mitigating efficiency for the actual
sidered. fluid to be treated, including possible effects of scales, de-
posits, etc. associated with this fluid;
I 400 Internal corrosion protection by organic coatings — capability of the conveyed fluid to distribute inhibitor in
or linings the pipeline system along its full length and circumfer-
401 If internal coatings or linings are to be evaluated as an ence,
option for corrosion control, the following main parameters — compatibility with all pipeline system and downstream
shall be considered: materials, particularly elastomers and organic coatings,
— compatibility with any other additives to be injected,
— chemical compatibility with all fluids to be conveyed or — health hazards and environmental compatibility,
contacted during installation, commissioning and opera- — provisions for injection and techniques/procedures for
tion, including the effects of any additives (see I 500); monitoring of inhibitor efficiency, and
— resistance to erosion by fluid and mechanical damage by — consequences of failure to achieve adequate protection,
pigging operations; and redundant techniques.
— resistance to rapid decompression;
— reliability of quality control during coating application, Guidance note:
— reliability of (internal) field joint coating systems, if appli- For pipelines carrying untreated well fluid or other fluids with
cable; and high corrosivity and with high requirements to safety and relia-
— consequences of failure and redundant techniques for cor- bility, there is a need to verify the efficiency of chemical treat-
rosion mitigation. ment by integrity monitoring using a tool allowing wall thickness
measurements along the full length of the pipeline (see Section
Guidance note: 10).
Internal coating of pipelines (e.g. by thin film fusion bonded
epoxy) has primarily been applied for the purpose of friction re- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 9
INSTALLATION
A. General tion manual shall include all factors that influence the quality
and reliability of the installation work, including normal and
A 100 Objective contingency situations, and shall address all installation steps,
including examinations and check points. The manual shall re-
101 The objective of this section is to provide requirements flect the results of the FMEA analysis or HAZOP studies, and
as to which analyses, studies and documentation shall be pre- shall state requirements for the parameters to be controlled and
pared and agreed for the installation, and further to provide re- the allowable range of parameter variation during the installa-
quirements for the installation and testing of the complete tion.
pipeline system which are not covered elsewhere in the stand-
ard. The following shall, as a minimum, be covered:
A 200 Application — quality system manual,
— mobilisation manual,
201 This section is applicable to installation and testing of — construction manual,
pipelines and rigid risers designed and manufactured accord- — health, safety and environment manual, and
ing to this standard. — emergency preparedness manual.
A 300 Failure Mode Effect Analysis (FMEA) and Haz- The manuals should include:
ard and Operability (HAZOP) studies
301 Systematic analyses of equipment and installation oper- — interface description;
ations shall be performed in order to identify possible critical — organisation, responsibilities and communication;
items or activities which could cause or aggravate a hazardous — description of and commissioning procedures for the
condition, and to ensure that effective remedial measures are equipment and systems involved in the operation;
taken. The extent of analysis shall reflect the criticality of the — limitations and conditions imposed by structural strength
operations and the extent of experience available from previ- in accordance with the design;
ous similar operations. — limitations on operations imposed by environmental con-
ditions; and
302 Special attention shall be given to sections of the pipe- — references to the established operational and contingency
line route close to other installations or shore approaches procedures.
where there is greater risk of interference from shipping, an-
choring etc. For critical operations, procedural HAZOP studies 503 The Contractor shall prepare procedures covering nor-
shall be performed. mal and contingency situations. The procedures shall describe:
Guidance note:
— purpose and scope of the activity;
Guidance in performing Failure Mode Effect Analysis is given in — responsibilities;
DNV Rules for Classification of High Speed and Light Craft, Pt.0
Ch.4 Sec.2. — materials, equipment and documents to be used;
— how the activity is performed in order to meet specified re-
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- quirements; and
— how the activity is controlled and documented.
A 400 Installation and testing specifications and draw-
ings 504 The installation manual shall be updated/revised as
needed as installation proceeds.
401 Specifications and drawings shall be prepared covering
installation and testing of pipeline systems, risers, protective 505 The installation manuals are subject to agreement
structures etc. through:
402 The specifications and drawings shall describe, in suffi- — review of methods, procedures and calculations,
cient detail, requirements to installation methods and the proc- — review and qualification of procedures,
esses to be employed and to the final result of the operations. — qualification of vessels and equipment, and
403 The requirements shall reflect the basis for, and the re- — review of personnel qualifications
sults of, the design activities. The type and extent of verifica- 506 Requirements to the installation manual and acceptance
tion, testing, acceptance criteria and associated documentation are given in the various subsections. The results of the FMEA
required to verify that the properties and integrity of the pipe- analysis or HAZOP studies (see A 300) shall also be used in
line system meet the requirements of this standard, as well as determining the extent and depth of verification of equipment
the extent and type of documentation, records and certification and procedures.
required, shall be stated.
507 In cases where variations in manner of performance of
404 Requirements to the installation manual and the extent an activity may give undesirable results, the essential variables
of tests, investigations and acceptance criteria required for and their acceptable limits shall be established.
qualification of the installation manual shall be included.
A 600 Quality Assurance
A 500 Installation Manuals
601 The installation Contractor shall as a minimum have an
501 Installation manuals shall be prepared by the various implemented quality assurance system meeting the require-
Contractors. ments of ISO 9001/ISO9002 or equivalent. Further require-
502 The installation manual is a collection of the manuals ments for quality assurance are given in Section 2B 500.
and procedures relevant to the specific work to be performed.
It is prepared in order to demonstrate that the methods and A 700 Welding
equipment used by the Contractor will meet the specified re- 701 Requirements for welding processes, welding procedure
quirements, and that the results can be verified. The installa- qualification, execution of welding and welding personnel are
DET NORSKE VERITAS

given in Appendix C. testing are unsatisfactory, the welding shall be suspended until
702 Requirements for mechanical and corrosion testing for the causes of the defects have been established and rectified.
qualification of welding procedures are given in Appendix B. 807 For "Golden Welds" (critical welds e.g. tie-in welds that
703 The mechanical properties and corrosion resistance of will not be subject to pressure testing, etc.) 100% ultrasonic
weldments shall at least meet the requirements given in the in- testing, 100% radiographic testing, and 100% magnetic parti-
stallation and testing specifications. cle testing or 100% liquid penetrant testing of non- erromag-
netic materials shall be performed. If the ultrasonic testing is
704 For weld repair at weld repair stations where the pipeline performed as automated ultrasonic testing, see Appendix E,
section under repair is subjected to tensile and bending stress- the radiographic and magnetic particle/liquid penetrant testing
es, a weld repair analysis shall be performed. The analysis shall may be omitted subject to agreement.
determine the maximum excavation length and depth combi-
nations that may be performed, taking into account all stresses 808 Magnetic particle testing or liquid penetrant testing of
acting at the area of the repair. The analysis shall be performed non-ferromagnetic materials shall be performed to verify com-
in accordance with the requirements to Engineering Criticality plete removal of defects before commencing weld repairs, and
Assessment (ECA) given in Section 5D. for 100% lamination checks at re-bevelled ends of cut pipe.
The analysis shall consider the reduction of yield and tensile 809 Visual Examination shall include:
strength in the material due to the heat input from defect exca-
vation, preheating, and welding and also dynamic amplifica- — 100% examination of completed welds for surface flaws,
tion due to weather conditions and reduced stiffness effect at shape and dimensions;
field joints. The stresses in the remaining section shall not be — 100% examination of the visible pipe surface, prior to field
above 80% of SMYS. joint coating; and
— 100% examination of completed field joint coating.
705 The weld repair analysis shall be subject to agreement.
706 The root and the first filler pass shall, as a minimum, be A 900 Production tests
completed at the first welding station before moving the pipe. 901 One production test is required for each Welding Proce-
Moving the pipe at an earlier stage may be permitted if an anal- dure Specification (WPS) used for welding of the pipeline
ysis is performed showing that this can be performed without girth welds.
any risk of introducing damage to the deposited weld material.
This analysis shall consider the maximum misalignment al- 902 Production tests should not be required for welding pro-
lowed, the height of the deposited weld metal, the possible cedures qualified specifically for tie-in welds, flange welds,
presence of flaws, support conditions for the pipe and any dy- Tee-piece welds etc.
namic effects. 903 Production tests may, subject to agreement, be omitted
in cases where fracture toughness testing during welding pro-
A 800 Non-destructive testing and visual examination cedure qualification is not required by this standard, or for C-
801 Requirements for methods, equipment, procedures, ac- Mn steel linepipe with SMYS < 450MPa.
ceptance criteria and the qualification and certification of per- 904 The extent of production tests shall be expanded if:
sonnel for visual examination and non-destructive testing
(NDT) are given in Appendix D. — the Contractor has limited previous experience with the
802 Requirements to automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) are welding equipment and welding methods used,
given in Appendix E. — the welding inspection performed is found to be inade-
quate,
803 The extent of NDT for installation girth welds shall be — severe defects occur repeatedly
100% ultrasonic or radiographic testing. It is recommended — any other incident indicates inadequate welding perform-
that radiographic testing is supplemented with ultrasonic test- ance, and
ing in order to enhance the probability of detection and/or char-
acterisation/sizing of defects. — the installed pipeline is not subjected to system pressure
testing, see Section 5B.203.
804 For wall thickness > 25mm, automated ultrasonic testing
should be used. 905 The extent of production testing shall be consistent with
805 Ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be used in the following the inspection and test regime and philosophy of the pipeline
cases: project.
906 Production tests shall be subject to the non-destructive,
— UT or automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) shall be per- mechanical and corrosion testing as required in Appendix C.
formed whenever sizing of flaw height and/or determina-
tion of the flaw depth is required; 907 If production tests show unacceptable results, appropri-
— 100% testing of the first 10 welds for welding processes ate corrective and preventative actions shall be initiated and
with high potential for non-fusion type defects, when start- the extent of production testing shall be increased.
ing installation or when resuming production after suspen-
sion of welding and when radiographic testing is the
primary NDT method. For wall thickness above 25mm ad-
ditional random local spot checks during installation are B. Pipeline Route, Survey and Preparation
recommended;
— testing to supplement radiographic testing for wall thick- B 100 Pre-installation route survey
ness above 25 mm, to aid in characterising and sizing of 101 A pre-installation survey of the pipeline route may be re-
ambiguous indications; quired in addition to the route survey required for design pur-
— testing to supplement radiographic testing for unfavoura- poses by Section 3 if:
ble groove configurations, to aid in detection of defects;
— 100% lamination checks of a 50 mm wide band at ends of — the time elapsed since the original survey is significant,
cut pipe. — a change in seabed conditions is likely to have occurred,
— the route is in areas with heavy marine activity, and
806 If ultrasonic testing reveals unacceptable defects not dis- — new installations are present in the area.
covered by radiography, the extent of ultrasonic testing shall
be 100% for the next 10 welds. If the results of this extended 102 The pre-installation survey, if required, shall determine:
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— potential new/previously not identified hazards to the C. Marine Operations

pipeline and the installation operations;
— location of wrecks, submarine installations and other ob- C 100 General
structions such as mines, debris, rocks and boulders that 101 These requirements are applicable for vessels perform-
might interfere with, or impose restrictions on, the instal- ing pipeline and riser installation and supporting operations.
lation operations; The requirements are applicable for the marine operations dur-
— that the present seabed conditions confirm those of the sur- ing installation work only. Specific requirements for installa-
vey required in Section 3; and tion equipment onboard vessels performing installation
— any other potential hazards due to the nature of the suc- operations are given in the relevant subsections.
ceeding operations.
102 The organisation of key personnel with defined respon-
103 The extent of, and the requirements for, the pre-installa- sibilities and lines of communication shall be established prior
tion route survey shall be specified. to start of the operations. Interfaces with other parties shall be
defined.
B 200 Seabed preparation
103 All personnel shall be qualified for their assigned work.
201 Seabed preparation may be required to: Key personnel shall have sufficient verbal communication
skills in the common language used during operations.
— remove obstacles and potential hazards interfering with
the installation operations; 104 Manning level should comply with IMO's "Principles of
— prevent loads or strains that occur as a result of seabed Safe Manning". Non-propelled vessels shall have similar man-
conditions such as unstable slopes, sand waves, deep val- ning and organisation as required for propelled units of same
leys and possible erosion and scour from exceeding the de- type and size.
sign criteria;
— prepare for pipeline and cable crossings; C 200 Vessels
— infill depressions and remove high-spots to prevent unac- 201 All vessels shall have valid class with a recognised clas-
ceptable free spans; and sification society. The valid class shall cover all systems of im-
— carry out any other preparation due to the nature of the suc- portance for the safety of the operation. Further requirements
ceeding operations. to vessels shall be given in a specification stating requirements
for:
202 Where trench excavation is required before pipelaying,
the trench cross-section shall be specified and the trench shall — anchors, anchor lines and anchor winches;
be excavated to a sufficiently smooth profile to minimise the — anchoring systems;
possibility of damages to the pipeline, coating and anodes. — positioning and survey equipment;
203 The extent of, and the requirements for, seabed prepara- — dynamic positioning equipment and reference system;
tion shall be specified. The laying tolerances shall be consid- — alarm systems, including remote alarms when required;
ered when the extent of seabed preparation is determined. — general seaworthiness of the vessel for the region;
— cranes and lifting appliances;
B 300 Pipeline and cable crossings — pipeline installation equipment (see. D); and
301 Preparations for crossing of pipelines and cables shall be — any other requirement due to the nature of the operations.
carried out according to a specification detailing the measures 202 Vessels shall have a documented maintenance pro-
adopted to avoid damage to both installations. The operations gramme covering all systems vital for the safety and operation-
should be monitored by ROV to confirm proper placement and al performance of the vessel, related to the operation to be
configuration of the supports. Support and profile over the ex- performed. The maintenance programme shall be presented in
isting installation shall be in accordance with the accepted de- a maintenance manual or similar document.
sign.
203 Status reports for any recommendations or requirements
302 The specification shall state requirements concerning: given by National Authorities and/or classification societies,
— minimum separation between existing installation and the and status of all maintenance completed in relation to the main-
pipeline, tenance planned for a relevant period, shall be available for re-
— co-ordinates of crossing, view.
— marking of existing installation, 204 An inspection or survey shall be performed prior to mo-
— confirmation of position and orientation of existing instal- bilisation of the vessels to confirm that the vessels and their
lations on both sides of the crossing, principal equipment meet the specified requirements and are
— lay-out and profile of crossing, suitable for the intended work.
— vessel anchoring,
— installation of supporting structures or gravel beds, C 300 Anchoring systems, anchor patterns and anchor
— methods to prevent scour and erosion around supports, positioning
— monitoring and inspection methods, 301 Anchoring systems for vessels kept in position by an-
— tolerance requirements, and chors (with or without thruster assistance) while performing
— any other requirements. marine operations shall meet the following requirements:
B 400 Preparations for shore approach — instruments for reading anchor line tension and length of
401 The location of any other pipelines, cables or outfalls in anchor lines shall be fitted in the operations control room
the area of the shore approach shall be identified and clearly or on the bridge, and also at the winch station; and
marked. — remotely operated winches shall be monitored from the
control room or bridge, by means of cameras or equiva-
402 Obstructions such as debris, rocks and boulders that lent.
might interfere with or restrict the installation operations shall
be removed. The seabed and shore area shall be prepared to the 302 Anchor patterns shall be predetermined for each vessel
state assumed in the design such that over-stressing in the pipe- using anchors to maintain position. Different configurations
line during the installation and damage to coating or anodes is for anchor patterns may be required for various sections of the
avoided. pipeline, especially in the vicinity of fixed installations and
DET NORSKE VERITAS

other subsea installations or other pipelines or cables. — Class 2 for operations < 500 m away from existing instal-
303 Anchor patterns shall be according to the results of a lations and for tie-in/riser installation operations,
mooring analysis, using an agreed computer program, and — Class 3 for manned subsea operations or other operations
shall be verified to have the required capacity for the proposed where a sudden horizontal displacement of the vessel may
location, time of year and duration of operation. Distance to have fatal consequences for personnel.
other installations and the possibility to leave the site in an 502 Subject to agreement and on a case by case basis, vessels
emergency situation shall be considered. with displacement > 5000 t performing operations < 500 m
304 Station-keeping systems based on anchoring shall have away from existing installations or performing tie-in/riser in-
adequate redundancy or back-up systems in order to ensure stallation operations may have Class 2 provided that the con-
that other vessels and installations are not endangered by par- sequences of fire or flooding will not seriously affect the safety
tial failure. of the installation or the integrity of the pipeline.
305 Each anchor pattern shall be clearly shown on a chart of C 600 Cranes and lifting equipment
adequate scale. Care shall be taken in correlating different
chart datum, if used. 601 Cranes and lifting equipment including lifting gear, lift-
ing appliances, slings, grommets, shackles and pad-eyes, shall
306 Minimum clearances are to be specified between an an- meet applicable statutory requirements. Certificates for the
chor, its cable and any existing fixed or subsea installations or equipment, valid for the operations and conditions under
other pipelines or cables, both for normal operations and emer- which they will be used, shall be available on board for review.
gency conditions.
C 400 Positioning systems C 700 Anchor handling and tug management
401 Requirements for the positioning system and its accura- 701 Anchor handling vessels shall be equipped with:
cy for each type of vessel and application shall be specified. — a surface positioning system of sufficient accuracy for an-
402 The accuracy of horizontal surface positioning systems chor drops in areas within 500 m of existing installations
shall be consistent with the accuracy required for the operation and pipelines, and
and sufficient to perform survey work, placing of the pipeline, — computing and interfacing facilities for interfacing with
supporting structures or anchors within the specified toleranc- lay vessel, trenching vessel or other anchored vessels.
es, and to establish reference points for local positioning sys-
tems. 702 Procedures for the anchor handling shall be established,
ensuring that:
403 Installation in congested areas and work requiring pre-
cise relative location may require local systems of greater ac- — anchor locations are in compliance with the anchor pattern
curacy, such as acoustic transponder array systems. Use of for the location;
ROV's to monitor the operations may also be required. — requirements of owners of other installations and pipelines
404 The positioning system shall provide information relat- for anchor handling in the vicinity of the installation are
ing to: known, and communication lines established;
— position prior to anchor drop is confirmed;
— position relative to the grid reference system used, — anchor positions are monitored at all times, particularly in
— geographical position, the vicinity of other installations and pipelines; and
— offsets from given positions, and — any other requirement due to the nature of the operations
— offsets from antenna position. is fulfilled.
405 Positioning systems shall have minimum 100% redun- 703 All anchors transported over subsea installations shall be
dancy to allow for system errors or breakdown. secured on deck of the anchor handling vessel.
406 Documentation showing that positioning systems are 704 During anchor running, attention shall be paid to the an-
calibrated and capable of operating within the specified limits chor cable and the catenary of the cable, to maintain minimum
of accuracy shall be available for review prior to start of the in- clearance between the anchor cable and any subsea installa-
stallation operations. tions or obstacles.
C 500 Dynamic positioning C 800 Contingency procedures
501 Vessels using dynamic positioning systems for station 801 Contingency procedures shall be established for the ma-
keeping and location purposes shall be designed, equipped and rine operations relating to:
operated in accordance with IMO MSC/Circ.645 (Guidelines
for Vessels with Dynamic Positioning Systems), or with earlier — work site abandonment including emergency departure of
NMD requirements for consequence class, and shall have cor- the work location and when anchors cannot be recovered,
responding class notations from a recognised classification so- — mooring systems failure, and
ciety as follows: — any other requirement due to the nature of the operations.
Vessels > 5000 t displacement:
— Class 1 for operations > 500 m away from existing instal-
lations, D. Pipeline Installation
— Class 3 for operations < 500 m away from existing instal-
lations and for tie-in/riser installation operations, D 100 General
— Class 3 for manned subsea operations or other operations 101 The requirements of this subsection are generally appli-
where a sudden horizontal displacement of the vessel may cable to pipeline installation, regardless of installation method.
have fatal consequences for personnel. Additional requirements pertaining to specific installation
methods are given in the following subsections.
Vessels < 5000 t displacement:
102 Interfaces shall be established with other parties that
— Class 1 for operations > 500 m away from existing instal- may be affected by the operations. The responsibilities of all
lations, parties and lines of communication shall be established.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

D 200 Installation Manual D 300 Review and qualification of the installation man-
201 The laying Contractor shall prepare an installation manual, essential variables and validity
ual. As a minimum, the installation manual shall include all Review of methods, procedures and calculations.
documentation required to perform the installation, and shall 301 The review of methods, procedures and calculations
demonstrate that the pipeline can be safely installed and com- shall include:
pleted to the specified requirements by use of the dedicated
spread. — Failure mode effect analysis,
202 The installation manual shall cover all applicable as- — HAZOP studies,
pects such as: — installation procedures,
— contingency procedures,
— spread, including modifications and upgrading, if any; — engineering critical assessments for girth welds,
— supervisory personnel, inspectors, welders and NDT per- — engineering critical assessments for weld repair lengths,
sonnel; — other calculations made as part of the installation scope.
— communications and reporting;
— navigation and positioning; Review and qualification of procedures
— anchor handling, anchor patterns and catenary curves (if
applicable); 302 Review and qualification of procedures shall as a mini-
— dynamic positioning system (if applicable); mum include:
— stress/strain and configuration monitoring, control, and re- — welding procedures for production and repair welding (see
cording during all phases of installation activities; Appendix C);
— operating limit conditions; — non-destructive testing procedures and automated NDT
— normal pipe-lay; equipment (see Appendix D, Appendix E);
— anode installation (where applicable); — field joint coating and field joint coating repair proce-
— piggyback pipeline saddle installation (where applicable); dures; and
— piggyback pipeline installation (where applicable); — internal and external coating repair procedures.
— pipe-lay in areas of particular concern, e.g. shipping lanes,
platforms, subsea installations, shore approach; Qualification of vessels and equipment
— vessel pull management system;
— abandonment and recovery; 303 Qualification of vessels and equipment prior to start of
— start-up and lay-down; work shall include:
— method of buckle detection; — dynamic positioning system test;
— installation of in-line assemblies and equipment;
— pipe handling, hauling, stacking and storage; — combined review and dynamic positioning system/ten-
sioner system tests (simulate vessel pull and tensioner fail-
— maintaining pipeline cleanliness during construction;
ures and redundancy tests during pull);
— pipe tracking;
— repair of damaged pipe coating; — tensioner system review test (test combinations of tension-
— internal coating repair; ers, testing of single tensioner failure when running two or
— internal cleaning of pipe before and after welding; three tensioners, test redundancy of single tensioners, sim-
ulate main power loss and loss of signal power);
— welder qualification;
— welding equipment, line-up clamps, bevelling procedures, — abandonment and recovery winch test (fail safe actions,
welding procedures, production welding, weld repair, simulate main power loss and loss of signal power);
welding production tests; — friction clamp test (fail safe actions and test clamps during
— NDT equipment, visual examination and NDT proce- vessel pull);
dures, visual examination and NDT of welds; — remote operated buckle detector;
— weld repair analysis extent of weld repair at repair station, — pipeline support geometry;
determined by ECA (Ref. A 700); — stinger configuration and control devices;
— field joint coating and field joint coating repair; — review of calibration records of critical/essential equip-
— touchdown point monitoring; ment, including welding machines and automated NDT
— pipeline repair in case of wet or dry buckle; equipment;
— crossings; and — review of maintenance records for critical/essential equip-
— provisions for winter laying, prevention of ice build-up, ment, including welding machines and automated NDT
removal of ice, low temperature reservoirs in steel and equipment; and
concrete coating, etc. — maintenance/calibration records of critical/essential
equipment on support vessels.
203 The installation manual shall be supported by calcula-
tions and procedures, including contingency procedures, to an Review of personnel qualifications
extent that adequately cover the work to be performed. 304 Review of personnel qualifications shall include:
204 If the installation method used results in an accumulated
plastic strain above 0.3%, an Engineering Criticality Assess- — welders qualification/certification records,
ment (ECA) shall be documented for the girth welds. The ECA — welding inspectors and QC personnel qualification/ certi-
shall establish the fracture toughness required to tolerate the fication records, and
defect acceptance criteria given in Appendix D Table D-4, Ta- — NDT operators qualification/certification records.
ble D-5 or shall validate these acceptance criteria against frac-
ture toughness values obtained during welding procedure 305 Records from vessel qualification, testing and calibra-
qualification. tion shall be kept onboard and be available for review.
Alternatively the defect acceptance criteria may be established 306 Essential variables shall as minimum be established for:
by an ECA based on fracture toughness values obtained during — Allowable variations in stress/strain and configuration
welding procedure qualification, see Appendix D. control parameters where variations beyond established
205 If the accumulated plastic strain is 2% or above the frac- limits may cause critical conditions during installation;
ture toughness testing and fracture mechanics assessments — variations in equipment settings/performance that can
shall be validated according to E. cause or aggravate critical conditions;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— changes in welding joint design and process parameters sion. The forces applied shall be controlled such that no dam-
beyond that allowed in Appendix C; age to the pipeline or coating will occur.
— changes in NDT method, NDT equipment and NDT 702 The installation vessel tensioning system arrangement
equipment calibration beyond that allowed in Appendix D shall therefore be such that:
and Appendix E;
— weld repair lengths/depths in areas where the pipe is sub- — the tensioners, brakes and holding clamps shall be able to
ject to bending moments/axial stress. The maximum hold the pipeline throughout an accidental flooding;
length/depth of excavation shall be determined by ECA — the tensioning system shall have sufficient redundancy to
calculations (see A.704); prevent simultaneous breakdown of tensioners;
— changes in field joint coating procedure; — the tensioner capacity shall have sufficient redundancy to
— operating limit conditions; and allow failure of individual tensioners, without compromis-
— any other requirement due to the nature of the operations. ing the pipeline integrity; and
307 The validity of the installation manual is limited to the — in case of tensioner failure or failure in the tensioner sys-
lay-vessel/spread where the qualification was performed and tem, the pipeline installation shall not re-start before the
to the pipeline or section of pipeline in question. system has been repaired.
D 400 Operating limit conditions 703 When applicable for the laying method, the pipeline
shall be fully supported along the length of the vessel and on
401 Operating limit conditions shall be established and to the stinger by rollers, tracks or guides that allow the pipe to
agreed. move axially. Supports shall prevent damage to coating, field
402 The operating limit conditions shall be based on stress joint coatings, anodes and in-line assemblies, and rollers shall
and strain calculations, FMEA analysis or HAZOP study data, move freely. The vertical and horizontal adjustment of the sup-
and shall refer to objective, critical values indicated by meas- ports shall ensure a smooth transition from the vessel onto the
uring devices. The operating limit conditions shall be referred stinger, to maintain the loading on the pipeline within the spec-
to in the procedure for stress/strain and configuration control. ified limits. The support heights and spacing shall be related to
Continuous monitoring and recording of the measuring devic- a clear and easily identifiable datum. The pipeline support ge-
es required for control of the operating limit conditions shall be ometry shall be verified prior to laying, and the accepted height
performed during all phases of installation activities. and spacing of supports shall be permanently marked or other-
wise indicated.
403 Operating limit criteria may, subject to agreement, be
based on a defined seastate for areas where dependable histor- 704 Stingers shall be adjusted to the correct configuration to
ical environmental data and regular weather forecasts are ensure a smooth transition from the vessel to the outboard
available. stinger end, and to maintain the loading on the pipeline within
the specified limits. The geometry shall be verified prior to lay-
404 Regular weather forecasts from a recognised meteoro- ing. If the stinger can be adjusted during laying operations, it
logical centre shall be available onboard the lay vessel, and shall be possible to determine the stinger position and config-
shall be supplemented by historical environmental data. uration by reference to position markings or indicators. Buoy-
405 If the critical values are about to be exceeded, prepara- ant stingers shall be equipped with indication devices showing
tions for lay-down shall commence. If the critical condition is the position of the rollers relative to the water surface.
weather dependent only, and if weather forecasts indicate that 705 A buckle detector shall be continuously pulled through
the weather condition will subside, the lay-down may be post- the pipeline during laying, unless the same degree of control in
poned subject to agreement. detection of buckles is achieved by other means. The manner
406 Decision to recover the pipeline shall be based on com- in which the same degree of control is achieved shall be docu-
parison of the actual seastate with the limiting seastate, togeth- mented. Exceptions are also when buckle detectors are not
er with weather forecasts. suitable due to the installation method, e.g. reeling, or for small
diameter pipelines, where the gap between the inner pipe wall
D 500 Installation procedures and the buckle detector disc will be very small, and contact
501 Installation procedures meeting the requirements of this with the internal weld bead can give false indications. The
standard, including all requirements of the installation and test- buckle detector shall be positioned such that the critical areas
ing specifications, shall be prepared by the Contractor for are monitored, (normally a distance after the touch down
agreement. point). The diameter of the buckle detector disc shall be chosen
with due regard to the pipeline internal diameter and tolerances
D 600 Contingency procedures on ovality, wall thickness, misalignment and internal weld
bead.
601 Contingency procedures meeting the requirements of
this standard, including all requirements of the installation and 706 The abandonment and recovery (A & R) winch should
testing specifications, shall be prepared by the Contractor for be able to recover the pipeline when waterfilled, or alternative
agreement. The contingency procedures shall at least cover: methods for recovering the pipeline should be available.
707 A sufficient amount of instrumentation and measuring
— failure of dynamic positioning system, devices shall be installed to ensure that monitoring of essential
— failure of tensioner system, equipment and all relevant parameters required for stress/strain
— failure of anchors and anchor lines, and configuration control and control of the operating limit
— ROV breakdown, conditions can be performed.
— breakdown of positioning system, and
— other critical or emergency situations identified in FMEA The following instrumentation is required:
analysis or HAZOP studies. Tensioners:
D 700 Layvessel arrangement, laying equipment and — total pipeline tension recorders,
instrumentation — tension at each tensioner,
701 The tensioners shall operate in a fail-safe mode and shall — tensioner setting and variance to set point (dead band), and
have adequate pulling force, holding force, braking capacity — indication of applied pulling, holding and squeeze pres-
and squeeze pressure to maintain the pipe under controlled ten- sure.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Stinger: of weld numbers, pipe numbers, NDT, pipe lengths, cumula-

tive length, anode installation, in-line assemblies and repair
— underwater camera(s) and video recorders for monitoring numbers. The system shall be capable of detecting duplicate
pipeline position with respect to the last roller on the sting- records.
er (if restricted underwater visibility is expected, a sonar is
required for monitoring pipeline position with respect to 805 The individual pipes of the pipeline shall be marked in
the rollers on the stinger); accordance with the established pipe tracking system, using a
— reaction load indicators (vertical and horizontal) on the suitable quick-curing marine paint. The location, size and col-
first and last rollers on the stinger; and our of the marking shall be suitable for reading by ROV during
— stinger configuration and tip depth for articulated stingers. installation and subsequent surveys. It may be necessary to
mark a band on top of the pipeline to quantify any rotation that
Buckle detector: may have occurred during installation. If damaged pipes are
replaced, any sequential marking shall be maintained.
— pulling wire tension and length recorder, when applicable. 806 Pipes shall be bevelled to the correct configuration,
Winches: checked to be within tolerance, and inspected for damage. In-
ternal line-up clamps shall be used, unless use of such clamps
— abandonment and recovery winches shall be equipped is demonstrated to be impracticable. Acceptable alignment,
with wire tension and length recorder, and root gap and staggering of longitudinal welds shall be con-
— anchor winches shall meet the requirements given in C firmed prior to welding.
300. 807 In-line assemblies shall be installed and inspected as re-
quired by the specification, and shall be protected against dam-
Vessel: age during passage through the tensioners and over pipe
— vessel position, supports.
— vessel movements such as roll, pitch, sway, heave, 808 Field joint coating and inspection shall meet the require-
— water depth, ments given in Section 8.
— vessel draft and trim, 809 The parameters to be controlled by measuring devices,
— current strength and direction, and the allowable range of parameter variation during installa-
— wind strength and direction, and tion, shall be established in a procedure for configuration con-
— direct or indirect indication of sagbend curvature and trol, pipeline tension and stress monitoring. The function of
strain. essential measuring devices shall be verified at regular inter-
All measuring equipment shall be calibrated and adequate doc- vals and defective or non-conforming devices shall repaired or
umentation of calibration shall be available onboard the vessel replaced.
prior to start of work. All measuring equipment used shall be 810 The buckle detector load chart, if a buckle detector is
provided with an adequate amount of spares to ensure uninter- used (see 705) shall be checked at regular intervals. The buckle
rupted operation. detector shall be retrieved and inspected if there is reason to
Essential equipment shall be provided with back-up. believe that buckling can have occurred. If the inspection
shows indications of buckling or water ingress, the situation
Direct reading and processing of records from all required es- shall be investigated and remedial action performed.
sential instrumentation and measuring devices, shall be possi-
ble at the vessels bridge. 811 The position of pipeline start up and lay-down shall be
verified as within their respective target areas prior to depar-
Correlation of recorded data and pipe numbers shall be possi- ture of the lay vessel from site, and adequate protection of
ble. pipeline and lay-down head shall be provided.
708 Other equipment shall be available to monitor pipeline 812 Pipelaying in congested areas, in the vicinity of existing
lay down point and other operations that are critical to the in- installations and at pipeline and cable crossings, shall be car-
tegrity of the pipeline or represent a risk for fixed installations ried out using local positioning systems with specified accura-
or other subsea installations and pipelines. ROVs shall be ca- cy and appropriate anchor patterns. Measures shall be taken to
pable of operating under the seastates expected for the opera- protect existing installations, cables and pipelines from dam-
tion in question. age. Such operations and the pipeline touch down point shall
709 Other measuring and recording systems or equipment be monitored by ROV.
shall be required if they are essential for the installation oper- 813 Other critical operations such as laying in short radii
ation. curves, areas with steep slopes, use of very high or low pulling
tension values etc. shall be identified and special procedures
D 800 Requirements for installation for the operation shall be prepared.
801 Handling and storage of materials on supply and laying 814 In the event of buckling a survey of the pipeline shall be
vessels shall ensure that damage to pipe, coatings, assemblies performed before repair to establish the extent of damage and
and accessories are avoided. Slings and other equipment used feasibility of the repair procedure. After completion of the re-
shall be designed to prevent damage. Storage of pipes shall be pair, a survey shall be performed of the pipeline over a length
in racks and suitable shoring shall be used. Maximum stacking sufficient to ensure that no further damage has occurred.
heights shall be determined to avoid excessive loads on the
pipe, coating or anodes. All material shipped for installation 815 If loss or major damage to weight and corrosion coating
shall be recorded. or anodes and their cables/connectors are observed, repair shall
be performed and inspected according to established proce-
802 All material shall be inspected for damage, quantity and dures.
identification upon arrival. Damaged items shall be quaran-
tined, repaired or clearly marked and returned onshore. 816 Prior to abandonment of the pipeline, all internal equip-
ment except the buckle detector shall be removed and all
803 Pipes and in-line assemblies shall be inspected for loose welds, including the abandonment and recovery head welds,
material, debris and other contamination and cleaned internal- shall be completely filled. In the event that the cable will have
ly before being added to the line. The cleaning method shall to be released from the vessel, a buoy and pennant wire should
not cause damage to any internal coating. be attached to the abandonment and recovery head. The buoy
804 A pipe tracking system shall be used to maintain records shall be large enough to remain on the surface when exposed
DET NORSKE VERITAS

to the weight of the pennant wire, as well as any hydrodynamic — testing of pipe coating durability; and
loads from waves and current. — testing of straighteners and resulting pipe straightness.
Alternatively, seabed abandonment with a ROV friendly hook- 302 An Engineering Criticality Assessment shall be per-
ing loop may be used. Winch tension and cable lengths shall be formed as required in Section 5D 1000.
monitored, and the specified values shall not be exceeded dur-
ing the abandonment and recovery operation. 303 The characteristic strain capacity, εc, determined by an
ECA shall be validated by realistic testing of girth welded pipe,
Before recovery the pipeline shall be surveyed over a length e.g. by full scale bend testing. The extent of testing and the de-
away from the abandonment and recovery head, sufficient to tails of the test procedure are subject to agreement, but all as-
ensure that no damage has occurred. pects of significance to unstable fracture shall be considered,
817 An as-laid survey shall be performed either by continu- such as:
ous touch down point monitoring or by a dedicated vessel, and
shall, as a minimum, include the requirements given in J. — mechanical material properties of linepipe and girth weld,
including weld metal overmatch and possible effects of
strain ageing;
— geometric effects, e.g. on crack tip constraint, net section
E. Additional Requirements for Pipeline Instal- yielding and gross section yielding;
lation Methods Introducing Plastic Deforma- — mode of loading, multiples and magnitudes of loads and
tions displacements;
— strain concentration effects, such as geometric mismatch,
E 100 General material strength mismatch of adjacent pipes, weld metal
overmatch, weld toe strain concentration and coating stiff-
101 The requirements of this subsection are applicable to ness discontinuities;
pipeline installation by methods which give an accumulated — defect type, location, shape and size; and
plastic strain >2% during installation and operation when all — effect of temperature on resistance to brittle fracture.
Strain Concentration Factors (SNCF) are included. The appli-
cable requirements given in D shall also be satisfied. The testing shall demonstrate, conservatively, that possible
102 The specific problems associated with these installation weld defects will not result in unstable fracture during pipe lay-
methods shall be addressed in the installation and testing spec- ing, and will not extend by stable crack growth beyond a size
ifications. that is acceptable with respect to fatigue and unstable fracture
in the operational phase.
103 Pipes used for such installation methods shall meet the
supplementary requirement, pipe for plastic deformation (P), 304 Bending tests on pipe coating shall also be performed to
see Section 6D 300. demonstrate that successive bending and straightening will not
impair the pipe coating and field coating. No degradation of
104 For installation welding, the sequence of pipes included the coating properties shall occur. For this test the coating test
in the pipestring shall be controlled such that variations in stiff- may be carried out on plates.
ness on both sides of welds are maintained within the assump-
tions made in the design. This may be achieved by matching, 305 The straighteners shall be qualified using pipe which is
as closely as possible, wall thickness/diameter of the pipes and delivered to the pipeline and bent corresponding to the mini-
the actual yield stress on both sides of the weld. mum curvature fed into the straighteners. It shall be demon-
strated that the strain resulting from the straightening is within
105 Selection of welding consumables and welding of pipes- the assumptions made for the validation testing, and that the
trings shall be according to the requirements given in Appen- specified straightness is achieved. The straightening shall not
dix C. cause damage to coating. The maximum deformation used dur-
106 100% automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) according to ing straightening to the specified straightness shall be recorded
the requirements given in Appendix E should be performed. and regarded as an essential variable during installation.
E 200 Installation Manual E 400 Installation procedures
201 An installation manual shall be prepared by the Contrac- 401 In addition to the applicable procedures of this subsec-
tor for acceptance by the Purchaser and in addition to the re- tion, the following procedures are required as applicable:
quirements of A 500 and applicable requirements of D 200, it
shall include: — reel loading;
— pipe straightening;
— the amount of displacement controlled strain, both accu- — anode and anode double plate installation;
mulated and maximum for each single strain cycle; — installation, welding and NDT of additional pipe strings;
— method for control of, and allowable variation in, curva- and
ture of the pipe between the point of departure from the — any other procedure needed due to the nature of the oper-
reel and entry into the straighteners; ations.
— description of straighteners; and
— proposed procedure for qualification of the installation E 500 Requirements for installation
method by fracture mechanics assessment and validation 501 Adequate support of the pipestring shall be provided
testing. when loading the reel. Tension shall be applied and monitored
during reeling in order to ensure that the successive layers on
E 300 Qualification of the Installation Manual the reel are sufficiently tightly packed to prevent slippage be-
301 In addition to the applicable requirements of D 300, tween the layers. Adequate measures shall be taken to protect
qualification of the installation manual shall include: the coating during reeling.
— qualification of welding procedures according to the spe- 502 The reel shall not be used for control of the pipeline ten-
cific requirements given in Appendix C, including CTOD sion during installation, unless it can be demonstrated that such
or critical J testing and δ−R or J-R testing; use will give acceptable redundancy and will not induce exces-
— engineering critical assessments to determine the charac- sive stresses or have other detrimental effects.
teristic strain capacity, εc; 503 The curvature of the pipe, peaking and sagging, between
— validation of engineering critical assessment by testing, the point of departure from the reel and entry into the straight-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

eners shall not exceed the maximum values assumed in design F 600 Contingency procedures
and ECA and validated in the material testing of the girth weld- 601 In addition to the applicable procedures of D 600, con-
ed pipes. tingency procedures are required for:
504 Anodes should be installed after the pipe has passed
through the straightener and tensioner. The electrical connec- — weather conditions in excess of the operating limit condi-
tion between anodes and pipe shall meet the specified require- tions,
ments and shall be verified at regular intervals, see Section 8. — ballast system breakdown or partial failure,
— loss of towing tension,
— excessive towing tension,
— pre-designation of temporary mooring area(s) along the
F. Pipeline Installation by Towing tow route, and
F 100 General — third party marine activities.
101 The specific problems associated with pipeline towing F 700 Arrangement, equipment and instrumentation
operations are to be addressed in the installation and testing
specifications. The weight and buoyancy distribution control 701 Vessels shall be equipped with:
during fabrication, launching of the pipestring, tow, ballast — measuring equipment that continuously displays and
control, environmental loads and contingencies shall be ad- records the towing speed and tensions,
dressed when the requirements are specified.
— measuring equipment that continuously displays and mon-
102 Tows may be performed as: itors the depth of the pipestring and its distance from the
seabed, and
— surface or near-surface tows, with the pipestring supported — measuring equipment that continuously display the posi-
by surface buoys; tion of any ballast valves. The flow rates during any bal-
— mid-depth tows, where the pipestring is towed well clear lasting and de-ballasting are to be displayed.
away from the seabed; and
— bottom tows, where the pipestring is towed in contact 702 All measuring equipment shall be continuously moni-
with, or close to, the seabed. tored during the tow and installation.
103 For surface tows, all aspects pertaining to the tow are 703 Installation of strain gauges to monitor the stresses in the
subject to agreement in each case. pipestring during tow and installation shall be considered.
104 For bottom or near bottom tows, the pipeline route shall F 800 Pipestring tow and installation
be surveyed prior to the tow and the route shall avoid rough
seabed, boulders, rock outcrops and other obstacles that may 801 Launching of pipestrings shall be performed such that
cause damage to the pipeline, coating or anodes during the tow over-stressing of the pipestring and damage to the coating and
and installation. During bottom and near bottom tows, ade- anodes are avoided. If pipestrings are moored inshore awaiting
quate monitoring with ROVs and of the pipeline position at the tow, adequate precautions shall be taken to avoid marine
critical phases is required. Satisfactory abrasion resistance of growth influencing pipestring buoyancy, weight and drag.
the pipeline coating shall be demonstrated. All aspects pertain- 802 Notification of the tow shall be given to the relevant au-
ing to bottom tows are subject to agreement in each case. thorities, owners of subsea installations crossed by the towing
105 For mid-depth tows, the requirements in F 200 through route and users of the sea.
F 800 are generally applicable.
803 Towing shall not commence unless an acceptable weath-
F 200 Installation Manual er window for the tow is available. During the tow a standby
vessel shall be present to prevent interference with the tow by
201 An installation manual shall be prepared by the Contrac- third party vessels.
tor and, in addition to the requirements of A 400 and applicable
requirements of D 200, it shall include: 804 Tension in the towing line and the towing depth shall be
kept within the specified limits during the tow. If required, bal-
— description of towing vessel(s) including capacities, lasting or de-ballasting shall be performed to adjust the towing
equipment and instrumentation; and depth to the specified values.
— description of pipestring instrumentation. 805 Installation shall be performed by careful ballasting and
F 300 Qualification of Installation Manual de-ballasting. Care shall be exercised to prevent over-stressing
of the pipestring. The use of drag chains during the installation
301 Qualification of the installation manual shall include the is recommended. The installation operation shall be monitored
applicable requirements of D 300. by ROV.
F 400 Operating limit conditions
401 Operating limit conditions with regard to weather win-
dow for the tow, the seastate and current and allowed strain G. Other Installation Methods
gauge values (if installed) shall be established.
G 100 General
F 500 Installation procedures
101 Other installation methods may be suitable in special
501 Installation procedures meeting the requirements of this cases. A thorough study shall be performed to establish the fea-
standard and the installation specifications shall be prepared sibility of the installation method and the loads imposed during
and agreed. In addition to the applicable procedures of D 500, installation. Such methods are subject to agreement in each
procedures are required for, but not limited to: case.
— control of weight- and buoyancy distribution, 102 Installation of flexible pipelines, bundles and multiple
— launching of the pipestring, pipelines shall be performed after a thorough study to establish
— ballast control during tow, the feasibility of the installation method and the loads imposed
— ballast control during installation, and during installation. The installation is subject to agreement in
— installation and joining of additional pipestrings. each case.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

H. Shore Pull be calibrated, and an adequate amount of spares to ensure un-

interrupted operation shall be provided.
H 100 General 704 ROVs shall, if used, be equipped with video cameras,
101 The requirements of this subsection are applicable to the sonars, a bathymetric system, transponders, responders etc. as
execution, inspection and testing of shore pull when pipes- needed. It shall be documented that ROVs are able to operate
trings are pulled either from a vessel onto the shore, or vice under the seastate expected for the operation in question.
versa. 705 Other measuring and recording systems or equipment,
102 Detailed requirements for the execution, inspection and such as strain gauges, should be provided if they are essential
testing of shore pull shall be specified, considering the nature for the installation operation or the integrity of the pipeline.
of the particular installation site. The specific problems associ-
ated with shore pull shall be addressed in the installation and H 800 Requirements for Installation
testing specifications. 801 If necessary the seabed shall be prepared as required in
B.
H 200 Installation Manual
802 Satisfactory abrasion resistance of the pipeline coating
201 An installation manual shall be prepared by the Contrac- shall be demonstrated for the installation conditions.
tor and, in addition to the requirements of A 500 and D 200,
shall cover,: 803 Installation of the pulling head shall be made in a man-
ner that prevents over-stressing of the pipeline and provides a
— description of offshore plant arrangement, equipment and secure connection.
instrumentation;
— description of onshore plant arrangement, equipment and 804 Buoyancy aids should be used if required to keep pulling
instrumentation; and tension within acceptable limits.
— special operations. 805 During the operation, continuous monitoring of cable
tension and pulling force is required. Monitoring with ROVs
H 300 Qualification of Installation Manual may be needed.
301 Qualification of the installation manual shall include the
applicable requirements of D 300.
H 400 Operating limit conditions I. Tie-in Operations
401 Operating limit conditions with regard to the seastate I 100 General
and current shall be established if relevant.
101 The requirements of this subsection are applicable to tie-
H 500 Installation procedures in operations using welding or mechanical connectors. The op-
erations can be performed onboard a laying vessel (in which
501 Installation procedures meeting the requirements of this case welding is the preferred method) or underwater. The spe-
standard and the installation specifications, shall be prepared cific problems associated with tie-in operations shall be ad-
and agreed. In addition to the applicable procedures of D 500, dressed in the installation and testing specifications.
procedures are required for, but not limited to:
102 Tie-in operations, by means of hot or cold taps, are sub-
— installation of pulling head; ject to special consideration and agreement.
— tension control;
— twisting control; I 200 Installation Manual
— ROV monitoring where applicable; 201 An installation manual shall be prepared by the Contrac-
— other critical operations; tor and shall, in addition to the requirements of A 500 and D
— site preparation and winch set-up; 200, cover:
— buoyancy aids, where applicable; and
— position control in trench, tunnels, etc., as applicable. — description of diving plant arrangement, equipment and
instrumentation; and
H 600 Contingency procedures — special operations.
601 Contingency procedures meeting the requirements of
this standard and the installation and testing specification shall I 300 Qualification of Installation Manual
be prepared. 301 Qualification of the installation manual shall include the
602 The contingency procedures shall cover: applicable requirements of D 300.
— cable tension exceeding acceptable limits, I 400 Operating limit conditions

— excessive twisting of the pipestring, 401 Operating limit conditions with regard to the seastate,
— ROV breakdown, and current and vessel movements shall be established.
— other critical or emergency situations.
I 500 Tie-in procedures
H 700 Arrangement, equipment and instrumentation 501 Tie-in procedures meeting the requirements of this
701 Cables, pulling heads and other equipment shall be di- standard and the installation specifications shall be prepared
mensioned for the forces to be applied, including any over- and agreed. In addition to the applicable procedures of D 500,
loading, friction and dynamic effects that may occur. the following procedures are required:
702 Winches shall have adequate pulling force to ensure that — lifting and deployment of the pipeline/riser section,
the pipe is maintained under controlled tension within the al-
lowed stress/strain limits. The forces applied shall be control- — configuration and alignment control, and
led such that no damage to the pipeline anodes or coating will — mechanical connector installation.
occur. If underwater methods are used, additional procedures are re-
703 The winches shall be equipped with wire tension and quired to cover the safety and operational aspects of the under-
length indicators and recorders. All measuring equipment shall water operations.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

I 600 Contingency procedures requirements to survey vessel, survey equipment, the extent of
601 In addition to the requirements of D 600, the following survey, tolerances for the as-laid pipe line, and the maximum
contingency procedure is required: acceptable length and gap height of spans at various locations.
The extent of procedures to be prepared and qualified shall be
— weather conditions in excess of the operating limit condi- specified.
tions before completion of tie-in.
J 300 As-laid survey
If underwater methods are used, additional contingency proce- 301 The as-laid survey should include the following:
dures are required to cover the safety and operational aspects
of the underwater operations. — determination of the position and depth profile of the en-
tire pipeline,
I 700 Tie-in operations above water — identification and quantification of any spans with speci-
701 The position of the tie-in shall be verified prior to start fied accuracy to length and gap height,
of operations. A survey shall be performed to establish that the — determination of position of start-up and lay down heads,
location is free of obstructions and that the seabed conditions — determination of the presence of debris, and
will permit the tie-in to be performed as specified. — as laid-video documentation of the pipeline to the extent
702 To avoid overstressing during lifting and lowering of the specified.
pipeline sections, the winch tension shall be monitored contin-
uously and shall not exceed the specified for operation. Lifting J 400 As-laid survey of corrosion protection systems
arrangements and equipment shall be designed, and lifting 401 Prior to any pipeline protection operations, a video sur-
points attached, in a manner that prevents any over-stressing of vey of the corrosion protection system shall be carried out
the pipeline section during lifting and lowering into final posi- along the full length of the pipeline, including risers. Signifi-
tion. cant damage to the coating and sacrificial anodes shall be doc-
703 ROV/diver monitoring of the operation should be per- umented.
formed to confirm correct configuration of the pipeline sec- 402 In the case of extensive damage to coating or sacrificial
tions from the seabed and onto the vessel. anodes, consequences for long-term performance shall be con-
704 The alignment and position of the tie-in ends shall be sidered. Potential measurements at any bare surfaces should be
within the specified tolerances before completing the tie-in. carried out to confirm adequate protection. Corrective actions
may include retrofitting of anodes and coating repairs, includ-
705 Installation of mechanical connectors shall be per- ing risers. Satisfactory level of protection shall be documented
formed in accordance with the Manufacturer's procedure. For after the corrective action has been performed.
flanged connections hydraulic bolt tension equipment shall be
used. During all handling, lifting and lowering into the final
position, open flange faces shall be protected against mechan-
ical damage. K. Span Rectification and Pipeline Protection
706 A leak test to an internal pressure not less than the local
incidental pressure should be performed for all mechanical K 100 General
connections whenever possible. 101 The requirements of this subsection are applicable to
707 Corrosion protection of the tie-in area shall be per- span rectification and the protection of pipelines, e.g. by
formed and inspected in accordance with accepted procedures. trenching and backfilling, gravel dumping, grout bags, con-
crete mattresses etc.
708 After completion of the tie-in, a survey of the pipeline on
both sides of the tie-in, and over a length sufficient to ensure 102 A specific survey of the work area should be required in
that no damage has occurred, should be performed addition to, or supplementing, the as-laid survey if:
709 It shall be verified that the position of the tie-in is within — significant time has elapsed since the as-laid survey,
the target area prior to departure of the vessel from site. The — a change in seabed conditions is likely,
pipeline stability shall be ensured and adequate protection of — heavy marine activity is present in the area,
pipeline provided. — new installations are present in the area, and
I 800 Tie-in operations below water — the as-laid survey does not provide sufficient information.
801 In addition to the requirements of I 700, the require- 103 The survey of the work area, if required, shall as a min-
ments in 802 and 803 are valid for tie-in operations involving imum include:
underwater activities.
802 Diving and underwater operations shall be performed in — a video inspection of the pipeline to identify any areas of
accordance with agreed procedures for normal and contingen- damage to pipeline, coating and anodes;
cy situations covering applicable requirements. — cross profiles of the pipeline and adjacent seabed at regu-
lar intervals;
803 Requirements for underwater welding are given in Ap- — depth profiles along the pipeline and the seabed at both
pendix C. sides of the pipeline; and
— any existing subsea installations.
The undisturbed seabed level shall be included in the cross pro-
J. As-Laid Survey files.
J 100 General K 200 Span rectification and protection specification
101 These requirements are applicable to as-laid surveys 201 The requirements applicable to the specific methods of
performed by ROV either by continuous touch down point span rectification and protection regarding execution, monitor-
monitoring from the lay vessel or by a dedicated vessel. ing and acceptance. Requirements for vessels, survey equip-
ment etc. shall be addressed in the installation and testing
J 200 Specification of as-laid survey specifications. The extent of procedures to be prepared and
201 The installation and testing specification shall contain qualified shall be specified.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

K 300 Span rectification controlled manner, such that the required material is deposited
301 Span rectification is required for all spans exceeding the over and under the pipeline, supports, subsea assemblies, etc.
specified acceptable length or height for the specific location. without disturbing their vertical or lateral position, and over
Rectification of other spans shall be considered if scour or sea- the adjacent seabed.
bed settlement could enlarge the span length and gap height 503 The gravel dumping operation shall ensure rectification
above maximum acceptable dimensions before the first of all spans to meet the specified requirements. Stabilisation of
planned pipeline inspection. free spans should be carried out in a continuous operation,
302 Adequate rectification of spans shall be documented by where the distance between spans to be stabilised is not too
a video survey. All rectified spans shall be identified and the large, so as to avoid scouring and formation of free spans be-
length, gap and height shall be within the requirements. tween gravel dumps.
504 If the fall pipe technique is used for gravel dumping,
K 400 Trenching minimum clearances shall be specified such that the fall pipe
401 Where trench excavation is performed after pipelaying, cannot touch the pipeline, any other subsea installation or the
the trenching equipment shall be of a type that does not place seabed. Deployment operations shall be performed well away
significant loads on the pipeline and minimises the possibility from the pipeline or any other subsea installation. Before the
of damage to the pipeline. fall pipe is moved to the dumping location, the clearance be-
neath the fall pipe shall be verified. The clearance shall be con-
402 Trenching equipment shall be equipped with sufficient tinuously monitored during dumping.
instrumentation to ensure that damage and excessive pipe con-
tact is avoided. 505 The completed gravel dump shall leave a mound on the
seabed with a smooth contour and profile and a slope not steep-
403 Special care shall be taken during trenching operations er than specified. If the gravel dumping is performed over ca-
of piggy back / bundle pipelines, so that strapping arrange- ble and pipeline crossings, the gravel mound shall provide the
ments will not be disturbed / damaged during trenching. For specified depth of cover over both the raised and the crossed
small pipelines without any weight coating, trenching shall not pipeline. During the dumping operations inspections shall be
damage / dismantle the anodes. performed with a sonar survey system, or when visibility is re-
404 Where mechanical backfilling is required, it shall be car- stored, a video camera, to determine the completeness and ad-
ried out in a manner that minimises the possibility of damage equacy of the dumping.
or disturbance to the pipeline. 506 Upon completion of the gravel dumping, a survey shall
405 The trenching equipment monitoring system shall be be performed to confirm compliance with the specified re-
calibrated and include: quirements. The survey shall, as a minimum, include:
— devices to measure depth of pipe, — a video inspection of the pipeline length covered,
— a monitoring system and control system preventing hori- — cross profiles of the mound and adjacent undisturbed sea-
zontal loads on the pipeline or devices to measure and bed at regular intervals,
record all vertical and horizontal forces imposed on the — length profiles of the mound,
pipeline by trenching equipment, and devices to measure — confirmation that minimum required buried depth is
the proximity of the trenching equipment to the pipeline, achieved, and
horizontally and vertically relative to the pipeline; — any existing installations and their vicinity in order to en-
— underwater monitoring systems enabling the trenching sure that the installation(s) have not suffered damage.
equipment operator to view the pipeline and seabed profile
forward and aft of the trenching equipment; K 600 Grout bags and concrete mattresses
— measuring and recording devices for trenching equipment 601 Concrete mattresses and grout bags shall meet the spec-
tow force; and ification with regard to size, shape and flexibility of the mate-
— devices monitoring pitch, roll, depth, height and speed of rial, location of filling points, and the specific gravity,
the trenching equipment. composition and grading of grout.
406 Jet sleds shall have a control and monitoring system for 602 Placing of grout bags and concrete mattresses shall be
the position of the jetting arms and the overhead frame, hori- performed in a controlled manner, such that the bags or mat-
zontally and vertically relative to the pipeline. The location of tresses are placed as required. Restrictions on vessel move-
the sled shall not be controlled by the force between sled and ments during the operation shall be given.
pipeline. Devices indicating tension in the tow line and show- 603 During the placing operations, inspections shall be per-
ing the depth of the trench, shall be installed. formed with a ROV-mounted video camera to determine the
407 The trench depth shall be referenced to the undisturbed completeness and adequacy of the installation.
seabed adjacent to the pipeline and to the top of the pipeline. 604 Upon completion of the placing operation, a survey shall
408 An allowable range of values, indicated by the measur- be performed to confirm compliance with the specified re-
ing devices of the trenching equipment, shall be established. quirements. The survey shall as a minimum include:
The possibility of damage to coating shall be considered. Dur-
ing trenching operations the measuring devices shall be contin- — a video inspection of the completed work,
uously monitored. — cross profiles of the placed bags or mattresses and adjacent
undisturbed seabed at regular intervals, and
409 A post-trenching survey shall be performed immediately — length profiles of the placed bags or mattresses and the
or as agreed after the trenching, in order to determine if the re- seabed at both sides of the area.
quired depth of lowering has been achieved and if any remedial
work is required.
K 500 Post-installation gravel dumping L. Installation of Protective and Anchoring
501 Material used for gravel dumping shall meet the speci- Structures
fied requirements for specific gravity, composition and grad-
ing. L 100 General
502 Gravel dumping shall be performed in a continuous and 101 Installation of protective and anchoring structures shall
DET NORSKE VERITAS

be performed according to specifications and procedures meet- appurtenances shall prevent any damage to coating and paint.
ing the requirements of the applicable design code. In addition, special precautions shall be taken to protect flange
faces and other specially prepared surfaces from damage.
603 All tolerances and measurements required in order to in-
stall the riser in accordance with drawings and specifications
M. Installation of Risers shall be verified in the field before installation commences. Di-
M 100 General ameter, roundness and cleanness of J-tubes shall be checked by
gauging pigs, pulling a test pipe or similar to prevent the pull-
101 The installation and testing specification shall cover the ing head and riser from jamming.
riser installation operations and address the specific problems
associated with these operations. Diving and underwater oper- 604 Adequate control shall be performed to ensure that the
ations shall be performed in accordance with agreed proce- angularity and straightness of risers, the distance between ris-
dures covering applicable requirements. ers and bracing, the spacing between adjacent risers and other
critical dimensions meet the specified requirements.
102 The following methods may be used:
605 Tie-ins between riser and pipeline shall be performed in
— integral installation by surface vessel, where the riser and accordance with I.
pipeline are welded on deck of the vessel and the pipeline 606 Prior to pull-in of risers into J-tubes, it shall be verified
and riser lowered to the seabed. The riser is then posi- that the bellmouth is clear of debris and obstructions, that the
tioned in clamps installed on the structure; bellmouth height above the seabed is within design limits, and
— installation by J-tube method, where the riser is pulled that no damage to the bellmouth, J-tube or J-tube clamps (if ap-
through a pre-installed J-shaped conduit on the structure, plicable) has occurred. Entry of the pipeline into the bellmouth
— installation by bending shoe, where the pipeline is de- shall be monitored by ROV, and the tension in the pull-in cable
formed around a quarter circle shaped bending shoe. In- shall be monitored by calibrated load cells and shall not exceed
stallation by bending shoe is subject to acceptance by the the specified maximum. Proper sealing as specified shall be
Purchaser in each case; ensured at the bell-mouth for a riser in a J-tube in case the cor-
— installation of prefabricated risers, where the riser is in- rosion protection system is designed with for a non-corrosive
stalled in clamps fitted on the structure by a surface vessel. fluid in the annulus.
Hyperbaric welding or mechanical connector are then
used to connect the riser and pipeline, 607 All clamps, protection frames, anchor flanges etc., shall
— stalk-on risers installed by a installation vessel, and be installed in accordance with specification and drawings, us-
— flexible, free-hanging risers. ing appropriate bolt torque and to the specified tolerances.
608 Repair of damage to coating and paint shall be per-
M 200 Installation Manual formed in accordance with accepted procedures.
201 The installation manual should, in addition to the re- 609 Upon completion of the installation, a ROV or diver sur-
quirements given in A 500 and D 200, cover: vey shall be performed to confirm the position of the riser rel-
ative to the platform, the position of any expansion loops,
— communication line and interface procedure with the plat- supports, etc., and the results of any trenching and protection
form where the riser is installed; operations.
— description of offshore plant arrangement, equipment and
instrumentation; 610 Cleaning, gauging and system pressure testing shall be
— procedures for offshore riser fabrication; performed in general accordance with the requirements in O,
— procedures for measurement and control of cut-off length except that wire line pigs may be used, The holding time shall
on the pipeline, riser bottom bend section, spool piece etc.; be at least 2 hours and the pressure variation shall not exceed
— anchor pattern for installation vessel; and ± 0.4% unless the variation can be related to temperature vari-
— diving and/or underwater operations procedures. ations during the test period. Visual inspection of welds and
flanged connections shall be performed whenever possible.
M 300 Qualification of the Installation Manual
301 The installation manual shall be qualified. The qualifica-
tion shall, as a minimum, include the requirements of D 300. N. As-Built Survey
M 400 Operating limit conditions
N 100 General
401 Operating limit conditions with regard to the seastate
and current shall be established such that any over-stressing of 101 All work on the pipeline, including crossings, trenching,
the pipe material and weldments is avoided. When adverse gravel dumping, artificial backfill, subsea assemblies, riser in-
weather conditions require shut-down of the installation work, stallation, final testing etc., should be completed before the as-
the vessel shall move away from the platform. built survey is performed. The as-built survey of the installed
and completed pipeline system is performed to verify that the
M 500 Contingency procedures completed installation work meets the specified requirements,
and to document any deviations from the original design.
501 Contingency procedures shall be prepared for accept-
ance, covering dynamic positioning system breakdown, an- N 200 Specification of as-built survey
chor dragging and anchor line failure. If underwater methods
are used, additional contingency procedures are required to 201 The specification shall contain requirements to survey
cover the safety and operational aspects of the underwater op- vessel, survey equipment and the extent of survey. The extent
erations. of procedures to be prepared and qualified shall be specified.
M 600 Requirements for Installation N 300 As-built survey requirements

601 Offshore installation welding shall be performed in ac- 301 The as-built survey shall as a minimum include:
cordance with Appendix C, and acceptance criteria for visual — detailed plot of the position of the pipeline, including loca-
examination and non-destructive testing shall be established in tion of in-line assemblies, anchoring and protective struc-
accordance with Appendix D and Appendix E as applicable. tures, tie-ins, supports etc.;
602 Transportation, storage and handling of riser pipe and — out of straightness measurements as applicable;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— depth of cover or trench depth as applicable; samples shall be analysed and suitable actions shall be taken to
— quantification of span lengths and heights, including remove and/or inhibit harmful substances.
length and height reporting tolerances; 405 If water is to remain in the pipeline for an extended pe-
— location of areas of damage to pipeline, coating and an- riod of time, consideration shall be given to control of bacteria
odes; growth and internal corrosion.
— location of any areas with observed scour or erosion along
pipeline and adjacent seabed; 406 Added corrosion inhibitors, oxygen scavengers, bio-
— verification that the condition of weight coating (or an- cides, dyes, etc. shall be considered for possible harmful inter-
choring systems that provide for on-bottom stability) is in actions and their impact on the environment during and after
accordance with the specification; disposal of the test water.
— description of wreckage, debris or other objects which 407 The pipeline cleaning concept shall consider:
may affect the cathodic protection system or otherwise im-
pair the pipeline; and — protection of pipeline components and facilities (e.g.
— as-built video for the entire pipeline. valves) from damage by cleaning fluids and pigs,
— testing devices such as isolation spheres etc.,
N 400 Inspection of impressed current cathodic corro- — removal of substances that may contaminate the product to
sion protection system be transported,
401 Impressed current cathodic corrosion protection systems — particles and residue from testing and mill scale,
shall be inspected, including cables, conduits, anodes and rec- — organisms and residue resulting from test fluids,
tifiers. Readings from the corrosion monitoring system shall be — chemical residue and gels, and
verified by independent potential measurements, and adequate — removal of metallic particles that may affect future inspec-
electrical insulation from other installations (if applicable) tion activities.
shall be confirmed.
408 The basic requirement for gauging is to run a metallic
402 If the required protection level is not attained, the causes gauge plate with a diameter of 97% of the nominal inner diam-
shall be identified and adequate corrective actions performed. eter through the pipeline. Alternatively, other gauging tools
Satisfactory performance shall be documented after the correc- such as electronic gauging pigs etc. may be used. Tolerances
tive action. on diameter, wall thickness, misalignment and weld penetra-
tions shall be considered for small bore pipelines when select-
ing the diameter of gauge plate.
O. Final Testing and Preparation for Operation 409 Cleaning and gauging train design, number and type of
pigs, need for chemical cleaning, train velocity etc., shall be
O 100 General decided based on type and length of pipeline, steep gradients
along the pipeline route, type of service, construction method,
101 All work on the pipeline, including crossings, trenching, downstream process etc.
gravel dumping, artificial backfill, subsea assemblies, riser in-
stallation, as-built survey etc., should be completed before the 410 If cleaning and gauging are performed on separate sec-
final testing commences. tions of the pipeline prior to tie-in, a minimum of one cleaning
and gauging pig should be run through the completed pipeline
102 Disposal of cleaning and test fluids shall be performed system prior to, or during, product filling.
in a manner minimising danger to the environment. Any dis-
posal of fluids shall be in compliance with requirements from O 500 System pressure testing
National Authorities. 501 A pipeline system pressure test shall be performed based
O 200 Specification of final testing and preparation for upon the system test pressure determined according to Section
operation 5B.202 unless the test is waived as allowed by Section 5B.203.
The extent of the test should normally be from pigtrap to
201 The installation and testing specification shall contain pigtrap, including all components and connections within the
requirements for equipment, the extent of testing and prepara- pipeline system. The test shall be performed after completion
tion for operation, performance of tests and preparation for op- of all installation, construction and pipeline protection works.
eration and associated acceptance criteria. The extent of The pressure test is normally performed as a combined
procedures to be prepared and qualified shall be specified. strength and leak test.
O 300 Procedures for final testing and preparation for 502 The system may be tested as separate sections provided
operation that the tie-in welds between sections have been subject to
100% radiographic, ultrasonic and magnetic particle testing, or
301 All operations and tests shall be performed in accord- by a combination of other methods which provide the same or
ance with agreed procedures. improved verification of acceptable weld quality.
O 400 Cleaning and gauging 503 The pipeline section under test shall be isolated from
other pipelines and facilities. Pressure testing should not be
401 Cleaning and gauging may be combined with the initial performed against in-line valves, unless possible leakage and
flooding of the pipeline, be run as a separate operation, or be damage to the valve is considered, and the valve is designed
combined with the weld sphere removal after completion of and tested for the pressure test condition. Blocking off or re-
hyperbaric tie-in. moval of small-bore branches and instrument tappings, should
402 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that any be considered to avoid possible contamination.
suspended and dissolved substances in the fluid used for this 504 End closures, temporary pigtraps, manifolds and other
operation are compatible with the pipe material and internal temporary testing equipment, shall be designed and fabricated
coating (if applied), and that deposits are not formed within the according to a recognised code and with design pressure equal
pipeline. to the pipeline's design pressure. Such items shall be individu-
403 Water should have a minimum quality corresponding to ally pressure tested to at least the same test pressure as the
filtration through a 50µm filter, and an average content of sus- pipeline.
pended matters not exceeding 20 g/m3. 505 Filling of the pipeline with test water should be per-
404 If water quality or the water source is unknown, water formed in a controlled manner, using water behind one or more
DET NORSKE VERITAS

pigs. The pig(s) shall be capable of providing a positive air/wa-

ter interface. Considerations shall be given to pre-filling valve
body cavities with an inert liquid, unless the valves have pro-
vision for pressure equalisation across the valve seats. All
valves shall be fully open during line filling. A pig tracking
system and the use of back-pressure to control the travel speed
of the pig shall be considered if steep gradients occur along the
pipeline route.
506 Instruments and test equipment used for the measure-
ment of pressure, volume and temperature shall be calibrated
for accuracy, repeatability and sensitivity. All instruments and
test equipment shall possess valid calibration certificates, with
traceability to reference standards within the 6 months preced-
ing the test. If the instruments and test equipment have been in
frequent use, calibration specifically for the test should be re-
quired.
507 Gauges and recorders shall be checked for correct func-
tion immediately before each test. All test equipment shall be
located in a safe position outside the test boundary area. Figure 9-1 Determination of volume of air
508 The test pressure should be measured using a dead 513 During pressurisation of the pipeline, the pressure shall
weight tester. Dead weight testers shall not be used before a be increased at a maximum 1 bar per minute up to 95% of the
stable condition is confirmed. When pressure testing is per- test pressure. The last 5% up to the test pressure shall be raised
formed from a vessel, where a dead weight tester can not be by a linear diminishing rate down to 0.1 bar per minute. Time
shall be allowed for confirmation of temperature and pressure
utilised due to the vessel movements, the test pressure shall be stabilisation before the test hold period begins.
measured by using one high accuracy pressure transducer in
addition to a high accuracy large diameter pressure gauge. 514 The pressure level requirement for the system pressure
test is given in Section 5B.202.
509 The following requirements apply for instruments and 515 The test pressure hold period after stabilisation shall be
test equipment: held for a minimum 24 hours.
— dead weight testers shall have a range of minimum 1.25 516 Subject to agreement, shorter pressure hold periods may
be accepted for pipelines with test volumes less than 5 000 m3,
times the specified test pressure, and shall have an accura- ref. M.610.
cy better than ±0.1 bar and a sensitivity better than 0.05
bar; 517 The pressure shall be continuously recorded during pres-
surisation, stabilisation and hold periods. Temperature and
— the volume of water added or subtracted during a pressure pressure shall be recorded simultaneously at least every 30
test shall be measured with equipment having accuracy minutes during the hold period.
better than ± 1.0% and sensitivity better than 0.1%;
518 If possible, flanges, mechanical connectors etc. under
— temperature measuring instruments and recorders shall pressure shall be visually inspected for leaks during the pres-
have an accuracy better than ± 1.0°C, and a sensitivity bet- sure test, either directly or by monitors.
ter than 0.1°C; and 519 The pressure test is acceptable if the pipeline is free from
— pressure and temperature recorders shall be used to pro- leaks, and the pressure variation is within ± 0.2% of the test
vide a graphical record of the pressure test for the total du- pressure. A pressure variation up to an additional ± 0.2% of the
ration of the test. test pressure is normally acceptable if the total variation (i.e.
± 0.4%) can be documented to be caused by temperature fluc-
If a pressure transducer is used instead of a dead weight tester, tuations or otherwise accounted for. If pressure variations
the transducer shall have a range of minimum 1.1 times the greater than ± 0.4% of the test pressure are observed, the hold-
specified test pressure, and the accuracy shall be better than ing period shall be extended until a hold period with acceptable
pressure variations has occurred.
± 0.2% of test pressure. Sensitivity shall be better than 0.1%.
520 De-pressurisation of the pipeline shall be performed as a
510 A correlation that shows the effect of temperature controlled operation, normally at a rate not exceeding 1 bar per
changes on the test pressure, shall be developed and accepted minute.
prior to starting the test. Temperature measuring devices, if 521 Documentation produced in connection with the pres-
used, shall be positioned close to the pipeline, and the distance sure testing of the pipeline system shall include:
between the devices shall be based on temperature gradients
along the pipeline route. — pressure and temperature recorder charts,
— log of pressure and temperatures,
511 The test medium should be water meeting the require- — calibration certificates for instruments and test equipment,
ments given in O 400. — calculation of air content,
512 The air content of the test water shall be assessed by con- — calculation of pressure and temperature relationship and
justification for acceptance, and
structing a plot of the pressure against volume during the initial — endorsed test acceptance certificate.
filling and pressurisation, until a definite linear relationship is
apparent, see Figure 9-1. This should be done at 35% of test O 600 Cleaning, de-watering and drying
pressure. The assessed air content shall not exceed 0.2% of the 601 Upon completion of pressure testing, the pipeline should
calculated total volume of the pipeline under test. be cleaned. Residues, organisms etc. shall not remain in the
DET NORSKE VERITAS

pipe after testing (see 407). plosive mixtures and, in the case of gas or condensate, to avoid
602 De-watering is required before introducing the product hydrate formation. The injection rate shall be controlled so that
into the pipeline. Drying may be required in order to prevent pressure and temperature do not exceed allowable limits for
an increase in the corrosion potential or hydrate formation, or the pipeline material or dewpoint conditions.
if omission of drying is deemed to have an adverse effect on
the product transported. O 900 Operational verification (start-up inspection)
603 Introduction of the product may be accepted in special 901 After stable production has been reached it shall be ver-
cases. The separation pig train between the test medium and ified that the operational limits are within design conditions.
the product will then require special qualification in order to Important parameters can be:
avoid contact between the residual test water and the product.
— expansion,
604 Selection of de-watering and drying methods and chem- — movement,
icals shall include consideration of any effect on valve and seal — lateral snaking,
materials, any internal coating and trapping of fluids in valve
cavities, branch piping, instruments etc. — upheaval buckling, and
— wall thickness/metal loss.
O 700 Systems testing
902 The need to perform baseline inspection of the wall
701 Prior to product filling, safety and monitoring systems thickness shall be evaluated based on the corrosivity of the
shall be tested in accordance with accepted procedures. This product, the corrosion allowance used in the design, and the
includes testing of: defect sizing capabilities of the inspection tool that will be
— corrosion monitoring systems; used during operation of the pipeline.
— alarm and shutdown systems;
— safety systems such and pig trap interlocks, pressure pro-
tection systems etc.;
— pressure monitoring systems and other monitoring and P. Documentation
control systems; and
— operation of pipeline valves. P 100 General
101 The installation and testing of the pipeline system shall
O 800 Product filling be documented. The documentation shall, as a minimum, in-
801 During product filling, care shall be taken to prevent exclude that given in Section 3F.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 10
OPERATION, INSPECTION, AND REPAIR
A. General subject to regular testing and inspection.

404 For pressure control during normal operations, see Sec-
A 100 Objective tion 3B 300.
101 The purpose of this section is to provide requirements 405 Operational control shall ensure that design temperature
for the safe and reliable operation of pipeline systems for the limits are not exceeded. If the design is based on a constant
whole service life. Requirements are given for operation, in- temperature along the whole route, control of inlet temperature
spection, modifications and repair. will be sufficient. Additional controls are required if the design
A 200 Procedures is based on a temperature profile for the pipeline.
201 Prior to start-up of operation, detailed procedures for op- 406 If the operating conditions are changed relative to the
eration, inspections, and repairs shall be establish. These pro- design premises, a re-qualification of the pipeline system ac-
cedures shall, as a minimum, provide information with respect cording to Section 11 shall be carried out.
to the following: A 500 Inspection and monitoring philosophy
— organisation and management; 501 An inspection and monitoring philosophy shall be estab-
— start-up and shut-down procedures; lished, and this shall form the basis for the detailed inspection
— operational limitations; and monitoring program. The philosophy shall be evaluated
— cleaning and other maintenance, e.g. pigging; every 5 to 10 years.
— corrosion control, including inspection and monitoring; 502 Inspections and monitoring shall be carried out to ensure
— inspection; safe and reliable operation of the pipeline system. All inspec-
— emergency procedures; tion and monitoring requirements identified during the design
— reporting procedures. phase as affecting safety and reliability during operation shall
202 Procedures covering non-routine or special activities, be covered in the inspection and monitoring program (see Sec-
shall be prepared as required, e.g. in case of major repairs, tion 3B 200 and Section 5B 300).
modifications etc. A 600 Special inspections
A 300 In-Service file 601 A special investigation shall be performed in case of any
301 An in-service file of historical data shall be established event which impairs the safety, reliability, strength or stability
and maintained for the whole service life. The in-service file of the pipeline system. This investigation may initiate further
shall contain all important data (see 201) and shall reference all inspections.
necessary supporting documents to provide a full record of in- 602 If mechanical damage or other abnormalities are detect-
formation. ed during the periodic inspection, a proper evaluation of the
302 The in-service file shall, as a minimum, contain infor- damage shall be performed, which may include additional in-
mation regarding: spections.
— results and conclusions from the in-service inspections;

— accidental events and damages to the pipeline system;,
— repair and modifications; and B. Pipeline Configuration Survey
— operational data affecting corrosion and other deteriora-
tion (fluid composition, flow rate, pressure, temperature B 100 General
etc.). 101 A pipeline configuration survey is a survey (e.g. a visual
or ROV) to determine the configuration and condition of the
303 The in-service file, together with the DFI-résumé, shall pipelines and its components. At uneven seabed locations, the
be the basis for future inspection planning see Section 3F 600. survey will verify the position and configuration of the pipe-
304 The in-service file and the DFI-résumé shall be easily re- line.
trievable in case of an emergency situation.
B 200 Periodic survey
A 400 Operation 201 The start-up inspections shall be completed within one
401 Measures shall be in place to ensure that critical fluid pa- year from start of production, see Section 9O 900. In case of
rameters are kept within the specified design limits. As a min- significant increase in temperature or pressure after this first
imum, the following parameters should be controlled or inspection, the need of additional inspections should be con-
monitored: sidered.
— pressure and temperature along the pipeline; 202 A long term inspection programme reflecting the overall
— dew point for gas lines; safety objective for the pipeline shall be established, and shall
— fluid composition, flow rate, density and viscosity. be maintained/updated on a regular basis. The following
should be considered:
402 All safety equipment in the pipeline system, including
pressure control and over-pressure protection devices, emer- — operation conditions of the pipeline,
gency shut down systems, and automatic shut down valves, — consequences of failure,
shall be tested and inspected at agreed intervals. The inspec- — likelihood of failure,
tion shall verify that the integrity of the safety equipment is in- — inspection methods, and
tact and that the equipment can perform the safety function as — design and function of the pipeline.
specified. The long term program shall state the philosophy used for
403 Safety equipment in connecting piping systems shall be maintaining the integrity of the pipeline system and will form
DET NORSKE VERITAS

the basis for the detailed inspection program in terms of in- 208 The frequency of future external inspections shall be de-
spection methods and intervals. termined based upon an assessment of:
203 The long term inspection program shall include the en- — degradation mechanisms and failure modes,
tire pipeline system. The following items, at minimum, should — likelihood and consequences of failure,
be considered:
— results from previous inspections,
— pipeline, — changes in the operational parameters,
— risers, — repair and modifications, and
— valves, — subsequent pipelay operation in the vicinity.
— Tee and Y connections,
— mechanical connectors, 209 Critical sections of the pipeline system vulnerable to
damage or subject to major changes in the seabed conditions
— flanges, i.e. support and/or burial of the pipeline, shall be inspected at
— anchors, short intervals, normally on an annual basis. The remaining
— clamps, sections should also be inspected, ensuring a full coverage of
— protecting structures, the entire pipeline system within a 5 to 10 years period.
— anodes,
— coating.
204 A detailed inspection program including specifications C. Inspection and Monitoring of External Cor-
for the inspections shall be prepared for each survey. The de-
tailed inspection program should be updated based on previous rosion
inspections as required.
C 100 General
205 Pipeline systems that are temporarily out of service shall
also be subject to periodical survey. 101 In the splash zone and in the atmospheric zone, damaged
and/or disbonded coatings can cause severe corrosion damage.
206 Inspection shall be carried out to ensure that the design Risers carrying hot fluids are most vulnerable to such damage.
requirements remain fulfilled and that no damage has oc-
curred. The inspection program should, as a minimum, ad- 102 In the submerged zone, coating malfunctions are not
dress: critical unless they are combined with deficiency in the cathod-
ic protection system. (For definition of zones, see Section 8D
— exposure and burial depth of buried or covered lines, if re- 100).
quired by design, regulations or other specific require- 103 For risers contained in J-tubes filled with non-corrosive
ments; fluid (see Section 8B.105) inspection of external corrosion
— free spans including mapping of length, height and end- may not be required if adequate properties of the fluid is veri-
support conditions; fied by periodic testing.
— condition of artificial supports installed to reduce free
span; 104 Inspection by special internal tools may be used to detect
external corrosion of risers and pipelines in all three zones (see
— local seabed scour affecting the pipeline integrity or at- D 200) including risers contained in J-tubes, if required.
tached structures;
— sand wave movements affecting the pipeline integrity; C 200 Risers in the Splash zone and the Atmospheric
— excessive pipe movements including expansion effects; Zone
— identification of areas where upheaval buckling or exces-
sive lateral buckling has taken place; 201 In the splash and atmospheric zones, visual examination
— integrity of mechanical connections and flanges; of the coating shall be performed in order to assess the needs
— integrity of sub-sea valves including protective structure; for preventive maintenance. Besides visual indications of di-
rect damage to the coating, effects such as rust discoloration
— Y- and Tee connections including protective structure;
and bulging or cracking of the coating are indicative of under-
— pipeline settlement in case of exposed pipeline, particular- rusting. Coating systems which prevent close inspection of un-
ly at the valve/Tee locations, der-coating corrosion shall require special consideration.
— the integrity of pipeline protection covers (e.g. mattresses,
covers, sand bags, gravel slopes, etc.); 202 The frequency of the external inspection in the splash
— mechanical damage to pipe, coatings and anodes; zone of risers shall be determined based on the fluid category,
— major debris on, or close to, the pipeline that may cause the line pipe material, coating properties and any corrosion al-
damage to the pipeline or the external corrosion protection lowance.
system; and
— leakage. C 300 Pipelines and Risers in the Submerged Zone
301 To a large extent, inspection of external corrosion pro-
207 The risers shall be part of the long-term inspection protection of pipelines and risers with sacrificial anodes can be
gramme for the pipeline system. In addition to the generally limited to inspection of the condition of anodes. Excessive an-
applicable requirements for pipeline inspection, special atten- ode consumption is indicative of coating deficiencies, except
tion shall be given to the following elements for riser inspec- close to platforms, templates and other structures where cur-
tions: rent drain may lead to premature consumption of adjacent pipe
anodes.
— riser displacement due to pipeline expansion or foundation
settlement, 302 Potential measurements on anodes, and at any coating
— coating damage, damage exposing bare pipe metal, may be carried out to verify
— technique for corrosion control of any risers in closed con- adequate protection. Electric field gradient measurements in
duits or J-tubes, the vicinity of anodes may be used for semi-quantitative as-
— extent of marine growth, sessments of anode current outputs.
— extent of any previous damage due to corrosion, 303 For pipelines with impressed current cathodic protection
— integrity and functionality of riser supports and guides, systems, measurements of protection potentials shall, at mini-
and mum, be carried out at locations closest to, and most remote
— integrity and functionality of protecting structure. from, the anode(s).
DET NORSKE VERITAS

304 A survey of the external corrosion protection system, — corrosion probes; i.e. weight loss coupons or other retriev-
should be carried out within one year of installation. able probes for periodic or on-line determination of corro-
sion rates;
— in-situ wall thickness measurements, i.e. repeated meas-
urements of wall thickness at defined locations using port-
D. Inspection and Monitoring of Internal Corro- able or permanently installed equipment.
sion
302 Techniques and equipment for corrosion monitoring
D 100 General shall be selected based upon:
101 Inspection of internal corrosion is carried out in order to — monitoring objectives, including requirements for accura-
confirm the integrity of the pipeline system, primarily by cy and sensitivity;
means of in situ wall thickness measurements. — fluid corrosivity and the corrosion preventive measures to
102 The objective of monitoring internal corrosion is to con- be applied;
firm that the fluid remains non-corrosive or, more often, to as- — potential corrosion mechanisms.
sess the efficiency of any corrosion preventive measures, and 303 A typical major objective of corrosion monitoring is to
accordingly to identify requirements for inspection of corro- detect changes in either intrinsic corrosivity of the fluid, or in
sion. the efficiency of the corrosion prevention measures. For pipe-
103 Corrosion monitoring as defined above does not normal- lines carrying dry (i.e. fully processed) gas, inspection of inter-
ly give any quantitative information of critical loss of wall nal corrosion may be postponed provided that monitoring
thickness. Although monitoring may be carried out as actual demonstrates that no corrosive liquids have entered the pipe-
wall thickness measurements in a selected area, it cannot re- line, or been formed by condensation downstream of the inlet.
place pipeline inspection schemes that cover the pipeline sys-
tem, or section thereof, in its full length and circumference. On
the other hand, inspection techniques for internal corrosion are
not normally sensitive enough to replace monitoring. E. Defects and Repair
104 The requirements for corrosion inspection and monitor- E 100 General
ing, and the capability of optional techniques, shall be evaluat-
ed at an early stage of pipeline system design. 101 Repair and modification shall not impair the safety level
of the pipeline system below the specified safety level.
105 Pipelines and risers manufactured from Corrosion Re-
sistant Alloys (CRA) do not normally require inspection and 102 All repairs shall be carried out by qualified personnel in
monitoring of internal corrosion. accordance with agreed specifications and procedures, and up
to the standard defined for the pipeline.
D 200 Corrosion inspection If the repair involves welding, the personnel, method, and
201 Internal corrosion inspection shall be carried out with a equipment shall be agreed upon according to Appendix C.
carrier tool ("inspection pig") capable of inspecting the internal For other types of repair the requirements for personnel, meth-
surface of the pipeline along its full circumference and length, od and necessary equipment to carry out the work shall be
or a critical part thereof. agreed upon in each case.
202 The technique for detection of internal corrosion (e.g. 103 All repairs shall be tested and inspected by experienced
magnetic flux leakage or ultrasonic examination) shall be se- and qualified personnel in accordance with agreed procedures.
lected based on considerations of linepipe material, diameter NDT personnel, equipment, methods, and acceptance criteria
and wall thickness, expected form of damage, and require- shall be agreed upon in accordance with Appendix D.
ments to detection limits and defect sizing capability. The lat-
ter shall be determined based on pipeline design and 104 Pipeline systems with defects may be operated tempo-
operational parameters. rarily under the design conditions or reduced operational con-
ditions until the defect has been removed or repair has been
203 Candidate operators of inspection tools should be re- carried out. It must, however, be documented that the pipeline
quired to document the capability of their systems with respect integrity and the specified safety level is maintained, which
to detection limits and sizing of relevant corrosion defects (in- may include reduced operational conditions and/or temporary
cluding localised corrosion at girth welds) for the pipe dimen- precautions.
sions considered.
105 Alternatively, a pipeline system with defects may be
204 The frequency of internal inspections shall be deter- permanently re-qualified to lower operational conditions see
mined based on factors such as: Section 11 and Section 5, e.g. reduced pressure, which may al-
low for omitting repair.
— criticality of pipeline,
— potential corrosivity of fluid, 106 When a defect is observed, a evaluation of the defect
shall be performed and shall, as a minimum, include:
— detection limits and accuracy of inspection system,
— results from previous surveys and monitoring, — determined details of the defect,
— changes in pipeline operational parameters, etc. — mechanisms causing the defect,
— accuracy and uncertainties in the inspection results,
See also Section 9O 900. — options for further operational conditions of the pipeline
system,
D 300 Corrosion monitoring
— repair methods.
301 The following major principles of corrosion monitoring
may be applied: 107 In each case a thorough evaluation of the defect and the
impact on safety and reliability for the operation of the pipeline
— fluid analyses; i.e. monitoring of fluid physical parameters shall be performed. The requirements given in the following
and sampling of fluid for chemical analysis of corrosive sections regarding required actions, e.g. grinding or replace-
components, corrosion retarding additions or corrosion ment, may be waived if it can be documented that the specified
products; safety level for the pipeline system is not impaired.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

108 Defects that affect the safety or reliability of the pipeline E 600 Leaks
shall either be removed by cutting out the damaged section of 601 Prior to carrying out a repair of any leak, the mechanism
the pipe as a cylinder, or alternatively, the pipeline may be re- causing the leak shall be established.
qualified to a lower design pressure according to Section 11
and Section 5. 602 The most suitable method for repairing a leak in the pipe
depends upon e.g. the pipe material, pipe dimensions, location
109 Depending upon the condition of the damage, a tempo- of leak, load conditions, pressure, and temperature. The fol-
rary repair may be accepted until the permanent repair can be lowing repair methods may be used:
carried out. If a temporary repair is carried out, it shall be doc-
umented that the pipeline integrity and safety level is main- a) The damaged portion is cut out of the pipe as a cylinder
tained either by the temporary repair itself and/or in and a new pipe spool is installed either by welding or
combination with other precautions. by an mechanical connector. For guidance, reference is
made to DNV RP-F104, Mechanical Pipeline Cou-
E 200 Global buckling plings.
b) Clamps are installed, and tightness is obtained by ei-
201 In case of a global buckling (upheaval buckling or lateral ther welding, filler material, friction or other qualified
deflection) resulting in plastic bending strains, the pipeline mechanical means.
may continue operating until the need of repair has been eval-
uated, provided that the operational parameters are kept within 603 Leaking flanges and couplings may be sealed by install-
a range that prevents the accumulation of low-cycle high strain ing a seal clamp covering the leaking flange or coupling, in-
fatigue failure in the buckled section. creasing the bolt pre-load, or replacing gaskets and seals. Prior
to increasing the pre-load in bolts, it shall be documented by
E 300 Grooves, gouges, cracks and notches calculation that no over-stressing occurs in bolts, flange or gas-
ket/seals. In case the pre-load in the bolts is removed, e.g. due
301 Sharp defects like grooves, gouges, and notches should to changing of gasket, new bolts shall be used for the flange
preferably be removed by grinding or other agreed repair connection.
methods. For ground defects where all sharp edges are con- 604 All repair clamps, sleeves, pipe spools, and mechanical
firmed as removed, the defect can be regarded as a smooth connectors shall be qualified prior to installation and leak test-
metal loss defect, see E 400. ed after installation. For guidance, reference is made to DNV
RP-F104, Mechanical Pipeline Couplings.
E 400 Metal loss defects
401 Metal loss defects caused by e.g. corrosion, erosion, or E 700 Repair by welding
grind repair shall be checked for capacity. For guidance, refer- 701 Repair welding procedures and welders shall be quali-
ence is made to DNV RP-F101, Corroded Pipelines. fied as described in Appendix C.
702 Repair welding above water shall be carried out as de-
E 500 Dents scribed in Appendix C.
501 A dent is defined as a depression which produces a gross 703 Underwater welding shall be carried out in a dry habitat,
disturbance in the curvature of the pipe wall, and which results see Appendix C.
in a diameter variation of more than 2% of the nominal diam- 704 Repair welding may, in special cases, be carried out on
eter (see Section 5). pipelines while operating, depending on pipe material, pipe
502 A dent affecting the longitudinal or circumferential weld wall thickness, product type, pressure and temperature. It shall
can result in cracks, and removal of the damaged portion of the be documented that safety for carrying out the repair is accept-
pipe should be considered. The damaged part can be cut out as able, and a safety procedure shall be established.
a cylinder, or repaired by installing a full encirclement welded 705 All repair welds shall be subject to visual and non-de-
split sleeve which is designed to take the full internal operating structive testing, see Appendix D. Following the repair, pres-
pressure. sure testing may be required for the repaired section.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 11
REQUALIFICATION
A. General The reason for requiring use of this standard is in case the origi-
nal standard used for design is less stringent than necessary to
A 100 Objective meet the target safety levels specified in this standard.
101 The purpose of this section is to define re-qualification ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
and to give requirements for re-qualification of pipeline sys-
tems.
102 Re-qualification is a re-assessment of the design under
changed design conditions. B. Design Criteria
Guidance note:
A re-qualification may be triggered by a change in the original B 100 General
design basis, by not fulfilling the design basis, or by mistakes or 101 A target safety level as defined in Section 2C 600 shall
shortcomings having been discovered during normal or abnormal apply for a re-qualification assessment.
operation.
Possible causes may be: 102 Operational experience, e.g. change of operational con-
ditions, inspection records and modifications, shall be consid-
- preference to use this standard, e.g. due to requirements for ered in a re-qualification assessment.
higher utilisation for existing pipelines;
- change of the premises;
B 200 System Pressure Test
- environmental loads,
- deformations, 201 System pressure testing may be required when:
- scour.
- change of operational parameters; — the original mill pressure test or system pressure test does
- pressure or temperature, not satisfy requirements according to this standard at the
- corrosivity of the medium. new design pressure;
- deterioration mechanisms having exceeded the original as- — a significant part of the pipeline has not been system pres-
sumptions; sure tested e.g. new pipeline section. (for omission of sys-
- corrosion velocity, both internal and external, tem pressure test, see Section 5B.203).
- dynamic responses, contributing to fatigue, which may
be caused by lacking supports etc. B 300 Deterioration
- extended design life;
- discovered damage; 301 All relevant deterioration mechanisms shall be evaluat-
ed. Typical deterioration mechanisms are:
- dents,
- damage to pipeline protection, — corrosion,
- weld defects,
- corrosion related defects.
- damage to anodes. — external corrosion
— internal corrosion
— erosion,
A 200 Application — accidental loads,
201 Within the original design life, and without essential — development of free spans,
changes in the manner of employment (repair etc.), the stand- — fatigue,
ard under which the pipeline was built shall apply when con- — settlement.
sidering incidents, minor modifications or rectification of
design parameters exceeded during operation. 302 Sufficient reliability or safety measures shall be applied
For major modifications or other instances not covered by the to account for the accuracy and uncertainties in the inspection
above paragraph this standard shall apply. results.
Guidance note: 303 Accumulated damage experienced prior to the re-quali-
The same safety level shall apply for lifetime extensions of an ex- fication shall be included in the evaluation.Commentary (In-
isting pipeline as would apply for the design of a new pipeline. formative)
DET NORSKE VERITAS

SECTION 12
COMMENTARY (INFORMATIVE)
A. General — give guidance reflecting good engineering practice.
A 100 Objective The section is informative only, and some of the recommenda-
The purpose of this section is to: tions may not be founded on thorough work but engineering
judgement only.
— give an overview of the standard by giving cross referenc-
es to subjects covered in different sections;
— give background information to the requirements in the
standard; and B. Cross References
Table 12-1 Index and cross references
Key word Reference Comment or aspect
Characteristic material Sec.5 B600 fk
strength Sec.5 B604 Relation to supplementary requirement U
Sec.5 B604 Guidance Proposed (conservative) de-rating stresses
note
Sec.5 B606 Reduction due to the UO/UOE process
Sec.5 D505 and Sec.5 Reduction in longitudinal direction
D506
Crossing Sec.2 B303 Evaluation of risks
Sec.3 C204 Survey
Sec.5 B102 Minimum vertical distance
Sec.9 B300 Specification
Golden weld Sec.9 A807 Requirements
Installation Sec.2 C400 Safety class
Sec.5 H100(D) Design criteria
Sec.5 H200 Pipe straightness
Sec.9 Installation phase
Linepipe NDT Level Sec.5 B500 Design – general
Sec.6 B100 General introduction and designation
Table 6-13 NDT requirements
Mill pressure test Sec.1 C200 Definition
Sec.5 B200 Link between mill pressure test and design
Sec.5 D401 Reduced mill test pressure implication on pressure containment capacity
Sec.6 E1104 Basic Requirement
Sec.6 E1105 Maximum test pressure
Sec.6 E1108 Waiving of mill test – UOE-pipes, conditions
Minimum wall thick- Sec.5 B400 Minimum 12 mm and when it applies
ness Sec.5 C300 When to use minimum wall thickness, relation to nominal thickness and corrosion allow-
ance
Ovality Eq. (5-18) and Eq. (5- Minimum allowed ovality for collapse
21)
Sec.5 D800 Maximum allowed ovality, as installed
Table 6-14 and Table Maximum allowed ovality, line pipe specification
6-15
Pressure - general Sec.1 C200 Definitions
Sec.3 B300 Pressure control system Table 3-1 Choice of Pressure
Table 5-7 Pressure load effect factors Table 3-1 Choice of Pressure
Sec.4 B202, Sec.4 Characteristic values
B203
Pressure - incidental Sec.12 F600 Benefit of lower incidental pressure
Sec.3 B300 Pressure control system
Table 3-1 Selection of incidental pressure during pressure test and for full shut-in pressure
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table 12-1 Index and cross references (Continued)

Key word Reference Comment or aspect
Reeling Sec.5 D1006 Fracture assessment – when supplementary requirement P comes into force
Sec.5 D1100 Engineering criticality assessment
Eq. (5-25) Capacity formula
Table 5-8 Condition factor
Sec.6 D300 Supplementary requirement P
Sec.6 D400 Supplementary requirement D
Sec.9 E Testing
Spiral welded Sec.5 A204 Requirements
Strain hardening Eq. 5.26 In capacity formula; strain
Eq. 5.24 Capacity formula SMYS/SMTS - (in αc)
Table 6-3 SMYS and SMTS
Table 6-3 αh (YS/UTS)
System pressure test Sec.1 C200 Definition
Sec.5 B200 Link to design
Sec.5 B202 Requirements
Sec.5 B203 Waiving of system pressure test
Sec.5 B204 Safety class during system pressure test
Sec.5 D400 Limit state check - pressure containment
Sec.5 D500 Limit state check -local buckling
Sec.9 O500 Execution of the test(filling, holding time etc)
Weld onto pipe Sec.7 B1203 Requirements for doubler plates etc.
Table 12-1 b Characteristic material properties for design

Local buckling
Pressure Dis-
Symbol Description Reference contain- Load place- Propa-
Col-
ment Control- ment gating
lapse led Control- buckling
led
Elastic properties
E Young’s modulus X
ν Poisson’s ratio X
α Temperature expansion, as function of the
temperature (within the actual temperature X
range)
Plastic properties
SMYS Specified minimum yield stress Table 6-3 and Table 6-6 X X X X X
fy, temp Yield stress temperature derating value Sec.5 B603, Table 5-2 X X X X X
and Fig. 5-1
SMTS Specified minimum tensile strength Table 6-3 and Table 6-6 X - X - -
fu, temp Tensile strength temperature derating value Sec.5 B603, Table 5-2 X - X - -
and Fig. 5-1
αA Ultimate strength anisotropy factor Table 5-2 and Table 6-3 - - X - -
Note 4
αfab Fabrication factor Table 5-3 - X (X) (X) X
Plastic properties depending on additional requirements
αu(U) increased utilisation Table 5-2 X X X X X
αh(P) Strain hardening value Table 6-3, Table 6-6 - - - X -
and Sec.6 D304
αc(U) Flow stress parameter Eq. 5.23 - - X - -
C. Design Philosophy trunk line with 40 years design life.

The main aspect when determining the safety class is the con-
C 100 Safety Class discussion sequence, typically to people, environment and cost. Note that
Safety class shall be specified for each part of the pipeline and this consequence not necessarily is limited to failure of the
for each phase. The classification shall be based on the require- considered pipeline itself, but also to its impact on the total ex-
ments in Section 2. ploration. One such example may be reduction in production if
a water injection line or a system for waste water fails which
The safety class concept allows the owner some flexibility in
from an isolated point of view could be defined as safety class
terms of risk which is both a reasonable and rational approach,
low.
e.g. this allows the owner to differentiate between the design
conservatism for a flow line with a 5 year design life and a Another example is differentiation of temporary phases. A fail-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ure during installation, normally considered as safety class the pipeline will/may be necessary.
low, will have a significantly smaller consequence than a fail-
ure during a shut-down period of the pipeline, where both pol- Pipelines subjected to subsidence related horizontal move-
lution and time for repair are significantly more expensive and ments should be kept under observation during their operation-
time consuming. al life. There are normally significant uncertainties involved in
the prediction of the subsidence load effects, and design ac-
However, the total safety may not always be increased by spec- counting for these uncertainties (in order to reflect the accept-
ifying a higher safety class. This may be the case when the able probability of failure stated in this standard) may in some
most probable cause of failure would be draught of vessel, cases be unpractical. Monitoring of the subsidence progress
where the emphasis should be put on operating procedures and and pipeline behaviour may in such cases be part of the design
back-up. During such circumstances, it may not be required philosophy.
with a higher safety class.
Pipelines installed on unstable seabed where freespans may
The above clearly illustrates that Table 2-4 is for "normal" occur or grow during their operational life should be subject to
classification only, as stated. regular inspection. In extreme cases, it may be impossible to
consider such events in the original design, and the only design
C 200 Structural reliability analyses option is to prepare a contingency philosophy for monitoring
and intervention of freespans.
Structural reliability methods consider structural analysis
models in conjunction with available information regarding In cases where uncertainties in the operational conditions (me-
the involved variables and their associated uncertainties. The dium chemical composition, water content, temperature, etc.)
reliability as assessed by reliability methods is not an objective impose uncertainties in the prediction of the corrosion rate,
physical property of the pipeline itself in the given operational close monitoring of the medium or corrosion inspection may
and environmental condition, but rather a nominal measure of be part of the design philosophy.
the reliability given a particular physical and probabilistic
modelling and analysis procedure applied. D 200 Air and sea temperatures
Structural reliability analysis is only one part of a total safety In cases where the air or sea temperature at the time of instal-
concept as gross errors are not included. A gross error is de- lation is higher than the minimum ambient temperature de-
fined as a human mistake during the design, construction, in- fined in the project design basis, the minimum ambient
stallation or operation of the pipeline that may lead to a safety temperature applicable for the installation period (including
level far below what is normally aimed for by use of a partial sufficient contingency) should be used when applicable. This
safety factor design format or specific reliability analysis. may be relevant in calculations where the temperature differ-
ence between the ambient installation temperature and the
Target reliabilities have to be met in design in order to ensure minimum or maximum design temperature is governing for the
that certain safety levels are achieved. A probabilistic design design.
check can be performed using the following design format:
Pf,calculated < Pf,target
P f,calculated is the calculated probability of failure evaluated by E. Loads
a recognised (accepted) reliability method and pf,target is a tar-
get value that should be fulfilled for a design to be accepted. E 100 Local pressure
Acceptable failure probabilities depend in general on the con- The term "local" pressure was introduced in DNV'96. This de-
sequence and nature of failure, the risk of human injury, eco- notes the internal pressure at a specific point in the pipeline
nomic losses, social (political) inconvenience and the expense system relative a reference pressure. The reference pressure
and effort required to reduce the failure probability. shall be defined at a specific point, typically the inlet. The dif-
Accident statistics may be used as guidance on relative failure ference relative the reference pressure is the column weight of
probability levels but only limited information about specific the content.
failure probability for SLS, ULS and FLS can be deduced from The following relationship exists:
failure statistics. Structural failure probability from a SRA is a
nominal value and cannot be interpreted as an expected fre- p local, ref = p ref + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h
quency of failure. The following specific local pressures exist:
C 300 Characteristic values p ld = p d + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h
p li = p inc + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h = p d ⋅ γ inc + ρ cont ⋅ g ⋅ h
In a LRFD format, so called characteristic values are used.
These are often lower fractiles for strength and resistance, not p lt = p t + ρ t ⋅ g ⋅ h
always however, and upper fractiles for loads. Typical exam-
ples of these may be SMYS for the yield stress and 100-year where
waves for loads.
pinc = p d ⋅ γ inc =incidental pressure
The characteristic value in the resistance formulas is a lower γinc = 1.10 (normally; maximum), see Section 3B 300,
fractile and the expected yield stress is typically in the order of 1.05 (minimum)
8% higher. On commonly overlooked implication of this is
that it is not allowed to replace the fy based upon a certificate pt = 1.05 pinc (if defined in the highest point of the pipe-
or test. Such a replacement requires a thorough evaluation by line system)
a reliability specialist. ρcont = density of contents
ρt = density of test liquid (water) content
g = gravitational acceleration
h = vertical distance from reference point to sea surface
D. Design Premise
An example for a design pressure of 200 bar, 10% incidental
D 100 Monitoring pressure and a content density of approximately 200 kg/m3 is
given in the figure below. The differential pressure which shall
The following includes typical examples where monitoring of be used for pressure containment is also included.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

within the joint industry project SUPERB and the reports may
be bought from Sintef, Norway. Some results have been pub-
lished, e.g. Jiao et al (1996) and Mørk et al (1997).
The SUPERB results were incorporated in DNV Rules for Sub-
marine Pipeline Systems, 1996 (DNV'96) and modified in or-
der to allow for additional aspects, not necessarily to be
considered in a research project. Hence, all limit states may not
have identical partial factors as in the SUPERB reports.
In this new standard, the LRFD format has been modified on
the resistance side as described in Section 2 and the limit states
from DNV'96 modified correspondingly. The local buckling
formulation has, further more, included some results from the
Hotpipe project, allowing a higher utilisation of pressurised
pipes. See e.g. Vitali et al (1999).
F 200 Material de-rating

E 200 Conversion of pressures For a pipeline designed for a temperature above 50°C, a corre-
sponding de-rated yield stress shall be determined and used for
The governing pressure for design is the incidental pressure. the conditions where this is the relevant temperature. The de-
The incidental pressure is normally defined as the pressure rated strength applies only to conditions where the elevated
with an annual probability of exceedance of 10-4. temperature is relevant, e.g. operation.
If the design pressure is given, the incidental pressure shall be As an example, a grade 450 material to be operated at 100°C
determined based on the pressure regulating system and the
pressure safety system tolerances and capabilities to ensure shall be de-rated by approximately 30 MPa to 420 MPa which
that the local incidental pressure meets the given annual prob- shall be used in the design for operating condition unless other
ability of exceedance above. However, the design pressure can de-rating can be documented.
not be lower than the incidental pressure/1.10. Hence, if the in- In cases where the de-rated strength of a material grade is in-
cidental pressure, determined as outline above, gives a pres- sufficient for the intended use, the material SMYS shall not be
sure which is higher than 10% above the design pressure, the specified higher to compensate for the reduced strength. A
design pressure should be re-defined. Likewise, if the inciden- higher material grade shall be selected.
tal pressure becomes less than 5% above the design pressure,
it shall be taken as 5% above the design pressure. F 300 Condition load effect factors
If the pressure not can exceed the design pressure, e.g. full
The load condition factor γC = 1.07, pipeline resting on uneven
shut-in pressure is used, the incidental pressure may be re-
duced to the design pressure, see Table 3-1. seabed refers to the load effect uncertainty due to variation in
weight, stiffness, span length or heights. This implies that it is
Different systems may have different definitions of design not applicable for the sag bend evaluation during installation
pressure and incidental pressure, e.g. between topside and a on uneven seabed.
pipeline system. When converting the defined pressures in one
system to pressure in another system, the conversion shall be F 400 Pressure containment - equivalent format
based on pressure having an annual probability of exceedance
less than 10-4. This pressure shall then be defined as the inci- The format of the pressure containment resistance in Section 5
dental pressure in the pipeline system. Determination of design is given in a LRFD format. This corresponds to the traditional
pressure shall then be made based on the above principles. format, which usually is expressed in terms of allowable hoop
stress, is given in Eq. (12.1).
E 300 Flow velocity around cylindrical members
D – t1 2 ⋅ αU
The increased accelerations and flow velocities in the flow ( p li – p e ) ⋅ -------------- ≤ ------------------------------- ⋅ ( SMYS – f y, temp ) (12.1)
around a cylinder (jacket leg/member, columns etc.) can lead 2 ⋅ t1 3 ⋅ γ m ⋅ γ SC
to additional forces on the risers, riser supports or other pipe-
line system components. The following expression can be used The differential pressure is here given as a function of the local
to calculate the increased velocity: incidental pressure. Introducing a load factor, γinc, reflecting
the ratio between the incidental pressure and the design pres-
⎛ R ⎞
2
sure, the formula can be rearranged for the reference point
V i = V u ⎜ 1 + ------⎟ above water, as given in Eq. (12.2).
⎝ z ⎠
2
Where: D – t1 2 ⋅ αU (12.2)
p d ⋅ -------------- ≤ --------------------------------------------- ⋅ ( SMYS – f y, temp )
Vi = increased velocity 2 ⋅ t1 3 ⋅ γ m ⋅ γ SC ⋅ γ inc
Vu = nominal velocity Introducing a usage factor as given in (12.3), the criteria can be
R = cylinder radius given as in Eq. (12.4).
z = distance between cylinder centre and the actual location 2 ⋅ αU
(z ≥ R). η = --------------------------------------------
- (12.3)
3 ⋅ γ m ⋅ γ SC ⋅ γ inc
D – t1 (12.4)
F. Design Criteria p d ⋅ -------------- ≤ η ⋅ ( SMYS – f y, temp )
2 ⋅ t1
F 100 General D – t1 η
p d ⋅ -------------- ≤ ----------- ⋅ ( SMTS – f u, temp )
The basis for most of the given limit states were developed 2 ⋅ t 1 1.15
DET NORSKE VERITAS

The corresponding usage factors for γinc = 1.10 (10% inciden- tion:
tal pressure) are given in Table 12-2.
1
p c = y – --- b (12.10)
Table 12-2 "Usage factors" η for pressure containment 3
Utilisation Safety Class Pressure where:
factor,αU Low Normal High test
1.00 0.847 3 0.802 0.698 1 0.96
(0.843) b = – p el
0.96 0.8133 0.77 0.672 0.96
c = - ⎛ p p + p p p el f 0 ---- ⎞
(0.838) 2 D
1) In location class 1, 0.802 may be used ⎝ t2 ⎠
2) In location class 1, 0.77 may be used 2
3) Effectively this factor since the pressure test is governing d = p el p p
u = --- ⎛ - --- b + c⎞
F 500 Calculation of nominal thickness 1 1 2
The negative fabrication tolerance is normally given as a per- 3⎝ 3 ⎠
centage of the nominal thickness for seamless pipes, and as an
absolute measure for welded pipes.
v = --- ⎛ ------ b – --- bc + d⎞
1 2 3 1
The pressure containment criterion gives a minimum required
minimum wall thickness, t1. Depending on the fabrication tol- 2 ⎝ 27 3 ⎠
erance format, the implication of the corrosion allowance will
be different. For a fabrication tolerance given as a percentage,
% tfab, Eq. (12.5) applies.
–1 ⎛ –v ⎞
t 1 + t corr Φ = cos ⎜ -------------⎟
t = ---------------------- ⎝ – u 3⎠
1 – %t fab (12.5)
Correspondingly, the nominal thickness based on an absolute
fabrication tolerance, tfab , is given by Eq. (12.6).
t = t 1 + t corr + t fab (12.6)

Φ 60 π
y = – 2 – u cos ⎛ ---- + ---------⎞
F 600 Pressure containment criterion, incidental pres- ⎝ 3 180 ⎠
sure less than 10% above the design pressure.
The governing pressure when determining the wall thickness is
the local incidental pressure. The pipeline system shall have a
pressure control system which ensures that there is a low life-
time probability for exceeding the local incidental pressure at F 800 Local buckling - Moment
any point in the system. If this is achieved for an incidental
pressure which is 10% above the design pressure, this gives The given formula is valid for 15 ≤ D/t ≤ 60 for yielding and
one wall thickness. ovalisation failure modes. Up to D/t equal to 45, these failure
modes will occur prior to other failure modes, e.g. elastic buck-
However, a better control system which can guarantee the ling, and hence do not need to be checked.
same probability for an incidental pressure 5% above the de-
sign pressure, a correspondingly smaller wall thickness is re- Over D/t 45, elastic buckling has to be checked separately, typ-
quired. This is reflected by a lower γinc in (12.3). ically through FE analysis, with D/t a sufficient "safety mar-
gin" above the actual D/t in order to account for both
F 700 Local buckling - Collapse uncertainty as well as natural thickness variations.
The collapse pressure, pc, is a function of the: In addition to check for elastic buckling, a thinner pipe be-
comes more susceptible to imperfections. Special considera-
— elastic capacity, tions shall be made to
— plastic capacity and — girth welds and mismatch at girth welds, and
— the ovality. — point loads, e.g. point supports.
The formulation adopted in this standard is identical as in If both the elastic buckling has been documented to occur be-
BS8010, apart from the safety margin. The formula is given in yond the valid range and the implications of imperfections has
Eq. (12.7) with the defined elastic and plastic capacities in Eq. found to be acceptable, the criteria may be extended to D/t=60.
(12.8) and Eq. (12.9).
2 2 D F 900 Local buckling - Girth weld factor
( p c – p el ) ( p c – p p ) = p c p el p p f 0 ---- (12.7)
t 1
Research on buckling of pipes including girth welds has shown
t2 3 that the girth weld has a significant impact on the compressive
2E ⎛ ----⎞ strain capacity, see Ghodsi et al (1994). A reduction in the or-
⎝ D⎠ der of 40% was found for D/t=60. There are no other known
p el = -------------------- (12.8) experiments on the impact from girth welds for lower D/t.
2
1–v
It is assumed that the detrimental effect is due to on-set of
t2 buckling due to imperfections at the weld on the compressive
p p = 2 ⋅ f y ⋅ α fab ⋅ ⎛ ----⎞
⎝ D⎠ (12.9) side. If this is true, this effect will be more pronounced for
higher D/t's. The girth weld factor should be established by test
This third degree polynom has the following analytical solu- and/or FE-calculations.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

If no other information exists and given that the reduction is F 1100 Local buckling - Buckle arrestors
due to the misalignment on the compressive side, the reduction The buckle arrestor is usually designed to resist the propagat-
is expected to negligible at D/t=20. A linear interpolation is ing pressure. The propagation pressure resistance of a pipe is
then proposed up to D/t=60. based upon an "infinite" pipe, and the length has to be consid-
If no other information exists then the following girth weld fac- ered when designing the buckle arrestor. A short buckle arres-
tor is proposed. tor needs to be thicker than a longer buckle arrestor.
Most formulas on design of buckle arrestors are build up from
three components:
— propagating pressure of the pipeline,
— propagation pressure of the buckle arrestor and
— so called cross-over pressure.
The cross over pressure is a pressure which normally approach
the propagating pressure of the pipeline when the buckle arre-
stor short enough and the propagating pressure of the buckle
arrestor itself when it becomes longer. Hence, the crossover
pressure is a function of the propagating pressure of the pipe-
line, the buckle arrestor and the length of the buckle arrestor.
Even though the safety factor is provided in the propagating
pressure formula, it is recommended to decrease this with 15%
(from 35 to 30) for the propagating pressure resistance of the
Figure 12-1 Proposed girth weld factors buckle arrestor. This to decrease the failure probability to the
F 1000 Local buckling - Propagating pressure unconditioned safety level in line with normal ULS checks.
The propagating pressure is the pressure required to continue Discussion regarding buckle arrestors are e.g. given in
to develop/run a buckle along a pipe. This means that in order Sriskandarajah (1987).
to experience a running buckle, a dent or buckle has to exist F 1200 Local buckling - Allowable stress design format
prior to the propagating buckle. The propagating buckle will
continue to propagate until the pressure is less than the propa- This Allowable Stress Design (ASD) check may be used as a
gating pressure. preliminary simplified criterion of the local buckling check in
an early design stage for internal over-pressure. It does not su-
Pipelines are usually not designed to resist the propagating persede the LRFD criterion which shall be applied in the final
pressure in the sense that it will not be governing for the de- design.
sign. For many pipelines, however, the pipe will resist the
propagating pressure due to shallow water depth or high inter- The following stress conditions are to be satisfied:
nal pressure (requiring thick wall for pressure containment). In
cases where the pipe not will resist the propagating pressure,
buckle arrestors are installed with a specific spacing, based on σe ≤ η × fy
a cost evaluation, in order to avoid flattening too large portions
of the pipeline.
σl ≤ η × fy
Test performed to determine the propagating pressure is usual-
ly performed in a static manner, a volume of water is pumped Where:
into the pressure chamber where the specimen, with an initial
buckle, is located and the maintain pressure is the propagating
pressure. This procedure deviates quite substantially from a 2 2 2
real propagating buckle. Such differences may be: σe = σ h + σ l – σ h σ l + 3 τ lh
— the pressure at the buckle is higher due to the lack of iner-

D–t
σ h = ∆p d ⎛⎝ -------------2-⎞⎠
tia;
— the deformation pattern may be different; this may also 2t 2
imply that typical strains experienced during the buckling
propagation may be different; and
σe = the equivalent stress
— the stress-strain relationship will correspond to a static
case while in the real case a much higher value may be ex- σl = longitudinal stress
perienced due to the high strain rate. γ = usage factor as given by Table 12-3.
fy = yield stress, see Table 5-2
In the real situation, however, the running buckle will stop τlh = tangential shear stress
when it reach a water depth corresponding to a too low pres-
sure. At this point, the running buckle will change from a dy- Table 12-3 Usage factors for equivalent stress check,
namic condition to a static condition. The very important Safety class Low Normal High
conclusion from this is that the most conservative estimate η 1.00 0.90 0.80
from a dynamic and static condition should always be used,
since the buckle will experience both. And, this will not neces- All Load Factors are to be equal to unity for the stress check.
sarily be as conservative as it may look at the first glance. Condition load factor shall be applied when relevant and on
The safety factors provided on the propagating pressure is relevant stress components.
based upon a conditioned probability, i.e. including the proba-
bility for a buckle to occur in addition to the probability of the F 1300 Local buckling - Adding moments
pipe failing to resist the pressure. This implies that the failure For a pipe section exposed to bending moments acting in dif-
probability of the propagating pressure resistance in itself (iso- ferent directions, the factorised load effects should be added,
lated) is 1-2 decades higher than for other ULS limit states. e.g. a functional moment in the x-direction and a environmen-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

tal moment in the y-directions should be added as in: phase provide information about the defect size after installa-
tion which is needed for assessing possible fatigue crack
2 2
Md = ( γ F ⋅ M F, x ) + ( γ E ⋅ M E, y ) (12.11) growth and unstable fracture during operation.
Assessment at Level 2 is considered safe provided that the
Load effect factors shall be applied on each individual compo- girth welds will not be subjected to conditions during operation
nent. that may lead to failure by fatigue crack growth or unstable
F 1400 Ovalisation fracture.
Pipe ovalisation is mentioned in three different places within It is acceptable to increase the load ratio limit to Lr max=σU/σY,
this standard: i.e. the ultimate tensile sltrength (in true stress) to yield stress
ratio.
— Section 5D 800, where the maximum allowable ovalisa- The material specific Failure Assessment Diagram (FAD),
tion f0 = 3%. This applies for the pipeline as installed con- which requires knowledge of the material stress strain curve,
dition. This limitation is due to the given resistance must be used to avoid non-conservative or excessively con-
formulations which not includes the ovality explicitly, as servative predictions. For assessing defects located within the
well as other functional aspects as stated in the paragraph. weld metal the FAD should be derived from all-weld metal
— Section 5D.503, where the minimum ovalisation f0 = 0.5% tensile tests. For assessing defects at the fusion line and within
to be accounted for in the system collapse check; and the HAZ the FAD should be derived from parent material tensile
combined loading. The collapse formula includes the oval- tests. The respective yield stress values at 0.2% permanent
ity explicitly giving a lower resistance for a larger ovality, strain or at the lower yield point should be derived from the
hence a minimum ovality is prescribed. same stress-strain curves.
— Table 6-14 and Table 6-15, dimensional requirements,
where the maximum allowable out of roundness to be de- The design strain should be calculated by an elastic-plastic
livered from Manufacturer is specified. analysis considering strain concentrations and safety factors.
In lack of a relevant strain concentration factor (SNCF), the
The ovality of a pipe exposed to bending strain may be estimat- SNCF may be approximated from elastic stress concentration
ed by Eq. (12.12). This is a characteristic formula without any factors (SCF) for the same geometry and mode of loading in
safety factors. accordance with Neuber's rule. (For simplicity the SNCF may
conservatively be taken as the square of the SCF.) (SCFs ap-
plied directly on the primary stress may lead to overly conserv-
ative results.)
The primary stress should be taken from the parent material's
true stress-true strain curve at the design strain.
D 2
f 0 + 0.030 ⎛ 1 + -----------⎞ ⎛ 2ε c ----⎞
D
⎝ 120t ⎠ ⎝ t⎠ (12.12) Note that the parent material stress-strain curve is decisive for
f 0 ′ = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ the primary stress as well as for the FAD for defects located at
Pe the fusion line and within the HAZ. It is essential to use the
1 – ----- same parent material stress strain curve for both purposes in or-
Pc
der to avoid gross errors. Also note that for conservative strain
based assessments the parent material stress-strain curve
For further information, reference is made to Murphey (1985) should represent an upper bound curve giving an upper bound
predicted primary stress. However, a lower bound weld metal
stress-strain curve should be applied for constructing a con-
servative FAD for assessment of defects located in the weld
G. Fracture Mechanics metal.
Welding residual stresses may be included as secondary stress
G 100 Engineering Criticality Assessment (ECA) - as described by BS 7910:1999 with the relaxation by increas-
Strain based design ing primary stress. An alternative approach is to add the corre-
The fracture mechanics models for unstable fracture assess- sponding welding strain (welding stress divided by the
ments described in BS 7910 are formulated for stress based as- modulus of elasticity) to the design strain used to determine the
sessments and are recommended for load controlled situations. primary stress. In the latter case no relaxation by increasing
For pipe laying methods introducing plastic strain these mod- primary stress is allowed.
els are usually not directly applicable. Therefore, some guide-
lines for strain based design are given below with the objective G 200 ECA - Cyclic loading into the plastic regime
to define input parameters needed to carry out assessments us- The mechanisms for crack extension by ductile tearing under
ing the format of BS 7910:1999. For nomenclature it is re- cyclic loading, such as pipe laying by reeling, are at present not
ferred to BS 7910:1999. well understood. However, some recommendations for con-
A necessary condition for safe use of strain based design at ducting an unstable fracture assessment at Level 3 are given
strain levels considerably above yielding is that the pipe is pre- below. Due to the uncertainty related to these recommenda-
dominantly loaded in global displacement control. This can be tions the results should be verified experimentally for large
regarded as fulfilled when the magnitude of load resulting values of accumulated strain.
from load controlled sources alone including appropriate safe- It is assumed that stable crack extension is taking place only
ty factors is well below the plastic collapse level. under tensile stress. Plastic deformation under tensile loading
No assumption of local displacement control involving relaxa- in each load cycle may contribute to stable crack extension,
tion of the stress level due to crack growth should be made. while purely elastic unloading and reloading do not.
Strain based design should preferably be carried out at assess- For each stress-strain cycle the plastic strain between the up-
ment Level 3 which require that the fracture resistance curve crossing at zero stress and the following down-crossing at zero
(J-R or δ--R curve) is established by testing according to BS stress should be determined. The total applied strain should be
7448:Part 4 or equivalent standards. This is to ensure that a taken as the sum of the plastic strains of all load cycles plus the
possible weld defect will not lead to collapse due to ductile elastic strain for the single load cycle of maximum stress.
tearing. Further, an assessment at Level 3 for the installation The design strain should be taken as the applied strain multi-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

plied by relevant safety factors. Further assessment should be Other test specimen configurations, such as specimens loaded
carried out as prescribed in G. in tension, may be used for deriving the fracture toughness for
use in an ECA provided that it is justified that the crack tip con-
G 300 Fracture toughness testing straint of the test specimen is not smaller than for the most se-
vere pipeline weld defect assessed in the ECA.
The resistance to cleavage fracture and to ductile tearing is
known to depend on the crack tip constraint. Standardised frac- The fracture toughness can be derived from the load vs. clip
ture toughness test specimens are usually deeply notched and gauge displacement record using one of the following princi-
loaded in bending, which give maximum crack tip constraint ples:
and lower bound fracture toughness values. However, pipeline
weldments are usually predominately subjected to membrane — The J-value vs. the crack mouth displacement or load point
stress and contain weld defects of smaller heights than the displacement can be derived by non-linear elastic-plastic
notch length of standardised specimens. It is therefore justified finite element analysis using the stress-strain curve of the
to use non-standard test specimens that more closely reflects material to be tested.
the crack tip constraint of pipeline weld defects. — The CTOD value can be measured by using a double clip
gauge technique . The displacement due to separation of
The formulas given by the test standards for deriving the frac- the crack faces is measured at two different distances from
ture toughness from the load vs. displacement records may not the crack mouth, z1 and z2, e.g. at zero and at 2 mm. The
be valid for non-standard specimen configurations. The frac- CTOD is calculated from the load-displacement curve as
ture toughness shall therefore be derived by one of the tech- 2 2
niques described below or another proven method. ( 1 – v )K I a + z1
δ = ---------------------------- + V pl – --------------- ( V p2 – V pl )
SENB test specimens with reduced notch length, but otherwise 2E z2 – z1
in accordance with BS 7448 or equivalent standards, may be
used for deriving the fracture toughness for use in an ECA pro-
vided that the specimen notch length is not chosen shorter than where
the height of the most severe weld defect assessed in the ECA. KI is the stress intensity factor at the subject
The fracture toughness for SENB test specimens can be de- load
rived from the load vs. clip gauge displacement record accord- Vp1 and Vp2 are the plastic parts of the clip gauge dis-
ing to the following formulas: placements at z1 and z2 respectively.
2
(1 + v )
2 ηp Ap
J = -------------- × f ⎛ -----⎞
FS a
------------------- + ---------------------- H. API Material Grades
l.5 ⎝ W⎠ E B(W – a)
BW
H 100 API material grades
a 2
η p = 3, 785 – 3, 101 ⎛⎝ -----⎞⎠ + 2, 018 ⎛⎝ -----⎞⎠
a 101 The API requirements to the Grades X42 through X80
W W are listed in Table 12-4. For full details see the API Specifica-
tion for Line Pipe (API Specification 5L). The SMYS and
where Ap is the area under the load vs. crack mouth displace- SMTS values given in MPa in the table below are converted
ment (CMOD) curve. For definitions of the other parameters it from the API specification (in ksi), and differ slightly from the
is referred to BS 7448. mechanical properties in Section 6, Table 6-3, which apply for
If the total displacement, Vg, is measured at a distance z ≤ 0.2a this standard.
from the physical crack mouth then the CMOD can be calcu-
lated from: Table 12-4 API Material Grades
API SMYS SMTS
Vg Grade
CMOD = ----------------------------------------- ksi MPa ksi MPa
z X42 42 289 60 413
1 + -------------------------------
0.8a + 0.2W X46 46 317 63 434
X52 52 358 66 455
The CTOD-value, δ, can be calculated from J according to the
following formulas: X56 56 386 71 489
X60 60 413 75 517
J
δ = ------------------------------- X65 65 448 77 530
σ YS + σ TS X70 70 482 82 565
m --------------------------
2 X80 80 551 90 620
ksi = 6.895 MPa; 1 MPa = 0.145 ksi; ksi = 1000 psi (lb f/in2)
α a
m = 1, 221 – 0, 739 ----- + 2, 751n – 1, 418n -----
W W I. Components and assemblies
I 100 Bends
It should be noted that the mother pipe shall be subject to hy-
drostatic testing in accordance with Section 6 E1100. This
σ σ 2 σ 3 does however not include the relaxed requirement of Section 6
n = 1.724 – 6.098 ⎛ ----------⎞ + 8.326 ⎛ ----------⎞ – 3.965 ⎛ ----------⎞
YS YS YS
⎝ σ TS⎠ ⎝ σ TS ⎠ ⎝ σ TS ⎠ E1108.
For bends made of clad or lined pipe special care should be tak-
en to prevent disbonding and/or wrinkling of the clad/lining
layer. It may be difficult or impossible to obtain bending radii
of the order of 3D or 5D without disbonding and/or wrinkling.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

I 200 Riser Supports — unintentionally swinging objects.

Riser Supports are to be designed to ensure a smooth transition
of forces between Riser and support.
Inspection/control methods are to be specified so that proper J. Material and Design Links
Installation is ensured, in accordance with the design assump-
tions. J 100 General
Where the Riser Support relies on friction to transfer load, ap- Optimisation of pipeline design requires a closer link between
propriate analytical methods or experimental test results are to material and design. In this standard, this is evident and it is of
be used to demonstrate that adequate load transfer will be de- vital importance to have a common understanding between the
veloped and maintained during the life of the structure. The de- disciplines on the choice and requirements of the material. The
sign of the studbolts are to be such that it is possible to monitor sub-section will go through some of the aspects linking design
the remaining bolt tension during the design life time. This can with material and vice versa.
be done by utilising mechanical bolt load indicators in some of
the studbolts in each connection. An overview of the links between material and design is given
in Figure 12-2. The different aspects will be discussed in the
The minimum remaining pretension level in the studbolts at following.
which pre-tensioning must be performed is to be determined
during the design phase. The design premise will state content, transport requirement,
description of the content etc.
The design is to be such that all the studbolts in one connection
can be pre-tensioned simultaneously by means of bolt tension- The material type and grade will be decided by a life cycle cost
ing jacks. analyses considering both operational and design aspects.
All relevant loads are to be considered when calculating the fa-
tigue life of the Riser Supports.
I 300 J-tubes
The J-tube system is to be designed to perform satisfactorily
during its entire planned life. It is to be designed against rele-
vant failure modes.
— The routing is to be based on the following considerations:
— platform configuration and topsides layout
— space requirements
— movements of the J-tube
— cable/Pipeline approach
— J-tube protection
— in-service inspection and maintenance
— Installation considerations.
The J-tube spools are normally to be joined by welding.
For J-tubes, loads during Installation include:
— load-out
— transportation
— lifting
— launching
— upending
— docking
— pressure testing
— temporary supporting.
The effect of deflections due to a connected Pipeline's thermal
expansion or contraction is to be taken into account.
Loads caused by deflections of the J-tube, or the structure to
which the support is attached, are to be considered. Figure 12-2 Overview of links between material and design
Loads on the J-tube and supports as a result of foundation set- J 200 Supplementary requirements
tlements are to be considered. Accidental loads are loads to
which the J-tube and support system may be subjected in con- The supplementary requirements are described in Section 6D
nection with incorrect operation or technical failure such as Sour service (S) is required if the fluid is defined as sour ac-
fire, explosions and impact loads. The relevant accidental cording to the NACE definition, see Section 6D.101.
loads and their magnitude are to be determined on the basis of
a risk analysis. Fracture arrest (F) is required for pipelines transporting gas or
mixed gas, see Section 5D.1103 and 1104, Section 6D 200.
The effect of impact by vessels is to be considered for the J-
tube and support system within the splash zone. Normally the Supplementary requirement for plastic deformation (P) is re-
J-tubes and supports are to be routed inside the structure to quired if the accumulated plastic strain exceed 2%. The sup-
avoid vessel impact. plementary requirement also requires testing of strained
material which implies that information about the expected
Consideration is to be given to accidental loads caused by fall- strain cycles should also be given, see Section 5D.1006.
ing objects such as:
Supplementary requirement for dimensions (D) is required by
— falling cargo from lifting gear supplementary requirement P and else when tight dimensional
— falling lifting gear control is required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Supplementary requirement for increased utilisation (U) shall requirements P and F depend on the accumulated strain
be determined on a cost benefit evaluation. This supplementa- that the pipeline will experience during its life.
ry requirement usually implies that 4% less steel is required, Figure 12-3 gives an overview of the different criteria for the
see Section 5B 600. different supplementary requirements.
J 300 Links based on accumulated strain
The requirement to NDT levels as well as to supplementary
Figure 12-3 Illustration of when supplementary requirement U and D as well as Linepipe NDT level 1 is required.
Note that it is required in addition to specify P, specify the an-

ticipated strain cycles.
J 400 Material data sheet
Type of material
Product
Standard DNV-OS-F101 Submarine Pipeline Systems
Scope: This Material Data Sheet (MDS) specifies the selected options in the References in Section 6 of the
referred standard and modified requirements which supersedes the Standard
corresponding requirements in the referred standard.
Process of manufacture A400
Delivery condition Table 6-10
Supplementary requirements S Sour service D100
F Fracture arrest properties D200
P Pipe for plastic deformation D300
Strain cycle:
D Dimensions D400
U Increased utilisation D500
Qualifications MPS to be qualified E300
Weldability testing C600
Chemical composition Table 6-1, Table 6-2
Table 6-5, E 700
Tensile testing Table 6-3, Table 6-6
Impact testing Table 6-3, Table 6-6
Hardness testing Table 6-3, Table 6-6
Extent of testing E 800
Test samling E 800
Hydrostatic testing E 1100
Nos-destructive testing E 900
Residual magnetism Table 6-13
End preparations E 900
Dimensional requirements E 1200
Surface protection F
Marking F
Certification G
Project specific reguirements and/or agreed deviations to/from the Standard are stated below:
NDT level B100
Designation B300
Design temperatures Max Min
Pipe diameter mm
Wall thickness mm
Lengths m
DET NORSKE VERITAS

K. Installation For static plus dynamic loading the calculated strain shall sat-
isfy Criterion II in Table 12-5. The strain shall include all ef-
K 100 Safety class definition fects, including varying stiffness due to field joints or buckle
Installation of pipeline and pipeline components is normally arrestors.
defined as safety class Low. However, if the installation activ-
ity impose a higher risk to personnel, environment or the as- Table 12-5 Simplified criteria, overbend
sets, a higher "safety class" should be used. Such activities may Criterion X70 X65 X60 X52
typically be repair, where the system is shut down, but the pro- I 0.270% 0.250% 0.230% 0.205%
duction medium is still within the system, modifications to ex- II 0.325% 0.305% 0.290% 0.260%
isting system or installation operations where failure may lead
to extensive economic loss. Sagbend
K 200 Coating For combined static and dynamic loads the equivalent stress in
the sagbend and at the stinger tip shall satisfy the allowable
In case no other data is available the following criterion should stress format ASD as given in F1200, however, η shall be 0.87.
be used. The mean overbend strain:
Effects due to varying stiffness or residual strain from the over-
D
ε mean = – ------- + ε axial (12.13) bend may be ignored.
2R
should satisfy: For the sagbend in deeper water, where collapse is a potential
problem, the normative buckling criteria in the standard shall
also be satisfied.
γ cc ε mean ≥ ε cc (12.14)
Calculation requirements
where
The following requirements to the lay analysis apply both
R = stinger radius when using Limit State Criteria and Simplified Criteria:
εmean = calculated mean overbend strain
εaxial = axial strain contribution — The analysis shall be conducted using a realistic non-linear
γcc = 1.05 safety factor for concrete crushing stress-strain (or moment-curvature) representation of the
εcc = limit mean strain giving crushing of the concrete. material (or cross-section).
Positive strain denotes tensile strain. — For calculation of strain concentration at field joints, non-
The mean overbend strain at which concrete crushing first oc- linear material properties of the steel, the concrete and the
curs depends on the pipe stiffness, the concrete strength and corrosion coating shall be considered.
thickness, the axial force and the shear resistance of the corro- — The characteristic environmental load during installation
sion coating. Crushing occurs at lower mean overbend strains is to be taken as the most probable largest value for the
for lower concrete strength, lower axial force, higher pipe stiff- sea-state (Hs, Tp) considered with appropriate current and
ness and higher shear resistance. If no other information is wind conditions. The sea-state duration considered is not
available, concrete crushing may be assumed to occur when to be less than 3 hrs.
the strain in the concrete (at the compressive fibre in the mid- — If the dynamic lay analysis is based on regular waves, it
dle of the concrete thickness) reaches 0.2%. shall be documented that the choice of wave heights and
periods conservatively represents the irregular sea-state
For concrete coating of 40 mm thickness or more, together (Hs, Tp).
with asphalt corrosion coating, a conservative estimate of εcc
is 0.22% for 42" pipelines and 0.24% for 16" pipelines, with K 400 Reeling
linear interpolation in between.
A pipeline that is reeled onto a spool will be subjected to large
Reference is made to Endal (1995) or Ness (1995). plastic strains. When two abutting pipe joints have dissimilar
K 300 Simplified laying criteria tangential stiffness, e.g. due to different wall thickness or var-
ying material properties, a discontinuity will occur. The result
This simplified laying criteria may be used as a preliminary of this is a concentration of compressive strains in the softer
simplified criterion of the local buckling check during early joint in an area close to the weld. Experience has shown that
design stages. It does not supersede any of the failure mode variations in properties (within fabrication tolerances) may
checks as given in the normative part of the standard. cause the pipe to buckle.
In addition to the simplified stress criteria given below, the Figure 12-4 and Figure 12-5 attempt to illustrate the reeling sit-
limit states for Concrete Crushing (K200), Fatigue (Sec.5 uation from two different points of view. It is recognised that
D700) and Rotation (Sec.5 H203) shall be satisfied. Reference these illustrations, and the description below, are simplified
is further made to Endal et. al. (1995) for guidance on the Ro- and only take into account global effects.
tation limit state.
In Figure 12-4 the sudden increased curvature is visualised by
Overbend looking at the moment curvature relationship for the two abut-
For static loading the calculated strain shall satisfy Criterion I ting joints. It is seen that the required moment equilibrium
in Table 12-5. The strain shall include effects of bending, axial across the weld will lead to an increase in curvature in the
force and local roller loads. Effects due to varying stiffness weaker pipe. This figure also shows clearly that an increased
(e.g. strain concentration at field joints or buckle arrestors) stiffness difference will increase the sudden increase in curva-
need not be included. ture in the weaker joint.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Over-matching (girth) weld materials are often used in pipes.

These will introduce stiffness variations, however the effect of
these are not normally significant from a buckling point of
view.
If a thick and relatively stiff coating is applied with gaps across
field joints, stress concentrations due to variations in yield
stress and wall thickness will be amplified.
Analyses have also shown that accurate non-linear material
modelling is essential for the accuracy of FE analyses. Espe-
cially important in this respect is the tangential material stiff-
ness, often defined through the yield stress to ultimate stress
ratio, SMYS/SMTS. High ratios increase significantly the
cross section's tendency to buckle. Obviously a high D/t ratio
will have a similar effect.
During reeling, application of a high back tension is the major
Figure 12-4 Moment curvature relationship for plastic remedy available for reducing the possibility for pipe buckling,
bending of pipes with different stiffness. and both practical experience and FE analyses have shown that
this is a viable and mitigating measure in this context.
Figure 12-4 provides a different illustration: The distribution
of moment and corresponding tangential stiffness is schemati- Hence: in order to reduce the probability of buckling during
cally plotted along the pipeline. reeling, one should:
At the left hand side of the figure the pipe is assumed to lie — specify a low thickness fabrication tolerance,
tight onto the reel with a constant bending moment well into — specify a low variation in yield stress,
the plastic regime. From the point where the pipe first touches — specify a low yield stress to ultimate stress ratio and
the reel, to the point at the right hand side where back tension — apply a high and steady back tension during reeling.
is applied, the moment is assumed to decay linearly to zero.
(Note that this moment will not vanish if the caterpillars, For further information, reference is made to Crome (1999).
through which the back tension is applied, restrain rotation.)
Furthermore, Figure 12-5 illustrates the scenario where a field
joint approaches the reel and a weak/soft joint follows a strong-
er/stiffer one. L. References
The lower part of this figure shows the tangential stiffness Crome, Tim; "Reeling of Pipelines with Thick Insulating Coat-
along the pipeline. Attention should be paid to the sudden drop ing, Finite Element Analyses of Local Buckling", OTC, Hou-
in stiffness at the weld. It is obvious that this loss of stiffness ston, 1999.
will attract deformations, i.e. increased curvature in the weaker
pipe close to the weld. Endal G., Ness O. B., Verley R., Holthe K. and Ramseth S;
"Behaviour of Offshore Pipelines Subjected to Residual Cur-
vature During Laying", Proceedings of OMAE'95 conference,
Copenhagen, Denmark
Ghodsi Nader Yoosef-, Kulak G. L. and Murray D. W.; "Be-
haviour of Girth Welded Line-pipe", University of Alberta de-
partment of Civil Engineering, Structural Engineering Report
No. 23, 1994
Jiao G., Sotberg T., Bruschi R., Verley R. and Mørk K; "The
SUPERB Project: Wall Thickness Design Guideline for Pres-
sure Containment of Offshore Pipelines", Proceedings of
OMAE'96 conference, Florence, Italy
Murphey D.E. and Langner C. G. "Ultimate pipe strength un-
der bending collapse and fatigue", Offshore Mechanics and
Arctic Engineering symposium, New Orleans 1985.
Mørk. K, Spiten J., Torselletti E., Ness O. B., and Verley R.;
"The SUPERB Project and DNV'96: Buckling and Collapse
Limit State", Proceedings of OMAE'97 conference, Yokoha-
ma, Japan
Ness O. B. and Verley R.; "Strain Concentrations in Pipelines
with Concrete Coating: An Analytical Model", Proceedings of
OMAE'95 conference, Copenhagen, Denmark
Figure 12-5 Schematic illustration of bending moment and Sriskandarajah T. and Mamendran, I. K.; "Parametric consid-
stiffness along the pipe erations of design and installation of deepwater pipelins", Off-
FE analyses have shown that the most important parameters, shore Oil and Gas Pipeline Technology, London, 1987
with respect to stiffness variations are variations, in yield stress Vitali L., Bruschi R., Mørk K., Verley R.(1999); "Hotpipe
and wall thickness. Under disadvantageous circumstances, project - Capacity of pipes subjected to internal pressure, axial
variations within normal fabrication tolerances may lead to force and bending moment", Proc. 9th Int. Offshore and Polar
buckling of the pipe cross section. Engineering Conference, Brest 1999.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 118 – App.A see note on front cover
APPENDIX A
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS TO ISO
A. General required values in transverse direction.

302 The ISO standard requires transverse tensile test pieces
A 100 General for outer diameters ≥ 210 mm. However, for deep water
101 For C-Mn steel linepipes, a comparison is made between pipelay application additional longitudinal tests may be speci-
this offshore standard and ISO/FDIS 3183-3 (final draft) re- fied. Requirements shall be subject to agreement.
garding requirements to material properties and manufacture.
B 400 Frequency of testing during manufacture
401 DNV specifies testing of one pipe from each lot or once
per 50 pipes, whichever gives the highest test frequency.
B. Differences observed 402 The ISO standard specifies tensile, Charpy V-notch and
B 100 Chemical composition and mechanical properties bend testing to be carried out on one pipe per lot.. For outside
diameters < 508 mm; this testing shall be at least once per 100
101 Requirements to chemical composition are in general pipes. For all other pipes, testing shall be at least once per 50
comparable. The DNV standard applies for wall thicknesses up pipes. Macro/metallographic examination shall be once per
to 35 mm for welded linepipes, while ISO applies up to 25 mm. shift or when pipe size is changed. With respect to hardness
DNV specifies limits on residual elements when scrap material measuring, it is stated that hard spots shall be examined.
is being used in steel production.
B 500 NDT
102 Requirements to tensile properties and Charpy V-notch
energy values are identical. Regarding Charpy V-notch test 501 Both DNV and ISO refer to the same basic standards.
temperature, the requirements are comparable for gas-convey- DNV has introduced requirements in addition to the basic
ing pipelines. For liquid-conveying lines, the ISO standard is standards. In the DNV standard C-Mn steel linepipes with lon-
10°C stricter. gitudinal or helical weld seams have been divided into two (2)
NDT levels; NDT Level I and NDT Level II. NDT Level II is
103 The DNV standard specifies strain ageing tests to be car- comparable to ISO and is restricted to load controlled condi-
ried out if cold forming during pipe manufacture exceeds 5% tions. NDT Level I allows use of displacement controlled cri-
strain. teria (strain based design) and has more stringent requirements
104 The DNV standard specifies fracture toughness testing to NDT with respect to transverse imperfections.
during qualification for the base material and the weld metal
(welded linepipes). Measured CTOD values shall be a mini- B 600 Dimensions
mum of 0.20mm for both base material and weld metal at the 601 The standard dimensional requirements given in the
design temperature. The ISO standard specifies CTOD testing DNV standard are comparable to the ISO requirements.
as an optional agreement, to be carried out in accordance with
ISO 12135 during MPS qualification with notches in weld B 700 Documentation
metal, HAZ and base metal. Sampling procedure shall be sub- 701 The DNV standard specifies Inspection Certificate 3.1B
ject to agreement. (EN 10204) or accepted equivalent.
105 Hardness measurements are specified by both standards. 702 According to the ISO standard, the Purchaser shall state
However, DNV gives detailed acceptance limits. the documentation level required.
B 200 Weldability B 800 Special requirements for sour service
201 The DNV standard states that a weldability test program 801 Both standards specify HIPC testing during production.
shall be performed or relevant weldability documentation may The DNV standard states requirements for the Ca/S ratio
be accepted. For steels with SMYS>415 MPa, a more exten- (greater than 1.5) and gives detailed requirements for re-test-
sive program shall be carried out. The Charpy V-notch energy ing.
requirements to weld area are equal to 10% of SMYS in J. De-
tailed requirements to personnel qualification are given with 802 For NACE listed materials, SSC testing is not specified
references to EN 287(ISO 9606) and EN 1418. under the DNV standard. The ISO standard states that 3 test
pieces shall be taken per sample pipe (qualification of the MPS
202 References are made to EN 719 and EN 729 regarding only).
quality assurance of welding. Detailed requirements are given
to procedure qualification. Batch testing of welding consuma- B 900 Special requirements for fracture arrest
bles is specified. 901 The DNV standard specifies that a Charpy V-notch tran-
203 Regarding ISO, the Manufacturer shall, subject to agree- sition curve shall be established for the base material in both
ment, supply weldability data or perform weld tests. Accept- the non-strain-aged and the strain-aged condition. The Charpy
ance criteria are to be agreed. Charpy V-notch energy V-notch energy values to be fulfilled are stricter than corre-
requirements for weld area = 40J. sponding requirements in the ISO standard. In addition, ISO
does not specify testing in the strain-aged condition.
B 300 Samples and test pieces
B 1000 Mill pressure test
301 Both standards refer to the general conditions of ISO
377. The DNV standard states that for linepipe outer diameters 1001 The mill test pressure is lower in ISO than in this stand-
> 300mm, tensile properties shall be tested in both transverse ard. The ISO requirement is:
and longitudinal direction of the pipe axis. The YS/TS ratio in
the longitudinal direction shall not exceed the maximum spec-
ified value in the transverse direction by more than 0.020 for 2t min
standard material, and more than 0.030 for sour service mate- p = 0.95 ------------- SMYS
rial. SMTS in the longitudinal direction can be 5% less than the D
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover App.A – Page 119
This hoop stress formula for the ISO mill pressure test is dif- identical). Hence, the mill test pressure difference compared to
ferent from the formula in ISO 13623 and DNV (which are this standard depends on D/t.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 120 – App.B see note on front cover
APPENDIX B
MECHANICAL TESTING AND CORROSION TESTING
A. Mechanical Testing Guidance note:

This conversion is not applicable to API 5L type specimens
A 100 General
101 This appendix addresses methods for mechanical testing
of materials and products. Rectangular cross sectional specimen used for base material
102 Test laboratories shall meet the requirements of ISO 403 A rectangular cross sectional specimen shall be of full
Guide 25, "General requirements for the competence of cali- material thickness. Apart from the following exceptions, flat-
bration and testing laboratories", or an accepted equivalent. tening of test specimens is not allowed:
A 200 Selection and preparation of samples and test — pipe material tensile tests taken transverse to pipe axis
pieces shall be flattened, and
201 Selection of samples and preparation of test pieces shall — specimen grip ends may be flattened or machined to fit the
in accordance with the general conditions of ISO 377, as far as test machine's grips.
applicable. The following requirements apply:
The extensometer shall be attached to a machined surface.
a) Test samples from linepipe shall be taken from pipe ends Double sided extensometers should be used.
in accordance with Fig. B-1 and Appendix C Table C-3, Test acceptance criteria are given in Section 6 Table 6-3, Table
taking into account the supplementary details specified in 6-6 as applicable.
A 300-A 1000 and in Appendix C Fig. C-1.
Circular cross sectional specimen used for base metal and "all
b) For other welds including girth weld, samples shall be tak- weld metal" tensile test
en in accordance Appendix C Fig. C-1 and Fig. C-2.
404 The circular cross sectional specimen used for base met-
c) Samples from fittings shall be taken in accordance with al shall have the maximum size possible dependant upon wall
the recognised standard or specification used for manufac- thickness, up to 20 mm diameter of the gauge length.
ture.
All-weld tensile test specimens shall have a circular cross sec-
d) For bolts, structural items, flanges, pressure containing tion being of maximum obtainable diameter allowed by the
equipment and other components and equipment (see Sec- weld geometry and dimensions. The specimens may have a di-
tion 7) samples shall be taken in accordance with the rec- ameter of 20, 10, 8, or 6 mm with other dimensions as given in
ognised standard or specification used for manufacture. ISO 5178.
A 300 Chemical analysis Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
301 Methods and procedures for chemical analysis shall be Transverse weld tensile test
according to recognised industry standards, of acceptable un- 405 Tensile test specimens shall have a rectangular cross
certainty. Results from chemical analyses shall be given with section being of full material thickness and with the dimen-
the same number of digits as given in the specification of the sions as given in ISO 4136. The weld reinforcement shall be
product and/or in this standard. All digits shall be significant. removed on both the face and root sides by machining or grind-
Guidance note: ing.
ISO/TR 9796 gives a list of available international standards pro- There shall be no flattening of the test specimen except for test-
viding chemical analysis methods, with information on the appli-
cation and precision of the various methods. ing of longitudinal or spiral seams of welded pipe. Grip ends
may be flattened to fit test machine grips.
Transverse weld tensile test of clad/lined pipes shall be per-
Chemical analysis of weld overlay formed on full thickness of the carbon steel, after removal of
the corrosion resistant cladding/lining, taking care not to re-
302 The chemical composition of the weld overlay shall be duce the carbon steel wall thickness.
obtained at the surface of the overlay after machining of the
overlay such that the minimum distance from the surface to the Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
fusion line is either 3 mm or the minimum thickness specified All-weld tensile testing of weld overlay
for the finished component, whichever is the lesser.
406 Tensile test specimens shall have circular cross section
A 400 Tensile test of maximum obtainable diameter allowed by the weld geome-
try and dimensions. The specimen shall be machined from the
401 Tensile testing shall be carried out in accordance with weld overlay transverse to the welding direction.
the requirements in this appendix and ISO 6892. The specimen
configuration and possible specimen flattening shall be the Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
same for all the delivered items.
A 500 Bend test
Conversion of elongation values
General
402 Conversion of elongation requirements for tensile test
specimens shall be performed according to: 501 Bend testing shall be performed in accordance with ISO
5173 or ISO 5177 as appropriate.
— ISO2566/1 for carbon and low alloy steels, in normalised,
QT and TMCP condition; and — Bend test specimens shall have full wall thickness. The
— ISO 2566/2 for austenitic steels (and duplex steel). width of root and face bend specimens shall be approxi-
mately 25 mm. The width of side bend specimens shall be
The value (5.65 • √S0) is adopted as the preferred proportional 10 mm. The edges may be rounded to a radius of 1/10 of
gauge length for tensile test specimens. the thickness.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover App.B – Page 121
— The weld reinforcement on both faces shall be removed largest possible cross section. The notch shall be perpendicular
flush with the original surfaces, as showed in Fig. B-2. The to the surface.
weld shall be located in the centre of each specimen. Base material
— The specimens shall be bent to a angle of 180° using a
former with diameter depending on the specified mini- 602 The specimens shall be taken transverse to rolling direc-
mum yield stress SMYS for the parent material. For mate- tion/forging direction/pipe axis whenever possible. However,
rials with SMYS up to 360 MPa, the former diameter shall for pipes with D<300 mm, the specimens shall be taken paral-
be 4x thickness of the test specimen. For materials with lel to pipe axis.
SMYS equal to or exceeding 415 MPa, the former diame- Charpy V-notch testing of welds.
ter shall be 5x thickness of the test specimen.
— After bending, the welded joint shall be completely within 603 The location of specimens is given in Appendix C Fig.
the tensioned region. C-1. When the wall thickness exceeds 20 mm for double sided
welds, four additional sets of Charpy-V notch test specimens
Bend test of clad/lined pipes shall be performed on full thick- shall be sampled from the weld metal, FL+ (sampling 50% of
ness of the pipe, including the corrosion resistant alloy. HAZ), FL+2 mm and FL+5 mm in the root area, see Fig. B-6.
Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F. Impact testing of clad/lined pipes shall be performed in the car-
bon steel portion of the material.
Longitudinal root bend testing on clad/lined pipes
Charpy V-notch testing of load bearing weld overlay
502 Longitudinal root bend test shall include the corrosion
resistant alloy. 604 When the weld overlay material is designed to transfer
the load across the base material/weld overlay fusion line, im-
— The longitudinal axis of the weld shall be parallel to the pact testing of the weld overlay and HAZ shall be performed
specimen, which is bent so that the root surface is in ten- (i.e. when the overlay is a part of a butt joint or acts as a tran-
sion. sition between a corrosion resistant alloy and a carbon steel).
— The width of the longitudinal root bend specimen shall be The longitudinal axis of the specimen shall be perpendicular to
at least twice the width of the internal weld reinforcement the fusion line and the notch parallel to the fusion line.
or maximum 25 mm. The edges may be rounded to a radi- Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
us of 1/10 of the thickness.
— The internal and external weld reinforcement shall be re- A 700 Drop weight tear test (DWTT)
moved flush with the original surfaces. 701 Drop weight tear test shall be carried out in accordance
— The thickness of the specimen shall be equal to the base with API RP 5L3.
material thickness or a maximum of 10 mm, as shown in
Fig. B-3. Drop weight tear test specimens
— The specimen shall be bent to an angle of 180° using a 702 Full thickness specimens are preferred. Reduced speci-
former with diameter 90 mm. men may be used subject to Purchaser agreement. If reduced
thickness specimens are used, both surfaces shall be equally
Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F. machined to the thickness of 19.0 mm. The testing temperature
Bend testing of weld overlay reduction given in API RP 5L3 shall apply.
503 Side bend test specimens shall be used. The test speci- The specimens shall be taken transverse to the rolling direction
mens shall be sampled perpendicular to the welding direction. or pipe axis, with the notch perpendicular to the surface.
Reference is made to Section 6D.204.
— For pipes the test specimens shall sample the full thickness
of the weld overlay and the base material. For heavy sec- A 800 Fracture toughness testing
tions the thickness of the base material in the specimen
shall be at least equal to 5x the thickness of the overlay. Fracture toughness testing (CTOD or critical J testing and d-R
— The thickness of side bend specimens shall be 10 mm. The or J-R testing) shall be carried out in general compliance with
edges may be rounded to a radius of 1/10 of the thickness. the latest revisions of the relevant parts of BS 7448 or an equiv-
The central portion of the bend test specimen shall include alent standard.
an overlap area. The number of valid CTOD or critical J tests for each location
— The specimens shall be bent to an angle of 180°. For base shall be minimum 3. The characteristic CTOD or critical J val-
materials with SMYS up to 415 MPa the former diameter ue shall be taken as the lowest from 3 valid tests or selected in
shall be 4x thickness of the test specimen. For base mate- accordance with BS 7910. For testing specimens with notch lo-
rials with SMYS equal to or exceeding 415 MPa the cation in fusion line/HAZ, it is recommended to test at least 6
former diameter shall be 5x thickness of the test specimen. specimens in order to obtain 3 valid specimens. Only speci-
mens that are qualified with respect to crack tip location by
Test acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F. post-test metallographic examination shall be considered val-
id.
A 600 Charpy V-notch impact test
Qualification of linepipe
601 The impact test shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements of this Appendix and ISO 148. The test pieces 801 The following applies when the requirements to fracture
shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 148 without any prior toughness are set as workmanship criteria with respect to qual-
flattening of the test material. Standard (i.e. full size) speci- ification of linepipes:
mens shall be used whenever possible. Each set shall consist of Testing of weld metal and of base material only.
three specimens taken from the same test coupon. The test tem- The test specimen geometry shall be in accordance with the
perature shall be in accordance with Section 6 Table 6-4 or as test standard using through thickness notched specimens.
relevant..
Testing of parent material shall be conducted on specimens
Test acceptance criteria are given in Section 6 Table 6-3 or Ta- taken both in the longitudinal and the transverse pipe direction.
ble 6-6 as applicable. Either through thickness notched specimens of rectangular
The specimens shall be sampled 2 mm below the surface. A sections (Bx2B) or surface notched specimens of square sec-
smaller distance than 2 mm shall be used if necessary (due to tions (BxB) shall be used. (With the notation used by BS 7448
the dimensions of the material) to make specimens with the assuming axial grain flow the test specimens are to of type X-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Y or X-Z and of Z-Y or Y-Z.) Clad Plate, Sheet and Strip).

Testing of weld metal shall be conducted on through thickness A 1000 Metallographic examination and hardness testing
notched specimens with orientation transverse to the weld di-
rection. (The corresponding notation used by BS 7448 is NP). Macro examination
The notch is to be located in the weld metal centre line. 1001 Macro examination shall be performed at 5x to 10x
If critical J testing has been carried out the required critical J is magnifications. Macro examination shall be conducted on
to be calculated from the required CTOD as specimens given in Figs. B-4 a), b), c) as applicable. The mac-
ro section shall include the whole weld deposit and in addition
J = CTOD x σY include at least 15 mm of base material on each side measured
where sY is the actual yield stress of the material used for frac- from any point of the fusion line. The macro-section shall be
ture toughness testing as defined by the test standard for CTOD prepared by grinding, polishing, and etched on one side to
testing. Unless stated otherwise testing shall be conducted at clearly reveal the fusion line and HAZ.
the minimum design temperature. Acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
ECA of girth welds. The macro examination of weld overlay shall be sampled
802 The following applies when CTOD or critical J fracture transverse to the welding direction. The width of the macro
toughness testing is carried out in conjunction with an Engi- section shall be minimum 40 mm. The face exposed by sec-
neering Critical Assessment (ECA): tioning shall be prepared by grinding, polishing and etched by
Testing shall be conducted at the minimum design tempera- a suitable etchant to clearly reveal the weld and heat affected
ture. Additional testing at higher temperature(s) may be carried zone.
out in order to provide less conservative input to the ECA for Acceptance criteria for weld overlay are given in Appendix C
loading conditions that will not occur below the respective test Part F.
temperature(s).
Micro examination
Testing of weld metal shall be conducted on through thickness
notched specimens of rectangular sections (Bx2B) with orien- 1002 Samples for optical metallography shall be prepared
tation transverse to the weld direction. (The corresponding no- using standard procedures, and further etched in an applicable
tation used by BS 7448 is NP). The notch is to be located in the etchant in order to reveal the microstructure. For quenched and
weld metal centre line. tempered forgings and castings in low-alloy steels the require-
ments of Section 7F shall apply in addition.
Testing of fusion line/HAZ shall be conducted on surface
notched specimens of square sections (BxB) with orientation Micro examination of duplex stainless steels shall be per-
transverse to the weld direction. (The corresponding notation formed at a minimum magnification of x400.
used by BS 7448:1991 is NQ). The specimen shall be notched Acceptance criteria are given in Section 6C 300, C 400, C 500
so that the direction of crack extension cross the fusion line as applicable.
from the weld metal side or is parallel with the fusion line. Hardness testing of base material
Following testing of fusion line/HAZ each specimen shall be 1003 Hardness testing of base material shall be carried out
qualified with respect to the location of the fatigue pre-crack according as shown in Fig B-4a. The Vickers HV10 method
tip by post-test metallography as outlined in the test standard. according to ISO 6507.
The specimen is considered qualified if
Hardness testing of welds
a) the pre-crack tip is not more than 0.5 mm from fusion line
1004 Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with
and ISO 6507-1 on the specimens used for macro examination.
b) grain coarsened heat affected zone (GCHAZ) micro-struc- The Vickers method HV10 shall be used. Indentations shall be
ture is present within a region confined by a line perpendicular made along traverses, each 1.5 mm ±0.5 mm below the surface
to the crack plane through the crack tip and a parallel line 0.5 at either side of the weld.
mm ahead of the crack tip.
In the weld metal, a minimum of 3 indentations equally spaced
803 The following applies when determination of the frac- along each traverse shall be made. In the HAZ, indentations
ture resistance curve (δ-R or J-R curve) is carried out in con- shall be made along the traverses for each 0.5 mm into unaf-
junction with an Engineering Critical Assessment (ECA): fected material, and starting as close to the fusion line as pos-
Testing shall be conducted at a temperature representative of sible. A minimum of 3 indentations on either side of the weld
the most severe loading condition. shall be made into the unaffected material spaced approxi-
The geometric configurations of the test specimens shall be as mately 1 mm. Refer to Fig. B-4.
stated in 802. For double sided welds, one additional hardness traverse shall
Following testing of fusion line/HAZ each specimen shall be be made through the root area, see Fig. B-4 b).
qualified with respect to the location of the fatigue pre-crack Hardness testing of clad/lined pipes shall have one additional
tip as required in 802. hardness traverse located in the thickness centre of the clad-
804 When CTOD or critical J fracture toughness testing is ding. Refer to Fig. B-5 a) in for longitudinal welds in pipes and
carried out in conjunction with an Engineering Critical Assess- Fig. B-5 b) for girth welds.
ment (ECA), modification of test specimen geometry and load- Acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F..
ing mode in order to reduce unintended conservatism are
acceptable provided that all modifications are well founded on For hardness testing of weld overlay, the Vickers method
generally accepted fracture mechanics theory and experimen- HV10 shall be used. Hardness testing shall be performed at a
tal documentation. minimum of 3 test locations each: in the base material, in the
HAZ and in each layer of overlay up to a maximum of 2 layers.
Further guidelines for use of such specimens are given in Sec-
tion 12 of this document. Acceptance criteria are given in Appendix C Part F.
A 900 Shear strength test A 1100 Strain ageing test

901 Shear testing shall be in accordance with ASTM A264 Base material
(Standard Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel- 1101 A test coupon shall be machined from the material. The
DET NORSKE VERITAS

orientation of the coupon shall be transverse to the pipe axis for 206 Rolled surfaces shall be tested "as-received", i.e. with-
pipes with D ≥ 300 mm. For smaller diameters, the coupon out mechanical preparation. The root and the cap side of the
shall be oriented parallel to pipe axis. The coupon may be welds are only to be prepared with the intention of removing
straightened prior to uniform tension in order to obtain full size "loose material" that will interfere with weighing prior to and
specimens. after testing. Cut faces shall be ground (500 grid) and sharp
The test coupon shall be of either full or reduced wall thick- edges smoothed off. The specimen shall subsequently be pick-
ness. The reduced (parallel) section of the coupon shall have a led to reduce the susceptibility of cut surfaces to end-grain at-
width and thickness sufficient to produce the required number tack. For duplex stainless steels and austenitic grades with
of standard (full size) Charpy V-notch specimens needed for PRE > 30, 20% nitric acid + 5% hydrofluoric acid, 5 minutes
the test. at 60°C is adequate.
After preparation the test coupon shall be aged at 250°C for 207 The test solution shall be prepared according to the ref-
one hour. Thereafter, the specified number of Charpy V-notch erenced standard. For 25 Cr duplex and austenitic CRAs with
specimens shall be machined from the middle of the coupon. a specified PRE value of minimum 40 (see Section 6 Table 6-
The orientation of the specimens shall be longitudinal to the 5) the test temperature shall be:
coupon centreline, with the notch perpendicular to the surface — 50°C for base materials (including longitudinal weld, if
of the test coupon.
applicable);
Acceptance criteria are given in Section 6D.203. — 35°C and 40°C for girth welds in 25 Cr duplex and auste-
nitic CRAs respectively.
The test period shall be 24 hours.

B. Corrosion Testing
Corrosion testing of weld overlay
B 100 General 208 Specimens for corrosion testing of the weld overlay
101 For certain linepipe material and fluid combinations shall be machined from the base material side. The remaining
where improper manufacture or fabrication can cause suscep- surface of the specimen shall be representative for the weld
tibility to corrosion related damage, the need for corrosion test- overlay at the minimum distance from the fusion line (equal to
ing during qualification and/or production shall be assessed. 3 mm or the minimum weld overlay thickness specified for the
Certain corrosion tests are applicable to confirm adequate finished machined component, whichever is the lesser). The
manufacturing and fabrication procedures affecting the micro- opposite surface of the specimen shall be machined such that
structure. the thickness of the specimen is 2 mm. The size of the speci-
men shall be 25 x 25 mm in length and width.
This subsection describes test requirements and methods for
corrosion testing. B 300 Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking test
Test laboratories shall meet the requirements in A.102 above. 301 Hydrogen Pressure Induced Cracking (HPIC) testing
shall be carried out based on NACE TM0284 "Evaluation of
B 200 Pitting corrosion test
Pipeline Steels for Resistance to Stepwise Cracking" modified
201 This test is applicable to verify CRA resistance to pitting according to EFC Publication Number 16 "2Guidelines on Ma-
and crevice corrosion by oxidising and chloride containing flu- terials Requirements for Carbon Steel and Low Alloy Steels for
ids, e.g. raw seawater and other water containing fluids (in- HS-containing Environments in Oil and Gas Production".
cluding treated seawater) with high residual contents of
302 Evaluation and acceptance criteria shall comply with
oxygen and/or active chlorine. For duplex stainless steels, this
EFC Publication Number 16.
test is further applicable to verify adequate microstructure re-
lated to manufacturing and fabrication procedures affecting B 400 Sulphide Stress Cracking test
e.g. toughness and weldability in addition to corrosion resist-
ance. 401 Linepipe materials to be used for sour service and not
meeting the general requirements in Section 6D 100, shall be
202 The test shall be carried out according to ASTM G48 qualified by testing for resistance to Sulphide Stress Cracking
"Standard Test Methods for Pitting and Crevice Corrosion Re- (SSC) as specified in Section 6D.102.
sistance of Stainless steels and Related Alloys by the Use of
Ferric Chloride solutions", Method A. 402 For qualification of new materials (i.e. not listed for sour
service in the latest edition of NACE MR0175), testing shall be
203 Requirements for frequency and extent of testing during conducted on specimens from at least 3 heats of material. If
manufacture and installation are defined in Section 6E 800 and qualification is to be performed for a material listed for sour
Section 9A 800, respectively. Location of specimens is given service in NACE MR0175 but not meeting the requirements
in Fig. B-2. for a specific property in Section 6D 100, e.g. maximum hard-
204 Test specimens from clad/lined pipe shall be machined ness or contents of alloying or impurity elements, then testing
to remove the carbon steel portion and are to contain the full shall be carried out on material representing the worst case
weld and any heat affected zone in the corrosion resistant al- conditions to be qualified.
loy. 403 Qualification testing shall include testing of simulated
205 The minimum recommended size of test specimens is 25 girth welds and for welded pipe also seam welds. Specimen
mm wide by 50 mm long by full material thickness. For welds, preparation, testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall
at least 15 mm of the base material on each side of the weld comply with either EFC publication No. 16 and 17 for C-Mn
shall be included in the test specimen. and CRA linepipe respectively, or NACE TM0177-96.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Figure B-1 Samples position for linepipe
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Figure B-2 Bend test specimens
Figure B-3 Longitudinal root bend test specimens
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Figure B-4 Hardness locations
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Figure B-5 Hardness locations cladded materials
Figure B-6 Charpy V-notch specimen location for testing The "FL" specimen shall sample 50% WM and 50% HAZ. The
in the root area of double sided welds FL+2mm and FL+5mm specimens shall be sampled 2 and 5
mm from the fusion line nose formed where the two fusion
lines come together.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 128 – App.C see note on front cover
APPENDIX C
WELDING
A. Application calibration and testing of all tools and welding equipment used
during qualification/production welding.
A 100 General
B 200 Personnel
101 This appendix applies to all fabrication involving shop-
, site- or field welding including post weld heat treatment. 201 All personnel involved in welding related tasks shall
have adequate qualifications and understanding of welding
102 The materials covered by this appendix are: technology. The qualification level shall reflect the tasks and
— C-Mn steel; responsibilities of each person in order to obtain the specified
— clad/lined steel; and quality level.
— corrosion resistant alloys (CRA) including ferritic auste- Welding co-ordinator
nitic (duplex) steel, austenitic stainless steels, martensitic 202 The Manufacturer organisation shall nominate at least
stainless steels ("13% Cr"), other stainless steels and nick- one authorised welding co-ordinator in accordance with EN
el based alloys. 719.
The materials are addressed with and without requirements for Welding operators, welders and air-arc gaugers
sour service. The material requirements are specified in Sec- 203 Through training and practise prior to qualification test-
tion 6 and Section 7.
ing, the welding personnel shall have a understanding of;
A 200 Welding processes
— fundamental welding techniques,
201 Welding may be performed with the following processes — welding procedure specifications,
unless otherwise specified: — relevant methods for non-destructive testing, and
— acceptance criteria.
— Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW / 111),
— Flux Cored Arc Welding without gas shield (FCAW /114), 204 Welders and welding operators shall be certified in ac-
— Flux Cored Arc Welding with external gas shield (G- cordance with EN 287, ISO 9606 or other relevant and recog-
FCAW / 136), nised standards, for the respective positions, material grades
— Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW / 135), and welding processes.
— Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW / 141),
— Submerged Arc Welding (SAW / 12), and 205 Qualification testing according to EN 1418 or equivalent
— Plasma Arc Welding (PAW / 15). is required for welding operators where their tasks are to pre-
set, adjust, start, guide and stop the welding operation.
Guidance note: 206 Welders shall be qualified for single side butt welding of
GMAW and FCAW are regarded as methods with high potential pipes in the required principal position. Welders may be qual-
for non-fusing type defects ified for part of the weld, root, fillers or cap by agreement. Re-
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- pair welders may be qualified for partial thickness repair on a
representative test configuration provided only such weld re-
202 Pre-qualification shall be performed to document that pairs are made.
welds meeting all specified requirements under realistic field 207 The qualification test shall be carried out with the same
conditions can be consistently produced. or equivalent equipment to be used during production welding,
Pre-qualification testing is considered necessary for the fol- and should be at the actual premises, i.e. work shop, yard, and
lowing welding process: vessel. Use of other premises shall be specially agreed.
— resistance welding (high frequency welding), 208 Qualification testing shall be based on 100% visual ex-
— flash butt welding, amination, 100% radiographic or ultrasonic testing, and 100%
— friction welding, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant testing. Test requirements
— radial friction welding, shall be in accordance with Appendix D, H.
— electron beam welding, and 209 When using processes which have high potential for
— laser welding non-fusing type defects, bend testing shall be performed. The
number of bend tests is specified in Table C-1.
203 Prior to qualification testing, general information of the
welding procedure and possibly reference to practical experi- Table C-1 Number of bend tests required for welder
ence and joint quality shall be documented. The extent and the qualification
content of the pre-qualification program shall be agreed before
Pipe diame- Wall Face- Root- Side-
start up. ter(mm) Thickness bendtests bendtests bendtests
(mm)
D ≤ 100 0 2 0
Requirements for Quality Assurance are given in Section 2B 100 < D ≤ 300 t < 20 0 2 0
500. D > 300 2 2 0
D ≤ 100 0 0 2
100 < D ≤ 300 t ≥ 20 0 0 2
D > 300 0 0 4
B. Welding Equipment, Tools and Personnel Note 1: Face and root bend test specimens may be replaced by side bend
specimens subject to agreement.
B 100 Welding equipment and tools
101 Inspection of the workshop, site or vessel prior to start of Sampling of test specimens is shown in Figure C-2.
production shall be required. This shall include verification of 210 A welder or welding operator who has produced a com-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover App.C – Page 129
plete and acceptable welding procedure qualification is there- welding consumables in order to meet the any guaranteed max-
by qualified. imum value for hydrogen in the weld metal. Recommendations
211 When a qualification testing of recent date is transferred for post weld heat treatment (maximum temperature, holding
to a new project, the welding personnel shall be informed time, etc.) should also be provided.
about particular project requirements for which their welding Guidance note:
performance will be especially important. The Contractor responsible for the welding and the welding con-
212 Personnel to perform air-arc gouging shall be trained sumable Manufacturer should agree on the content and the spec-
ified limits in the data sheets
and experienced with the actual equipment. Qualification test-
ing may be required. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
Hyperbaric welding
213 Prior to qualification testing for underwater (hyperbaric) C 200 Chemical composition
welding, welders shall have passed a surface welding test as 201 All welding consumables shall be delivered in accord-
specified above and shall have received relevant training for ance with Manufacturer's data sheets, which shall state the
hyperbaric welding. minimum and maximum levels of C, Mn, Si, P, S, micro-alloy-
214 Qualification for underwater welding shall, as a mini- ing elements and any other intentionally added elements.
mum, consist of one test in the habitat (or at a testing facility 202 When sour service is specified, the chemical composi-
under representative conditions for the work in question), and tion of the welding consumables shall comply with NACE
shall be in accordance with the qualified underwater welding MR-0175. The Ni-content may be increased up to 2.2% in
procedure. The test weld shall be visually examined and non- welding consumables for girth welds, provided that other re-
destructively tested. Mechanical testing shall be in accordance quirements in EFC 16 are fulfilled, and that the welding proce-
with Table C-1. dure has been tested for resistance to SSC.
215 Renewal of the qualification (214 above) may be re- 203 The selection of welding consumables shall be given
quired if welding has been interrupted for a period more than 6 special attention in order to avoid any types of preferential
months. The retest shall as a minimum consist of one test cou- weld corrosion. This applies particularly to material with en-
pon with an approximate length of 300 - 400 mm. The welding hanced corrosion properties, and for selection of welding con-
shall be performed in an agreed welding position under repre- sumable for the root pass in systems for seawater service.
sentative conditions, followed by visual examination and non-
destructive testing. 204 The chemical composition of the weld overlay materials
shall comply with the material requirements specified for the
applicable type of overlay material or with a project specifica-
tion.
C. Welding Consumables C 300 Mechanical properties
C 100 General 301 The weld metal shall, as a minimum, have strength, duc-
101 Welding consumables shall be suitable for their intended tility and toughness meeting the requirements of the base ma-
application, giving a weld with the required properties and cor- terial. The yield stress (Rt0.5) of welding consumables should
rosion resistance in the finally installed condition. be within the range 80 - 250 MPa above the SMYS of the re-
spective base material.
102 Welding consumables for arc welding shall be classified
according to recognised classification schemes. 302 For girth welds, all batches of consumables used in pro-
duction including possible wire / flux combinations shall be
103 Low hydrogen consumables and processes shall be used qualified by testing according to C 400.
for welding of all C-Mn steels. However, cellulose coated elec-
trodes may be used for welding C-Mn steels with SMYS ≤ 415 303 Welding consumables for welds in pipelines exposed to
provided special welding procedures preventing hydrogen in- accumulated plastic strain from the installation method and/or
duced cracking are established. operational loads requires special attention for selection of
yield stress, see E 600 and Section 6D 300. The yield stress
104 Low hydrogen consumables shall give a diffusible hy- (Rt0.5) of welding consumables should be within the range 80
drogen content of maximum 5 ml/100g weld metal. Hydrogen - 200 MPa above the SMYS of the respective base material.
testing shall be performed in accordance with ISO 3690 or BS Response to straining and ageing shall meet the requirements
6693-5. of the base material when tested in accordance with E 600.
105 Welding steels with SMYS ≥ 415 MPa shall be given
special consideration in order to ensure safety against cold C 400 Batch testing – Girth welds
cracking in the HAZ and/or the weld metal. Attention shall 401 The purpose of batch testing is to verify that the consum-
also be given to the requirements for the relationship between ables used for girth welds remain nominally equivalent to that
the yield and tensile strength of weld metal and base material. used for welding procedure qualification, with respect to
106 Welding consumables for processes other than manual chemistry and mechanical properties.
or mechanised arc welding may require special consideration 402 Batch testing shall be conducted when ECA is per-
with respect to certification, handling and storage. formed and always for steels with SMYS ≥ 415MPa for all
107 All welding consumables shall be individually marked welding consumables, including possible wire/flux combina-
and supplied with an inspection certificate type 3.1B according tions when new batches other than the one used for welding
to EN 10204 or equivalent. Certificate type 2.2 is sufficient for procedure qualification is to be used for installation welding.
SAW flux. 403 For this standard a batch is defined as the volume of
Data Sheet product identified by the supplier under one unique batch
108 Each welding consumables or combination of welding number, manufactured in one continuous run from batch con-
consumables shall be delivered in accordance with a data trolled raw materials.
sheet. The data sheet shall give guaranteed limits and/or mini- 404 Each individual product (brand name and dimensions)
mum values for composition and mechanical properties, deter- shall be tested once per batch, except for solid wire originating
mined under defined reference conditions. The data sheet from the same heat, where one diameter may represent all.
should give recommendations for handling/recycling of the SAW fluxes do not require individual testing, however, SAW
DET NORSKE VERITAS

wires shall be tested in combination with a selected, nominal may be based on previously qualified welding procedures pro-
batch of flux. vided that all the specified requirements can be fulfilled.
405 The testing shall be performed on samples taken from 102 All welding shall be based on welding consumables and
girth welds welded according to the welding procedure to be welding techniques proven to be suitable for the type of mate-
used in production. Three samples shall be removed from the rial and type of fabrication in question. A welding procedure
12 and 6 o'clock position and from the 3 or 9 o'clock position. specification shall as a minimum contain the following infor-
The testing of each sample shall include: mation:
— 1 all-weld metal tensile test. Hardness testing (HV10) of — material standard, quality level, grade and project specifi-
the centre at the end of each grip; cation;
— 1 macro section taken adjacent to the all-weld metal ten- — diameter and wall thickness (or range);
sile test. The macro section shall be hardness tested — groove preparation and design, including tolerances;
(HV10) vertically through the weld centre line with inden- — welding process;
tations spaced 1.5mm apart; — number and location of welders;
— 1 set of Charpy V-notch test at weld centre line in half — welding consumable, trade name and recognised classifi-
thickness. Test temperature shall be the same as for quali- cation;
fication of the relevant procedure; and — gas mixture and flow rate;
— If required due to ECA, fracture toughness testing shall be — welding rod / wire diameter;
performed of the weld metal at the minimum design tem- — quantity of added metal powder or wire;
perature. — welding parameters: current, voltage, type of current, po-
larity, travel speed, wire stick out and wire angle for each
arc (or range);
Chemical analysis — number of welding arcs as well as cold and hot wire addi-
tion;
406 For solid wire and metal powders the analysis shall rep- — welding position(s) and direction;
resent the product itself. For coated electrodes and cored wires, — stringer or weaving;
the analysis shall represent the weld metal, deposited accord- — nozzle size;
ing to EN 26847 (ISO 6847). The analysis shall include: — number of passes;
— all elements specified in the relevant classification stand- — number of passes before barge move-up;
ard and the relevant data sheet, see 201; and — clamping (internal or external);
— the N content. — maximum time laps between passes;
— minimum preheat and interpass temperature range; and
— post weld heat treatment.
Mechanical properties 103 For underwater welding the welding procedure specifi-
407 The properties shall represent all deposited weld metal. cation shall contain, in addition to D102:
The mechanical properties shall meet the minimum specified
requirements in 301. If an ECA is performed, the relevant me- — water depth (minimum/maximum),
chanical properties of the weld metal shall meet the properties — pressure inside the chamber,
used as input in the ECA, considering any partial safety factors — gas composition inside the chamber,
used. — humidity, maximum level,
— temperature inside the chamber (minimum/maximum),
408 Batch tests shall be documented by an inspection certif- — length, type and size of the welding umbilical,
icate EN 10204 3.1B, with reference to a recognised product — position for voltage measurements, and
qualification standard and containing all specified results. — welding equipment.
C 500 Handling and storage of welding consumables D 200 Preliminary welding procedure specification
501 Welding consumables shall be treated with care in order 201 A preliminary welding procedure specification (pWPS)
to avoid contamination, moisture pick-up and rusting, and shall be prepared for each new welding procedure qualifica-
shall be stored under dry conditions. Whenever recycling of tion. The pWPS shall specify the ranges for all relevant param-
flux is used, the flux shall be vacuum cleaned directly from the eters.
weld into a flux holding box. The recycling process and the ra-
tio of new/recycled flux shall be suitable to prevent any detri- 202 The pWPS shall be submitted for review and acceptance
mental degradation of the flux quality, e.g. moisture pick-up by the Purchaser prior to commencing the welding procedure
and change of grain size. qualification.
502 A detailed procedure for storage, handling, recycling D 300 Welding procedure qualification record
and re-baking of welding consumables shall be prepared and, 301 The welding procedure qualification record (WPQR)
as a minimum, shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's shall be a record of the parameters used during qualification
recommendation. The procedure shall be reviewed and agreed welding and subsequent non-destructive, destructive and cor-
prior to start of the production. rosion test results. The WPQR shall be submitted for review
503 For underwater welding, the storage and handling rou- and agreement prior to start of production. However, the weld-
tines of welding consumables on the support vessel and in the ing procedure qualification for linepipe production may be car-
welding chamber, as well as the sealing and transfer proce- ried out during first day production on the Manufacturer(s own
dures to the welding chamber, shall be specified. risk.
D 400 Welding procedure specification
401 A welding procedure specification (WPS) is a specifica-
D. Welding Procedures tion based on a WPQR and accepted in accordance with those
requirements. The WPS is the pWPS revised to reflect the
D 100 General welding variables qualified by the WPQ. All production weld-
101 Detailed welding procedures shall be prepared for all ing of pipeline and riser systems shall be performed in accord-
welding covered by this Appendix. The welding procedures ance with a WPS.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

D 500 Welding procedure specification for repair weld- or deposit rate.

ing Welding consumable: Any change of type, classification, di-
501 A repair welding procedure specification shall be pre- ameter and brand as well as addition or omission of powder,
pared, based on a WPQR for the type of weld repair to be ap- hot or cold wire.
plied. A repair WPS shall contain the following information in Wire stick-out: Any change in stick-out outside the tolerances
addition to the information given under D100: specified in the agreed WPS.
— method of removal of the defect, preparation and design of Gas shielding: A change outside (10% of specified mixture,
the weld area; nominal composition and nominal flow rate.
— minimum and maximum repair depth and length; and Welding position: A change to a principal position not being
— visual examination and NDT to be performed of the exca- qualified according to Table C-2.
vated area before welding as well as of the final weld re-
pair. Welding direction: A change from vertical down to vertical up
or vice versa.
D 600 Essential variables for welding procedures
Number of passes: Change from multipass to singlepass or
601 A qualified welding procedure remains valid as long as vice versa.
the essential variables are kept within acceptable limits and
production tests are performed regularly. When one or more Polarity: Any change.
variations outside the acceptable limits for essential variables Heat input:
occur, the welding procedure shall be considered invalid, and
shall be re-specified and qualified. — For steels with SMYS up to and including 415 MPa any
change beyond (15%.
602 The essential variables and the acceptable limits of var- — For materials with SMYS above 415 MPa the heat input
iables shall be as described in 603 and 604 below. For special variations shall not be more than (±10% unless otherwise
welding system processes, other essential parameters and ac- qualified.
ceptable variations may need to be applied.
603 An acceptance of a welding procedure of a particular Time lapse between root pass and first filler pass: Any delay
manufacturer is valid for welding in workshops or sites under significantly increasing the cold cracking risk in excess of that
the same technical and quality control of that manufacturer. qualified.
The following changes shall lead to a new qualification: Preheating: Any decrease in the minimum qualified tempera-
ture.
Materials:
Interpass temperature: Any change beyond + 25°C of the
— A change from a lower to a higher strength grade but not maximum interpass temperature.
vice versa;
— A change in the supply condition (TMCP, Q/T or normal- Cooling of welds: Any change in cooling method resulting in
ised); shorter cooling time than qualified (installation welding).
— A change between the processes rolled, forged or cast; Post weld heat treatment: Any change from the qualified post
— Any increase in Pcm of more than 0.02, CE of more than weld heat treatment procedure.
0.03 and C content of more than 0.02%; Stringer/Weave: Stringer to weave more than three times the
— Any change in base material origin (steel mill) for steels specified diameter.
with SMYS above 415 MPa.
Numbers of welders: Decrease in numbers of welders for root
Diameter: A change in diameter from one to another of the fol- and hot pass.
lowing ranges:
Table C-2 Qualified principal welding positions
— D < 100 mm, Test position Applicable welding position 1)
— 100 mm < D < 300 mm and
— D > 300 mm. 1G (PA) 1G (PA)
2G (PC) 1G+2G (PA+PC)
Thickness: A change outside the thickness interval 0.75 t to 1.5 5G (PF/PG) 1G+3G+5G (PA+PF/PG)
2G + 5G (PC+PF/PG) All
t for t ≤ 30 mm, where t is the nominal thickness of the test 6G (H-L045) All
joint, excluding the thickness of any corrosion resistant clad-
ding. For t > 30 mm a change outside the thickness interval Note 1 qualification welding on butt joints may also be applicable for weld-
ing of fillet welds, e.g. 1G and 5G may also be applicable for 1F and
0.75 t to 1.25 t. 5F respectively.
Groove configuration: Any change in groove dimensions out-
side the tolerances specified in the agreed WPS. 604 The essential parameters for underwater welding are
those specified above plus the following:
Line-up clamps: Change from external to internal or vice ver-
sa. Pressure inside the chamber: Any change.
Welding process: Any change. Gas composition inside the chamber: Any change.
Number of wires: Change from single-wire to multiple-wire Humidity: Any increase beyond + 10% Rh of the maximum
system or vice versa. level during qualification.
Welding equipment:
— Any change in equipment type and model for mechanised E. Qualification of Welding Procedures
welding;
— Any change in equipment type and model when semi- E 100 General
mechanised welding equipment (equipment with wire
feeding for manual welding) is used for installation weld- 101 Qualification welding shall be performed based upon the
ing (including underwater welding). accepted pWPS, using the type of welding equipment to be
used during production welding, and under conditions that are
Arc characteristics: Any changes affecting the transfer mode representative of the actual working environment for the work
DET NORSKE VERITAS

shop, site, vessel or the habitat where the production welding 203 When a heat treated pipe or component is repaired by
will be performed (see D 200, D 300, D 400). welding, a new suitable heat treatment may be required to be
102 The number of test joints shall be sufficient to obtain the included in the qualification of the weld repair procedure, de-
required number of specimens for the destructive tests speci- pending on the effect of the weld repair on the properties and
fied. Allowance for re-testing should be considered when de- microstructure of the existing weld and base material.
ciding the number of test joints to be welded. 204 Extent of NDT, mechanical testing and corrosion testing
103 The test joints for qualification welding shall be of suf- (if applicable) shall be as for the production welding procedure
ficient size to give realistic restraint during welding. qualification, but with additional impact testing in the HAZ be-
tween existing weld metal and repair weld. The number and lo-
104 The welding qualification test shall be representative for cation of the additional impact test sets shall be agreed on a
the production welding with respect to angle of pipe axis, in- case by case basis. Repair welding procedures shall meet the
terpass temperature, application of preheat, heat conduction, same requirements as the original weld. Full and half thickness
time between each layer, etc. The base material selected for the repair shall be tested as a main procedure. For other repairs:
qualification testing should be representative of the upper macro, bend and hardness.
range of the specified chemical composition for C-Mn steel,
and of the nominal range of the specified chemical composi- 205 The qualification test shall be made on pipe nipples or
tion for corrosion resistant alloys. If tack welds are to be fused pipe components in a manner realistically simulating the repair
into the final joint during production welding, they shall be in- situation to be qualified, e.g.
cluded when welding the test piece.
— full and 1/2 thickness repair,
105 For qualification welding of procedures for linepipe or — shallow surface repair of the weld seam, and
linepipe components containing longitudinal welds, attention — single pass repair.
should be paid to the requirement for obtaining a macro and
hardness test specimen from the longitudinal weld, see note 2 The length of the pipe nipple or test material shall be sufficient
in Fig. C-2 and note 8 in Table C-3. For all welding positions, to give realistic restraint.
except 1G (PA) and 2G (PC), it is recommended that one of the 206 Weld repairs performed from the inside of a single-sided
pipes used for the welding procedure qualification test be fixed joint shall be qualified separately, when internal weld repairs
with the longitudinal weld in the 6 or 12 o'clock position. are agreed.
106 Fillet welds to pressure containing pipes or components
E 300 Qualification of longitudinal and spiral welds in
may be qualified by a full penetration butt joint, provided that
linepipe and linepipe components
the essential variables in D 600 are applied.
301 Pre-qualification testing is required for manufacturers
107 Qualification of weld overlay shall be performed on a
with limited experience of fabrication of linepipe and linepipe
test sample which is representative for the size and thickness
components to the actual or similar specifications.
of the production base material. The minimum weld overlay
thickness used for the production welding shall be used for the 302 Welding shall be performed in accordance with a de-
welding procedure qualification test. tailed pWPS or WPS as specified in D. The pWPS shall be
qualified by NDT, mechanical testing and corrosion testing (if
108 Welds in pipelines exposed to accumulated plastic strain
applicable).
from the installation method and/or operational loads (see Sec-
tion 6D 300), require additional testing for qualification of the 303 The type and number of tests are given in Table C-3 with
girth weld welding procedures, see E 600 and Table C-4. method and acceptance criteria specified in F below.
109 Each test weld shall be subject to 100% visual examina- E 400 Qualification of girth welds in risers, expansion
tion, radiographic testing, ultrasonic testing and surface crack loops and pipe strings for towing
detection.. Test requirements shall be in accordance with Ap-
pendix D, H. Mechanical and corrosion testing as applicable 401 Pre-qualification testing is required for Contractors hav-
for the type of material and welding in question shall be as ing limited experience with the actual type of fabrication to the
specified in E 300 to E 700. actual or similar specification.
110 Except for installation and tie-in welding, previously 402 Qualification of welding procedures for risers, expan-
qualified welding procedures may be transferred to a new pro- sion loops and pipe strings for towing may be performed by
duction provided that they recently have been applied for pro- any of the arc welding processes specified in A 200.
duction to the same or more stringent requirements. Successful 403 Mechanised welding systems where previous experi-
application of such procedures shall be documented through ence is limited, or where the system will be used under new
recent, relevant tests. conditions, shall be subject to a more extensive pre-qualifica-
tion programme or documentation before they may be used.
E 200 Qualification of repair welding procedures The extent and the contents of a pre-qualification programme
201 Repair welding shall be qualified by a separate weld re- for such mechanised welding systems shall be accepted by
pair qualification test. The scope of qualification testing shall Purchaser. The Contractor shall prove and document that the
be agreed based on the types and extent of repair welding ap- welding systems are reliable and that the process can be con-
plicable. tinuously monitored and controlled.
202 Preheat for repair welding shall be minimum 50×C 404 The type and number of destructive tests for welding
above minimum specified preheat for production welding. procedure qualification are given in Table C-4 with methods
DET NORSKE VERITAS

and acceptance criteria as specified in F below.
Table C-3 Qualification of welding procedures for longitudinal welds in linepipes and linepipe components
TEST JOINT NUMBER OF EACH SPECIFIED TEST
Wall D(mm) Transverse All-weld Root Face Side Charpy Macro and Corrosion Fracture
thickness Weld tensile 1) bend bend bend 2) V-notch set hardness tests, toughness
(mm) Tensile 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Micro-
structure
examination
≤300 2 1 2 2 0 4 1 -8) 6 9)
<20 >300 2 1 2 2 0 4 1 -8) 6 9)
≤300 2 1 0 0 4 4 1 -8) 6 9)
≥20 >300 2 1 0 0 4 4 1 -8) 6 9)
Note
1) For HFW pipes, the tensile specimen shall be located along the weld seam within the heat-treated area.
2) Two additional side bend specimens shall be tested for clad/lined pipe.
3) Each Charpy V-notch set consist of 3 specimens. Impact testing shall be carried out with the V-notch in the weld metal, in the fusion line (FL), in FL+2
mm and FL+5 mm. Impact testing is not required for t < 6 mm.
4) Where several welding processes or welding consumables are used, impact testing shall be carried out in the corresponding weld regions, if the region
tested cannot be considered representative for the complete weld.
5) For double sided welds on C-Mn steels with SMYS > 415 MPa, four additional sets of Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be sampled from the weld
metal, FL (sampling 50% of HAZ), FL + 2 mm and FL + 5 mm in the root area, refer Fig. B-6 in Appendix B.
6) When the wall thickness exceeds 20 mm for single sided welds, two additional sets of Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be sampled from the weld
metal root and FL in the root area.
7) For HFW pipes, impact testing shall be conducted with the Charpy V-notch located in the FL, FL+2 mm and in the Transformation Line (TL) (TL which
has been formed during the local heat treatment subsequent to welding).
8) Requirements for corrosion tests and microstructure examination are specified in F and depend on service and the type of material.
9) Three base material and three weld metal specimens. Fracture toughness testing is not required for t < 13 mm.
Table C-4 Qualification of welding procedures for girth welds

Wall D(mm) Transverse All- Root Face Side Longi- Charpy Macro and Corrosion Fracture
thickness Weld weld bend bend bend tudinal V-notch hardness tests, toughness
(mm) Tensile tensile 10) bend set 8) Micro-
1) 11) 2) 3) 4) 7) structure
examination
<20 ≤300 2 - 2 1) 1 1) 0 2 4 2 -9) -12)
>300 4 2 4 1) 4 1) 0 2 4 2 -9) -12)
≥20 ≤300 2 - 0 0 4 2 4 5) 6) 2 - 9) -12)
>300 4 2 0 0 8 2 4 5) 6) 2 - 9) -12)
Notes
1) For welding processes with high potential for non-fusing type defects, side bend tests shall be performed instead of root and face bend tests.
2) Impact testing is not required for t < 6 mm.
3) Each Charpy V-notch set consists of 3 specimens.
4) Impact testing shall be carried out with the V-notch in the weld metal, in the fusion line (FL), in FL+2 mm and FL+5 mm.
5) For double sided welds on C-Mn steels with SMYS > 415 MP, four additional sets of Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be sampled from the weld
metal, FL (sampling 50% of HAZ), FL + 2 mm and FL + 5 mm in the root area, refer Fig. B-6 in Appendix B.
6) When the wall thickness exceeds 20 mm for single sided welds, two additional sets of Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be sampled from the weld
metal root and FL in the root area.
7) Where several welding peocesses or welding consumables are used, impact testing shall be carried out in the corresponding weld regions, if the region
8) For girth welds in welded pipe, one macro and hardness shall include a longitudinal pipe weld.
9) Requirements for corrosion tests and microstructure examination are specified in F, and depend on the service and type of material, see Section 6.
10) Bend tests on clad/lined pipes shall be performed as side bend tests.
11) Longitudinal bend tests are only applicable for clad/lined pipe.
12) Fracture toughness testing shall only be performed when required for Engineering Critical Assessment (ECA), see F.314. Extent of testing shall be in
accordance with Appendix BA 800, unless specified otherwise.
E 500 Qualification of girth welds for installation and performed by any of the arc welding processes specified in
tie-in A200.
501 Installation, general 504 The WPS shall be qualified by NDT, mechanical testing
502 Pre-qualification testing is required for Contractors hav- and corrosion testing (if applicable) prior to start of any pro-
ing limited experience with installation and tie-in welding to duction welding.
the agreed specification. 505 The type and number of destructive tests for welding
503 Qualification of welding procedures for installation and procedure qualification are given in Table C-4 with method
tie-in of pipelines systems and pipeline components may be and acceptance criteria as specified in F below. For welding in
position 1G (PA) and 2G (PC), the number of mechanical tests
may be reduced to half of what is specified in Table C-4 sub-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ject to acceptance by Purchaser. 602 Documentation from mechanical testing of plastically

506 Mechanised welding systems where previous experi- deformed and straightened welds shall be provided. This doc-
ence is limited or where the system will be used under new umentation shall be relevant with respect to the type and
conditions will require a more extensive pre-qualification pro- strength of the base material, degree of plastic deformation,
gramme or documentation before they can be accepted for use. time between each deformation cycle, type of welding con-
The extent and the contents of a pre-qualification programme sumable, welding parameters and the mechanical properties of
for such mechanised welding systems shall be agreed upon be- the weld. Special considerations shall be given to laying oper-
fore it is commenced. The Contractor shall prove and docu- ations with long time or high temperature between the different
ment to the Purchaser that the welding systems are reliable and deformation cycles, which may cause ageing to take place be-
that the process can be continuously monitored and controlled. fore subsequent deformation of the pipe.
E 600 Qualification of girth welds exposed to accumu- 603 For welding procedure qualification additional material
lated plastic strain testing shall be performed on material samples, including the
girth weld, that have successively been deformed by uni-axial
601 Welds in pipelines exposed to accumulated plastic strain tension and compression and artificially aged as specified in
from the installation method and/or operational loads, see Sec-
tion 9E, will be exposed to localised high strain (see Section Section 6D 300, prior to visual examination and non-destruc-
6D 300). The weld metal and/or the HAZ may receive exces- tive testing.
sive plastic deformation caused by differences in the yield 604 The type and number of additional destructive tests for
stress in the base material and weld metal and variations in welding procedure qualification is given in Table C-5 with ac-
wall thickness or diameter between the two pipe ends. To ceptance criteria specified in Section 6D 300 and F below.
avoid local excessive strain concentrations and subsequent risk
for strain ageing, the welding procedure shall demonstrate that 605 The number of test joints shall be sufficient to cover the
the weld and the adjacent base material have as uniform me- required number of destructive tests that have been specified.
chanical properties as possible, and that the weld metal shows Allowance for re-testing should be considered when deciding
the same response to strain hardening and ageing as the pipe the number of test joints to be plastically deformed and
material. straightened.
Table C-5 Additional testing for qualification of welding procedures for girth welds exposed to accumulated plastic strain
THE JOINT NUMBER OF EACH SPECIFIED TEST
Wall thickness D Deformed and Deformed and Deformed and Macro and Deformed and Fracture
(mm) (mm) artificial aged artificial aged artificial aged hardness 4) artificial aged toughness
all-weld transverse base material Charpy V-notch testing and J-R
tensile 1) 2) weld tensile 3) tensile test set 5) 6) 7) 8) testing
<300 2 4 2 1 4 - 9)
<20 >300 2 4 2 1 4 - 9)
<300 2 4 2 1 4 - 9)
≥20 >300 2 4 2 1 4 - 9)
Notes:
1) The test specimens shall be sampled from 1 and 7 o'clock position.
2) All-weld tensile testing is not required for t < 10 mm.
3) The test samples shall be sampled as for pipes with OD > 300 mm (ref. Fig.C-2).
4) For girth welds in welded pipe, one macro and hardness test shall include a longitudinal pipe weld.
5) Impact testing is not required for t < 6 mm.
6) Each Charpy V-notch set consists of 3 specimens.
7) Impact testing shall be carried out with the V-notch in the weld metal, in the fusion line (FL), in FL+2 mm and FL+5 mm.
8) Where several welding processes or welding consumables are used, impact testing shall be carried out in the corresponding weld regions, if the region
9) Extent of testing and details of the test procedure are subject to agreement.
Table C-6 Qualification of overlay welding procedures

Wall thickness Side-bend Macro and Chemical All-Weld Charpy V-notch Corrosion test
base material specimens1) Hardness tests Analysis Tensile2) impact sets2) 3) 4) 5)
All 4 1 1 2 4 1
Notes:
1) Side-bend tests are to be taken transverse to the welding direction.
2) Only required when the design considers the overlay material to be load bearing.
3) Only required when the weld overlay is load bearing across the overlay/base material fusion line.
4) Each Charpy V-notch set consists of 3 specimens. Impact testing shall be carried out with the V-notch in the weld metal, in the fusion line (FL), in FL+2
mm and FL+5 mm.
5) Only when required by F 600.
mum of three joints for mechanised welding systems.

E 700 Qualification of underwater welding for tie-in 702 The welding procedures for closing possible vent holes
701 The qualification test program shall consist of a mini- shall also be qualified. This qualification test shall as a mini-
mum of one completed joint for manual welding, and a minimum include impact testing of weld metal, FL, FL+2, FL+5
and all weld metal tensile test. The qualification may be per-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

formed as a "buttering" test providing considerations are made C-3 to Table C-6. Sampling of test specimens is shown in Fig.
to start/stop and that access limitations for the actual produc- C-1 and Fig. C-2 for longitudinal welds in linepipes and line-
tion welding is simulated. pipe components and girth welds respectively.
703 The qualification program may be extended in cases 302 Test specimen dimensions and methods for testing are
where the underwater welding will occur under conditions given in Appendix B.
where previous experience is limited, or will be undertaken by
a company with limited experience in this field. 303 If test results are influenced by improper sampling, ma-
chining, preparation, treatment or testing, then the test sample
704 If a welding procedure is to be used over a large range of and specimen (as relevant) shall be replaced by a correctly pre-
depths, it may, subject to special evaluation in each case, re- pared sample or specimen and a re-test may be performed.
quire qualification testing at one or several pressures.
304 A test failing to meet the specified requirements may be
705 Voltage and amperage of the welding circuits should re-tested. The reason for the failure shall be investigated and
preferably be continuously monitored at the arc. If voltage is reported before any re-testing is performed. The re-testing
measured at the power source, calibration should be performed shall consist of two further test specimens/sets of test speci-
taking into consideration the type, lengths and cross section ar- mens. If both re-tests meet the requirements, the test should be
eas of the welding cables. regarded as acceptable. All test results, including the failed
E 800 Qualification of overlay welding tests, shall be reported.
801 Overlay welding shall be performed with GTAW or Transverse weld tensile testing
pulsed GMAW. Other methods may be used subject to agree- 305 The ultimate tensile strength of the joint shall be at least
ment. The WPS shall be qualified by NDT, mechanical testing equal to the specified ultimate tensile strength for the base ma-
and corrosion testing (if applicable) prior to start any produc- terial. When different material grades are joined, the ultimate
tion welding. tensile strength of the joint shall be at least equal to the mini-
802 The type and number of destructive tests for welding mum specified tensile strength of the lower grade.
procedure qualification are given in Table C-2 with method
and acceptance criteria specified in F below.
803 Unless the production welding procedure can be ap-
plied, the repair welding procedure shall be qualified. Weld re-
pair performed on weld overlay machined to the final thickness
shall be separately qualified.
E 900 Qualification of welding procedures for struc-
tures
901 Welding procedures for structural components, supplied
as a part of the pipeline systems, shall be qualified in accord-
ance with EN 288-3. The requirements shall be appropriate for
the structural categorisation of the members and stresses in the
structure. The extent of tensile, hardness and impact testing
and the test temperatures shall in general be in compliance with
this standard.
F. Examination and Testing

F 100 General
101 All visual examination, non-destructive testing, me-
chanical testing and corrosion testing of test pieces shall be
performed in the as welded or post weld heat treated condition,
whatever is applicable for the final product.
F 200 Visual examination and non-destructive testing
201 Each test joint shall undergo 100% visual examination
and non-destructive testing as specified in Section 6, Section 7
and Section 9, as applicable, with acceptance criteria as re-
quired for the production welding.
202 Weld overlay shall be non-destructively tested with a
surface and weld thickness which is representative for the pro-
duction welding, i.e. after machining the overlay thickness to
3 mm or the thickness representative for the thickness on the
finished component.
F 300 Destructive testing of butt joints Figure C-1 Welding procedure qualification test - sampling
301 The type and number of mechanical tests and micro- of test specimens for longitudinal welds, manufacture of
structure evaluations for qualification tests are given in Table linepipes or linepipe components
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Note 1: The indicated location of the test specimens are not required for qualification of welding in the 1G (PA) and 2G (PC) positions, where
sampling positions are optional.
Note 2: For welded pipe, one macro and hardness shall include a longitudinal pipe weld.
Figure C-2 Welding procedure qualification test - girth wleds, sampling of test specimens
All-weld tensile testing not be less than those specified for the weld metal (see C 300)
306 The upper yield or the Rt0.5 and the tensile strength shall and the elongation shall not be less than that specified for the
base material. When different material grades are joined, the
DET NORSKE VERITAS

acceptance level of the weld metal shall be at least equal to the 503 Clad/lined steel pipes shall have the microstructure of
minimum specified strength of the lower grade. the corrosion resistant portion of the weld examined in accord-
Bend testing ance with Section 6C 500.
307 The guided bend tests shall not disclose any open defects 504 Other CRA's shall have the microstructure examined in
in any direction exceeding 3 mm. Minor ductile tears less than accordance with Section 6C 400.
6 mm, originating at the specimen edge may be disregarded if F 600 Testing of weld overlay
not associated with obvious defects.
601 When the weld overlay is not contributing to strength,
Longitudinal root bend testing on clad/lined pipes tensile testing and Charpy V-notch testing of the weld overlay
308 The guided bend tests shall not disclose any open defects material are not required. When the weld overlay strength is
in any direction exceeding 3 mm. Minor ductile tears less than considered as a part of the design, such mechanical testing of
6 mm, originating at the specimen edge may be disregarded if the weld overlay material is required.
not associated with obvious defects. 602 The base material shall retain the minimum specified
Charpy V-notch impact testing mechanical properties after any post weld heat treatment. The
base material properties in the post weld heat treated condition
309 The average and single Charpy V-notch toughness at shall then be documented by additional testing and recorded as
each position shall not be less than specified for the base ma- a part of the welding procedure qualification.
terial in the transverse direction (KVT values), see Table 6-3,
Table 6-4, Table 6-6. Any requirement for fracture arrest prop- 603 The testing in 604 through 607 shall, as a minimum, be
erties as listed in Table 6-9 shall not apply for the weld and performed when the overlay material is not considered as part
HAZ. of the design and when the base material has not been affected
by any post weld heat treatment.
310 When different steel grades are joined, a series of impact
tests shall be performed in the HAZ on each side of the joint. Bend testing of weld overlay
The weld metal shall meet the more stringent energy require- 604 The bend testing shall be performed in accordance with
ment. Appendix B A 500. The guided bend tests shall disclose no de-
Macro section fects exceeding 3 mm. Minor ductile tears less than 6 mm,
originating at the specimen edge may be disregarded if not as-
311 The macro section shall be documented by photographs sociated with obvious defects.
(magnification of at least 5x).
Macro examination of weld overlay
312 The macro section shall show a sound weld merging
smoothly into the base material without weld defects accord- 605 The macro sections shall be documented by mac-
ing to the visual examination and NDT acceptance criteria in rographs. The macro section shall show a sound weld merging
Appendix D. smoothly into the base material without weld defects accord-
ing to the visual examination and NDT acceptance criteria in
Hardness testing Appendix D.
313 The maximum hardness shall not exceed the limits given Hardness testing of weld overlay
in Section 6C 200, Section 6C 300, and Section 6D 100 as ap-
plicable for the intended service and type of material tested. 606 The maximum hardness for base material and HAZ shall
not exceed the limits given in Section 6 C 200, Section 6 C
Fracture toughness testing 300, Section 6 C500, Section 6 D 100 as applicable for the in-
314 Fracture toughness shall not be less than specified for tended service and type of material. The maximum hardness
the base material and weld in Section 6 C. For girth welds frac- for the overlay material shall not exceed the limits given in
ture toughness testing shall only be performed when required NACE MR-0175 for sour service, unless otherwise specified.
for Engineering Critical Assessment (ECA), see Section 9E. Chemical analysis of weld overlay
Extent of testing shall be in accordance with Appendix BA 607 The chemical composition shall be obtained in accord-
800. ance with Appendix B A 300. The location for the chemical
Testing of girth welds exposed to accumulated plastic strain analysis shall be considered as the minimum qualified thick-
315 The girth weld shall be plastically deformed and aged in ness to be left after any machining of the corrosion resistant
accordance with E 600. The mechanical testing specified by weld overlay. The chemical composition of the weld deposit
Table C-5 shall meet the requirements in Section 6D 300. The metal shall comply with the applicable specification for the
difference in values obtained for the yield stress of base mate- type of alloy specified for the overlay material.
rial and weld metal should be within a range of 100 MPa. All-weld tensile testing of load bearing weld overlay
F 400 Sulphide stress cracking test 608 All-weld tensile testing shall be performed in accord-
ance with Appendix B A400.
401 Sulphide stress cracking testing is to be performed to
qualify materials not meeting the requirements for sour service 609 The yield stress and ultimate tensile strength of the weld
according to Section 6D 100. Testing procedures are specified deposit shall be at least equal to the material strength used in
in Appendix BB 400 the design.
Charpy V-notch impact testing of load bearing weld overlay
F 500 Corrosion Testing and Microstructure Examina-
610 When the weld overlay material is designed to transfer
tion
the load across the base material/weld overlay fusion line, im-
Corrosion test pact testing of the weld overlay and HAZ shall be performed
501 25 Cr duplex stainless steel shall be subject to pitting (i.e. when the overlay is a part of a butt joint or acts as a tran-
corrosion test. Testing procedures are specified in Appendix sition between a corrosion resistant alloy and a carbon steel).
BB 200, and the acceptance criteria are given in Section 6C 611 The average and single Charpy V-notch toughness at
300. each position shall not be less than specified for the base ma-
Microstructure examination: terial. When different steel grades are joined, a series of impact
tests shall be considered in the HAZ on each side of the joint.
502 Welds in duplex stainless steel shall have the micro- The weld metal shall meet the more stringent energy require-
structure examined in accordance with Section 6C 300. ment.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Corrosion testing and microstructure examination of weld minimum interpass temperature of the pass in question shall be
overlay applied.
612 Requirements for corrosion testing and microstructure 210 Supports, attachments, lifting devices etc. used for per-
examination of stainless steel and nickel base weld overlay manent positioning of risers and pipelines shall be welded to a
materials used in seawater service shall be specially consid- doubler ring or plate. Doubler rings for temporary use should
ered and agreed. be clamped. Welding of temporary attachments shall be sub-
613 The surface to be used for microstructure examination ject to agreements.
shall be representative of a weld overlay thickness of 3 mm or 211 Permanent doubler rings and plates shall be made of ma-
the minimum overlay thickness specified for the finished materials satisfying the requirements for pressure containing
chined component, whichever is less. parts. Doubler rings shall be made as fully encircling sleeves
with the longitudinal welds made with backing strips, and
avoiding penetration into the main pipe material. Other welds
shall be continuous, and made in a manner minimising the risk
G. Fabrication and Welding Requirements of root cracking and lamellar tearing.
G 100 General 212 Transitions where the material thickness or yield stress
is unequal shall be in accordance with ASME B 31.8 Appendix
101 All welding shall be performed using the type of weld- I or equally recognised codes.
ing equipment and under the conditions that are representative
for the working environment during procedure qualification 213 Field bevelling shall preferably be by means of bevel-
welding (see E.101). Pre-qualification testing shall be per- ling machines.
formed for welding systems where the Contractor has limited 214 After cutting of linepipe or plate material for new bevel
previous experience, or where the system will be used under preparation, a new lamination check by ultrasonic and magnet-
new conditions. All welding equipment shall be maintained in ic particle/dye penetrant testing shall be performed.
good condition in order to ensure the quality of the weldment. 215 Maximum root gap for fillet welds should be 2 mm.
102 All welding shall be performed under controlled condi- Where the root gap is > 2 mm but ≤ 5 mm, this shall be com-
tions with adequate protection from detrimental environmental pensated by increasing the throat thickness on the fillet weld by
influence such as humidity, dust, draught and large tempera- 0.7 mm for each mm beyond 2 mm gap. Welding of fillet welds
ture variations. with root gap > 5 mm is subject to repair based on an agreed
103 All instruments shall have valid calibration certificates procedure.
and the adequacy of any control software shall be documented. G 300 Repair welding
G 200 Production welding 301 Defective welds that cannot be repaired with grinding
201 All welding shall be carried out strictly in accordance only may be locally repaired by welding. Repair welding shall
with the accepted welding procedure specification and the re- be performed in accordance with a repair welding procedure.
quirements in this subsection. If any parameter is changed out- For welding processes applying large weld pools, e.g. multi-
side the limits of the essential variables, the welding procedure arc welding systems, any unintended arc-stop is to be consid-
shall be re-specified and re-qualified. Essential variables and ered as a repair.
variation limits are specified in D 600. 302 Weld seams may only be repaired twice in the same ar-
202 The weld bevel shall be free from moisture, oil, grease, ea. Repeated repairs of the root in single sided welds are not
rust, carbonised material, coating etc., which may affect the permitted, unless specifically qualified and accepted by Pur-
weld quality. Welding of CRAs or clad/lined materials require chaser in each case. Weld repairs shall be ground to merge
cleaning of internal and external surface of the pipe up to a dis- smoothly into the original weld contour.
tance of at least 20 mm from the bevels. 303 Repairs of the root pass in a single-sided joint for mate-
203 Longitudinal welds shall be staggered at least 50 mm rial meeting sour service requirements shall be carried out un-
and should be located in the upper half of the linepipe if possi- der constant supervision.
ble. 304 A local weld repair shall be at least 50 mm long.
204 The minimum preheat temperature shall be measured at 305 The excavated portion of the weld shall be large enough
a distance of minimum 75 mm from the edges of the groove at to ensure complete removal of the defect, and the ends and
the opposite side of the heating source when practically possi- sides of the excavation shall have a gradual taper from the bot-
ble. If not possible. The adequacy of the measuring at the out- tom of the excavation to the surface. Defects can be removed
side only shall be demonstrated. by grinding, machining or air-arc gouging. If air-arc gouging
205 The interpass temperature shall be measured at the edge is used, the last 3 mm through the root of the weld shall be re-
of the groove immediately prior to starting the following pass. moved by mechanical means and the whole excavated area
shall be ground to remove any carbon enriched zones. The
206 Number of welders and the weld sequence shall be se- width and the profile of the excavation shall be sufficient to en-
lected in order to cause minimum distortion of the pipeline or sure adequate access for re-welding.
the components.
Complete removal of the defect shall be confirmed by magnet-
207 Line-up clamps should not be removed before the first ic particle testing, or dye penetrant testing for non ferromag-
two passes are completed. The release of line-up clamp shall netic materials. Residuals from the NDT shall be removed
be qualified and simulated during WPQ. When tack welds are prior to re-welding.
necessary for alignment, these shall only be made in the weld
groove if qualified in the welding procedures. Defective tack 306 If the area of repair is subject to large bending and/or ax-
welds shall be completely removed. ial stresses, e.g. at a laybarge repair station or similar situa-
tions, the weld repair length shall be determined by
208 Start and stop points shall be distributed over a length of calculations, see Section 9A 700.
weld and not "stacked" in the same area.
209 Welding shall not be interrupted before the joint has suf- G 400 Post weld heat treatment
ficient strength to avoid plastic yielding and cracking during 401 Post weld heat treatment should be performed for weld-
handling. Prior to restart after an interruption, preheating to the ed joints of C-Mn steel having a nominal wall thickness above
DET NORSKE VERITAS

50 mm, unless CTOD testing shows acceptable values in the as yielding and cracking of pipes in tension. The maximum
welded condition. In cases where the minimum design temper- length of allowable repair steps shall be calculated based on the
ature is less than -10°C, the thickness limit shall be specially maximum stresses present in the joint during the repair opera-
determined. tion, see Section 9A 700.
402 If post weld heat treatment is used to obtain adequate re- 703 Full penetration repairs are only to be implemented un-
sistance of welded joints against sulphide stress cracking, this der constant supervision, otherwise the weld shall be cut out.
shall be performed for all thicknesses. 704 Production tests (See Section 9A 900) shall be per-
403 Post weld heat treatment shall be carried out at 580°C to formed in a manner which, as far as possible, reproduces the
620°C unless otherwise recommended by the steel Manufac- actual welding, and covers the welding of a sufficient large
turer or the welding consumables Manufacturer. For quenched pipe section in the relevant position. Production welds cut out
and tempered material, the post weld heat treatment tempera- due to NDT failure may be used.
ture shall as a minimum be 25°C below the tempering temper- 705 For production testing, the same number of tests as spec-
ature of the base material. ified in E 500 (and Table C-5 when applicable) shall be carried
404 Heating, soaking and cooling shall be performed in a out.
controlled manner according to an approved procedure. The Underwater welding
soaking time shall be 2 minutes/mm, but with minimum soak-
ing time 1 hour. Where local heat treatment is performed, the 706 Underwater welding shall be carried out utilising a low
specified temperature shall be maintained in a band extending hydrogen process, in a chamber (habitat) where the water has
at least 3 times the wall thickness on each side of the weld. The been displaced. Other methods are subject to special accept-
temperature at the edge of the insulation band shall be maxi- ance by Purchaser.
mum half the soaking temperature. When the temperature at all 707 A confirmation test should be carried out at the location
parts has dropped below 300°C, the joint may be cooled in still prior to starting the welding. The test weld shall be made on
air. pipe or components in the habitat under actual conditions. The
405 The heat treatment temperature cycle shall be available coupons shall cover welding from the 6 o'clock to 9 o'clock re-
for verification if requested. gion. Subject to acceptable visual examination and NDT, the
welding may commence. NDT requirements shall be in ac-
G 500 Welding of linepipe and linepipe components cordance with acceptance criteria as for the production welds.
501 The Manufacturer shall be capable of producing welded Mechanical testing of the test weld shall be performed imme-
linepipe and linepipe components of the required quality. diately after welding. The number of mechanical tests is half
that required for welding procedure qualification. Provided
502 Welds containing defects may be locally repaired by that the same welding habitat, equipment and welding proce-
welding. Weld deposit having unacceptable mechanical prop- dure are used consecutively on the same pipeline under com-
erties shall be completely removed before re-welding. parative conditions, further confirmation test welds are not
503 Testing during production of linepipe shall be performed required.
according to Section 6E 800. 708 Welding cables shall be of the same dimension and ap-
504 Production tests should be required during the produc- proximately the same length (e.g. ± 5%) as those used during
tion of linepipe components. The tests shall be performed in a the welding procedure qualification test. Use of artificial re-
manner which, as far as possible, reproduces the actual weld- sistance to simulate the actual cable dimension and length may
ing, and covers the welding of a sufficient large test piece in be used, if this is agreed.
the relevant position. Production welds, cut out due to NDT 709 All relevant welding parameters shall be monitored and
failure, may be used. recorded at the surface control station under supervision by a
welding co-ordinator. The welding area shall have continuous
G 600 Fabrication of risers, expansion loops, pipe communication with the control station. All operations includ-
strings for towing. ing welding shall be monitored by a video system that can be
601 The Contractor shall be capable of producing welded remotely controlled from the control station.
joints meeting the required quality. This may include welding
of girth welds, overlay welding and post weld heat treatment of
the components. Relevant documentation of the Contractor's
capabilities shall be available if requested by the Purchaser. H. Material and Process Specific Requirements
602 Production tests should be required during the produc- H 100 Internally clad/lined carbon steel
tion Section 9A 900. The tests shall be performed in a manner
which, as far as possible, reproduces the actual welding and Production welding
covers the welding of a sufficient large test piece in the rele- 101 Welding of the corrosion resistant cladding portion may
vant position. Production welds cut out due to NDT failure be performed by the welding processes listed in A 200, except
may be used. Flux Cored Arc Welding without gas shield (FCAW / 114).
603 When production testing is required, the same number of The welding shall be double sided whenever possible. Welding
tests as specified in E 400 (and Table C-5 when applicable) of the root pass in single sided (field) joints will generally re-
shall be carried out. Impact test samples shall be located in the quire welding with Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW / 141)
weld metal and in the HAZ at the position that showed the low- or Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW / 135).
est average energy absorption during the procedure qualifica- 102 The final weld bevel preparation shall be made by ma-
tion test. chining or grinding. The grinding wheels used for the corro-
sion resistant cladding material shall not have previously been
G 700 Installation and tie-in welding used for carbon steel. Thermal cutting shall be limited to plas-
Installation ma arc cutting.
701 Installation welding shall be carried out by qualified per- 103 Stainless steel wire brushes shall be used for interpass
sonnel. The type of welding equipment and the welding proce- cleaning of the corrosion resistant weld metal and clad/lined
dure shall be qualified prior to installation welding. material.
702 Long defects may require repair in several steps to avoid 104 All operations during welding of the pipeline system
DET NORSKE VERITAS

shall be carried out with adequate equipment and/or in a pro- 204 The heat input should be kept within the range 0.5 - 1.5
tected environment to avoid carbon steel contamination of the kJ/mm, avoiding the highest heat input for smaller wall thick-
corrosion resistant material. Procedures for examination of nesses.
surfaces and removal of any contamination shall be prepared.
205 In case of a second weld repair, a separate welding pro-
Welding consumables cedure qualification shall be performed.
105 Welding consumables for corrosion resistant materials Welding consumables
shall be selected to suit the cladding/lining material. The cor-
rosion resistance of the welding consumable shall be better 206 Welding consumables with enhanced nickel and nitro-
than that of the cladding/lining material. For single sided gen content shall be used unless full heat treatment after weld-
(field) joints, the same type of welding consumable should be ing is performed. Sufficient addition of material from the
used for all passes needed to complete the joint. Alternative welding consumables is essential for welding of the root pass
welding consumables may be considered for fill and capping and the two subsequent passes.
passes after depositing a weld thickness not less than 2 times Backing or shielding gases shall not contain hydrogen. The ox-
thickness of the cladding/lining. The alternative welding con- ygen content of the backing gas shall be less than 0.1% during
sumables must be documented to be compatible with the weld- welding of the root pass.
ing consumables used for the root area, the base material and
the applicable service. Any effect on the probability for detect- H 300 Martensitic (13% Cr) stainless steel
ing weld defects by the applicable NDT procedures is also to
be considered. Extent of testing and documentation shall be Production welding
agreed before commence of qualification testing. 301 Welding of martensitic stainless steel may be performed
by the welding processes listed in A 200, except for Flux Cored
H 200 Duplex stainless steel Arc Welding without gas shield (FCAW / 114). Welding of
Production welding root pass in single sided joints will normally require welding
201 Welding of 22 Cr / 25 Cr duplex stainless steel may be with Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW / 141).
performed by the welding processes listed in A 200, except for 302 Thermal cutting shall be limited to plasma arc cutting.
Flux Cored Arc Welding without gas shield (FCAW / 114).
Welding of root pass in single sided joints will generally re- 303 Fabrication of martensitic stainless steel shall be per-
quire welding with Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW / 141). formed in a workshop or part thereof, which is reserved exclu-
sively for this type of material. Grinding wheels and steel
202 Thermal cutting shall be limited to plasma arc cutting. brushes shall be suitable for martensitic stainless steels and
203 Fabrication of duplex stainless steel shall be performed shall not previously have been used on carbon steel materials.
in a workshop, or part thereof, which is reserved exclusively Post weld heat treatment
for this type of material. Grinding wheels and steel brushes
shall be suitable for working on duplex stainless steel and not 304 A suitable post weld heat treatment may be performed if
previously used for carbon steel. sour service is required.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover App.D – Page 141
APPENDIX D
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING (NDT)
A. General 50 mm and up to and including 200 mm in

thickness
A 100 Scope ISO 1106-3 Recommended practice for radiographic ex-
101 This Appendix specifies the requirements for methods, amination of welded joints Part 3: Fusion
equipment, procedures, acceptance criteria, and the qualifica- welded circumferential joints in steel pipes
tion and certification of personnel for visual examination and of up to 50 mm wall thickness
non-destructive testing (NDT) of C-Mn steels, duplex steels, ISO 2504 Radiography of welds and viewing condi-
other stainless steels and clad steel materials and weldments tions for films - Utilisation of recommended
for use in pipeline systems. patterns of image quality indicators (I.Q.I.)
ISO 5579 Non-destructive testing - Radiographic ex-
102 This Appendix does not cover automated ultrasonic test- amination of metallic materials by X- and
ing (AUT) of girth welds. Specific requirements pertaining to gamma rays - Basic rules
AUT of girth welds are given in Appendix E. Appendix E shall ISO 5580 Non-destructive testing - Industrial radio-
be read and interpreted in conjunction with this Appendix. graphic illuminators - Minimum require-
103 Requirements for NDT and visual examination of other ments.
materials shall be specified and shall be in general agreement ISO 9002 Quality Systems, Model for Quality Assur-
with the requirements of this Appendix. ance in Production, Installation and Servic-
ing.
A 200 Codes and standards ISO 9303 Seamless and welded (except submerged
201 The following codes and standards are referred to in this arc-welded) steel tubes for pressure purposes
Appendix: - Full peripheral ultrasonic testing for the de-
tection of longitudinal imperfections
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, ISO 9304 Seamless and welded (except submerged
Article 2 and Article 5. arc-welded) steel tubes for pressure purposes
ASTM - Eddy current testing for the detection of im-
A578/578M Standard Specification for Straight-Beam perfections
Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad ISO 9305 Seamless tubes for pressure purposes - Full
Steel Plates for Special Applications peripheral ultrasonic testing for the detection
ASTM of transverse imperfections
A577/577M Standard specification for Ultrasonic Angle- ISO 9402 Seamless and welded (except submerged arc
Beam Examination of Steel Plates welded) steel tubes for pressure purposes -
ASTM Full peripheral magnetic transducer/ flux
leakage testing of ferromagnetic steel tubes
E 709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Exam- for the detection of longitudinal imperfec-
ination tions
ASTM ISO 9598 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes-
E 797 Standard Practice for Measuring Thickness Full peripheral magnetic transducer/flux
by Manual Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Contact leakage testing of ferromagnetic steel tubes
Method for the detection of transverse imperfections
ASTM ISO 9765 Submerged arc-welded steel tubes for pres-
E 1212 Standard Practice for Establishment and sure purposes - Ultrasonic testing of the weld
Maintenance of Quality Control Systems for seam for the detection of longitudinal and/or
Non-destructive Testing Agencies transverse imperfections)
ASTM E 1444 Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Ex- ISO 10124 Seamless and welded (except submerged
amination arc-welded) steel tubes for pressure purposes
ASTM E 1417 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Ex- - Ultrasonic testing for the detection of lam-
amination inar imperfections
DNV Classification Note No. 7 - Ultrasonic In- ISO 10543 Seamless and hot-stretch reduced welded
spection of Welded Joints steel tubes for pressure purposes - Full pe-
EN 473 Qualification and certification of NDT per- ripheral ultrasonic thickness testing
sonnel - General principles ISO 11484 Steel tubes for pressure purposes - Qualifica-
EN 1711* Non-Destructive Examination of Welds: tion and certification of non-destructive test-
Eddy Current Examination by Complex ing (NDT) personnel
Plane Analysis ISO 11496 Seamless and welded steel tubes for pressure
EN 12084* Eddy Current testing - General Principles of purposes - Ultrasonic testing of tube ends for
the Method the detection of laminar imperfections
ISO 1027 Radiographic image quality indicators for ISO 12094 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes -
non-destructive testing - Principles and iden- Ultrasonic testing for the detection of lami-
tification nar imperfections in strips or plates used in
ISO 1106-1 Recommended practice for radiographic ex- manufacture of welded tubes
amination of welded joints Part 1: Fusion ISO 12095 Seamless and welded steel tubes for pressure
welded butt joints in steel plates up to 50 mm purposes - Liquid penetrant testing
thick ISO 13663 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes-Ul-
ISO 1106-2 Recommended practice for radiographic ex- trasonic testing of the area adjacent to the
amination of welded joints Part 2: Fusion weld seam body for detection of laminar im-
welded butt joints in steel plates thicker than perfections
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 142 – App.D see note on front cover
ISO 13664 Seamless and welded steel tubes for pressure — acceptance criteria.
purposes - Magnetic particle inspection of
tube ends for the detection of laminar imper- 502 If alternative methods or combinations of methods are
fections used for detection of imperfections, the procedures shall be
ISO 13665 Seamless and welded steel tubes for pressure prepared in accordance with an agreed code or standard. The
purposes - Magnetic particle inspection of need for procedure qualification shall be considered in each
tube body for the detection of surface imper- case based on the method's sensitivity in detecting and charac-
fections terising imperfections and the size and type of defects to be de-
tected.
*Until final approval of the EN's, reference is made to the cor-
responding prEN's. 503 Non-destructive testing procedures shall be signed by
the responsible Level 3 person.
A 600 Personnel qualifications
301 NDT Contractors shall as a minimum have an imple-
mented quality assurance system meeting the general require- 601 Personnel performing manual or semi-automatic NDT
ments of ISO 9002 and supplemented with the requirements and interpretation of test results shall be certified according to
given in ASTM E 1212. a certification scheme which meets the requirements of EN
473 (Qualification and certification of NDT personnel-General
302 Further requirements for quality assurance are given in principles) and shall possess a valid certificate of proficiency.
Section 2B 500. The certificate shall state the qualification level and categories
A 400 Non-destructive testing methods for which the operator is certified.
401 Methods of NDT shall be chosen with due regard to the 602 Personnel calibrating and interpreting results from auto-
conditions influencing the sensitivity of the methods. The mated equipment for NDT shall be certified to an appropriate
methods' ability to detect imperfections shall be considered for level according to a certification scheme meeting the require-
the material, joint geometry and welding process used. ments of EN 473. In addition, they shall be able to document
adequate training and experience with the equipment in ques-
402 As the NDT methods differ in their limitations and/or tion, and shall be able to demonstrate their capabilities with re-
sensitivities, combination of two or more methods may be regard to calibrating the equipment, performing an operational
quired in order to ensure optimum probability of detection of test under production/site/field conditions, and evaluating size
harmful defects. and location of imperfections.
403 For detection of surface imperfections in ferromagnetic 603 Personnel operating automated equipment for NDT dur-
materials, magnetic particle or eddy current testing shall be ing manufacture of linepipe shall be certified according to ISO
preferred. For detection of surface imperfections in non-mag- 11484 or equivalent certification scheme.
netic materials, either dye penetrant testing or eddy current
testing shall be preferred. 604 Preparation of NDT procedures and execution of all
NDT shall be carried out under the responsibility of Level 3
404 For detection of internal imperfections either ultrasonic personnel and shall be performed by personnel holding at least
and/or radiographic testing shall be used. It may be necessary Level 2 qualifications. Personnel holding Level 1 qualifica-
to supplement ultrasonic testing by radiographic testing or vice tions may carry out NDT under the direct supervision of Level
versa, in order to enhance the probability of detection or char- 2 personnel.
acterisation/sizing of flaws.
605 Personnel performing visual examination shall have
Radiographic testing is preferred for detection of volumetric documented training and qualifications according to NS477,
imperfections. For material thicknesses above 25 mm radio- EWE Welding Inspector, or equivalent.
graphic testing should be supplemented by ultrasonic testing.
606 Personnel interpreting radiographs, performing ultra-
Ultrasonic testing is preferred for detection of planar imperfec- sonic testing, interpreting results of magnetic particle and liq-
tions. Whenever determination of the imperfection height and uid penetrant testing and performing visual examination shall
depth is necessary, e.g. as a result of an ECA, ultrasonic testing have passed a visual acuity test , such as Jaeger J-2, within the
is required. previous 12 months.
405 Alternative methods or combination of methods for de-
tection of imperfections may be used provided that the meth- A 700 Reporting
ods are demonstrated as capable of detecting imperfections 701 All NDT shall be documented such that the tested areas
with an acceptable equivalence to the preferred methods. may be easily identified and such that the performed testing
can be duplicated. The reports shall identify the defects present
A 500 Non-destructive testing procedures in the weld area and state if the weld satisfies the acceptance
501 Non-destructive testing shall be performed in accord- criteria or not.
ance with written procedures that, as a minimum, give infor-
mation on the following aspects: A 800 Timing of NDT
801 Whenever possible, NDT of welds shall not be per-
— applicable code(s) or standard(s), formed until 24 hours has elapsed since completion of weld-
— welding method (when relevant), ing.
— joint geometry and dimensions,
— material(s), 802 If welding processes ensuring a diffusible hydrogen con-
— method, tent of maximum 5ml/100g of weld metal are used, adequate
— technique, handling of welding consumables is verified, shielding gas
— equipment, main and auxiliary, content of H2 is controlled, or measures (such as post heating
— consumables (including brand name), of the weldments) are taken to reduce the contents of hydro-
— sensitivity, gen, the time in 801 above can be reduced.
— calibration techniques and calibration references, 803 Cellulose electrodes may be used for the root and hot
— testing parameters and variables, pass of C-Mn steel with SMYS less than 415 MPa provided the
— assessment of imperfections, heat input from subsequent welding passes reduces the hydro-
— reporting and documentation of results, gen content sufficiently to prevent hydrogen induced cracking.
— reference to applicable welding procedure(s), and See Appendix C 103.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

804 Provided the requirements of 802 and 803 above are side IQI is at least to meet the requirement shown in Fig. D-1.
complied with, NDT of pipeline installation girth welds and
longitudinal welds in linepipe may be performed as soon as the
welds have cooled sufficiently to allow the NDT to be per-
formed.
B. Manual Non-destructive Testing and Visual

Examination of Welds
B 100 General
101 Manual non-destructive testing of welds shall be per-
formed as required in the following and in general compliance
with these standards:
Radiography ISO 1106-1, ISO 1106-2, ISO 1106-3,
ISO 5579.
Ultrasonic ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section V, Article 5 Figure D-1 Source side IQI sensitivity curve (sensitivity in
%)
DNV Classification Note No. 7- Ultra-
sonic Inspection of Welded joints (Sensitivity requirements for material thickness < 10 mm shall
Magnetic Particle ASTM E 709, ASTM E 1444 be agreed in each case)
Dye Penetrant ASTM E 1417 207 IQIs shall whenever possible be placed on the source
Eddy Current ASTM E 309 side during exposure. If the IQIs must be placed on the film
side during production radiography this shall be indicated by
B 200 Radiographic testing projecting the letter F onto the film. The sensitivity of the film
201 Radiographic testing shall be performed by use of X-ray side IQI from the procedure qualification shall be used as ac-
according to agreed procedures. Use of radiographic isotopes ceptance criterion.
(gamma rays) may be required in some situations and is subject 208 Exposed radiographs shall have an average H & D den-
to agreement in each case. sity at the sound weld metal image of minimum 2.0. The max-
202 Radiographic testing procedures shall contain the infor- imum density allowed shall be according to the capabilities of
mation in A 500 and: the available viewing equipment, but not more than 4.0.
209 Evaluation of radiographs shall be performed under con-
— radiation source; ditions satisfying the requirements of ISO 2504 and ISO 5580.
— technique; Radiographs from the radiographic procedure qualification
— geometric relationships; shall be available as reference at the place where evaluation of
— film type; production radiography is performed.
— intensifying screens;
— exposure conditions; 210 Processing and storage shall be such that the films main-
— processing; tain their quality for a minimum of 5 years without deteriora-
— Image Quality Indicator sensitivities in percent of the wall tion. Thiosulphate tests shall be performed at regular intervals.
thickness, based on source and film side indicators respec- If film storage time in excess of 5 years is required, the radio-
tively; graphs should be digitised using methods giving adequate res-
— backscatter detection method; olution and stored in electronic media in an agreed manner.
— density;
— film side Image Quality Indicator identification method; B 300 Manual ultrasonic testing
— film coverage; and 301 Ultrasonic testing shall be performed according to
— weld identification system. agreed procedures.
203 Film and intensifying screen classification shall be ac- 302 Ultrasonic testing procedures shall contain the informa-
cording to ISO 5579. tion in A 500 and:
For X-ray exposure, fine-grained film in combination with — type of instrument;
lead screens shall be preferred. For gamma ray exposure, ultra — type and dimensions of probes;
fine grained film and lead intensifying screens shall be used. — range of probe frequencies;
204 Image Quality Indicators (IQI) according to document — description of reference block;
ISO 1027 and of required number shall be used. The IQIs shall — calibration details, range and sensitivity;
be clearly identifiable. — surface requirements, including maximum temperature;
— type of coupling medium;
Subject to agreement, other types of IQIs providing the same — scanning techniques supplemented with sketches, show-
accuracy of information regarding sensitivity of radiographs, ing the probes used and area covered; and
may be used. — recording details.
205 Each radiographic procedure and the consumables used
shall be qualified by making radiographic exposures of a weld- 303 No special procedure qualification test should be re-
ed joint with the same or typical configuration and dimensions, quired when manual methods are used. The procedure shall be
and of material equivalent to that which shall be used. subject to agreement.
The IQIs shall for radiographic procedure qualification pur- 304 Manual ultrasonic testing equipment shall:
poses be placed on both the film side and the source side. — be applicable for the pulse echo technique and for the dou-
206 The sensitivities obtained by both IQIs during procedure ble probe technique;
qualification shall be recorded and the sensitivity of the source — cover as a minimum the frequency range from 2 to 6 MHz;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— have a calibrated gain regulator with maximum 2 dB per ometries the reference block shall in addition to the features re-
step over a range of at least 60 dB; quired in 308, have a curvature equal to the pipe to be tested.
— have a flat screen accessible from the front for direct plot- The reference reflectors shall be radially drilled holes as de-
ting of reference curves or be capable of displaying user- tailed in G 800.
defined curves; 310 Calibration of ultrasonic equipment shall to be undertak-
— allow echoes with amplitudes of 5 per cent of full screen en in accordance with those procedures documented in DNV
height to be clearly detectable under test conditions; and Classification Note No. 7. Other methods of calibration ac-
— as a minimum include straight beam probes (0°) and angle cording to a recognised code or standard may be agreed.
beam probes of 45° 60° and 70°. Additional probes for
time-of-flight diffraction (ToFD) and double probe tech- 311 For evaluation of indications a reference curve (DAC
niques are recommended. For testing of longitudinal curve) shall be established using 3 points. The curve shall be
welds in pipe probes with angles of 35° and 55° may be re- plotted on the instrument screen, unless the equipment is
quired. Probes shall, if necessary, be suitable for use on equipped with software capable of constructing user-defined
hot surfaces (100 to 150°C). DAC curves.
312 For ultrasonic testing the contact surface shall be clean
305 Ultrasonic equipment, including probes, shall have cali- and smooth, i.e. free from dirt, scale, rust, welding spatter, etc.
bration pertaining to the characteristics of the equipment. The which may influence the result of the testing. Correction for
characteristics of cables shall be known and documented. differences in surface conditions and attenuation between the
306 Calibration of the ultrasonic equipment shall be carried reference block and the actual work piece shall be performed
out whenever it has been out of function for any reason includ- using the double probe technique. The maximum correction al-
ing on/off, and whenever there is any doubt concerning proper lowed on flat surfaces is 6 dB.
functioning of the equipment. 313 Welds shall whenever possible be tested from both
307 The IIW/ISO calibration block (ISO 2400) shall be used sides. If testing from one side only must be performed, a re-
for calibration of range and for angle determination. fined testing technique shall be employed to ensure detection
of defects. The testing shall include the area adjacent to the
308 For testing of welds reference blocks shall be used for weld for laminations and scanning for transverse indications in
gain calibration and construction of the reference curves. The the weld and base material. The probe movement velocity shall
reference block shall be manufactured from the actual material not exceed 100 mm per second.
to be examined. Reference blocks manufactured from other
materials may be acceptable provided that the material is doc- 314 For flaw detection the corrected primary gain may be in-
umented to have acoustic properties similar to the actual mate- creased by maximum 6 dB. Defect size evaluation shall not be
rial to be examined (e.g. the maximum variation in refracted performed at this increased gain level.
angle should be less than 1.5°). The reference block shall have 315 The indications shall be investigated by maximising the
length and width dimensions suitable for the sound beam path echoes by rotating the probes and by using different angle
for all probe types and the material dimension(s) to be tested. probes with DAC curves established according to 312. All in-
dications exceeding 20% of the reference curve shall be inves-
For testing of welds in plate, girth welds and similar ge-
tigated with and all indications exceeding 50% shall be
ometries a reference block with side drilled holes shall be used.
The thickness of the reference block, diameter and position of reported. Investigation shall be performed to the extent that the
operator can determine the shape and location of the indica-
the drilled holes shall be as shown in Fig. D-2 and Table D-1.
tion. For dimensional evaluation, either the "6 dB-drop" meth-
od or time of flight or maximum amplitude method shall be
used.
B 400 Manual magnetic particle testing
401 Magnetic particle testing shall be performed according
to agreed procedures.
402 Magnetic particle testing procedures shall contain the in-
formation in A 500 and:
— type of magnetisation;
— type of equipment;
— surface preparation;
— wet or dry method;
— make and type of magnetic particles and contrast paint;
— magnetising current (for prod magnetising, the prod type
and spacing shall be stated);
— demagnetisation; and
— description of the testing technique.
Fig. D-2. Reference block dimensions 403 No special procedure qualification tests should be re-
quired. The procedure shall be subject to agreement.
Table D-1 Reference Block Dimensions
Thickness Position of Diameter of
404 The equipment shall establish a field strength between
Material thickness (t) of reference side drilled side drilled 2.4 kA/m (30 Oe) and 4.0 kA/m (50 Oe) for probes. The equip-
mm block (T) hole hole mm ment shall be tested at maximum 6 months interval to verify
mm that the required field strength is established at the maximum
t < 25mm 20 or t 1/4 T & 3.0 leg spread/prod spacing to be used. The results shall be record-
1/2 T & ed.
25 mm ≤ t < 50mm 38 or t 3.0
3/4 T 405 Prods shall be soft tipped with lead or similar. Sparks be-
50 mm ≤ t < 100mm 75 or t 3.0
tween the prods and the material tested shall be avoided.
100 mm ≤ t < 150mm 125 or t 3.0
406 Electromagnetic AC yokes shall develop a minimum
309 For testing of longitudinal welds in pipe and similar ge- lifting force of 5 kg at maximum leg spread. The lifting force
DET NORSKE VERITAS

shall be checked prior to start of any testing and at regular in- — scanning details, and
tervals during testing. — recording details.
407 Use of permanent magnets is not permitted. DC yokes 603 In general no special procedure qualification test is re-
may only be used for specific applications if required by na- quired when manual methods are used. The procedure is con-
tional regulations. sidered qualified based on agreed testing procedure
408 The surface to be tested shall be clean and dry, free from specifications.
dirt i.e. paint, grease, oil, lint, scale, welding flux etc. which
may interfere with the testing. 604 Manual eddy current testing equipment shall have:
409 Testing using fluorescent wet magnetic particles should — single or dual frequency,
be the preferred method. — frequency range to include 1000Hz to 1MHz,
410 If non-fluorescent wet or dry particles are used they shall — gain/noise, a 1mm deep artificial defect shall be indicated
provide adequate contrast with the background or the surface as a full screen deflection through a coating thickness cor-
being tested. responding to the maximum expected on the structure to
be tested. Further, a 0.5 mm deep artificial defect shall be
411 To ensure detection of discontinuities having axes in any indicated through the same coating thickness with a mini-
direction, the testing of each area shall be performed with the mum noise/signal ratio of 1 to 3;
direction of the magnetic field in at least two directions ap- — the evaluation mode shall be a complex plane display,
proximately perpendicular to each other, and with sufficient — as a minimum, the signal display shall be in the x-y mode
overlap to cover the area to be tested. with storage facility. The trace shall be clearly visible as
412 Testing with fluorescent magnetic particles shall be con- well under daylight as under dark conditions, and
ducted in a darkened area with maximum 20 lux background — the phase control shall be able to give complete rotation in
light, using filtered ultraviolet light with wave lengths in the steps of no more than 10º each.
range of 3200 to 3800 Å. Operators/interpreters shall allow
sufficient time for eyesight to adjust to the dark surroundings. 605 Eddy current probes for measuring thickness of coating
Interpreters shall not wear photo-chromatic viewing aids. shall be capable of providing a full screen deflection lift-off
signal on the instrument when moved from an uncoated spot
413 Magnetic particle testing shall not be performed on parts on the reference block to a stop covered with the maximum
with surface temperatures exceeding 300°C. Between 60°C coating thickness expected on the structure to be tested. The
and 300°C, only dry magnetic particle testing shall be used. probe shall be clearly marked with its operating frequency
B 500 Manual liquid penetrant testing range.
501 Liquid penetrant testing shall be performed according to 606 Eddy current probes for weld examination shall be opti-
agreed procedures and shall only be used on non-ferromagnet- mised for examination of welds of the actual type to be tested.
ic materials or materials with great variation in magnetic per- Such probes shall be able to operate when covered by a thin
meability, unless otherwise agreed. layer of non-metallic wear-resistant material over the active
face. If used with such a cover, it shall always be mounted dur-
502 Liquid penetrant testing procedures shall contain the in- ing calibration as well.
formation in A 500 and:
607 A standard reference block of the same material as the
— surface preparation; test component shall be used. It shall have narrow slots of 0.5,
— make and type of penetrant, remover, emulsifier and de- 1.0 and 2.0 mm depth. Tolerance of the slot depth shall be +0,
veloper; -0.1 mm. Recommended width of slots shall be 0.1mm but ac-
— details of pre-testing cleaning and drying, including mate- ceptable up to 20% of the maximum depth (= 0.4 mm). All
rials used and time allowed for drying; slots shall have the same width in the same block.
— details of penetrant application: the time the penetrant re- The standard reference block shall have length, width and
mains on the surface, the temperature of the surface and thickness dimensions and slot positions, distances and lengths
penetrant during the testing (if not within the 15°C to 35°C depending on probes to be used such that calibrations can be
range); made without interference between slots or with edges.
— details of developer application, and developing time be-
fore evaluation; and 608 Eddy current equipment, including probes and cables,
— method for post-test cleaning. shall have calibration certification pertaining to the character-
istics of the equipment.
503 When the temperature of the surface and the penetrant is 609 Calibration of the eddy current equipment shall be car-
within the range 15°C to 35°C, no special procedure qualifica- ried out whenever it has been out of function for any reason in-
tion tests should be required. The procedure shall be subject to cluding on/off, and whenever there is any doubt concerning
agreement. proper functioning of the equipment.
Outside the temperature range 15°C to 35°C, the procedure
shall be qualified and a suitable comparator block shall be used 610 Surface conditions - excess weld spatter, scale, rust and
to compare indications from surface defects tested within and loose paint can influence sensitivity by separating the probe
outside the range during the procedure qualification. from the test object and shall be removed before the inspection.
611 The weld surface and the heat-affected zones shall be
B 600 Manual eddy current testing scanned with the chosen probe(s) in a raster like scan. As far as
601 Eddy current testing shall be performed according to EN the geometry of the test object permits it, the probe shall be
12084 and EN 1711 and accepted procedures. moved in a direction perpendicular to the main direction of the
expected defect. As least two probe runs shall be carried out
602 Eddy current testing procedures shall contain the infor- perpendicular to each other. For differential coil types, the sen-
mation in A 500 and: sitivity for defect detection is also dependent on the coil orien-
— type of instrument, tation. Therefore care shall be taken that this is also controlled
— type of probe, during examination.
— frequency setting, 612 All indications exceeding 50% signal amplitude from a
— calibration details, 2.0mm deep slot in the reference block and all crack like indi-
— surface condition requirements, cations shall be reported with information about the location of
DET NORSKE VERITAS

the defect, approximate length of the defect and maximum sig- 305 Manual magnetic particle testing of forgings shall be
nal amplitudes unless otherwise agreed with Purchaser. done in accordance with ASTM E 709, ASTM E1444 or equiv-
alent standard
B 700 Visual examination
306 Manual liquid penetrant testing of forgings shall be done
701 Visual examination shall be carried out in a sufficiently in accordance with ASTM E 1417 or equivalent standard.
illuminated area, (approximately 500 lx). A sufficient amount
of tools, gauges, measuring equipment and other devices shall C 400 Castings
be available at the place of examination. 401 Manual ultrasonic testing of castings shall be done ac-
cording to ASTM A 609 using the flat bottom hole calibration
procedure with 3 mm Ø flat bottom holes and the supplemen-
C. Manual Non-destructive testing of Base tary requirement S1 with basic reference hole of 3 mm Ø.
Equivalent standard may be used.
Materials and Weld Overlay
Straight beam examination
C 100 General The flat bottom holes shall be 3 mm Ø flat bottom holes at 3
101 All non-destructive testing of base materials shall be depths through the thickness. One hole shall have a metal
done according to agreed procedures as required in A 500, B depth of 10mm, one hole shall be at mid thickness and one hole
200, B 300, B 400, B 500 and B 600. shall have a metal depth of the thickness – 10 mm.
102 Manual non-destructive testing of base material, welds 402 Radiographic testing of castings shall be done accord-
and weld overlay shall be done on general compliance with the ing to ASME, section 5, article 2 or equivalent standard.
requirements given in subsection B and the referenced stand- 403 Radiographic procedures shall in addition to the require-
ards. ments of B.202 give the following information:
103 Acceptance criteria for manual non-destructive testing
of base material and weld overlay are given in subsection I. — shooting sketches,
— coverage,
C 200 Plate and pipe — source location,
201 These requirements are not applicable for plate and strip — location of IQI, and
covered by subsection F or linepipe covered by subsection G. — acceptance criteria
202 Manual ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be 404 Manual magnetic particle testing of castings shall be
done on accordance with ASTM E797 or equivalent standard. done in accordance with ASTM E 709, ASTM E1444 or equiv-
203 Manual ultrasonic testing for detection of laminar flaws alent standard.
in C-Mn, ferritic-austenitic (duplex), other stainless steels and 405 Manual liquid penetrant testing of castings shall be done
nickel based corrosion resistant alloys (CRA) shall be done in in accordance with ASTM E 1417 or equivalent standard.
accordance with ISO 12094 or equivalent standard.
204 Manual ultrasonic testing for detection of laminar flaws C 500 Weld overlay
in clad/lined steel shall be done in accordance with ASTM 501 NDT and visual examination on magnetic weld overlay
A578/578M or equivalent standard. deposits shall be performed as 100% visual examination and
205 Manual ultrasonic testing for detection of flaws other 100% magnetic particle testing
than laminar, shall be done on accordance with ASTM A577/ 502 NDT and visual examination on non-magnetic weld
577M or equivalent standard using a rectangular notch. overlay deposits shall be performed as 100% visual examina-
206 Manual magnetic particle testing of plate, strip and pipe tion and as 100% liquid penetrant or eddy current testing on
edges shall be done in accordance with ASTM E 709, ASTM non-magnetic weld deposits.
E1444 or equivalent standard.
207 Manual liquid penetrant testing of plate, strip and pipe
edges shall be done in accordance with ASTM E 1417 or D. Automated Non-Destructive Testing
equivalent standard.
208 Manual eddy current testing of plate, strip and pipe edg- D 100 General
es shall be done in accordance with ASTM E309 or equivalent 101 These requirements are applicable to all automated NDT
standard. processes except automated ultrasonic testing of girth welds
where specific requirements are given in Appendix E. The re-
C 300 Forgings quirements given in this subsection are additional to the re-
301 Manual ultrasonic testing of forgings shall be done ac- quirements of any code or standard where automated NDT
cording to ASTM A 388/ASTM A 388/M or equivalent stand- methods are prescribed or optional.
ard. For angle beam testing of duplex or austenitic steel 102 The performance automated NDT equipment shall be
forgings longitudinal wave angle beam probes should be used. documented by statistical records. Items subject to documenta-
Straight beam examination tion include:
302 The flat bottom holes shall be 3 mm Ø flat bottom holes — brief functional description of the equipment;
at 3 depths through the thickness. One hole shall have a metal — detailed equipment description;
depth of 5 mm, one hole shall be at mid thickness and one hole — operation manual including type and frequency of func-
shall have a metal depth equal to the thickness – 5mm. A DAC tional checks;
curve shall be established using the different holes. — calibration;
Angle beam examination — limitations of the equipment with regard to material or
303 The DAC curve shall be established using rectangular weld features including size, geometry, type of flaws, sur-
OD and ID notches with a depth of 3% of the thickness. face finish, material composition etc.; and
— repeatability.
304 Reference blocks shall be material from the actual forg-
ings and in the same heat treatment condition. 103 Equipment shall have documentation of calibration per-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

formed within the previous 6 months. 207 For calibration of the equipment, one or more special
reference blocks shall be prepared and used. These blocks shall
D 200 Automated ultrasonic testing be identical to the pipe or part of pipe to be tested with regard
201 Specific requirements for automated ultrasonic testing to material, acoustic properties, surface finish, diameter and
(AUT) of girth welds are given in Appendix E. thickness. For welded pipe the reference block shall contain a
typical production weld.
202 The requirements herein are additional to D 100 above
and are applicable to all automated ultrasonic testing other than 208 The reference block shall contain artificial reflectors
automated ultrasonic testing of girth welds. representing potential defects, and to verify positioning accu-
racy.
203 Requirements to the calibration of equipment, reference
blocks and equipment set-ups are given in subsections F and G 209 Other types of reflectors may be necessary for determin-
for each specific application. ing the detection capabilities of the equipment and for specific
applications.
The configuration of automated ultrasonic testing equipment
shall be described and documented with regard to: 210 The reference block shall be of a size allowing dynamic
checks with the same velocity and under the same conditions
— reference to code, standard or guideline used for design as during production testing.
and operation of the equipment, 211 The dimensional accuracy of the reference block shall
— number and type of probes with description, be documented.
— function of scanning device,
— ultrasonic instrument, number of channels and data acqui- 212 Reference blocks and calibration of the equipment shall
sition, be as required in subsections F and G.
— recording and processing of data, 213 Procedures for automated ultrasonic testing shall as a
— reference blocks, minimum contain the following information:
— couplant,
— couplant monitoring method, — functional description of equipment;
— temperature range for testing and limitations, — reference standards and guidelines;
— coverage achieved, — instructions for scanning device, ultrasonic electronics,
— maximum scanning velocity and direction, hardware and software for recording, processing, display
— documentation of method for calibration and sensitivity or presentation and storage of indications;
settings, and — equipment configuration: number of probes, types, cover-
— reporting of recordable indications. age;
— description of the probe operating mode(s), probe angles
204 The equipment shall incorporate continuously operating and probe firing sequence;
systems for: — sketches showing the area covered by each probe indicated
by the beam centre and lines showing - 2dB, - 3dB and - 6
— weld seam centring (if applicable), dB;
— alarm for loss of return signal (loss of coupling),
— equipment settings;
— alarm for serious malfunctions of the equipment,
— alarm or recording for indications exceeding the trigger or — static calibration method, gate and sensitivity settings;
alarm level, and — dynamic check acceptance criteria;
— marking or indication of areas where indications exceed — identification of test starting point and indication of length
the trigger or alarm level. tested;
— method for scanner alignment and maintenance of align-
205 The type and number of ultrasonic probes shall be suffi- ment;
cient to ensure that the base material, or the weld and the area — allowed temperature range;
adjacent to the weld, is: — coupling and coupling control;
— probe and overall functional checks;
— scanned from both sides of the weld for flaws oriented par- — surface condition and preparation;
allel to the longitudinal weld axis — description of testing work;
— scanned from both directions approximately parallel to — interpretation of results;
longitudinal weld axis for flaws oriented transverse to the — acceptance criteria;
longitudinal weld axis — reporting; and
— fully covered by ultrasound beams that are approximately — example of recorder charts.
perpendicular to the surface of flaws that are reflecting the
ultrasound.
It may be necessary to include tandem, TOFD and/or focused E. Non-Destructive Testing Acceptance Criteria
probes in order to enhance the probability of detection or char-
acterisation of flaws. E 100 General
206 For equipment using multiplexing, the scanning velocity 101 Acceptance criteria for NDT applicable to pipeline sys-
shall be selectable. The scanning velocity shall be set low tems or parts thereof are given in:
enough so that the length between the activation of each probe
(spatial resolution) is sufficiently short, i.e. the distance the — subsection F for plate and strip,
probe travels while inactive, shall be significantly less than the — subsection G for linepipe,
maximum length of allowable imperfections. The scanning ve- — subsection H for Pipeline girth welds were the accumulat-
locity VC shall be determined according to: ed strain resulting from the installation and operation will
not exceed 0.3%, when all strain concentration factors
(SNCF) are included, and
V C ≤ W C • PRF ⁄ 3 — subsection I for base materials, pipeline components,
equipment and structural items (including castings and
Where WC is the narrowest - 6dB beam width at the appropri- forgings),
ate distance of all probes within the array and PRF is the effec-
tive pulse repetition frequency per probe. 102 Acceptance criteria for pipeline girth welds where the
DET NORSKE VERITAS

accumulated strain resulting from installation and operation is F. Non-Destructive Testing of Plate and Strip at
above 0.3% but will not exceed 2.0%, shall be established by Mill
an ECA (see E 200).
The ECA shall determine the fracture toughness values re- F 100 General
quired to tolerate the defects permitted in subsection H. 101 The type and extent of non-destructive testing during
Alternatively can "fitness for purpose" type acceptance criteria manufacture of plate and strip shall be:
be established based on fracture toughness values actually
achieved. — 100% ultrasonic testing of plate and strip for laminar im-
perfections,
103 Acceptance criteria for pipeline girth welds where the
— 100% ultrasonic testing of clad plate for laminar imperfec-
accumulated strain resulting from installation and operation is
above 2.0%, shall be established based on an ECA (see E 200), tions and lack of bonding.
and validated by testing according to the requirements of Sec-
tion 9E. 102 The ultrasonic testing shall include testing of the four
edges of plate/strip over a width extending at least 50mm in-
104 For some welding methods an unambiguous correlation side the location of future welding preparations. A suitable al-
can be established between variation in welding parameters lowance in the area width shall be made to cover possible
and occurrence of defects. oversized plates and later edge milling and end bevelling.
For such methods the acceptance criteria given in this Appen- 103 If NDT of the body of line pipe is performed at the pipe
dix may, subject to special consideration and agreement, in mill, ultrasonic testing of plate and strip for laminar imperfec-
part be substituted by welding parameter records showing a tions may, subject to agreement, be omitted at the plate and
variation within acceptable limits. Such substitution shall be strip mill.
based on a comprehensive documentation of the correlation.
104 The acceptance criteria given in this subsection are gen-
Verification of the validity of the correlation by conventional, erally valid unless other acceptance criteria are specified in ac-
relevant NDT methods shall be performed during the entire pe- cordance with relevant clauses of subsection E.
riod the method is in use. The extent and type of NDT used for
the verification and the associated acceptance criteria, shall be 105 Equipment and procedures used for the ultrasonic test-
agreed in each case. ing shall comply with the requirements of subsection D. The
requirements for automated NDT processes given in subsec-
105 The method(s) of NDT and acceptance criteria for mate- tion D are additional to the requirements of any code or stand-
rials other than steel shall be agreed in each case. ard referred to in this subsection where automated NDT
E 200 Acceptance criteria based on Engineering Criti- methods are prescribed or optional.
cal Assessment (ECA)
F 200 Ultrasonic testing of C-Mn and duplex steel plate
201 Whenever acceptance criteria for NDT are established and strip
by an ECA, the ECA shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements given in 202 through 206. 201 Ultrasonic testing of the plate or strip body for laminar
imperfections shall be in accordance with ISO 12094 amended
202 The ECA shall be performed as required in Section 5D as follows:
1100.
— the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure
203 If acceptance criteria for weld defects are based on an 100% coverage of the plate body and all four edges and be
ECA, ultrasonic testing or automated ultrasonic testing shall be
performed. sufficiently small to ensure detection of the minimum al-
lowed imperfection size, and
204 The ultrasonic testing uncertainty data used in the ECA — for plate nominal thicknesses ≥ 40 mm the recess depth in
shall be appropriate for the applied ultrasonic testing equip- the reference standard/test piece shall be increased in order
ment and procedures used for the detection and assessment of to place the bottom of the recess between ¼ and ½of the
flaws of concern in the material and weld geometries in ques- nominal plate thickness.
tion.
205 If automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) is used for testing 202 Acceptance criteria for ultrasonic testing of C-Mn and
of or pipeline girth welds, the data used in the ECA shall be de- duplex steel plate and strip are given in Table D-2.
rived from the qualification testing of the automated ultrasonic 203 Subject to agreement the acceptance criteria for the body
testing system required in Appendix E. of plate and strip can limited to an allowed permitted area
The uncertainty data from this qualification testing shall be sta- of100 mm2 and a population density of 5 with the minimum
tistically treated to establish the flaw sizing error that gives a imperfection size area 30 mm2, length and width 5mm. All
95% confidence level against undersizing of flaws. other requirements in Table D-2 shall apply.
The maximum allowable flaw sizes from the ECA shall be re- Table D-2 Ultrasonic testing of C-Mn and duplex steel plate
duced in length and height with a flaw sizing error, that based and strip, acceptance criteria
on the data from the qualification testing will give a 95% con- Acceptance criteria plate and strip body
fidence against under sizing of flaws.
Service Maximumal- Minimum size Maximumpop-
206 For manual ultrasonic testing the data used in the ECA lowedimperfec- ofimperfection ulationdinsity
for quantitative estimates of ultrasonic testing uncertainty, per- tion tobe consid-
formance and reliability are preferably be of the "measured re- ered
sponse versus actual flaw size" type. The estimates shall be Non- Area: Area: 300 mm2 10
based on published results from comprehensive studies into sour 1000 mm2 Length: 35 mm within the
the reliability of manual ultrasonic testing. Width: 8 mm reference area
Sour Area: 500 mm2 Area: 150 mm2 5
207 The approach outlined above may also be used to justify Length: 15 mm within the
exceeding the acceptance criteria referred to in 101. Width: 8 reference area
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table D-2 Ultrasonic testing of C-Mn and duplex steel plate 105 All NDT for final acceptance of pipe shall be performed
and strip, acceptance criteria (Continued) after completion of cold straightening, forming, and expan-
Acceptance criteria for plate and strip edges sion. NDT for "in-house" purposes may be performed at any
time at the Manufacturer's discretion.
Service Maximumal- Minimum size Maximumpop-
lowedimperfec- ofimperfection ulationdinsity 106 If NDT of plate and strip in accordance with subsection
tion tobe consid- F is performed at the plate or strip mill, ultrasonic testing for
ered laminar imperfections in the body of the pipe may be omitted.
All Area: 100 mm2 Length: 10 mm 3
Width: 6 mm within the G 200 Untested pipe ends
reference area
201 When automated non-destructive testing equipment is
Notes:
used, a short area at both pipe ends cannot normally be tested.
1) Two or more adjacent imperfections shall be considered as one imper- The untested ends may either be cut off or the ends subjected
fection if they are separated by less than the largest dimension of the to manual or semi-automatic NDT by the same or alternative
smallest indication. method with an appropriate technique and using test parame-
2) The population density shall be the number of imperfections smaller ters that will achieve at least the same sensitivity.
than the maximum and greater than the minimum imperfection size
3) The reference area shall be: G 300 Suspect pipe
1000mm x 1000mm for non-sour service 301 In all cases when a pipe inspection results in automated
500mm x 500mm for sour service non-destructive testing equipment signals equal to or greater
The reference area for plate/strip when the plate/strip width is less than than the trigger or alarm level, the pipe shall be deemed sus-
one side of the square reference area, shall be 1.00m2 for non-sour and pect.
0.25m2 for sour service
1000mm length for the edge areas
Suspect pipe can be dealt with according to one of the follow-
ing options:
4) The width of an imperfection is the dimension transverse to the edge of
the plate/strip
— the pipe can be scrapped,
F 300 Ultrasonic testing of clad plate and strip — the suspect area can be cropped off.
301 For ultrasonic testing of the base material the require- If the suspect area is cropped, then all NDT requirements per-
ments of F 100 and F 200 shall apply. taining to pipe ends shall be performed on the new pipe end.
302 Ultrasonic testing for the detection of lack of bond be- 302 Alternatively, the suspect area of the pipe may be re-
tween the base material and cladding material in the body of tested by a different and appropriate test method supplemented
plate and strip, shall be performed in accordance with ASTM by the original method, with a different technique using test
A578, S7. parameters which give the same sensitivity as used during the
original test, and using the same acceptance level.
303 Acceptance criteria are:
Pipes passing these tests are deemed acceptable.
— ASTM A578, S7. In addition, no areas with laminations or 303 Pipes may be repaired provided the provisions of Sec-
lack of bond are allowed in the plate edge areas. tion 6 E 1000 are fulfilled.
F 400 Visual examination of plate and strip 304 Re-inspection of repair welds shall be 100% visual ex-
amination and 100% manual radiographic and ultrasonic test-
401 Visual examination and acceptance criteria shall be ac- ing.
cording to Section 6 E 504.
Testing shall be performed in accordance with G 800.
Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with G 800.
G. Non-Destructive Testing of Linepipe at Pipe G 400 Non-destructive testing applicable to all pipe
Mills 401 Ultrasonic testing of the ultimate 50 mm from each pipe
end for detection of laminar imperfections in C-Mn and duplex
G 100 General steel shall be in accordance with ISO 11496. The 50mm band
101 The extent of non-destructive testing during manufac- shall be measured from the future weld preparation and an al-
ture of linepipe shall be as required in Section 6,Table 6-13. lowance shall be made for later end bevelling. Manual ultra-
sonic testing, semi-automated or automated equipment may be
102 The types of testing required in Section 6, Table 6-13 are used. For welded pipe the reinforcement of the longitudinal
defined as: weld shall be removed so that it does not interfere with the test-
ing.
— Ultrasonic testing The acceptance criterion is:
— Surface imperfection testing
— Radiographic testing — According to requirements to plate and strip edges in Ta-
ble D-2 for non-sour or sour service.
Whenever the choice of methods for non-destructive testing is
optional, this is indicated in this subsection. 402 Ultrasonic testing of the ultimate 50 mm from each pipe
end for detection of laminar imperfections in of clad/lined pipe
103 The requirements for automated NDT processes given in shall be in accordance with ASTM A578/578M, S7. The
subsection D are additional to the requirements of any code or 50mm shall be measured from the future weld preparation and
standard referred to in this subsection where automated NDT an allowance shall be made for later end bevelling.
methods are prescribed or optional.
The acceptance criterion is:
104 The acceptance criteria given in this subsection are valid
unless other acceptance criteria are specified in accordance — no areas with laminations or lack of bond are allowed in
with relevant clauses of subsection E. the plate edge areas.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Guidance note: 504 Full peripheral ultrasonic thickness testing shall be per-
The ultimate length from each pipe end may, subject to agree- formed in accordance with ISO 10543. The minimum area
ment be increased to 100mm to allow field re-bevelling of pipe. coverage shall be not less than 25% of the pipe surface.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- The acceptance criterion is:
403 Magnetic particle testing or eddy current testing of the — The specified minimum and maximum thickness shall be
end face or bevel of each pipe in ferromagnetic steel for the de- met.
tection of laminar imperfections shall be performed in accord-
ance with: Ultrasonic testing for longitudinal imperfections in pipe body
505 Ultrasonic testing for the detection of longitudinal im-
— ISO 13664 and B 400 for magnetic particle testing perfections in the pipe body shall be performed in accordance
— B 600 for eddy current testing with ISO 9303.
The acceptance criterion is: The acceptance criterion is:
— imperfections longer than 6 mm in the circumferential di- — Acceptance level L2/C.
rection are not permitted.
Ultrasonic testing for transverse imperfections in pipe body
404 Liquid penetrant or eddy current testing of the end face 506 Ultrasonic testing for the detection of transverse imper-
or bevel of each pipe in non-ferromagnetic steel for the detec- fections in pipe body shall be performed in accordance with
tion of laminar imperfections shall be performed in accordance ISO 9305
with
The acceptance criterion is:
— ISO 12095 and B500 for liquid penetrant testing
— B 600 for eddy current testing — Acceptance level L2/C.
The acceptance criterion is: Surface testing for longitudinal and transverse indications in
pipe body
— imperfections longer than 6 mm in the circumferential di- 507 Testing of ferromagnetic seamless pipe for the detection
rection are not permitted. of longitudinal and transverse surface imperfections shall be
405 Residual magnetism at pipe ends in the direction parallel performed in accordance with one of the following standards:
to the pipe axis shall be measured with a calibrated Hall effect — ISO 9304 (eddy current testing)
gauss meter or equivalent equipment. The residual magnetism — ISO 9402 (flux leakage testing)
is not to exceed 3mT (30 Gauss). Some welding methods may — ISO 9598 (flux leakage testing)
require a more stringent acceptance criterion. — ISO 13665 (magnetic particle testing)
G 500 Non-destructive testing of seamless pipe Guidance note:
501 The extent of NDT shall be according to Section 6, Ta- If detection of defects on the internal surface of the pipe is
ble 6-13. deemed important, ISO 9402 or ISO 9598 should be preferred.
502 For pipes in duplex steel, it shall be demonstrated that ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
the presence of any possible coarse, anisotropic zones will not
impede the testing. The acceptance criteria are:
Ultrasonic testing for laminar imperfections in pipe body — ISO 9304 : Acceptance level L2
503 Ultrasonic testing for the detection of laminar imperfec- — ISO 9402: Acceptance level L2
tions in pipe body shall be performed in accordance with ISO — ISO 9598: Acceptance level L2
10124 amended as follows: — ISO 13665: Acceptance level M1
— the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure 508 Testing of non-ferromagnetic seamless pipe for the de-
100% coverage of the pipe body and be sufficiently small tection of longitudinal and transverse surface imperfections
to ensure detection of the minimum allowed imperfection shall be performed in accordance with one of the following
size; standards:
— a sample pipe shall be fitted with one 3.0 mm Ø through
drilled hole at each end. The distance from the pipe end to — ISO 9304 (eddy current testing)
the hole shall be equal to the length not covered by the ul- — ISO 12095 (dye penetrant testing)
trasonic testing equipment during production testing. Prior The acceptance criteria are:
to start of production the pipe shall be passed through the
ultrasonic testing equipment at the operational scanning — ISO 9304 : Acceptance level L2
velocity. For acceptance of the equipment both holes need — ISO 12095: Acceptance level P1
to be detected by all probes. At the manufactures option
these holes may be included in the reference block. G 600 Non-destructive testing of HFW, LBW and EBW
pipe
The acceptance criteria are:
601 The extent of NDT shall be according to Section 6, Ta-
— According to requirements to plate and strip body in Table ble 6-13.
D-2 for non-sour or sour service. 602 For pipes in duplex steel, it shall be demonstrated that
the presence of any possible coarse, anisotropic zones will not
Guidance note:
impede the ultrasonic testing.
Acceptance criteria for laminations in the pipe body according to
F.203 may apply, subject to agreement Ultrasonic testing for longitudinal imperfections in the weld
seam
603 Ultrasonic testing of the full length of the weld seam of
Ultrasonic thickness testing HFW, LBW and EBW pipe for the detection of longitudinal
DET NORSKE VERITAS

imperfections shall be in accordance with ISO 9303 and the — indications exceeding the alarm level set for N5 notches
following amendments: and 1.6 mm Ø holes are not acceptable; and
Equipment — for TOFD probes, indications exceeding the length or the
depth of the reference slits are not acceptable.
— Dedicated probes, either tandem or sender/receiver for de-
tection of imperfections located on the fusion face shall be 607 Alternative arrangements of the equipment may be
used. Additionally, TOFD probes may be used, subject to agreed provided it is demonstrated that equal coverage and
agreement. sensitivity in detection of imperfections is obtained.
— The equipment shall include devices for weld tracking/ Ultrasonic testing of the pipe body for detection of laminar im-
centring and provide checking of adequate coupling for all perfections
probes. 608 Ultrasonic testing of the pipe body for detection of lam-
Reference block inar imperfections need not be performed at the pipemill if test-
ing according to subsection F is performed at the plate/strip
The reference block shall contain mill.
— side drilled 1.6 mm Ø holes drilled parallel to the weld lon- 609 The testing if performed at the pipemill shall be in ac-
gitudinal axis at the weld centre. The holes shall be located cordance with ISO 12094 amended as follows:
at mid thickness and 2 mm below each surface for detec- — the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure
tion of imperfections located on the fusion face, (for use 100% coverage of the plate body and all four edges and be
with tandem or sender/ receiver probes); and sufficiently small to ensure detection of the minimum al-
— N5 notches on the inside and outside surfaces immediately lowed imperfection size, and
adjacent to the weld and on both sides of the weld. The — for plate nominal thicknesses ≥40mm the recess depth in
length of the notches shall be 1.5 x the probe element size the reference standard/test piece shall be increased in order
or 20 mm, whichever is the shorter. to place the bottom of the recess between ¼and ½ of the
For use with TOFD probes, the reference block shall contain nominal plate thickness.
two equal radially spark eroded slits at the weld centreline with The acceptance criteria are:
the width maximum 1.0 mm and located on the inside and out-
side surfaces. The length and depth of the slits shall be chosen — According to requirements to plate and strip body in Table
such that the acceptance criterion when using TOFD probes D-2 for non-sour or sour service.
will be the same as when using N5 notches and 1.6 mm Ø side
drilled holes. Guidance note:
A sample pipe shall be fitted with one 3.0 mm Ø through Acceptance criteria for laminations in the pipe body according to
drilled hole at the weld centreline at each end. The distance F203 may apply, subject to agreement.
from the pipe end to the hole shall be equal to the length not ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
covered by the ultrasonic testing equipment during production
testing. Prior to start of production, the pipe shall be passed Ultrasonic testing of the area adjacent to the weld seam body
through the ultrasonic testing equipment at the operational for detection of laminar imperfections
scanning velocity. For acceptance of the equipment, both holes 610 Ultrasonic testing of the area adjacent to the weld seam
need to be detected by all probes. At the Manufacturer's option, body for detection of laminar imperfections need not be per-
these holes may be included in the reference block. formed at the pipemill if testing according to subsection F has
Guidance note: been performed at the plate/strip mill.
Provided equal coverage and sensitivity is obtained other equip- 611 The testing if performed at the pipemill shall be in ac-
ment configurations, reference reflectors and calibration meth- cordance with ISO 112094 amended as follows:
ods may be used, subject to agreement.
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- — The width of the tested band shall be 50 mm;
— the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure
604 The equipment shall be calibrated as follows: 100% coverage of the area adjacent to the weld and shall
be sufficiently small to ensure detection of the minimum
— The response from the N5 shall be maximised according to allowed imperfection size; and
ISO 9303. — for plate nominal thicknesses ≥ 40 mm, the recess depth in
— The response from the mid thickness 1.6 mm Ø side the reference standard/test piece shall be increased in order
drilled hole with the dedicated tandem or sender or receiv- to place the bottom of the recess between 1/4 and 1/2 of the
er probes shall be maximised while keeping the response nominal pipe wall thickness.
from the near surface 1.6 mm Ø side drilled holes as equal
as possible. The acceptance criterion is:
The TOFD probes shall not undersize the length or depth of the — According to requirements to plate and strip edges in Ta-
either one of the slits in the reference block. ble D-2 for non-sour or sour service.
After calibration, all settings, gate positions and offsets from Testing of ferromagnetic pipe for the detection of surface im-
the weld centreline to the probe index point shall be reported perfections in the weld area
for each probe.
612 Testing of ferromagnetic HFW, LBW and EBW pipe for
605 The alarm/recording levels shall for the N5 notches and the detection of surface imperfections in the weld area shall be
the 1.6mm holes shall be set separately for each type of refer- performed in accordance with one of the following standards:
ence reflector used. The level shall be the lesser of the respons-
es obtained from either reflector type. — ISO 9304 (eddy current)
For TOFD probes, all indications exceeding the length or the — ISO 13665 (magnetic particle
depth of the reference slits shall be reported in a written format Eddy current testing performed in accordance with ISO 9304
or by a corresponding alarm level setting. shall use the segment coil technique, reference hole diameter
606 The acceptance criteria are: of maximum 3.20 mm and the lowest possible excitation fre-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

quency. 708 The equipment shall include devices for weld tracking
The acceptance criteria are: and provide checks of adequate coupling for each individual
probe.
— ISO 9304 :Acceptance level L2 709 The total automated ultrasonic system shall have a doc-
— ISO 13665:Acceptance level M1 umentation of calibration not older than 6 months at the start
of production.
Testing of non-ferromagnetic pipe for the detection of imper-
fections in the weld area 710 The reference block shall contain:
613 Testing of non-ferromagnetic HFW, LBW and EBW A 1.6 mm Ø through drilled holes at the weld centreline.
pipe for the detection of surface imperfections in the weld area B 1.6 mm Ø through drilled holes in the base material at
shall be performed in accordance with one of the following both sides at the weld toe edge, or drilled to half thick-
standards: ness from the outside and inside.
— ISO 9304 (eddy current) C N5 notches in the base material and parallel to the weld
— ISO 12095 (dye penetrant testing) at both sides of the weld toe edge externally.
D N5 notches in the base material and parallel to the weld
Eddy current testing performed in accordance with ISO 9304 at both sides of the weld toe edge internally.
shall use the segment coil technique, reference hole diameter E N5 notches in the weld, centred on and transverse to
of maximum 3.20 mm and the lowest possible excitation fre- the weld externally.
quency. F N5 notches in the weld, centred on and transverse to
The acceptance criteria are: the weld internally.
G 3.0 mm Ø through drilled holes in the pipe material 10
— ISO 9304 :Acceptance level L2 mm outside the weld toe edge.
— ISO 12095:Acceptance level P1
The length of the N5 notches shall be 1.5 times the probe (crys-
Radiographic testing tal) element size or 20 mm, whichever is the shorter. The
length does not include any rounded corners. The width of the
614 Radiographic testing of the extreme 300 mm of weld at N5 notches shall not exceed 1 mm.
each pipe end shall be performed in accordance with the re-
quirements of B 200. The number of notches and holes may be increased above the
numbers given above at the Manufacturer's option.
Pipe wall thickness in excess of approximately 20 mm may re-
— Table D-4 and lack of fusion and lack of penetration are quire that specific probes are used to detect longitudinal imper-
not permitted. fections in the mid thickness area of the weld. In such cases the
reference block shall contain a reflector to indicate the target
G 700 Non-destructive testing of SAW pipe position for these probes in order to verify correct positioning
701 The extent of NDT shall be according to Section 6, Ta- of the probes. The reflector may by used for setting of the
ble 6-13. alarm/recording level if it provides a return signal equal to a
702 For pipes in duplex steel, it shall be demonstrated that N5 notch. The Manufacturer shall propose a type of reflector
the presence of any possible coarse, anisotropic zones will not suitable for the purpose, and the type of reflector used is sub-
impede the ultrasonic testing. ject to agreement.
Ultrasonic testing for longitudinal and transverse imperfec- 711 A sample pipe shall be fitted with one 3.0 mm Ø through
tions in the weld seam drilled hole at the weld centreline at each end. The distance
from the pipe end to the hole shall be equal to the length not
703 Ultrasonic testing of the weld seam of SAW pipe for the covered by the ultrasonic testing equipment during production
detection of longitudinal and transverse imperfections shall be testing. Prior to start of production the pipe shall be passed
in accordance with ISO 9765, and the requirements given in through the ultrasonic testing equipment at the operational
the following. scanning velocity. For acceptance of the equipment, both holes
704 The equipment arrangement shall be suitable for detec- need to be detected by all probes. At the Manufacturer's option,
tion of defects oriented predominantly parallel to and/or at these holes may be included in the reference block.
right angles to the weld seam. In both cases testing shall be car- 712 The initial calibration shall be performed in the static
ried out in two opposing directions of beam travel. mode.
705 A description of the equipment shall be provided for re- A separate calibration shall be performed for each probe
view and agreement. The description shall include all docu- against the reference reflectors located in the area of the weld
mentation required by D 100 and D 200. that shall be covered by that probe.
706 The description of the equipment shall include: For detection of transverse imperfections, readily distinguish-
able signals shall be obtained from the (A) 1.6 mm Ø hole. The
— the number and position of probes dedicated for detection response from the opposite side (B) 1.6 mm Ø hole and the (E)
of longitudinal defects and their operational mode (pulse- and (F) transverse N5 notches shall be recorded.
echo and/or through transmission);
— the number of probes dedicated for detection of transverse For detection of longitudinal imperfections, the probe shall be
defects, their orientation given in degrees relative to the targeted at the (A) 1.6 Ø hole. The response from the (C) or (D)
weld axis and their operational mode (pulse-echo and/or N5 notch that is applicable for the specific probe shall be re-
through transmission); and corded.
— a sketch showing the probe angle, the chosen number of 713 If the wall thickness require specific probes to cover the
skips, the distance from the weld centreline to the probe mid thickness area of the weld, they shall be adjusted to obtain
index point and the angle between the ultrasound beam di- a peak signal from the mid thickness reflector.
rection and the weld axis for each probe.
714 The calibration shall be optimised until each primary re-
707 The probe angle shall be chosen to obtain the best test reflector (A), (B), (C) and (D) is detected by at least two different
sult for the wall thickness/diameter ratio of the pipe to be test- probes with different angles and/or sound paths and/or sensi-
ed. tivities.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

715 The signal amplitude percentage of full screen height re-calibrated as required in 712 to 719 and all pipes tested since
from reflectors (A) through (F) shall be recorded without any the last successful dynamic check shall be re-tested.
alterations to the amplification, position and angle relative to 723 Insufficient coupling shall be deemed to occur if the
the weld axis or sound path length used to optimise the calibra- transmission signal from any probe is more than 10dB lower
tion of the probes. than lowest the alarm/recording level for the probe pair.
716 The detection gates shall be set using the (G) 3mm Ø 724 For production testing the total gain shall be increased
holes. Gates shall start at the (G) reflector on the near side and with a minimum of + 3dB. This increased gain shall be re-
end at the (G) reflector at the opposite side. Only if geometrical moved during the dynamic check.
echoes from the weld reinforcement can exceed the echo from
the opposite (G) reflectors, may the gates end immediately be- 725 Indications exceeding the alarm/recording level or re-
fore the appropriate (C) or (D) reflector. The gate start and end corded shall be investigated by radiographic testing according
shall be set reflecting the tolerances of the weld tracking de- to 803. If the presence of a defect is not confirmed by radiog-
vice. raphy, manual ultrasonic testing according to 809 and 810
shall be performed. If this additional NDT does not confirm the
717 After completing the static calibration all settings, gate presence of defects, the pipe shall be re-scanned by the auto-
positions, angle relative to the weld axis and offsets from the matic ultrasonic equipment. If the rescanning the first 5 times
weld centre line to the probe index point shall be recorded for the alarm system has been triggered does confirm the absence
each probe. of defects, further re-scanning may be omitted.
718 The alarm/recording level for each probe shall set as fol- Ultrasonic testing of the pipe body for detection of laminar im-
lows: perfections
— For transverse imperfections: 80% of the signal amplitude 726 Ultrasonic testing of the pipe body for detection of lam-
from the opposite side (B) 1.6mm hole, but not less than inar imperfections need not be performed at the pipemill if test-
the lowest signal amplitude from the either of the (E) or (F) ing according to subsection F is performed at the plate/strip
transverse N5 notches. mill.
— For longitudinal imperfections: 100% of the signal ampli- 727 The testing, if performed at the pipemill, shall be in ac-
tude from the applicable (C) or (D) N5 notch giving the cordance with ISO 12094 amended as follows:
lowest signal amplitude.
— If the use of a mid thickness notch has been agreed for set- — the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure
ting of the alarm/recording level (signal response equal to 100% coverage of the plate body and all four edges and be
a N5 notch): 100% of the signal amplitude. sufficiently small to ensure detection of the minimum al-
lowed imperfection size, and
Guidance note:
— for plate nominal thicknesses ≥ 40 mm the recess depth in
Provided equal coverage and sensitivity is obtained other equip- the reference standard/test piece shall be increased in order
ment configurations, reference reflectors and calibration meth-
ods may be used, subject to agreement. to place the bottom of the recess between ¼and ½ of the
nominal plate thickness.
Guidance note:
As an alternative to the N5 notches and 1.6mm Ø holes the "two- — According to requirements to plate and strip body in Table
lambda method" may be used. This method uses fixed depth in- D-2 for non-sour or sour service.
ternal and external notches and the test sensitivity is increased by
electronic means i.e. by an increase in dB. The depth of the Guidance note:
notches shall be twice the wavelength at the ultrasonic frequency Acceptance criteria for laminations in the pipe body according to
used. The method is specified in SEP 1916. Use of this method F.203 may apply, subject to agreement
requires that the ultrasonic velocity and the ultrasonic frequency
for the particular application are documented. The method may ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
be used subject to agreement.
Ultrasonic testing of the area adjacent to the weld seam body
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- for detection of laminar imperfections
719 A check on the calibration shall be performed in the dy- 728 Ultrasonic testing of the area adjacent to the weld seam
namic mode. The change in gain required to maintain the re- body for detection of laminar imperfections need not be per-
corded percentage of full screen height for each probe shall be formed at the pipemill if testing according to subsection F has
recorded as an average of the 3 dynamic check results. All been performed at the plate/strip mill.
probes shall be verified as indicating the recorded signal am- 729 The testing if performed at the pipemill shall be in ac-
plitude from the probes dedicated to the respective holes and cordance with ISO 12094 amended as follows:
notches. Gate settings shall not deviate more than 2.5 mm from
the reference position. — The width of the tested band shall be 50 mm;
720 The dynamic check shall be performed at time intervals — the distance between adjacent scanning tracks shall ensure
according to ISO 9765. 100% coverage of the area adjacent to the weld and be suf-
ficiently small to ensure detection of the minimum al-
721 The equipment shall be deemed to be out of calibration lowed imperfection size; and
if: — for plate nominal thicknesses ≥40mm the recess depth in
the reference standard/test piece shall be increased in order
— the response from any reflector during the dynamic check to place the bottom of the recess between ¼ and ½ of the
falls below – 3dB of the recorded value from the dynamic nominal pipe wall thickness.
checks, see 719.
— the gate settings during the dynamic check varies more The acceptance criterion is:
than ± 2.5 mm from the recorded value from the static cal-
ibration. — The requirements to plate and strip edges in Table D-2 for
— any of the parameter used when optimising the initial stat- non-sour or sour service.
ic calibration are changed.
Testing of ferromagnetic pipe for the detection of surface im-
722 If the equipment is deemed out of calibration it shall be perfections in the weld area
DET NORSKE VERITAS

730 Testing of ferromagnetic SAW pipe for the detection of band at each pipe end of C-Mn and duplex steel shall be per-
surface imperfections in the weld area shall be performed in formed manually unless performed with automated equipment.
accordance with one of the following standards: The provisions of ISO 11496 shall apply. Probes meeting the
requirements of ISO 12094, Annex A shall be used.
— ISO 9304 (eddy current)
— ISO 13665 (magnetic particle Acceptance criterion is:
Eddy current testing performed in accordance with ISO 9304 — The requirements to plate and strip edges in Table D-2 for
shall use the segment coil technique, reference hole diameter non-sour or sour service.
of maximum 3.20 mm and the lowest possible excitation fre-
quency. 808 Ultrasonic testing for laminations over a 50mm wide
band at each pipe end of clad/lined pipe shall be performed
The acceptance criteria are: manually unless performed with automated equipment.. The
provisions of ASTM A578/578M, S7 shall apply.
— ISO 9304:Acceptance level L2
— ISO 13665:Acceptance level M1 Acceptance criterion is:
Testing of non-ferromagnetic pipe for the detection of imper- — ASTM A578, S7. In addition, no areas with laminations
fections in the weld area or lack of bond are allowed in the plate edge areas. Manual
ultrasonic testing of seamless pipe
731 Testing of non-ferromagnetic SAW pipe for the detec-
tion of surface imperfections in the weld area shall be per- Manual ultrasonic testing of SAW welds
formed in accordance with one of the following standards:
809 Manual ultrasonic testing of SAW welds shall be per-
— ISO 9304 (eddy current) formed in general accordance with B 300.
— ISO 12095 (dye penetrant testing) Probes with beam angles of 0°, 35°, 45°, 60° and 70° shall be
Eddy current testing performed in accordance with ISO 9304 available.
shall use the segment coil technique, reference hole diameter Calibration shall be against a reference block with a 1.6 mm Ø
of maximum 3.20 mm and the lowest possible excitation fre- through drilled hole using a 45° probe. A DAC curve consist-
quency. ing of 3 points shall be established.
The acceptance criteria are: Scanning for longitudinal defects shall be performed trans-
verse to the longitudinal axis of the weld with 100% overlap on
— ISO 9304 : Acceptance level L2 scan lines. The scanning shall include a check along the weld
— ISO 12095: Acceptance level P1 with a 0o probe for laminar defects that may interfere with the
testing. Scanning for transverse defects shall be included as de-
Radiographic testing tailed in 810.
732 Radiographic testing of the extreme 300 mm of weld at Indications exceeding 20% of DAC shall be further investigat-
each pipe end and shall include the area not covered by the au- ed and the amplitude maximised using probes with a smaller
tomatic ultrasonic. The testing shall be performed in accord- and larger angle. All maximised indications exceeding 50% of
ance with the requirements of B 200. DAC shall be reported.
The acceptance criteria are: Acceptance criterion is:
— Table D-5 and lack of fusion and lack of penetration are
— no maximised indications between 50% and 100% of
not permitted.
DAC are acceptable unless the presence of a defect is con-
G 800 Manual NDT firmed and found acceptable with radiographic testing and
no maximised indications exceeding 100% of DAC are ac-
801 Manual NDT shall be performed as given below and in ceptable.
general compliance with the requirements of subsection B.
802 The requirements in this subsection are applicable for 810 Scanning for transverse defects shall be performed at an
manual NDT performed at pipemills only. angle to the weld and "on bead"
Radiographic testing Probes with beam angles of 45°, 60° and 70° and frequencies
of 2 and 4 MHz shall be available. Use of 4 MHz probes shall
803 Radiographic testing shall be performed according to B be preferred.
200.
The reference block shall contain 1. mm Ø through drilled
Acceptance criteria are: holes at the weld centreline.
— Table D-5 and lack of fusion and lack of penetration are For "on bead" scanning a DAC curve shall be established
not permitted. against the 1.6 mm Ø weld centreline hole using 3 points (e.g.
1/2, full and 11/2 skip).
Manual ultrasonic testing
For scanning at an angle of 45° to the weld a DAC curve shall
804 Manual ultrasonic testing shall be performed at each be established against the 1.6mm Ø weld centreline hole using
pipe end over the area not covered by the automatic ultrasonic 3 points (e.g. ¼, full and 1½ skip).
testing. In addition manual ultrasonic testing shall be per-
formed whenever required to confirm the presence of defects "On bead" scanning shall be performed in both directions and
and all weld repairs. a number of 100% overlapping scans shall be performed.
805 Manual ultrasonic testing shall be performed in general Scanning at an angle of 45° to the weld shall be performed
accordance with B 300. from both sides and in both directions with 100% overlap on
scan lines.
806 Reference blocks shall be made from a section of project
pipe. Indications found to be acceptable with radiographic testing,
and where their dimension and type are confirmed by ultrason-
Manual ultrasonic testing pipe ends ic testing, are acceptable. Other indications are not acceptable
807 Ultrasonic testing for laminations over a 50mm wide if their maximised amplitude exceeds 50% of DAC.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Indications exceeding 20% of DAC shall be further investigat- H. Testing of Installation Girth Welds, Compo-
ed and the amplitude maximised using probes with a larger and nent Welds and other Pressure Containing
smaller angle. All maximised indications exceeding 50% of
DAC shall be reported. Welds
The acceptance criterion is: H 100 General
— no maximised indications between 50% and 100% of 101 These requirements are applicable to NDT and visual
DAC are acceptable unless the presence of a defect is con- examination of installation girth welds and welds in bends, ris-
firmed and found acceptable with radiographic testing and ers, expansion loops, pipestrings for reeling and towing and
no maximised indications exceeding 100% of DAC are ac- any other pressure containing welds.
ceptable. 102 The extent of NDT and visual examination shall be in
accordance with the relevant requirements given in the Stand-
Magnetic particle testing. ard.
811 Magnetic particle testing shall be performed in general
accordance with B 400. H 200 Non-destructive testing and visual examination
Acceptance criteria shall be according to the applicable re- 201 Manual NDT and visual examination shall be performed
quirements of this subsection. in accordance with the requirements in subsection B. Automat-
ed NDT shall be performed in general compliance with the re-
Liquid penetrant testing quirements in subsection D and Appendix E as applicable.
812 Liquid penetrant testing shall be performed in general 202 Specific requirements to automated ultrasonic testing of
accordance with B 500. girth welds (AUT) are given in Appendix E.
Acceptance criteria shall be according to the applicable re- 203 For radiography the following additional requirements
quirements of this subsection. to B 200 shall apply for installation girth welds:
Eddy current testing 204 Panoramic (single wall single image) exposures shall be
813 Eddy current testing shall be performed in general ac- used whenever possible.
cordance with B 600. 205 Fluormetallic screens may be used in combination with
Acceptance criteria shall be according to the applicable re- X-ray based on a satisfactory procedure qualification test
quirements of this subsection. where all requirements to sensitivity are met. Films used with
fluormetallic screens shall be designed for use with this screen
G 900 Non-destructive testing of weld repairs in pipe type.
901 Complete removal of the defects shall be confirmed by 206 For pipe with internal diameter < 250 mm gamma ray
magnetic particle testing, or liquid penetrant testing for non- and panoramic (single wall single image) exposures may be
ferromagnetic materials, before re-welding. used. The gamma ray source shall be Ir 192 and shall be used in
combination with lead screens and ultra fine-grained film. Oth-
902 A repaired weld shall be completely re-tested using ap- er types of radiation sources may be used for small wall thick-
plicable NDT methods in accordance with G 800 and with ac- nesses in combination with other film types based on a
ceptance criteria in accordance with the requirements in this satisfactory procedure qualification test where all require-
subsection. Manual ultrasonic testing shall be governing for ments to sensitivity are met.
embedded defects.
207 Where no internal access is possible, a double wall tech-
G 1000 Visual examination of welds in linepipe nique shall be applied.
1001 Each linepipe weld shall be subject to 100% visual ex- 208 For the double wall double image technique x-ray shall
amination. The internal weld at both pipe ends shall be 100% be used. Fluormetallic screens may be used based on a satisfac-
visually inspected for pipe with internal diameter (ID)< 610. tory procedure qualification test where all requirements to sen-
The internal weld of pipe with D < 600 mm shall be inspected sitivity are met. Films for use with fluormetallic screens shall
from both ends as far as access permits. be suitable for this screen type.
If necessary, the inspection of the internal weld shall be assist- 209 For the double wall single image technique both X-ray
ed by a boroscope, video endoscope or similar equipment. and gamma ray may be used. The choice of radiation source,
1002 Out-of-line weld bead at pipe ends, judged on radio- film and screen types shall be based on a satisfactory procedure
graphs or by etching, shall not exceed 0.3 t or 3 mm, whichever qualification test where all requirements to sensitivity are met.
is smaller. H 300 Acceptance criteria
1003 The external flash of HFW pipe shall be trimmed flush 301 The acceptance criteria given in Table D-3, Table D-4
with the pipe surface. The internal flash shall be trimmed to a and Table D-5 are applicable for welds in C-Mn steel where
height not exceeding 0.05 t + 0.3 mm. The trimming shall not the accumulated plastic strain resulting from installation and
reduce the wall thickness to below the minimum specified and operation will not exceed 0.3%.
the groove resulting from the trimming shall not undercut the
internal pipe contour more than 0.05 t. 302 For other welds the acceptance criteria shall be estab-
lished or validated as required by E.102 or E.103 as relevant.
1004 The height of the external and internal weld bead of
SAW pipe is not to exceed 3 mm. 303 The acceptance criteria use the term defect to define an
imperfection that has exceeded given dimensions and thus is
1005 The longitudinal/helical weld of SAW pipe shall meet deemed unacceptable.
the visual examination acceptance criteria given in Table D-3
304 The acceptance criteria given in Table D-4, Table D-5
1006 Pipes shall meet the specified requirements for work- assume that multi-pass welds are used and that the height of
manship, dimensions, length and weight given in Section 6. defects will not exceed the height of a welding pass or maxi-
1007 End preparation such as bevelling, grinding of internal mum 0.2 t. If welding methods e.g. SAW, "one-shot" welding
weld beads and grinding of external weld bead for automated etc. resulting in weld passes higher than 0.2 t are used, defect
ultrasonic girth weld testing purposes shall meet the specified indications equal to the length limits given in the tables shall
requirements. be height determined with ultrasonic testing. If the height ex-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

ceeds 0.2 t or the height of a welding pass, whichever is small- inspection requirements as the original weld.
er, the defect is not acceptable.
305 For welds in duplex steel, other stainless steels and clad Table D-3 Acceptance criteria for visual examination and sur-
face method testing
steel, the requirements in 301 to 304 are applicable except that
lack of fusion and lack of penetration are not permitted in the External profile Welds shall have a regular finish and merge
root of single sided welds. smoothly into the base material and shall not
extend beyond the original joint preparation
H 400 Repair of welds by more than 3 mm (6mm for SAW welds).
Fillet welds shall be of specified dimensions
401 Welds that do not comply with the requirements shall be and regular in form.
repaired locally or the whole weld zone shall be removed. Re- Cap reinforcement/ Cap reinforcement:
welding shall be performed with qualified repair welding pro- root penetration Height less than 0.2 t, maximum 4 mm.
cedures and by qualified welders, see Appendix C. Root penetration:
height less than 0.2 t, maximum 3 mm.
402 Complete removal of the defect shall be confirmed by
magnetic particle testing, or liquid penetrant testing for non- Cap concavity/root Cap concavity: not permitted.
ferromagnetic materials, before re-welding. concavity Root concavity shall merge smoothly into
base material and at no point shall the weld
403 A repaired weld shall be subject to the same testing and thickness be less than t.
Misalignment of Less than 0.15 t and maximum 3 mm.
adjoining ends
(High/low)
Cracks Not acceptable.
Lack of Individual length :
penetration/lack of ≤ t, maximum 25 mm.
fusion Accumulated length in any 300 mm length of
weld:
≤ t, maximum 50 mm.
Undercut, if Individual
measured by Depth d Permitted length
mechanical means d > 1.0 mm Not permitted
1.0 mm ≥ d > 0.5 mm 50 mm
0.5 mm ≥ d > 0.2 mm 100 mm
d ≤ 0.2 mm unlimited
Accumulated length in any 300 mm length of
weld: < 4 t, maximum 100 mm
Surface porosity Not permitted
Burn through Individual length :
≤t/4, maximum 6 mm in any dimension.
Accumulated length in any 300 mm length of
weld:
2 t, maximum 12 mm. Acceptable if weld
thickness at no point is less than t.
Arc burns, gouges, Not permitted.
notches
Dents Depth: <3 mm, length 1/4 x OD.
Table D-4 Acceptance criteria for radiographic testing

Type of defect Acceptance criteria 1) 2) 3) 9)
Individual defects Maximum accumulated size in any 300 mm weld length
(all dimensions in mm) (all dimensions in mm)
Porosity1) 2)
Scattered Diameter <t/4, maximum 3 Maximum 3% of projected area
Cluster 4) 2, cluster diameter maximum 12 one off or < 12
Wormhole Length: t/2, maximum 12, Width: t/10, maximum 3 2 off
Hollow bead Length: t, maximum 25, Width: maximum 1.5 2 t, maximum 50
Isolated 5) Diameter <t/4, maximum 3 -
On-line 6) Diameter <2, group length: 2t, maximum 50 2 t, maximum 50
Slag 1) 2) 3) 7)
Isolated Diameter <3 12, maximum 4 off separated by minimum 50
Single lines Width: maximum 1.5 2 t, maximum 50
Parallel lines Width: maximum 1.5 2 t, maximum 50
Inclusions
Tungsten Diameter <0.5 t, maximum 3 12, maximum 4 off separated by minimum 50
Copper, wire Not permitted, if detected -
Lack of
penetration 1) 2) 3) 7)
Root Length: t, maximum 25 t, maximum 25
Embedded 8) Length: 2t, maximum 50 2 t, maximum 50
Lack of fusion1) 2) 3) 7)
Surface Length: t, maximum 25 t, maximum 25
Embedded Length: 2 t, maximum 50 2 t, maximum 50
Cracks Not permitted -
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Table D-4 Acceptance criteria for radiographic testing (Continued)

Type of defect Acceptance criteria 1) 2) 3) 9)
Individual defects Maximum accumulated size in any 300 mm weld length
(all dimensions in mm) (all dimensions in mm)
Root concavity See Table D-3 -
Root undercut Depth: t/10, maximum 1 t, maximum 25
Excess penetration 0.2 t, maximum 3, Length: t, maximum 25 2 t, maximum 50
Burn through See Table D-3 See Table D-3
Total accumulation of discontinuities
Excluding porosity, maximum accumulation in any 300 mm weld length 3 t, maximum 100
Maximum 12% of total weld length.
Any accumulation of defects in any cross sections of weld that may constitute a leak path or may reduce the effective weld thickness with
more than t/3 is not acceptable.
Notes:
1) Volumetric defects separated by less than the length of the smallest defect or defect group shall be considered as one defect.
2) Elongated defects situated on line and separated by less than the length of the shortest defect shall be considered as one defect.
3) Refer to the additional requirements in 303 for welding methods that produce welding passes exceeding 0.2 t.
4) Maximum 10% porosity in cluster area.
5) "Isolated" pores are separated by more than 5 times the diameter of the largest pore.
6) Pores are "On-line" if not "Isolated" and if 4 or more pores are touched by a line drawn through the outer pores and parallel to the weld. "On-line" pores
shall be checked by ultrasonic testing. If ultrasonic testing indicates a continuous defect, the criteria for lack of fusion defect shall to apply.
7) Detectable imperfections are not permitted in any intersection of welds.
8) Applicable to double sided welding where the root is within the middle t/3 only.
9) Acceptance criteria of Table D-3 shall also be satisfied.
Table D-5 Acceptance criteria for ultrasonic testing1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Indication length, L Maximum echo amplitude permitted
L ≤. t/2, maximum 12,5 mm Reference level + 4 dB
t/2, maximum 12.5 mm < L < t, maximum 25 mm Reference level - 2 dB
L ≥. t, maximum 25 mm (indications in both outer t/3) Reference level - 6 dB
Accumulated length in any 300 mm of weld: t, maximum 50
mm
L. ≥ t, maximum 50 mm (indications in middle t/3) Reference level - 6dB
Accumulated length in any 300 mm of weld: 2 t, maximum
50 mm
Cracks are not permitted.
Transverse indications: Indications shall be considered as transverse if the echo amplitude transversely exceeds the echo amplitude from the
same indication longitudinally with more than 2 dB. Transverse indications are unacceptable unless proven not to be planar, in which case the
acceptance criteria for longitudinal indications apply.
For indications approaching the maximum permitted length it shall be confirmed that the indication height is less than 0.2 t or maximum 3
mm (see 303).
Total accumulation of discontinuities: The total length of acceptable indications with echo amplitude of reference level – 6 dB and above shall
not exceed 3 t, maximum 100 mm in any weld length of 300 mm nor more than 12% of total weld length. Any accumulation of defects in any
cross section of weld that may constitute a leak path or reduce the effective thickness of weld more than t/3 is not acceptable.
If only one side of the weld is accessible for testing 6 dB shall be subtracted from the maximum echo permitted above.
Notes:
a) Reference level is defined as the echo amplitude corresponding to the echo from the side drilled hole in the reference block described in Fig. D-2 of this
appendix, or equivalent reflector.
b) All indications exceeding 20% of the reference level shall be investigated to the extent that the operator determines the shape, length and location of the
imperfection.
c) Indications that cannot be established with certainty shall whenever possible be tested with radiography. Indications that are type determined in this way
shall meet the acceptance criteria of Table D-4.
d) Longitudinal imperfections where the echo height intermittently is below and above the acceptance level, shall if possible be investigated with radiogra-
phy. Indications that are determined in this way shall meet the acceptance criteria of Table D-4. If radiography cannot be performed, the length shall not
exceed 3 t, maximum 100 mm in any weld length of 300 mm
e) Length, height and depth shall be determined by an appropriate method, see B.315.
f) Detectable imperfections are not permitted in any intersection of welds
I. Acceptance Criteria for Pipeline Components, 101 NDT and visual examination of pipeline components
Equipment, Structural Items, Base Materials and equipment shall be performed in accordance with and
and Weld Overlay meeting the acceptance criteria of the code or standard used for
the design of the item in question, see Section 7.
I 100 General 102 For forgings and castings used in pipeline components
and equipment, the acceptance criteria given in this subsection
DET NORSKE VERITAS

shall apply. — No indication shall be larger than the indication received

103 For pressure containing girth welds connecting the from the 3mm Ø flat bottom holes in the reference block.
equipment or component to the pipeline or for pup-pieces Angle beam examination
welded to the equipment, the acceptance criteria for girth
welds in the relevant pipeline section shall apply. — No indication shall exceed a DAC curve established using
104 NDT and visual examination of structural items shall N3 (3% of thickness) notches.
meet the requirements of the applied design code.
302 Acceptance criteria for manual magnetic particle testing
105 The method of NDT and acceptance criteria shall be de- of forgings done in accordance with ASTM E709, ASTM
tailed in the material and manufacturing specification for: E1444 or equivalent standard shall be according to Table D-6.
— items of proprietary design, Acceptance criteria for manual liquid penetrant testing of forg-
— items where the NDT requirements are not part of the de- ings done in accordance with ASTM E1417 or equivalent
sign code or standard, and standard shall be according to Table D-6.
— items where the NDT requirements and acceptance criteria
are subject to specific requirements. Table D-6 Acceptance criteria for manual magnetic particle
and liquid penetrant testing of forgings and castings
I 200 Manual Non-destructive Testing Acceptance cri- A Crack-like defects: not permitted
teria for Plate and Pipe
B Linear indications with length more than three times the
201 For manual ultrasonic thickness measurements done on width: not permitted. Linear indications with length less than
accordance with ASTM E797 or equivalent standard accept- 1.5 mm may be deemed irrelevant
ance criteria shall be according to applicable specification or C Rounded indications: Diameter <3 mm, accumulated diam-
product standard eters in any 100 x150 mm area <8 mm.
202 Manual ultrasonic testing acceptance criteria for laminar I 400 Acceptance criteria for castings
flaws in C-Mn, duplex, other stainless steels and nickel based
corrosion resistant alloys (CRA) performed according to ISO 401 Acceptance criteria for manual ultrasonic testing of cast-
12094 are given in Table D-2. ings done according to ASTM A609 or equivalent standard
203 Acceptance criteria for manual ultrasonic testing for de- shall be according to ASTM A606, Table 2. No crack-like in-
tection of laminar flaws in clad/lined steel performed accord- dications are acceptable.
ing to ASTM A578/578M, S7 shall be ASTM A578, S7. In 402 Acceptance criteria for manual radiographic testing of
addition, no areas with laminations or lack of bond are allowed castings done according to ASME V, section 5, article 2 or
over a width extending at least 50 mm inside the location of fu- equivalent standard shall be according to Table D-7
ture weld preparations.
204 For manual ultrasonic testing for detection of flaws oth- Table D-7 Radiographic acceptance criteria for castings
er than laminar, performed according to ASTM A577/577M or Type of defect Acceptance criteria
equivalent standard, the acceptance criteria shall be that no in- Cracks ASTM E 186, E280, E446 Not acceptable
dications exceed the DAC curve established against the rectan- Gas porosity ASTM E 186, E280, E446 Level A2
gular notch with depth 3% of the thickness. Inclusions ASTM E 186, E280, E446 Level B2
205 Acceptance criteria for manual magnetic particle testing Shrinkage ASTM E 186, E280, E446 Level C2
of plate and pipe edges performed according to ASTM E 709,
ASTM E1444 or equivalent standard shall be: 403 Acceptance criteria for manual magnetic particle testing
of castings done in accordance with ASTM E709, ASTM
— No indications longer than 6mm in the circumferential/ E1444 or equivalent standard shall be according to Table D-6.
longitudinal direction are permitted
Acceptance criteria for manual liquid penetrant testing of cast-
206 Acceptance criteria for manual liquid penetrant testing ings done in accordance with ASTM E1417 or equivalent
of plate and pipe edges performed according to ASTM E 1417 standard shall be according to Table D-6.
or equivalent standard shall be:
I 500 Acceptance criteria for weld overlay
— No indications longer than 6mm in the longitudinal direc- 501 Acceptance criteria for as-welded surfaces of magnetic
tion are permitted and non magnetic weld overlay for visual examination, mag-
207 Acceptance criteria for manual eddy current testing of netic particle testing and liquid penetrant testing are:
pipe and pipe edges performed according to ASTM E 309 or — no round indications with diameter above 2 mm and no
equivalent standard shall be: elongated indications with length above 3 mm,
— No indications longer than 6mm in the circumferential/ — indications separated by a distance less than the diameter
longitudinal direction are permitted or length of the smallest indication, shall be considered as
one indication, and
I 300 Acceptance criteria for forgings — accumulated diameters of round indications and the length
301 Acceptance criteria for manual ultrasonic testing of of elongated indications in any 100 x 100 mm shall not to
forgings performed according to ASTM A 388/ASTM A 388/ exceed 10 mm.
M or equivalent standard shall be: For machined surfaces acceptance criteria shall be especially
Straight beam examination agreed upon.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

see note on front cover App.E – Page 159
APPENDIX E
AUTOMATED ULTRASONIC GIRTH WELD TESTING
A. General Manual UT support is not required if weld repair grooves are

made with mechanical equipment that consistently prepares
A 100 Scope the same groove geometry,.
101 This Appendix details the examination requirements for 104 If specifically required, the ultrasonic system shall in-
the automated ultrasonic testing of pipeline girth welds. corporate facilities for detection of transverse defects.
102 The Appendix applies when automated ultrasonic test- 105 An operating Quality Assurance system shall be used
ing (AUT) is performed on pipeline girth welds. covering the development of ultrasonic examination systems,
testing, verification and documentation of the system and its
103 Relevant parts of Appendix D apply and supplement this components and software against given requirements, qualifi-
Appendix. cation of personnel and operation of ultrasonic examination
A 200 References systems. ISO 9001 and ASTM E 1212 shall apply.
B 200 Documentation
a) American Society for Testing Materials - E 317-94: Stand-
ard Practice for Evaluating Performance Characteristics of 201 The configuration of the ultrasonic system shall for eval-
Pulse Echo Testing Systems Without the Use of Electronic uation purposes be described and documented with regard to
Measurement Instruments
— brief functional description of the system,
b) British Standards Institute - BS 4331: Part 3: 1974: Meth- — reference to the code, standard or guideline used for design
ods for assessing the performance characteristics of ultra- and operation of the system,
sonic flaw detection equipment. Guidance on the in- — description of the Quality Assurance system,
service monitoring of probes (excluding immersion — equipment description,
probes) — limitations of the system with regard to material or weld
c) Electricity Supply Industry - Standard 98-2: Ultrasonic features including sound velocity variations, geometry,
Probes: Medium Frequency Miniature Shear Wave Angle size, surface finish, material composition, etc.
Probes — number and type of transducers with description of char-
acteristics and set-up,
d) EN12668-1 Non destructive testing - Characterisation and — number of and height of examination zones, where rele-
verification of ultrasonic examination equipment- Part 1: vant,
Instruments — gate settings,
e) EN12668-2 Non destructive testing - Characterisation and — function of scanning device,
verification of ultrasonic examination equipment- Part 2: — ultrasonic instrument, number of channels and data acqui-
Probes sition system,
f) EN12668-3 Non destructive testing - Characterisation and — recording and processing of data,
verification of ultrasonic examination equipment- Part : 3: — calibration blocks,
Combined equipment — couplant monitoring method,
— temperature range for testing and limitations,
g) EN583-6 Non destructive testing - Ultrasonic examination — coverage achieved,
Part 6 - Time-of- flight diffraction as a method for defect — maximum scanning speed and direction,
detection and sizing — reporting of indications and documentation of calibration
and sensitivity settings.
Until final approval of the ENs, reference is made to the corre-
sponding prENs. B 300 Qualification
301 Automated ultrasonic systems shall be qualified and the
performance of the system shall be documented.
B. Basic Requirements Further guidance is given in subsection H.
B 100 General B 400 Ultrasonic system equipment and components
101 The ultrasonic system to be used shall be accepted General requirements
through qualification, see subsection H. 401 The system shall be capable of examining a complete
102 The ultrasonic system may use pulse echo, tandem, weld including the heat affected zone in one circumferential
time-of-flight diffraction (ToFD) and/or through transmission scan.
techniques. It shall have a fully automatic recording system to 402 There shall be recordable signal outputs for at least each
indicate the location of defects and integrity of acoustic cou- 2 mm of weld length.
pling. The system shall be configured such that the weld vol-
ume is divided into primary examination zones of a height not 403 Distance markers shall be provided on the recording at
exceeding 3 mm. Higher zones may be used for heavy wall intervals not exceeding 100 mm of circumferential weld
thickness, if agreed. length.
103 The ultrasonic system shall include scanner heads spe- 404 The scanning direction (clockwise or anti-clockwise)
cifically configured for testing of repairs. Due to the wide var- shall be clearly described and referred to an identifiable datum,
iation in repair weld groove shapes that may limit the detection and shall be maintained throughout the duration of the field
capabilities of the system, manual UT should support the AUT weld examination.
on weld repairs unless the groove shape is controlled to be Specific requirements for ultrasonic instruments using multi-
within given tolerances and the scanner head is configured ac- ple channels, pulse echo, tandem and/or through transmission
cordingly. techniques.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

Page 160 – App.E see note on front cover
405 The instrument shall provide an adequate number of in- system for field inspection and to monitor the ongoing system
spection channels to ensure the examination of the complete performance. Calibration blocks shall be manufactured from a
weld through thickness in one circumferential scan. Each in- section of pipeline specific linepipe.
spection channel shall provide 413 Acoustic velocity and attenuation measurements shall
— Pulse echo or through transmission modes be performed on material from all sources of pipe material sup-
— One or more gates, each adjustable for start position and ply to be used. These measurements shall be performed ac-
length cording to Annex B unless an equivalent method is agreed. If
— Gain adjustment differences in acoustic velocity for the same nominal wall
— Recording threshold between 5 and 100% of full screen thickness from any source of supply results in a beam angle
height variation of more than 1.5°, specific calibration blocks shall be
— Recording of either the first or the largest signal in the gat- made for material from each source of supply showing such
ed region variations.
— Signal delay to enable correlation to distance marker posi- 414 Details of the specific weld geometries shall be provided
tions (real time analogue recording only) in order to determine the particulars and numbers of calibration
— Recordable signal outputs representing signal amplitude blocks required, including the calibration reflectors required
and sound travel distance and their relative positions.
The instrument shall provide a linear A-scan presentation. The 415 The preferred principal calibration reflectors are nor-
instrument linearity shall have been determined according to mally 3 mm Ø flat bottom holes (FBH) and 1 mm deep surface
the procedures detailed in ASTM-317-79 or EN12668. Instru- notches. Other reflector dimensions and types may, however,
ment linearity shall not deviate by more than 5% from ideal. be used, if it is demonstrated during the system qualification
that the defect detection and sizing capabilities of the system is
The assessment of instrument linearity shall have been per- acceptable.
formed within 6 months of the intended end use date. For pro-
duction AUT with an expected duration exceeding 6 months, 416 The calibration blocks shall be designed with sufficient
but less than one year, the assessment of instrument linearity surface area so that the complete transducer array will traverse
may be performed immediately before the start of work. the target areas in a single pass.
A calibration certificate shall be made available upon request. 417 The calibration block shall be identified with a hard
stamped unique serial number providing traceability to the ex-
Specific requirements to ultrasonic instruments using the amination work and the material source of supply for which the
ToFD technique standard was manufactured. Records of the serial number, wall
406 The instrument shall provide a ToFD B-scan image. thickness, bevel design, diameter, and ultrasound velocity
shall be kept and be available.
407 The instrument shall fulfil the requirements to ultrasonic
instruments described in EN12668-1 and EN583-6, Chapter 6 418 The machining tolerances for calibration reflectors are:
"Equipment requirements"
(a) Hole diameters ± 0.2 mm
The recording system
(b) Flatness of FBH ± 0.1 mm
408 The recording or marking system shall clearly indicate
the location of imperfections relative to the 12 o'clock position (c) All pertinent angles ± 1°
of the weld, with a ± 1% accuracy. The system resolution shall (d) Notch depth ± 0.1 mm
be such that each segment of recorded data from an individual (e) Notch length ± 0.5 mm
inspection channel does not represent more than 2 mm of cir-
cumferential weld distance. (f) Central position of reference reflectors ± 0.1 mm
(g) Hole depth ± 0.2 mm
Acoustic coupling
409 Acoustic coupling shall be achieved by contact or water 419 The lateral position of all calibration reflectors shall be
column using a liquid medium suitable for the purpose. An en- such that there will be no interference from adjacent reflectors,
vironmentally safe agent may be required to promote wetting, or from the edges of the blocks.
however, no residue shall remain on the pipe surface after the 420 All holes and notches shall be protected from degrada-
liquid has evaporated. tion by filling or covering the hole or notch with a suitable seal-
The method used for acoustic coupling monitoring and the loss ant.
in signal strength defining a "loss of return signal" (loss of cou- 421 Dimensional verification of all calibration reflectors and
pling) shall be described. their position shall be performed and recorded.
Transducers 422 A calibration block register shall be established. The
410 Prior to the start of field weld examination details of the register shall include all calibration blocks to be used identified
types and numbers of transducers shall be specified. Once with the unique serial number and include the dimensional ver-
agreed, there shall not be any transducer or design changes ification records, ultrasound velocity, name of the plate/pipe
made without prior agreement. manufacturer and the heat number. The register shall be avail-
411 All transducers used in the ultrasonic system shall meet able for review.
the performance requirements detailed in Annex A. This An- Operators
nex is not necessarily complete for all possible configurations 423 Details of each AUT operator shall be provided for prior
that may be used. When the relevant requirements are not fully to start of field weld examination.
covered in the Annex, acceptance specific requirements to
transducers shall be identified. All transducers shall be evalu- 424 Operators performing interpretation are to possess a val-
ated according to this Annex, and the test results recorded. The id certificate of proficiency to Level 2 in the ultrasonic method
test result data sheets shall be available for review. When re- according to a certification scheme meeting the requirements
quired, all transducers shall be contoured to match the curva- of EN473, ASNT or equivalent. In addition they are to docu-
ture of the pipe. ment adequate training with the equipment in question, by
passing a specific and practical examination. If requested, they
Calibration blocks shall be able to demonstrate their capabilities with regard to
412 Calibration blocks shall be used to qualify the inspection calibrating the equipment, performing an operational test un-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

der field conditions and evaluating size, nature and location of ToFD technique
imperfections. 803 The recording threshold for ToFD is normally not rec-
425 Operators whom are not accepted shall not be used, and ommended to be changed from the calibration threshold. How-
operators shall not be substituted without prior approval. In ever, a change of threshold may be prescribed in the procedure.
case additional operators are required, details of these shall be Threshold level
accepted before they start to work.
804 It shall be verified that the threshold level is set low
426 One individual shall be designated to be responsible for enough to detect the minimum height critical defect identified
the conduct of the ultrasonic personnel, the performance of in the acceptance criteria.
equipment, spare part availability, and inspection work, in-
cluding reports and records. B 900 Power supply
427 The operators shall have access to technical support 901 The ultrasonic system shall have a dedicated power sup-
from one individual qualified to Level 3 at any time during ex- ply. There shall be provisions for alternative power supply in
ecution of the examination work. case of failure in the main power supply. There shall be no loss
of inspection data as a result of a possible power failure.
B 500 Recorder set-up
501 Channel output signals shall be arranged on the record- B 1000 Software
ing media in an agreed order. The function of each channel 1001 All recording, data handling and presenting software
shall be clearly identified. The hard copy recording shall be shall be covered by the Quality Assurance system and all soft-
corrected to account for any difference introduced due to dif- ware versions be identifiable by a unique version number.
ferent circumferential positions of the transducers.
1002 This version number shall be clearly observable on all
B 600 Circumferential scanning velocity display and printout presentations of examination results.
601 The maximum allowable circumferential scanning ve- B 1100 System Log Book
locity (VC), shall be determined according to 1101 The operator shall keep a Log Book detailing the per-
formance/characteristics data and identification for instru-
ments and transducers. The Log Book shall be updated as
V C ≤ W C • PRF ⁄ 3 changes are made, or, as additional information is gathered.
The Log Book shall be kept at the place of inspection, and be
where WC is the narrowest -6 dB beam width at the appropriate made available for review upon request.
operating distance of all transducers within the array, and PRF
is the effective pulse repetition frequency per transducer. B 1200 Spares
1201 There shall be a sufficient number of spare parts avail-
B 700 Gate settings able at the place of examination to ensure that the work can
Pulse echo, tandem and through transmission techniques proceed without interruptions. The type and number of spares
shall be agreed.
701 With each transducer positioned for the peak signal re-
sponse from the calibration reflector the detection gates are to B 1300 Slave monitors
be set. The gate shall start before the theoretical weld prepara-
tion and a suitable allowance shall be included to allow for the 1301 The system shall include the possibility to provide
width of the heat affected zone, so that complete coverage of slave monitors for use by supervising personnel, if agreed.
the heat affected zone is achieved. The gate ends shall be after
the theoretical weld centreline, including a suitable allowance
for offset of the weld centreline after welding. For porosity
mapping channels the gates shall also be set to cover the total C. Procedure
weld volume dedicated to the transducer.
C 100 General
ToFD technique
101 A detailed Automated Ultrasonic Examination Proce-
702 Ideally the time gate start should be at least 1 ?s prior to dure shall be prepared for each wall thickness and joint geom-
the time of arrival of the lateral wave, and should at least ex- etry to be examined prior to the start of any welding. The
tend up to the first back wall echo. Because mode converted procedure is as a minimum to include
echoes can be of use in identifying defects, it is recommended
that the time gate also includes the time of arrival of the first — functional description of equipment;
mode converted back wall echo. — reference standards and guidelines controlling equipment
maintenance;
703 As a minimum requirement the time gate shall at least — instructions for scanning device, ultrasonic instrument, ul-
cover the depth region of interest. trasonic electronics, hard- and software for recording,
704 Where a smaller time gate is appropriate, it will be nec- processing, display, presentation and storage of inspection
essary to demonstrate that the defect detection capabilities are data;
not impaired. — transducer configuration(s), characteristics, types, cover-
age;
B 800 Recording Threshold — number of examination zones for each wall thickness to be
Pulse echo, tandem and through transmission techniques examined;
— gate settings;
801 The recording threshold for planar detection channels — equipment settings;
shall be at least 6 dB more sensitive than the reference reflec- — description of calibration block(s), including type, size
tor, and shall be such that the smallest non-allowable imperfec- and location of all calibration reflectors;
tions are detected. — calibration intervals;
802 The recording threshold for porosity detection channels — calibration records;
shall be at least 14 dB more sensitive than the reference reflec- — identification of inspection starting point, scanning direc-
tor. tion, and indication of length inspected;
DET NORSKE VERITAS

— method for scanner alignment and maintenance of align- of the complete system, a weld shall be scanned followed by
ment; re-calibration with the inspection band removed between each
— allowed temperature range; scan. If any of the echo amplitudes from the reflectors of the
— couplant, coupling and coupling control; calibration block deviate more than 2 dB from the initial cali-
— transducer and overall functional checks; bration, the system shall not be used until acceptable correc-
— height and length sizing methodology; tions have been made. For an acceptable test, 3 satisfactory
— surface condition and preparation; scans and re-calibrations are required. In addition, a power
— description of inspection work; failure shall be simulated and operation of the system on the al-
— acceptance criteria; and ternative power source with no loss of examination data shall
— instructions for reporting including example of recorder be verified.
chart and forms to be used. Reference line
103 Prior to welding a reference line shall be scribed on the
pipe surface at a distance from the centreline of the weld prep-
D. Calibration aration on the inspection band side. This reference line shall be
used to ensure that the band is adjusted to the same distance
D 100 Initial static calibration from the weld centreline as to that of the calibration block.
Transducer positioning and Primary Reference Sensitivity Guiding band positioning
101 The system shall be optimised for field inspection using 104 The tolerance for inspection band positioning is ± 1 mm
the relevant calibration block(s). relative to the weld centreline. The template used to align the
102 Pulse echo and tandem transducers shall in turn be posi- scanning band to the reference line shall be adjusted to account
tioned at its operating (stand-off) position and adjusted to pro- for weld shrinkage. Shrinkage is determined by marking the
vide a peak signal from its calibration reflector, this signal reference line on both pipe ends for the first 25 welds, then
shall be adjusted to the specified percentage of full screen measuring the distance between them after welding.
height (FSH). Surface condition
103 The gain level required to produce this peak signal re- 105 The scanning area shall be free of spatter and other irreg-
sponse is the Primary Reference Level (PRE). The PRE, the ularities which may interfere with the movement of the trans-
signal to noise (S/N) ratio, and the transducers stand-off dis- ducers, the coupling or the transmission of acoustic energy into
tance shall be recorded. the material. The longitudinal seam welds shall be ground
Gate settings flush and smooth for a specified distance, normally in the
range of 150 mm from the factory bevel face to ensure that no
104 With each transducer positioned for a peak signal re- transducers are lifted from the pipe surface. The pipe coating
sponse from the calibration reflector the detection gates shall shall be cut back from the original factory bevel face for a
be set as detailed in the agreed Automated Ultrasonic Exami- specified distance, normally around 350 mm for concrete coat-
nation Procedure and according to B.701. ing and 150 mm for corrosion coating.
105 The settings for gate start and gate length for each chan- 106 The actual cut back dimension requirements shall be ad-
nel shall be recorded. vised and confirmed by the inspection body conducting the
testing.
D 200 Dynamic calibration
Transducer wear baseline measurements
Detection channels
107 Transducer case height measurements shall be provided
201 With the system optimised, the calibration block shall be for prior to the start of field weld examinations. An accurate
scanned. The position accuracy of the recorded reflectors rela- (± 0.1 mm) measurement shall be made of the case height at
tive to each other shall be within ± 2 mm, and with respect to each corner of each transducer. These measurements shall be
the zero start within ± 10 mm. Gate settings shall not deviate recorded and provide a comparison for the periodic measure-
more than 0.25 mm from the reference positions. ments taken throughout the examination period to assess for
202 For all transducers the recording media shall indicate the transducer wear.
required percentage of FSH and locate signals from each cali- Calibration frequency
bration reflector in its correctly assigned position.
108 The system shall be calibrated by scanning the calibra-
203 A calibration qualification chart shall be used as the in- tion block before and after inspection of each weld:
spection quality standard to which subsequently produced cal-
ibration charts may be judged for acceptability. This recording — for the first 20 welds.
shall be kept with the system Log Book. — at any change of calibration block
Coupling monitor channels — at any change of nominal wall thickness
204 The coupling monitor channels shall indicate no loss of — at any change of components
return signal, see also F.103. — before and after examination of repairs
109 If agreed, the frequency of calibration scans may be re-
duced to a minimum of 1 scan for each 10 consecutive welds.
E. Field Inspection 110 The peak signal responses from each calibration scan
shall be recorded. Any gain changes required to maintain prop-
E 100 Inspection requirements er sensitivity shall also be recorded.
General requirements 111 Hard copy recordings for each calibration scan shall be
101 The ultrasonic system used for examination during pro- included sequentially with the weld inspection charts. The last
duction shall in all essential aspects be in compliance with the weld number examined before calibration and the time at
set-up and configuration of the system used for system qualifi- which the calibration was performed shall appear on each cal-
cation (H). ibration chart.
102 Before the ultrasonic system is used for examination of Weld identification
production welds the system shall be tested. After calibration 112 Each weld shall be numbered in the sequence used in the
DET NORSKE VERITAS

pipe tracking system. perfections shall be evaluated. Their nature shall be clearly
113 The starting point for each scan shall be clearly marked identified on the examination report.
on the pipe and the scan direction shall be clearly marked using 103 All evaluations shall be completed immediately after ex-
an arrow. amination of the weld.
Replacement of components G 200 Examination reports
114 Following replacement of any component, the system 201 The examination results shall be recorded on a standard
shall be re-calibrated according to D. ultrasonic report form. The reports shall be made available on
E 200 Operational checks a daily basis or on demand.
Circumferential position accuracy G 300 Inspection records
201 As a minimum the position accuracy of the chart dis- 301 The following inspection records shall be provided:
tance markers shall be validated twice during each shift. Chart
accuracy shall be ± 1 cm or better. The result shall be recorded. — a hard copy record of each weld examined,
— an assessment of the weld quality according to the accept-
Transducer performance ance criteria,
202 Transducers shall be examined for wear against the — hard copy records of all calibration scans, and
baseline measurements performed according to 107 whenever — examination data in electronic form.
a change in gain of more than 6 dB is necessary to maintain the
required percentage of FSH (PRE). The transducer shall be re- 302 In lieu of hard copy records an alternative recording me-
placed or the contact face shall be re-surfaced to correct any of dia is acceptable. Where weld interpretation has been per-
the following: formed using digitally processed signals, the data files shall be
stored and backed up immediately following the examination
— Beam angle changes of ± 1.0° for angles less than 45° or ± of each weld. The stored data shall be in the same format as
1.5° for angles greater than 45°. used by the operator to assess the acceptability of welds at the
— Squint angles exceeding 1.5° for single crystal transducers time of examination.
and 2° for twin crystal transducers. 303 It agreed, a software package and one set of compatible
— For all transducers except creeping wave transducers the hardware shall be provided in order to allow the weld data file
noise shall be at least 20 dB weaker than the signal from to be retrieved in the same manner as the operator viewed the
the reference reflector at the target distance. data at the time of inspection.
— For creeping wave transducers the noise shall be at least 16
dB weaker than the signal from the reference reflector at
the target distance.
— Scores in the transducer wearface which may cause local H. Qualification
loss of contact or which exceed 0.5 mm.
H 100 General
203 Following either replacement or resurfacing of a trans-
ducer a new calibration shall be performed as described in Ap- 101 Ultrasonic systems shall be qualified and the perform-
pendix E, subsection D. ance of the system shall be documented.
102 A qualification is AUT system, weld method and groove
geometry specific. Qualification done for one type of welds or
an earlier version of the AUT system will not automatically
F. Re-examination qualify the system for a new application. This does, however
not mean, that earlier experience and qualification shall be dis-
F 100 General regarded, but be actively used for qualification for related ap-
101 Welds shall be re-examined whenever any of the follow- plications.
ing occur: 103 Qualification involves a technical evaluation of the AUT
Sensitivity system and application in question combined with any re-
quired practical tests .
102 Welds examined at a sensitivity lower than 3 dB from
the PRE shall be re-examined. 104 The qualification shall be based on a detailed and agreed
qualification programme.
Coupling loss
103 Welds exhibiting a loss of acoustic coupling, i.e. a drop H 200 Scope
in echo amplitude of more than 10 dB from the level through a 201 A qualification programme shall document the follow-
clean weld for a circumferential distance which exceeds the ing:
minimum allowable defect length for the affected channel
shall be re-examined. — Fulfilment of the requirements to AUT systems according
to this Appendix
Out of calibration — The ability of the AUT system to detect defects of relevant
104 If a calibration scan shows that the system is in any way types and sizes in relevant locations
"out of calibration", all welds examined since the last success- — The accuracy in sizing and locating defects.
ful calibration shall be re-examined.
H 300 Requirements
Detection
G. Evaluation and Reporting 301 The detection ability of an AUT system shall be deemed
sufficient if the probability of detecting a defect of the smallest
G 100 Evaluation of indications allowable height determined during an Engineering Critical
Assessment (see Appendix D, E 200) is 90% at a 95% confi-
101 Indications from weld imperfections shall be evaluated dence level. This requirement will, after technical justification,
according to the defect acceptance criteria provided. in most cases be regarded fulfilled, when the smallest allowa-
102 Indications recorded from sources other than weld im- ble defect height is 3 mm or more and the AUT sensitivity level
DET NORSKE VERITAS

is set at 50% of the echo from a 3 mm Ø flatbottom hole. shall be minimum 10 for each welding method/joint geometry
302 An alternative route to showing sufficient sensitivity and to be used. For small diameter pipelines a number of test welds
detection ability is to show that detection rates are higher, with may be required.
95% confidence, than those for an accepted workmanship 604 In order to show sufficient detection ability at a required
NDT technique, as given in Appendix D. confidence level, it will be necessary to increase the number of
Sizing accuracy included defects.
303 No specific requirements apply to defect sizing accura- 605 The presence and sizes of the induced defects in the test
cy. However, if the determined accuracy is to be used for de- welds shall be confirmed. For this purpose the test welds shall
termination of acceptable defect sizes based on the allowable subject to radiography, manual ultrasonic testing and magnetic
sizes calculated according to an Engineering Critical Assess- particle or eddy current testing. The reference point for all test-
ment (see Appendix D E 200), then high inaccuracies in sizing ing shall be the same and shall be indicated by hardstamping
(especially undersizing) can cause problems in defining the ac- on the test welds. The techniques used for this testing shall be
ceptance criteria. The requirements are thus indirectly set. optimised for the weld geometries in question. The interpreta-
tion of radiographs and other test results should at least be per-
H 400 Qualification programme formed two individuals, initially working independently of
each other and later reporting their findings jointly.
General
606 The report shall identify the identified defects in the test
401 A full qualification programme for a specific application welds with respect to circumferential position, length, height
of an AUT system will in general comprise the following stag- and depth. The report shall be kept confidential.
es:
H 700 Qualification testing
1) Collection of available background material, including
technical description of the AUT system and its perform- 701 The test welds shall be subjected to testing by the AUT
ance system.
2) Initial evaluation and conclusions based on available in- 702 For the testing a low echo amplitude recording threshold
formation shall be used. This threshold should be selected somewhat
above the noise level and the recording of echo amplitudes
3) Identification and evaluation of significant parameters and may be used for possible later determination of the examina-
their variability tion threshold setting to achieve sufficient detectability.
4) Planning and execution of a capability test programme 703 The reference point for circumferential positioning shall
5) Planning and execution of a reliability test programme be a hardstamped reference point on the test welds.
6) Reference investigations 704 The testing shall include repeatability tests with several
7) Evaluation of results from capability and reliability trials scans with guiding band removed and re-attached between
scans.
402 The extent of each of these stages will be dependent on 705 At least one test shall be done at the elevated tempera-
the prior available information and documentation, and may be ture expected during field work.
totally omitted if the prior knowledge is sufficient.
706 The AUT test results shall be reported. The report shall
403 As a minimum a qualification will involve an assess- give the identified defects in the test welds with respect to cir-
ment of the AUT system technical documentation, including cumferential position, length, height and depth. In addition the
the quality assurance system, and available information on de- defect height and amplitude around the highest and lowest part
tection abilities and defect sizing accuracy. Limited practical of the defects shall be reported for each 2 mm circumferential
tests, must, however, in many cases be executed, on which in- length over a length of 15 to 20mm.
formation is given below.
H 800 Validation testing
H 500 Variables
801 The reports from the AUT qualification testing shall be
501 Variables, which must be taken into account during a validated for accuracy in the determination of defect circum-
qualification, include, but are not necessarily limited to: ferential position, length, height and depth
— Welding method and groove geometry; 802 The validation testing shall be by cross-sectioning ("sa-
— Root and cap probe set-up; lami method"). The defects as reported in the AUT reports
— Probe set-up for other channels (the number of these chan- shall be used when selecting the areas for cross sectioning. The
nels may be increased or decreased provided there are no extent of cross sectioning shall be sufficient to ensure that the
set-up changes); defect height sizing accuracy determination will be based on a
— Reference reflectors; minimum of 29 measurements on different defects and / or 'ul-
— System, data acquisition and data treatment; trasonically independent' parts of defects (i.e. at locations
— Software version (except changes affecting viewing or many beam widths apart) for each welding method and joint
display only). configuration.
803 The cross sections shall be referenced to and validated
H 600 Test welds against the recording chart positions.
601 Qualification testing shall be performed using test welds 804 For determination of defect height sizing accuracy two
containing intentionally induced defects typical of those ex- parts of each defect, 10 - 20 mm long and corresponding to the
pected to be present in welds produced with the welding meth- highest and lowest part of the defect recorded by AUT, see
ods to be used. 706, shall be selected and the "salami method" applied on these
602 The material and the weld geometry shall be as for the parts to determine its height and location.
actual use of the equipment, including a sufficient number of 805 The weld sections containing defects shall be machined
repair welds with a representative variations in groove shape. in increments of 2.0 mm. Each machined cross section of the
603 The intentionally introduced defects shall vary in length, weld shall be etched and the defect location, height and depth
height and location. Too close spacing of the defects shall be measured with an accuracy better than ± 0.1 mm. Each cross
avoided. The number of defects in simulated production welds section shall be documented by a photograph with 5 - 10x mag-
DET NORSKE VERITAS

nification. new or modified system to detect and accurately size and posi-
806 In addition a few randomly selected defect parts shall be tion weld imperfections.
subject to such cross-sectioning. For determination of detec-
tion abilities and adjustment of required threshold levels addi-
tional cross-sectioning, or detailed ultrasonic mapping of
specimens cut out from the test weld pipes, is required. These Annex A. Transducer requirements
cross-section should be selected randomly, at locations where A.1 Identification
one or more of the applied NDT techniques have found indica-
tions. The transducer shall be identified with the following: the man-
ufacturer, type, beam angle, nominal frequency, crystal size
H 900 Analysis and shape, and a unique identification number.
901 The data recorded during the tests and reference investi-
gations shall be analysed with respect to: A.2 Beam angle
For beam angles less than 45° the measured angle shall not dif-
— Accuracy in height sizing (random and systematic devia- fer by more than 1.0°.
tion);
— Accuracy in length sizing; For beam angles greater than 45° the measured angle shall not
— Accuracy in circumferential positioning / location; differ by more than 1.5°.
— AUT defect characterisation abilities compared to the re- Evaluation shall be made according to BS 4331, Clause 5. The
sults of the destructive tests and the other NDT performed; beam angles shall be determined using the same homogeneous
— Repeatability when repositioning guide band and at ele- material for all probes.
vated temperature;
— If relevant, determination of probability of detection val- A.3 Beam size
ues or curves for different assumed echo amplitude thresh- The vertical dimension of the beam at the target shall be within
old settings to determine the threshold to be used during 20% of the design height specified. The horizontal dimension
examination, or, alternatively or supplementary, an analy- of the beam at the target shall not be greater than two times the
sis of the relationship between echo amplitude and defect vertical dimension of the beam. The target is defined as the
height. point along the beam axis where the inspection is to be per-
H 1000 Reporting formed. In the case of a focused element the target shall fall
within the -6 dB working range distributed across the focus.
1001 A qualification report shall as a minimum contain: Beam height measurements shall be taken at 5 points along the
-6 dB working range.
— Outcome of the technical evaluation of the AUT system
according to this Appendix; Evaluation shall be according to BS 4331 Clause 6.
— Description of the specimens and tests performed, includ-
ing sensitivities used; A.4 Overall gain
— Definitions of the essential variables (see E 200) for the The gain in hand shall be at least 50 dB.
welds and equipment used during qualification testing;
— Data recorded for each defect and each defect cross-sec- Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.4.
tion (sizes, locations, types, measured and determined dur- A.5 Index point
ing reference investigation, echo amplitudes);
— Outcome of the analysis of data (H 900); Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.6.
— Conclusion of the qualification.
A.6 Squint
The squint angle shall not exceed 1.5° for single crystal trans-
ducers or 2° for twin crystal transducers.
I. Validity of Qualification Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.8.
I 100 Validity
A.7 Longitudinal angle beam
101 A qualification is AUT system, weld method and groove
geometry specific. The longitudinal angle beam shall be at least 35 dB weaker
than the shear wave beam measured at a range of 100 mm.
A qualification of an AUT system will remain valid on the con-
dition that no changes are made in the essential variables de- Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.10.
fined in I 200. A.8 Surface waves
I 200 Essential variables Surface waves shall be at least 34 dB weaker than the shear
201 The following essential variables apply: wave, for beam angles less than 64°. For angles grater than 64°
they shall be at least 24 dB weaker measured at 100 mm range.
— Welding method and groove geometry (including repair Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.11.
welds);
— Root and cap probe set-up; A.9 Side lobes
— Probe set-up for other channels (the number of these chan-
nels may be increased or decreased to accommodate Side lobes shall be at least 20 dB weaker than the main beam,
changes in wall thickness provided there are no set-up except for angles greater than 64° where they shall be at least
changes); 15 dB weaker.
— Reference reflectors; Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.13.
— System, data acquisition and data treatment;
— Software version (except changes affecting viewing or A.10 Subsidiary maxima
display only). Any fluctuations in the echo amplitude shall not exceed that
202 Changes in the essential variables for an existing quali- caused by interference caused with grass.
fied system will require a demonstration of the ability of the Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.14.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

A.11 Pulse shape

The pulse shape shall be single peaked with any secondary
peaks in the tail of the pulse at least 20 dB less than the peak.
Evaluation shall be according to ESI Clause 8.16.
A.12 Frequency
The operating frequency shall be within ±10% of the nominal
frequency.
A.13 Pulse length

The pulse length shall not exceed 2.5 microseconds between
points on the rectified pulse at 10% of peak amplitude.
A.14 Signal to noise

For all transducers except creeping wave transducers the noise
shall be at least 20 dB weaker than the signal from the refer-
ence reflector at the target distance.
For creeping wave transducers the noise shall be at least 16 dB Figure 1. Test specimen and transducer placement
weaker than the signal from the reference reflector at the target
distance.
A minimum of two parallel surfaces are machined for the plane
Evaluation shall be according to BS 4331, Clause 11. Note:
This evaluation shall be performed using the system instru- to be evaluated; one pair of surfaces is made in the radial direc-
mentation in multiplex mode with all cabling in place, and all tion (perpendicular to the OD surface) and the other pair made
relevant electrical systems operating. 20° from the perpendicular to the OD surface. See Figure1.
Additional pairs of parallel surfaces may be machined at other
angles in the plane to be evaluated if more data points are de-
sired.
Annex B. Determination of shear wave velocity
in pipe steels The machined surfaces should be smooth to a 20 µm finish or
better. Minimum width of the specimen surface to be measured
B.1 General should be 20 mm and the minimum thickness between the par-
allel surfaces to be measured should be 10 mm. Vertical extent
The procedure defined in this Annex covers methods that may
be used to determine acoustic velocity of shear waves in line- of the test surface will be limited by the pipe wall thickness.
pipe steels. Equivalent methods may be used subject to agree-
ment. B.4 Test method
Linepipe used in oil and natural gas transmission exhibit vary- Using the machined slots as reflectors for the shear wave puls-
ing degrees of anisotropy with varying acoustic velocities de- es with the transducer in the appropriate positions and measur-
pending on the propagation direction with resultant changes in ing the pulse transit times determines together with the
the refracted angle of the sound in the steel. This is especially mechanically measured pulse travelling distances the shear
critical where focused beams are used for zonal discrimination. wave velocities in the axial and 20° direction (Figure 1).
It is thus required to determine the ultrasonic shear wave ve-
locity for propagation in different directions. A similar measurement in the through thickness direction de-
termines the radial velocity. Pulse transit times shall be meas-
B.2 Equipment ured between the forefront parts of 1st and 2nd backwall echo,
To determine the shear wave velocity directional dependency or, alternatively, using more multiple echoes.
an ultrasonic shear wave transducer of 5 MHz frequency with A minimum of three readings shall be made for each plane in
a crystal diameter of 6 - 10 mm should be used in combination which testing shall be done.
with an ultrasonic apparatus with bandwidth at least up to 10
MHz and a recommended capability of measuring ultrasonic B.5 Accuracy
pulse transit times with a resolution of 10 ns and an accuracy
of ±25ns. Devices for measuring mechanical dimension of the Errors in velocity determination shall not be greater than ±
specimens should have a recommended accuracy of ±0.1mm. 20m/s.
As couplant an easily removable glue or special high viscosity
shear wave couplant is recommended. B.6 Recording
B.3 Specimens Values for the velocities determined can be tabulated and
graphed. By plotting velocities on a two dimensional polar
A specimen is cut from a section of pipe to be tested and the
corresponding results are specific for a particular pipe diame- graph for a single plane, velocities at angles other than those
ter, wall thickness and manufacturer. Specimen dimensions made directly can be estimated.
should be a minimum of 50 mm x 50 mm. The effect of temperature on velocity can be significant under
A similar arrangement can also be used for measuring veloci- extreme test conditions, therefore the temperature at which
ties in a plane normal to pipe axis. these readings have been made should also be recorded.
DET NORSKE VERITAS

DNV Os F101

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DNV Os F101

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DNV Os F101

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of determining shear wave velocity in pipe steels?

What is the purpose of determining shear wave velocity in pipe steels?

What equipment is required to determine shear wave velocity directional dependency?

What equipment is required to determine shear wave velocity directional dependency?

OFFSHORE STANDARD

SUBMARINE PIPELINE SYSTEMS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

Amendments and Corrections

Comments may be sent by e-mail to rules@dnv.com

Computer Typesetting (FM+SGML) by Det Norske Veritas.

Allseas Engineering Exxon Prod. Research Company Reinertsen Engineering

DET NORSKE VERITAS

Sec. 1 General................................................................. 11 D 900 Marine growth ................................................................ 24

A. General.................................................................................. 11 E. External and Internal Pipe Condition ...................................24

DET NORSKE VERITAS

D 900 Ratcheting .......................................................................41 Sec. 7 Components and Assemblies............................. 65

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

O. Final Testing and Preparation for Operation ........................ 98 F. Design Criteria....................................................................109

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

D. Calibration .......................................................................... 162 I. Validity of Qualification.....................................................165

E. Field Inspection .................................................................. 162 J. Annex A. Transducer requirements....................................165

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

B 400 Rules touchdown point monitoring or by a dedicated vessel during

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

sible packing and shut-in conditions where these occur as part

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

D. Abbreviations and Symbols SSC Stress Sulphide Cracking

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

signed to each limit state. C 300 Location classes

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

A. General — tie-in operations,

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

D 400 Tide sign temperatures should preferably be based upon an

DET NORSKE VERITAS

F. Documentation — material take off/data sheets.

F 100 General Installation

DET NORSKE VERITAS

F 500 Installation and commissioning — drawings and photos of special components;

DET NORSKE VERITAS

A. General — loads induced by frequent pigging operations.

B. Functional Loads — fatigue analyses, and

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

N is the number of load effect cycles in a sea-state of a duration — stacking of pipes;

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS

A. General 102 Crossing pipelines should be kept separated by a mini-

DET NORSKE VERITAS

DET NORSKE VERITAS